Verifone Ruby

CITGO
Manager Reference
Software Version: 4.03
Part Number: 55371-00
Revision: B
CITGO Manager Reference

October 4, 2002
VeriFone, Inc.
2455 Augustine Drive
Santa Clara, CA 95054
Telephone: 408-330-6300
http://www.verifone.com
Printed in the United States of America.
2002 by VeriFone, Inc.
No part of this publication covered by the copyrights herein may be reproduced or copied in any
form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical, including photocopying, taping, or
information storage and retrieval systems without written permission of the publisher.
The content of this document and all features and specifications are subject to change without
notice. The information contained herein does not represent a commitment on the part of
VeriFone, Inc.
Publications are not stocked at the address given above. Requests for VeriFone publications
should be made to your VeriFone representative.
VeriFone, the VeriFone logo, Ruby SuperSystem, Gemstone, Ruby Card, Everest, and EASY ID
are trademarks or registered trademarks of VeriFone in the U.S. and/or other countries. All other
trademarks or brand names are the properties of their respective holders.
CITGO Manager Reference Revision History

Version
Revision
Date
Description
3.00
March 15, 1996
3.00
April 8, 1996
Reflects updates to the previous revision.
3.01
July 1, 1996
3.02
February 10, 1997
3.03
June 3, 1997
Reflects updates to the previous revision
3.04
July 28, 1997
3.05
January 12, 1998
3.07
June 4, 1998
3.07
July 29, 1998
Production release of software and documentation.
3.08
May 6, 1999
Reflects updates to the previous revision including

new Store and Forward function in Network
Manager mode; new Log In/Out function in
Manager mode; new Armed Forces Restriction
parameter in Fuel Manager Mode in DCR Site
Parameters; cash acceptor functionality.
3.08
June 16, 1999
Reflects change in the Armed Forces Restriction

parameter in Fuel Manager mode in DCR Site
Parameters, added details on Fractional Quantity
in Manager and Setting Up Car Washes in Car
Wash Manager.
3.08
December 23, 1999
3.09
October 18, 1999
Reflects addition of VeriPASS to software and

documentation.
4.00
January 31, 2000
Reflects updates to software and documentation

including Quick Credit, EASY ID, Prepaid Card
Balance Inquiry Receipt, Combo and Mix and
Match, Automatic Printing of Money Orders, Open
PLUs, and new maintenance functions.
4.00
February 22, 2000
Corrected the description and value definitions of

the Card Takeover Enabled parameter in Site
Parameters > DCR Site Parameters.
4.00
August 7, 2000
Reflects significant software updates.
CITGO Manager Reference Revision History (Continued)

Version
Revision
Date
Description
4.01
October 20, 2000
Implemented support for 60 cashiers; Added

VeriPASS Functions chapter which explains new
functions; moved activate and print VeriPASS tag
functions from Network Functions chapter to
new VeriPASS Functions chapter; also added
VeriPASS features to Product Entry, Discounts,
Payment, Refunds, and Dispenser Card
Reader chapters; added Deal pricing feature;
added the option of an installable line printer
during initial software installation; and changed
Check Franking to Check Franking File.
4.02
September 21, 2001
4.03
January 25, 2002
Reflects updates that include alternate POP

discount configuration; a date/time and station ID
to report headers; in-house and pump test MOPs;
printing of outdoor receipts for cash acceptor sales;
allowing sales while printing period reports; and
allowing one cashier per register per work period.
4.03
March 8, 2002
Reflects addition of POP Discount functionality.
Before We Start
EASY ID is a part of a comprehensive retailer awareness program to ensure the legal sale
of age-restricted products. Do not rely on EASY ID as the only source of information. It
does not take the place of a trained, aware, and conscientious retailer and cashier.
EASY ID should only be used in states which permit the electronic verification of
information from drivers licenses. Retailers should determine that electronic verification
is permitted in their states. Drivers licenses from all other states require the use of the
manual function.
Note:
All software is provided as is, without any warranty of any kind, whether
direct, indirect, exemplary, special, consequential, incidental, or otherwise
with regard to any use of EASY ID.
Using EASY ID
1. Make sure the current date and time are correctly set. If the date and time are not
set correctly, the unit may not display the correct information when an
identification is checked.
2. Make sure the lamination (plastic) surrounding the identification is intact and
clear.
3. Make sure the picture and/or description match the customer.
4. Make sure the words are all legible and clear.
5. Make sure any holograms or watermarks are visible.
Weights and Measures
Support for cash and credit pricing at the dispenser requires explicit cash and credit
selections on the dispenser. This is in compliance with the Weights and Measures
Guidelines for Selectable Unit Price Capability, section G-S.5.1.
Note:
This Ruby software supports a POP Discount feature, which allows a pointof-purchase discount on fuel based on the purchase meeting certain predefined transaction criteria. It is possible that the Weights and Measures
department in your state may consider this POP Discount feature, when used
in a post-pay scenario, to be in violation of state regulations.
YOUR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE POP DISCOUNT FEATURE IS DONE
AT YOUR OWN RISK. VERIFONE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY
LIABILITY FOR CLAIMS, FINES OR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM
IMPLEMENTATION OF THE POP DISCOUNT FEATURE IN A LOCALE
WHERE IT IS DEEMED A VIOLATION OF LOCAL OR STATE
REGULATIONS. YOU SHOULD CONSULT YOUR LOCAL WEIGHTS AND
MEASURES ENFORCEMENT GROUP BEFORE IMPLEMENTING THE
POP DISCOUNT FEATURE.
Contents
1.
Introduction
How to Use this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Around . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-3
Setting Up Your System

Standalone/Controller Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Workstation Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3.
Manager
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Start Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Security Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Start Security Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
System Manager Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuel Manager Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
DCR Configuration Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Configuration Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Report Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Flash Report Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Maintenance Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Security Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Car Wash Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
VeriPASS Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Network Manager Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Security Control Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Employee File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Employee File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Employee File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Start Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
October 4, 2002
ii Contents
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

Sales Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Gemcom Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Register Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
Register Configuration Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-66
Register Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-67
Check Franking File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-69
Check Franking File Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-70
Check Franking File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Logo/Slogan File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-73
Logo/Slogan File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74
Logo/Slogan File Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75
MOP File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-77
MOP File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-78
MOP File Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87
Currency File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-89
Currency File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Tax Rate File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
Tax Rate File Steps: General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-96
Break Points vs. Flat Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-103
Flat Rate Tax Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-105
Flat Rate Tax with Canadian GST Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-107
Break Point Tax Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-110
Break Point Tax with Canadian GST Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-113
Determining Break Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-117
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-124
Fee/Charge File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Fee/Charge File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-127
Fee/Charge File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-132
Category File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-134
Category File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-135
October 4, 2002
Contents iii
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Category File Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU File Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Promotion File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Promotion File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Promotion File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Tracking File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Tracking File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLU Tracking File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department Tracking File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department Tracking File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Department Tracking File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Key File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Key File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Soft Key File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Menu File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer ID Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer ID Info Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer ID Info Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Training Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
October 4, 2002
3-136
3-136
3-138
3-138
3-143
3-150
3-151
3-153
3-153
3-154
3-157
3-160
3-161
3-168
3-169
3-171
3-171
3-173
3-176
3-177
3-179
3-179
3-180
3-181
3-181
3-183
3-183
3-184
3-185
3-185
3-187
3-187
3-190
3-194
3-195
3-201
3-201
3-202
3-203
3-203
3-205
3-205
3-206
3-207
3-207
3-209
iv Contents
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Training Mode Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Banner Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Create Banner Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blue Law Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blue Law Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Blue Law Setup Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log In/Out Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log In/Out Prompt Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Log In/Out Prompt Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combo File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combo File Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combo File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mix File Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Match File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Match File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Match File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuring for Different Pump Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount File Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount Coupon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount Coupon Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
POP Discount Coupon Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-209
3-210
3-211
3-211
3-212
3-213
3-213
3-215
3-215
3-216
3-218
3-218
3-220
3-220
3-222
3-222
3-224
3-224
3-227
3-233
3-236
3-238
3-238
3-239
3-241
3-242
3-244
3-244
3-246
3-250
3-255
3-257
3-259
3-259
3-259
3-260
3-264
3-270
3-272
3-274
3-274
3-275
3-276
3-276
October 4, 2002
4.
Contents v
Fuel Manager
Start Fuel Manager Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Tank Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Tank Names Steps for Non-manifolded Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Tank Names Steps for Manifolded Tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Tank Names Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Product Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Considerations for All Dispensers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Dresser/Wayne Dispensers Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Product Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Product Configuration Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Product Code Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Product Code Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Product Code Setup Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Product Department Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Product Department Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Product Department Setup Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Product ID Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Product ID Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Product ID Setup Initial Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Pump Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Start Pump Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Attributes Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Hose Assignment Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Pump Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Fuel Product Prices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Fuel Product Prices Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Fuel Product Prices Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
DCR Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52
Start DCR Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
DCR Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54
DCR Receipt Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60
October 4, 2002
vi Contents
DCR Receipt Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

Fueling/Promo Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
DCR Enable/Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65
DCR Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68
Cash Acceptor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Start Cash Acceptor Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71
Cash Acceptor Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
Site Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75
Start Site Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76
Fuel Site Parameters Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
DCR Site Parameters Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
Cash Acceptor Site Parameters Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-89
TLS Site Parameters Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93
Site Parameters Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96
Initialize Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Initialize Fuel Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
Initialize DCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Initialize DCRs Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-101
Clear Pumps On Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Clear Pumps On Hold Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-103
Reset Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-104
Reset Controller Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
RFID Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-106
POP Discount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Standard Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Alternate Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-107
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-108
POP Discount Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
5.
Maintenance
Start Maintenance Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Version Information Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set Date and Time Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display I/O Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display I/O Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Files Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-9
October 4, 2002
Contents vii
Data Files Version Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Enable Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Enable Printer Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Disable Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Disable Printer Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Flush Printer Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Flush Printer Queue Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Get Latest Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Get Latest Data Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Set Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Start Set Totals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Totalizers Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Fuel Running Totals Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
List All Totals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Create Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Create Files Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Start Remote Dial-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Start Remote Dial-In Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
File Information Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Feature Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Feature Information Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Registration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Registration Information Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Set Store Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Set Store Telephone Number Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Set Store Postal Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Set Store Postal Code Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
CPU Exception Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
CPU Exception Information Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Start Debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Start Debugger Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Execute Load Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Execute Load Module Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Reset Soft Key File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Reset Soft Key File Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Adjust Buzzer Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Adjust Buzzer Volume Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Reset Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Reset Modem Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Printer Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Printer Error Log Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
October 4, 2002
viii Contents
Reset Tank Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Reset Tank Delivery Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Tank Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Monitor Tank Communication Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Print Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Backup Print Log Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Installation Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Print Installation Information Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reboot System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reboot System Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display IP Stats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display IP Stats Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
e-pc Status Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
e-pc Status Report Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41
5-42
5-42
5-43
5-43
5-46
5-46
5-47
5-47
5-49
5-49
Network Manager
Start Network Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Pre-authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Pre-authorization Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Mail Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Batch Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Batch Details Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Prepaid Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Prepaid Functions Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Quick Credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Quick Credit Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Communication Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Communication Statistics Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Print Network Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Print Network Log Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Print Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Print Parameters Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Network Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Network Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Network Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Print Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Print Product Codes Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Start Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Parameter Download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Credit Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Modem Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
October 4, 2002
Contents ix
Batch Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dealer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Proprietary Card Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Configuration Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store and Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Store and Forward Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.
6-46
6-47
6-48
6-50
6-51
6-52
6-53
6-54
6-55
6-58
6-58
Car Wash Manager

Setting Up Car Washes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Start Car Wash Manager Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Department Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Department Setup Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Car Wash Key Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Car Wash Key Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Car Wash Key Setup Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
DCR Display Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
DCR Display Setup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
DCR Display Initial Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Car Wash DCR Displays by Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Disable Car Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Disable Car Wash Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Enable Car Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Enable Car Wash Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Car Wash Code Days Valid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Car Wash Code Days Valid Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Set Car Wash Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Set Car Wash Display Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Outdoor Enable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Outdoor Enable Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
Car Wash Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Exacta Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Ryko Code-A-Wash III . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Ryko Code-A-Wash IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
October 4, 2002
x Contents
Unitec POS4000 and POS4000/2 (4000/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
8.
VeriPASS
Setting Up VeriPASS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Manager Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
VeriPASS Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Start VeriPASS Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Activate VeriPASS Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Activate VeriPASS Tag Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Print VeriPASS Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Print VeriPASS Tag Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Change Tag Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Add Tag Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Change or Remove Tag Password Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
Update VeriPASS Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Update VeriPASS Tag Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
Customer Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Customer Service Options Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Initialize VeriPASS Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Initialize VeriPASS Feature Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
VRN Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
VRN Update Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Merchant Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
Merchant Preferences Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
VeriPASS Club Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
VeriPASS Club Configuration Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
VeriPASS Club Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
VeriPASS EPC Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
VeriPASS EPC Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
VeriPASS EPC Configuration Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
October 4, 2002
Contents xi
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loyalty Redeem Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.
8-48
8-51
8-52
8-52
8-54
8-54
8-55
8-56
8-56
HPV-20 Functions
Initial Start Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Start HPV-20 Functions Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Backup Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Restore Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Upgrade Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Revert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Revert Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
10. Index
October 4, 2002
xii Contents
October 4, 2002
Introduction
This manual provides information on all the manager functions of the VeriFone Ruby
SuperSystem. These functions are used to set up and maintain the system.
This manual is part of the Ruby SuperSystem reference manual set. The set consists of the
following manuals:
Sales Reference
Manager Reference
Reports Reference
Glossary
Note:
October 4, 2002
Two optional features noted in these manuals, car wash and proprietary
network access, are standard in the CITGO application.
1-2 Introduction
How to Use this Manual

This manual uses a number of methods to display special information. Review these
methods before continuing with the manual.
Terms
All terms used in this manual are defined in the Glossary. The following terms are used
frequently and should be reviewed before using this manual.
Menu
A menu is a list of numbered functions that you can choose from.
Mode
A mode is a main menu item at the switcher. An employee ID and password are
required to enter a mode. This manual describes six modes: Manager, Fuel
Manager, Maintenance, Network Mgr, Car Wash Manager, and VeriPASS.
MOP
Method of payment.
Parameter
A parameter is a numbered item that is assigned a value. This value affects how the
system works. For example, Total in Double is a parameter in the Sales
Configuration function. If the value of this parameter is set to Y, then the sales
total prints in double-wide characters on the receipt. If the value of this parameter
is set to N, then the sales total prints in single-wide characters on the receipt.
If a parameter is referred to in the text, the parameter is shown in double quotes
(for example, Total in Double).
Record Numbers
System record numbers are numbers which are standard in the system and
cannot be changed. For example, the Employee File uses a three-digit number
(001 - 060) to identify each employee. System record numbers cannot be
added, changed, or deleted, but the information in the record can be changed.
User record numbers are numbers which are chosen by the user. For example,
you can create up to 100 departments in the range 0 to 9999. User record
numbers can be added and deleted, and the information in any record can be
changed.
Switcher
The switcher is the main menu of the Ruby terminal. It is where you choose the
mode to enter. If you press [EXIT] until [ SALES ] displays, you have reached
the switcher.
Value
A value is a number, string of characters, or predefined option that can be assigned
October 4, 2002
Introduction 1-3
to a parameter. The possible values for each parameter are listed. Refer to the
following examples:
Number
In the Security Control function, each parameter can be assigned a numeric
value of 0 through 9.
String of Characters
In the Employee File function, the Name parameter for each employee can
be a string of letters and numbers. The string can be 1 to 30 characters long.
Predefined Option
In the Pump Configuration, Attributes function the Blend type parameter
only accepts one of the following predefined values: ELEC, FIX, MECH,
NONE, or VARI.
If a specific value is referred to in the text, it is shown in single quotes (for
example, MECH).
Keys
To make changes to the terminal, you must press keys on the terminal. Keys are shown in
brackets as follows:
[ENTER]
Keys with specific functions are labeled. For example, the [EXIT] key is a black key
with the word EXIT on it. This key takes you back one menu level.
Some keys have more than one function. For example, the [List] key is stationary. If
the [SUSP] key is assigned to the soft key that has the List function, then this key has two
functions. When you are in Sales mode, press this key to suspend the current transaction
or recall a previously suspended transaction. In Manager mode, use this key to print a
listing of the current Manager function.
Getting Around
[ENTER] Key
The [ENTER] key is used in the following situations:
To complete the entry of data. For example, after you key an employees name into
the Employee File, you press [ENTER].
To create a new user record number. For example, to create a new PLU number,
you key the modifier, press [MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press
[ENTER]. If the number did not exist, it is created. If the number already exists,
the terminal tells you so.
October 4, 2002
1-4 Introduction
To choose a mode or menu item that displays. If you use the arrow keys to display
an item (the method used in all steps), you have the choice of pressing either
[ENTER] or [Select] to choose the item. The manual uses [Select] as a
standard in all steps.
[Select] Key
The [Select] key is used in the following situations:
To choose an existing system record number or user record number. If you know
the number of a record that you want to change, just key the number and press
[Select] to directly choose it. For example, if you are in the Department File
and want to change the information in department 10, key [1][0][Select].
The department displays and is ready to be worked on.
To choose a numbered parameter. All parameters are numbered. If you know the
number of a parameter that you want to change, just key the number and press
[Select]. The parameter displays and is ready to be worked on.
To choose a mode or menu item. This works two ways:

If you use the arrow keys to display an item (the method used in all steps), you
have the choice of pressing either [ENTER] or [Select] to choose the item.
The manual uses [Select] as a standard in all steps.
All menu items are numbered. If you know the number of a menu item that you
want to change, just key the number and press [Select]. The menu item
displays.
Arrow Keys
The left ([<--]) and right ([-->]) arrow keys are used to move backwards or forwards
through a menu, list of parameters, or list of values.
October 4, 2002
Setting Up Your System
Use this section to enter sales, fuel, and reporting information into your system for the first
time.
Note:
This section does not include every file or function you can set up. It only
includes those files and functions that need to be or should be set up before
you start using the Ruby terminal.
Follow the steps in the order they are given because some steps depend on other steps.
Some steps may not apply to your setup. For example, if you only accept one type of
currency, then you do not need to set up the Currency File to describe a second currency.
In a multiterminal system, set up the controller first. Many of the data files you set up
automatically download to the workstations.
For each step that applies to your system, do the following:
1. Read the section in the manual that describes the function.
2. Check if the section contains a worksheet. Make copies of the worksheet if you
have access to a copier. A few steps do not include a worksheet. For example, in
Set Date and Time you need only know the current date and time. No other
planning is necessary.
3. Complete the worksheet in pencil.
4. Enter the information you filled out on the worksheet into the terminal, following
the procedure in the manual.
October 4, 2002
2-2 Setting Up Your System
Standalone/Controller Setup
Follow these steps if you are setting up a standalone or controller terminal. Perform the
initial setup in each indicated section. Check off each step as you complete it. Then go on
to the next step in this list.
Maintenance Mode Setup Steps
The following sections are in the Maintenance chapter of this manual.
Maintenance Mode Setup
Step
Function: Description
Set Date and Time: Refer to Set Date and Time.
Set Store Telephone Number: Refer to Set Store Telephone Number.
Set Store Postal Code: Refer to Set Store Postal Code.
Registration Information: Refer to Registration Information.
Manager Mode Setup Steps

The following sections are in the Manager chapter of this manual.
Manager Mode Setup
Step
MOP File: Set up the methods of payment that are accepted.
Currency File: Set up an alternate currency, if your site accepts foreign

currency.
Check Franking File: Set up the information to be printed on the back of a

check, if your site accepts checks and has a TM930 slip printer.
Employee File: Set up employee records.
Sales Configuration File: Set up general sales operating values.
Tax Rate File: Set up the taxes your site is responsible for collecting.
Customer ID Information: Set up age checks that are required for the
purchase of certain items, such as tobacco and alcohol.
Logo/Slogan File: Set up the information that prints at the top and bottom of
receipts.
Create Banner: Set up the information that displays on the Customer Display
when no sales transactions are in progress.
10
Print Product Codes: Print out a list of product codes from Network
Manager mode to refer to when setting up the next few files.
October 4, 2002
Setting Up Your System 2-3
Manager Mode Setup (Continued)
October 4, 2002
Step
11
Category File: Set up categories for reporting totals for groups of

departments.
12
Blue Law File: If your local government restricts sales on certain items during
defined periods of time, set up these time periods in the Blue Laws Setup File.
Set the corresponding Apply Blue Law parameters to Yes in the PLU File
and the Department File.
13
Department File: To keep totals on fee/charge transactions, create a

department in the Department File for fees and charges before setting up the
Fee/Charge File. Do not set up any other departments until you have set up the
Fee/Charge File.
14
Fee/Charge File: Set up pricing for fees and charges that are to be added
automatically when certain PLUs and departments are sold.
15
Department File: Set up departments for reporting totals for groups of PLUs
and for sales. A department is a group that contains PLUs. To set up a
VeriPASS Loyalty program, identify the department in the Department File.
16
PLU File: Set up items for sales and reporting. A PLU is a single item that can
be sold. Set up PLUs used in VeriPASS Club, EPC, and Loyalty awards
programs.
17
PLU Promotion File: Set up PLU items on promotion. If you are setting up a
promotion for a car wash item, refer to Car Wash Manager Mode Setup
Steps in this section first.
18
PLU Tracking File: Set up PLU items that you wish to track.
19
Department Tracking File: Set up the departments you wish to track.
20
Menu File: Set up menus of PLU items for easy access for sales.
21
Soft Key File: Set up keys on the keyboard to perform special functions such
as selling an item by PLU, department, or menu, or accepting a method of
payment.
22
Security Control: Set up employee access values for each system function.
23
Log In/Out Prompt: Set up message to display when cashier logs in or out of
Sales mode.
24
Combo File: Set up combinations of PLUs you want to sell at a single

discount price.
25
Mix File: Set up groups of PLUs (10 PLUs maximum) for use in a Match File.
26
Match File: Set up matches using groups of mix files for discount pricing.
27
POP Discount File: Set up transaction requirements to earn Point of Purchase

(POP) Discounts. Enabling POP discounts requires additional set up in Fuel
Manager.
28
POP Discount Coupon: Set up coupon text so that a coupon may be generated
at the DCR or inside at the Ruby terminal. This set up requires that the POP
discount feature in Manager is enabled.
VeriPASS Mode Setup Steps

The following sections are in the VeriPASS chapter of this manual.
VeriPASS Mode Setup
Step
Initialize VeriPASS Feature: Activates the VeriPASS Feature. This requires a

Dealer Tag. Initialization prints to journal the level of VeriPASS functionality
at that site, for example inside, outside, or both.
Merchant Preferences: Set up the prompts that a customer sees when

activating a VeriPASS tag.
VeriPASS Club Configuration: Set up a Club Group PLU, a PLU for the
individual item in the Club, and the quantity of the item that is included in the
Club. The PLUs must be set up in Manager mode first.
VeriPASS EPC Configuration: Select up to 10 PLUs that can earn

punches and determine the number of punches needed to get a free item. The
PLUs must be set up in Manager mode first.
VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Configuration: Select up to 10 departments in which

loyalty dollars can be earned. Set up the PLUs to offer as a redemption item
and assign one of the department numbers to the PLU. The PLUs must be set
up in Manager mode first.
VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration: Set up the number of points

needed to redeem for each dollars worth of merchandise.
Car Wash Manager Mode Setup Steps

Car wash is an optional feature that may require a Ruby Card. Follow these steps if you
have the car wash option. The following sections are in the Car Wash Manager chapter
of this manual, except for the PLU Promotions File which is in the Manager chapter.
Car Wash Manager Mode Setup
Step
Department Setup: Set up the department number for car wash sales. The car
wash department must be set up in Manager mode first.
Car Wash Key Setup: Set up car wash keys on the car wash controller. The
car wash PLUs must be set up in Manager mode first.
DCR Display Setup: Set up the DCR display for car wash sales.
Car Wash Code Days Valid: For Unitec car wash controllers, set up the
number of days the car wash code is valid.
Car Wash Controllers: For Unitec car wash controllers, set up car wash
availability.
PLU Promotion File: To set up promotions on car wash keys, set up the
promotion(s) in the PLU Promotion File in Manager mode.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager Mode Setup Steps

The following sections are in the Fuel Manager chapter of this manual.
Fuel Manager Mode Setup
Step
Tank Names: Set up names for the fuel tanks at your site.
Product Configuration: Set up the fuel products that your site sells.
Product Code Setup: Set up the product codes for the fuel products your site
sells.
Product Department Setup: Set up the department number for fuel sales.
Product ID Setup: Set up the ID numbers for fuel products if desired.
Pump Configuration: Set up the operating attributes and hose assignments

for each pump.
Site Parameters: Set up operating procedures that affect all pumps, DCRs,
and cash acceptors.
Fuel Product Prices: Set up prices for each fuel product.
DCR Configuration: If you have DCRs at your site, set up DCR parameters.
10
Cash Acceptor Configuration: If you have cash acceptors at your site, set up
their parameters in Cash Acceptor Configuration and Cash Acceptor Site
Parameters.
11
POP Discount: Set up discount prices for the grades of fuel using the POP
discount and definition tables. Refer to POP Discount.
11
Initialize DCRs: Send the information set up in this section to the DCRs.
12
Initialize Fuel: Send the information set up in this section to the pumps.
Network Manager Mode Setup Steps

The following section is in the Network Manager chapter of this manual.
Network Manager Mode Setup
Step
1
October 4, 2002
Configuration: Set up parameters in Batch Configuration, Dealer
Configuration, and Debit Configuration.
Reports Mode Setup Steps

The following section is in the Reports Reference included in this binder.
Reports Mode Setup
Step
Report Configuration: Set up report period names and the report sections that
print for each period.
October 4, 2002
Workstation Setup
Follow these steps if you are setting up a workstation terminal. These steps should be done
on each workstation at your site. Perform the initial setup in each indicated section. Then
go on to the next step in this list.
Maintenance Mode Setup Steps
The following section is in the Maintenance chapter of this manual.
Maintenance Mode Setup
Step
1
Set Date and Time
Manager Mode Setup Steps

The following sections are in the Manager chapter of this manual.
Manager Mode Setup
October 4, 2002
Step
Description
Register Configuration: Set up specific files to be downloaded from the

controller.
Check Franking File: Set up the information to be printed on the back of a

check, if your site accepts checks and has a TM930 slip printer.
Logo/Slogan File: Set up the information that prints at the top and bottom of
receipts, if the workstation has different receipt information than the controller.
Create Banner: Set up the information that appears on the Customer Display
when no sales transactions are in progress, if the workstation has different text
on the Customer Display than the controller.
Menu File: Set up menus of PLU items for easy access for sales, if the
workstation has different menus than the controller.
Soft Key File: Set up keys on the keyboard to perform special functions such
as selling an item by PLU, department, or menu, or accepting a method of
payment, if the workstation has a different keyboard layout than the controller.
October 4, 2002
Manager
Manager mode contains functions which define general sales and system operating
conditions:
October 4, 2002
Security Control
Employee File
Configuration
Register Configuration
Check Franking File
Logo/Slogan File
MOP File
Currency File
Tax Rate File
Fee/Charge File
Category File
Department File
PLU File
PLU Promotion File
PLU Tracking File
Department Tracking File
Soft Key File
Menu File
Customer ID Info
Training Mode
Create Banner
Blue Law Setup
Log In/Out Prompt
Combo File
Mix File
Match File
3-2 Manager
POP Discount File

POP Discount Coupon
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-3
File Maintenance
Most Manager functions change system or sales values. There are several procedures
which are used to maintain these functions:
List
Add a Record
Change a Record
Delete a Record
The procedures that apply to each function are included in that functions section.
Note:
October 4, 2002
Changes to functions in Manager mode do not take effect until Manager

mode is exited.
3-4 Manager
Start Manager Mode

Use these steps to enter the Manager mode from any point in the application. Then refer to
the chapter that describes the function you wish to run.
Steps
1. Press [EXIT] until you reach the switcher.
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Manager mode appears.

[ MANAGER ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _
4. Key your employee ID and press [ENTER].

Enter Password _
5. Key your personal password and press [ENTER].

1. SECURITY CONTROL
** Use Arrow Keys **
*MANAGER MENU*
6. Continue with the appropriate Manager function.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-5
Security Control
Note:
3
This function is only available on standalone or controlling terminals.
Security Control relates security levels to management functions. Security levels range
from zero through nine. Zero is the lowest security level and nine is the highest.
Security Control contains the following sections:
System Manager Functions
Fuel Manager Functions
DCR Configuration Functions
Configuration Functions
Report Functions
Flash Report Functions
Maintenance Functions
Security Functions
Car Wash Functions
VeriPASS Functions
Network Manager Functions
Considerations
Consider these items when setting up security levels for functions.
Initial System Setup
All functions for which security level items have a default security level setting are based
on the way the system is most often used.
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review the default settings.
If the settings meet your operating guidelines, go to the next setup step.
If you wish to change the settings, complete the Security Control Initial Setup
section.
Security Level Structure
Ten security levels are available and range from 0 through 9. Set up the levels to reflect
job responsibility. The following list provides a sample security level set up.
8-9
6-7
4-5
0-3
October 4, 2002
Corporate
Manager
Assistant Manager
Cashiers
3-6 Manager
Assign a security level to each Security Control function based on the level of the
employees who perform the function.
Employee File
In the Employee File, assign security levels to each employee based on the security level
structure.
If an employees security level is equal to or greater than the security level

assigned to a function, then the employee can perform that function.
If an employees security level is less than the security level assigned to a function,
then the employee cannot perform that function.
Note:
Employee 001 is permanently assigned security level 9. This cannot be

changed.
Start Security Control

Use these steps to reach the Security Control functions.
Steps
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Security Control
function appears.
2. Press [Select].
1. SYSTEM MANAGER FUNCTIONS
*SECURITY CONTROL MENU*
3. Continue with the appropriate Security Control function.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-7
System Manager Functions

3
System Manager Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu
items) in Manager mode.
Steps
Use these steps to assign a security level to each function based on the sites security level
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the System Manager
Functions option appears.
2. Press [Select].
1. SECURITY CONTROL
SL: _
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired item appears.

The available items are listed below in the order of their appearance. Refer to the
section of an item for a functional description. For example, for a definition of the
Employee File, refer to Employee File.
1. SECURITY CONTROL
2. EMPLOYEE FILE
3. CONFIGURATION
4. REGISTER CONFIGURATION
5. CHECK FRANKING FILE
6. LOGO/SLOGAN FILE
7. MOP FILE
8. CURRENCY FILE
9. TAX RATE FILE
10. FEE/CHARGE FILE
11. CATEGORY FILE
12. DEPT FILE
13. PLU FILE
14. PLU PROMOTION FILE
15. PLU TRACKING FILE
16. DEPARTMENT TRACKING FILE
17. SOFT KEY FILE
18. MENU FILE
19. CUSTOMER ID INFO
20. TRAINING MODE
October 4, 2002
3-8 Manager
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
CREATE BANNER
BLUE LAW SETUP
LOG IN/OUT PROMPT
COMBO FILE
MIX FILE
MATCH FILE
POP DISCOUNT FILE
POP DISCOUNT COUPON
4. Key the new security level (1 - 9) and press [ENTER].

1. SECURITY CONTROL
SL: 8
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set up another security level OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Security Control menu.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-9
Fuel Manager Functions

3
Fuel Manager Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu
items) in Fuel Manager mode.
Steps
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Fuel Manager
2. FUEL MANAGER FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. TANK NAMES
SL: _

The available items appear below in the order of their appearance. For a
description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Fuel Manager
chapter later in this manual.
1. TANK NAMES
2. PRODUCT CONFIGURATION
3. PRODUCT CODE SETUP
4. PRODUCT DEPT SETUP
5. PRODUCT ID SETUP
6. PUMP CONFIGURATION
7. FUEL PRODUCT PRICES
8. DCR CONFIGURATION
9. CASH ACCEPTOR CONFIGURATION
10. SITE PARAMETERS
11. INITIALIZE FUEL
12. INITIALIZE DCRs
14. RESET CONTROLLER
15. RFID CONFIGURATION
16. POP DISCOUNT
1. TANK NAMES
October 4, 2002
SL: 8
3-10 Manager
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-11
DCR Configuration Functions

3
DCR Configuration Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions
(menu items) in the DCR Configuration function in the Fuel Manager mode.
Steps
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Configuration
3. DCR CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the DCR
Configuration section of the Fuel Manager chapter.
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
2. DCR RECEIPT HEADER
3. DCR RECEIPT TRAILER
4. FUELING/PROMO MESSAGE
5. DCR ENABLE/DISABLE
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
SL: 2
October 4, 2002
3-12 Manager
Configuration Functions
33
Configuration Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu
items) in Configuration Functions in Manager mode.
Steps
Use these steps to assign a security level to each function based on your sites security
level structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Configuration
4. CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Configuration
section of the Manager chapter later in this manual.
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
2. SALES CONFIG
3. GEMCOM CONFIG
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
SL: 7
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-13
Report Functions
3
Report Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu items) in
Reports mode. Assign a security level to each function based on the sites security level
structure.
Steps
1. At the Security Control menu, press [Select]. Press the arrow keys until the
Report Functions option appears.
5. REPORT FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. CLOSE CASHIER TOTALS
SL: _

The available items are listed below in the order of their appearance. Refer to the
section of an item for a functional description. For example, for a definition of
Close Cashier Totals, refer to Close Cashier Totals.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
October 4, 2002
CLOSE CASHIER TOTALS

PRINT CASHIER REPORT
PRINT WORKSHEET
CLOSE SHIFT
CLOSE DAILY
CLOSE MONTHLY
CLOSE YEARLY
CURRENT SHIFT
CURRENT DAILY
CURRENT MONTHLY
CURRENT YEARLY
PRINT SHIFT REPORT
PRINT DAILY REPORT
PRINT MONTHLY REPORT
PAYROLL REPORT
PREVIOUS SHIFT SAFE DROP REP(ORT)
FLASH REPORTS
PLU TOTAL CONFIGURATION
REPORT CONFIGURATION
3-14 Manager
Note:
The period name in some of the items (for example, Shift in Close
Shift) is user-defined. If you have changed the name of each period in
the Report Configuration function in Reports mode, that name appears
instead.
1. CLOSE CASHIER TOTALS
SL: 7
5. REPORT FUNCTIONS
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-15
Flash Report Functions

3
Flash Report Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu
items) in the Flash Reports function in Reports mode.
Steps
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Flash Report
6. FLASH REPORT FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. SUMMARY REPORT
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Flash Reports
chapter in the Reports Reference.
1. SUMMARY REPORT
2. PLU REPORT
3. PLU EXCEPTION REPORT
4. PLU PROMO REPORT
5. DEAL REPORT
6. DEPARTMENT REPORT
7. CATEGORY REPORT
8. TAX REPORT
9. HOURLY REPORT
10. SL/PRICE LEVEL RPT
11. PR/PRICE LEVEL RPT
12. TIER/PR REPORT
13. TANK REPORT
14. CONVERSION REPORT
15. AUTOCOLLECT REPORT
16. FP/HOSE REPORT
17. FP/HOSE RUNNING RPT
18. DISPENSER RPT
19. SAFE DROP REPORT
20. BLEND PRODUCT RPT
October 4, 2002
3-16 Manager
21. TANK MONITOR REPORT

22. TANK RECONCILIATION
23. CAR WASH REPORT
24. DCR STATISTICAL RPT
25. CASH ACCEPTOR RPT
26. MONEY ORDER REPORT
27. POP DISCOUNT RPT
28. FP/HOSE TEST REPORT
29. PROPRIETARY REPORT
30. N/W PRODUCT REPORT
31. NETWORK REPORT
32. BATCH SUMMARY REPORT
33. PREPAID ACT REPORT
1. SUMMARY REPORT
SL: 5
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-17
Maintenance Functions
3
Maintenance Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu
items) in the Maintenance mode.
Steps
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, Press [Select]. Press the arrow keys until the
Maintenance Functions option appears.
7. MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
1. VERSION INFORMATION
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Maintenance
2. SET DATE AND TIME
3. DISPLAY I/O CONFIGURATION
4. DATA FILES VERSION
5. ENABLE PRINTER
6. DISABLE PRINTER
7. FLUSH PRINTER QUEUE
8. GET LATEST DATA
9. SET TOTALS
10. CREATE FILES
11. START REMOTE DIAL-IN
12. FILE INFORMATION
13. FEATURE INFORMATION
14. REGISTRATION INFORMATION
15. SET STORE TELEPHONE NUMBER
16. SET STORE POSTAL CODE
17. CPU EXCEPTION INFORMATION
20. RESET SOFT KEY FILE
21. ADJUST BUZZER VOLUME
22. RESET MODEM
March 8, 2002
3-18 Manager
23.
27.
29.
30.
31.
PRINTER ERROR LOG

PRINT INSTALLATION INFORMATI(ON)
REBOOT SYSTEM
DISPLAY IP STATS
e-pc STATUS REPORT

SL: 2
March 8, 2002
Manager 3-19
Security Functions
3
Security Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu items)
in the Security Control function in Manager mode. The security level entered here controls
the ability of an employee to set the Security Control levels of the previous sections.
Assign a security level to each function based on the sites security level structure.
Steps
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Security Functions
option appears.
8. SECURITY FUNCTIONS
2. Press [Select].
SL: _
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired item appears. The available items are listed
below in the order of their appearance.
5. REPORT FUNCTIONS
9. CAR WASH FUNCTIONS
10. VERIPASS FUNCTIONS
11. NETWORK MANAGER FUNCTIONS
SL: 5
October 4, 2002
3-20 Manager
Car Wash Functions

3
Car Wash Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions (menu items)
in Car Wash Manager mode.
Steps
level structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Car Wash Functions
option appears.
2. Press [Select].
1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Car Wash
Manager chapter later in this manual.
1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
2. CAR WASH KEY SETUP
3. DCR DISPLAY SETUP
4. DISABLE CAR WASH
5. ENABLE CAR WASH
6. CAR WASH CODE DAYS VALID
8. OUTDOOR ENABLE
1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
SL: 4
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-21
VeriPASS Functions
3
VeriPASS function in Security Control contains a list of the menu items in the VeriPASS
mode.
Steps
structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS Functions
option appears.
2. Press [Select].
1. ACTIVATE VERIPASS TAG
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the VeriPASS
2. PRINT VERIPASS TAG
3. CHANGE TAG PASSWORD
4. UPDATE VERIPASS TAG
5. DEACTIVATE VERIPASS TAG
6. CUSTOMER SERVICE OPTIONS
7. INITIALIZE VERIPASS FEATURE
9. MERCHANT PREFERENCES
10. VERIPASS CLUB CONFIG
11. VERIPASS EPC CONFIG
12. VERIPASS DEPT LOYALTY CONFIG
13. VERIPASS REDEEM LOYALTY CONFIG
October 4, 2002
3-22 Manager
October 4, 2002
Manager
3-23
Network Manager Functions

3
Network Manager Functions in Security Control contains a list of the main functions
(menu items) in Network Manager mode. In the list below, an asterisk (*) appears in front
of the Network Manager functions which also appear in Sales mode.
Steps
level structure.
1. At the Security Control menu, press the arrow keys until the Network Manager
2. Press [Select].
1. PRE-AUTHORIZATION
SL: _

description of the function, refer to the corresponding section in the Network
Manager chapter later in this manual.
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
*5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
PRE-AUTHORIZATION
MAIL
BATCH DETAILS
PREPAID FUNCTIONS
QUICK CREDIT
COMM STATISTICS
PRINT NETWORK LOG
PRINT PARAMETERS
NETWORK CONFIGURATION
PRINT PRODUCT CODES
CONFIGURATION
*The security level set here applies to the use of the function in both Network Manager
and Sales mode.

October 4, 2002
SL: 2
3-24 Manager
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-25
File Maintenance
3
Use the following procedures to maintain the security control files.

List
Press [List] to print the contents of the current selection.
Note: Only those functions which apply to your system print in the list.
While in the Security Control menu, press [List] to print a list of the submenus
within the Security Control function and the security levels set in those submenus.
10/04/02
10:07
Store# AB123 Register ID# 1
SECURITY CONTROL FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
SYSTEM MANAGER FUNCTIONS

FUEL MANAGER FUNCTIONS
DCR CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS
CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS
REPORT FUNCTIONS
FLASH REPORT FUNCTIONS
MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS
SECURITY FUNCTIONS
CAR WASH FUNCTIONS
VERIPASS FUNCTIONS
NETWORK MANAGER FUNCTIONS
10/04/02
10:07
SYSTEM MANAGER FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
October 4, 2002
Sample Security Control Menu

Listing
SECURITY CONTROL
EMPLOYEE FILE
CONFIGURATION
REGISTER CONFIGURATION
CHECK FRANKING FILE
LOGO/SLOGAN FILE
MOP FILE
CURRENCY FILE
TAX RATE FILE
FEE/CHARGE FILE
CATEGORY FILE
DEPT FILE
PLU FILE
PLU PROMOTION FILE
PLU TRACKING FILE
DEPARTMENT TRACKING FILE
SOFT KEY FILE
MENU FILE
CUSTOMER ID INFO
TRAINING MODE
CREATE BANNER
BLUE LAW SETUP
LOG IN/OUT PROMPT
COMBO FILE
MIX FILE
MATCH FILE
POP DISCOUNT FILE
POP DISCOUNT COUPON
9
7
7
5
5
7
7
5
7
5
7
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
7
7
3
7
7
5
5
5
5
5
Start of Security
Control Menu Submenu
Listings
3-26 Manager
While in a Security Control submenu, press [List] to print a list of the security
levels set in that submenu.
10/04/02
10:07
CARWASH SECURITY
-------------------------------------1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
DEPARTMENT SETUP
CAR WASH KEY SETUP
DCR DISPLAY SETUP
DISABLE CAR WASH
ENABLE CAR WASH
CAR WASH CODE DAYS VALID
SET CAR WASH DISPLAY ORDER
OUTDOOR ENABLE
3
3
3
3
3
3
7
7
Sample Security Control Submenu

Listing
Note: Set Car Wash Display Order

appears on the listing but not on
the display. You cannot change
the security level.
Security Control Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Security Control file on a standalone or controlling terminal
for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your System for the order in which the system
should be set up.
Note:
1.
2.
3.
4.
The Ruby is installed with security levels that use the levels defined in the
Considerations section at the beginning of Security Control.
Copy the Security Control Worksheets and use a pencil to complete them.
Put a value, 0 through 9, in the Security Level column on the worksheet.
Follow the steps in each security control section to enter the information into the
system.
Put the copies in the pocket at the back of the binder for future reference.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-27
Security Control: System Manager Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. Security Control
15. PLU Tracking File
2. Employee File
16. Department Tracking File
3. Configuration
17. Soft Key File
4. Register Configuration
18. Menu File
5. Check Franking File
19. Customer ID Info
6. Logo/Slogan File
20. Training Mode
7. MOP File
21. Create Banner
8. Currency File
22. Blue Law Setup
9. Tax Rate File
23. Log In/Out Prompt
10. Fee/Charge File
24. Combo File
11. Category File
25. Mix File
12. Dept File
26. Match File
13. PLU File
27. POP Discount File
14. PLU Promotion File
28. POP Discount Coupon
Security
Level
Security Control: Fuel Manager Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Parameter
1. Tank Names
9. Cash Acceptor Configuration
2. Product Configuration
10. Site Parameters
3. Product Code Setup
11. Initialize Fuel
4. Product Dept Setup
12. Initialize DCRs
5. Product ID Setup
14. Reset Controller
6. Pump Configuration
15. RFID Configuration
7. Fuel Product Prices
16. POP Discount
8. DCR Configuration
October 4, 2002
Security
Level
Security
Level
3-28 Manager
Security Control: DCR Configuration Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Security
Level
Parameter
1. DCR Attributes
4. Fueling/Promo Message
2. DCR Receipt Header
5. DCR Enable/Disable
3. DCR Receipt Trailer
Security Control: Configuration Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
1. System Config
Parameter
Security
Level
3. Gemcom Config
2. Sales Config
Security Control: Report Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. Close Cashier Totals
11. Current Yearly
2. Print Cashier Report
12. Print Shift Report
3. Print Worksheet
13. Print Daily Report
4. Close Shift
14. Print Monthly Report
5. Close Daily
15. Payroll Report
6. Close Monthly
16. Previous Shift Safe Drop Rep
7. Close Yearly
17. Flash Reports
8. Current Shift
18. PLU Total Configuration
9. Current Daily
19. Report Configuration
Security
Level
10. Current Monthly
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-29
Security Control: Flash Report Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Parameter
1. Summary Report
18. Dispenser Report
2. PLU Report
19. Safe Drop Report
3. PLU Exception Report
20. Blend Product Report
4. PLU Promotion Report
21. Tank Monitor Report
5. Deal Report
22. Tank Reconciliation
6. Department Report
23. Car Wash Report
7. Category Report
24. DCR Statistical Report
8. Tax Report
25. Cash Acceptor Report
9. Hourly Report
26. Money Order Report
10. SL/Price Level Report
27. POP Discount Report
11. PR/ Price Level Report
28. FP/Hose Test Report
12. Tier/PR Report
29.Proprietary Report
13. Tank Report
30. N/W Product Report
14. Converstion Report
31. Network Report
15. Autocollect Report
32. Batch Summary Report
16. FP/Hose Report
33. Prepaid Act Report
17. FP/Hose Running Report
October 4, 2002
Security
Level
Security
Level
3-30 Manager
Security Control: Maintenance Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. Version Information
14. Registration Information
2. Set Date and Time
15. Set Store Telephone Number
3. Display I/O Configuration
16. Set Store Postal Code
4. Data Files Version
17. CPU Exception Information
5. Enable Printer
20. Reset Soft Key File
6. Disable Printer
21. Adjust Buzzer Volume
7. Flush Printer Queue
22. Reset Modem
8. Get Latest Data
23. Printer Error Log
9. Set Totals
27. Print Installation Information
10. Create Files
29. Reboot System
11. Start Remote Dial-In
30. Display IP Stats
12. File Information
31. e-pc Status Report
Security
Level
13. Feature Information
Security Control: Security Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. System Manager Functions
7. Maintenance Functions
2. Fuel Manager Functions
8. Security Functions
3. DCR Configuration Functions
9. Car Wash Functions
4. Configuration Functions
10. VeriPASS Functions
5. Report Functions
11. Network Manager Functions
Security
Level
6. Flash Report Functions
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-31
Security Control: Car Wash Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. Department Setup
5. Enable Car Wash
2. Car Wash Key Setup
6. Car Wash Code Days Valid
3. DCR Display Setup
8. Outdoor Enable
Security
Level
4. Disable Car Wash
Security Control: VeriPASS Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
1. Activate VeriPASS Tag
7. Initialize VeriPASS Feature
2. Print VeriPASS Tag
9. Merchant Preferences
3. Change Tag Password
10. VeriPASS Club Config
4. Update VeriPASS Tag
11. Customer Service Options
5. Deactivate VeriPASS Tag
12. VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Config
6. Customer SVC Awards
13. VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty

Config
Security
Level
Security Control: Network Manager Functions Worksheet

Parameter
Security
Level
Parameter
*1. Pre-authorization
7. Print Network Log
*2. Mail
8. Print Parameters
*3. Batch Details
9. Network Configuration
*4. Prepaid Functions
10. Print Product Codes
*5. Quick Credit
11. Configuration
Security
Level
6. Comm Statistics
*The security level set here applies to the use of this function in both Network Manager and Sales
modes.
October 4, 2002
3-32 Manager
Employee File
3
The Employee File contains a record for each employee. The information in this file is
used for the Payroll Report, Cashier Report, and security level access checks.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items when setting up employee information.
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review all the items in this section.
Then complete the Employee File Initial Setup section.
Employee Records
The Employee File contains either 30 or 60 records. The number of records is selected
during Ruby software installation. The Ruby terminal assigns one record number for each
employee ranging from 001 through 030 (or 001 through 060). These numbers cannot be
changed. Employees do not need to be assigned to record numbers in order.
Login Priorities
Cashiers are considered active on a register from the time they log in until they close out
their totals. If the One Cashier per Drawer parameter in Manager > Configuration >
Sales Config is set to Y, store personnel with security levels equal to, or below the
security level of the first cashier to log in, will NOT be allowed to log in. If someone
attempts to log in, the error message E1255 OPERATOR# <nnn> IS ACTIVE displays.
Store personnel with security levels above that of the first cashier, can log in by pressing
[Yes] in response to the following message:
E1255 OPERATOR # <999> IS ACTIVE
LOGIN OVERRIDE? [Y/N]
The number of times an operator is overridden, logs and prints in the memo section of the
appropriate cashier report and in the Summary Report. Additionally, any activity
performed by the overriding employee logs to the journal. Sales transactions made by
overriding employee appear in that employees Cashier Report.
Note:
The override prompt does not display if two or more cash drawers are
connected.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-33
Security Levels
In the Employee File, assign security levels to each employee based on the security level
structure.
If an employees security level is equal to or greater than the security level

assigned to a function, then the employee can perform that function.
If an employees security level is less than the security level assigned to a function,
then the employee cannot perform that function.
Note:
October 4, 2002
Employee 001 is permanently assigned security level 9. This cannot be

changed.
3-34 Manager
Employee File Steps

Use these steps to run the Employee File function and make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Employee File function
appears.
2. EMPLOYEE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
001 Name CORPORATE
*MANAGER MENU*
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired employee system record appears.
4. Enter the indicated information for each item. The variable nnn in each item is
the record number. It is also the number that the employee keys when an employee
ID is requested.
nnn Name
Description: Employee name. Enter all names in the same way. For example, enter first
names and then last names, or last names, a comma, and then first names.
Employees cannot clock in or out without having a name assigned.
Values:
Alphanumeric, 1 - 30 characters.
Steps:
Do one of the following:

1.
Key [*] [ENTER] to delete all information for the current employee
system record number.
2.
Key the new name and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
3.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the next item.
nnn Emp #
Description: Employee number. A number, such as a social security number or companyassigned ID, which identifies the employee for internal or payroll purposes.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new ID and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnn Security Level

Description: Employee security level. The employee has access to all functions that have
a security level less than or equal to the security level assigned here.
Note:
Employee system record number 001 is permanently assigned security level

9. This cannot be changed. This item will not appear for employee 001.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-35
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 8.
Steps:

1.
Key the new security level and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnn Password
Description: A string of characters (letters and/or numbers) that the employee must enter
to sign on or clock in or out.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new password and press [ENTER].

Key the new password again and press [ENTER] again to go to the next
item.
PASSWORD CHANGED appears if the password was changed
successfully.
2.
nnn Cashier?
Description: Indicate if this employee may perform cashier functions in Sales mode.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The employee may perform cashier functions in Sales mode.
No: The employee may clock in and out, but may not sign on as a cashier to
perform sales functions.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to go to the first item.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the first item.
5. Repeat step 3 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return to the

Manager menu.
2. EMPLOYEE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-36 Manager
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the employee records.
List
Press [List] to print a list of all employees and employee information. Passwords are
not printed.
Note:
Employee passwords only print with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby Customer
Support Center.
Sample Employee File Listing
10/04/02
EMPLOYEE FILE
10:07
ID#
EMPLOYEE NAME
EMP#
SL
CSH
PASSWORD
-------------------------------------001 CORPORATE
1
9
Y
*****
002 STORE MANAGER
2
7
Y
*****
003 ASST MANAGER
3
5
Y
*****
004 CASHIER
4
3
Y
*****
Add/Change a Record
Adding a record is the same as changing a record.
1. Press the arrow keys until the desired employee ID appears OR key a number
between 1 and 30 (or 1 and 60 depending on your system).
2. Press [Select].
3. After keying the record number, the Ruby terminal attempts to choose the record.
If the record number does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER appears
briefly and the Ruby terminal beeps once. Key another record number.
If the record number exists, the record appears. Enter a new name or change
the desired values.
Delete a Record
1. Press the arrow keys until the desired employee ID appears OR key a number
between 1 and 30 (or 1 and 60 depending on your system).
2. Press [Select].
3. After keying the record number, the Ruby terminal attempts to find the record.
If the record number does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER appears
briefly and the Ruby terminal beeps once. Key another record number.
If the record number exists, it appears.
4. Key [*] [ENTER] at the Name parameter. All information for the employee is
deleted.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-37
Employee File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Employee File on a standalone or controlling terminal for the
first time. Refer to Setting Up Your System for the order in which the system should be
set up.
1. Make copies of the Employee File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Put a value in each column on the worksheet. There is a description of each
parameter in the Employee File Steps section.
3. Follow the steps in the Employee File Steps section to enter the employee
information into the system.
4. Put the worksheets in the pocket at the back of the binder for future reference.
October 4, 2002
3-38 Manager
Employee File Worksheet

ID
001
Name
Emp #
Security
Level
Password
Cashier?
002
003
004
005
006
007
008
009
010
011
012
013
014
015
016
017
018
019
020
021
022
023
024
025
026
027
028
029
030
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-39
Employee File Worksheet (Continued)

ID
031
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
049
040
041
042
043
044
045
046
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
055
056
057
058
059
060
October 4, 2002
Name
Emp #
Security
Level
Password
Cashier?
3-40 Manager
Configuration
33
The Configuration function defines general system operating methods. It contains the
following sections:
System Configuration
Sales Configuration
Gemcom Configuration
Note:
Considerations
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review all the items in the Sales
Configuration file. Determine how you want the Ruby terminal to operate for each
transaction. Then complete the Sales Configuration Initial Setup section.
POP (Point of Purchase) Discounts
The POP Discount function allows you to sell fuel at discounted prices based on coupons,
related purchases, and MOPs, on a transaction-by-transaction basis. To enable this feature,
the POP Discount Enable [Y/N] parameter must be set to Y.
Value-Added Tax (VAT)
Refer to the Tax Rate File section later in this chapter for information related to the
Value Added Tax - VAT parameter in Sales Configuration.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-41
Start Configuration
Use these steps to reach the Configuration function from any point in the application.
Steps
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Configuration function
appears.
3. CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
*CONFIGURATION MENU*
3. Continue with the appropriate Configuration function.
October 4, 2002
3-42 Manager
System Configuration
System Configuration in the Configuration function contains parameters which set major
system values.
Note:
This function is only available with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby Customer
Support Center.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the System Config function
appears.
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
2. Press [Select].
3. Enter a value for each parameter.
To make changes to all items, follow each step below.
To make a change to a specific item, key the items number, press [Select],
and follow the steps for that item.
01 Initialize all files
Description: This procedure is usually only set to Y as part of the original system set-up.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: All system files are reset. Sales mode cannot be entered.
No: Standard setting to allow normal operations.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes and go to the next item.
02 Maximum PLUs
Description: This sets the maximum number of PLUs that the system can hold. To have a
record of the Ruby terminals totals run the Close Shift function before
changing this parameter. This number should not be changed without
interaction with the VeriFone Customer Support Center. The maximum
number the system can handle is dependent on your entire system hardware
configuration.
Note:
The default is 5,000 or less. Selection of over 5,000 PLUs may require a
Ruby Card.
Note:
A Ruby Card is required when HPV-20 is installed.
Values:
Numeric, 10,000 or less.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-43
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] OR press [-->] to make no
changes and go to the next item.
ALL TOTALS WILL BE LOST, CONTINUE? [Y/N]
2.
Press [Yes] to continue OR press [No] to go to the next item. The

following screen appears briefly before going to the next item.
PLU file change done._
03 PLU Totals Storage Media

Description: This allows storage of PLU total sales data on external media such as a
memory card.
Note:
This parameter only applies to systems with more than 5,000 PLUs.
Values:
Numeric, 1 or 2.
1: Static RAM
2: Card
Steps:

1.
2.
04 Maximum PLUs promo

Description: This sets the maximum number of promotions which can be defined for the
system. The maximum number the system can handle is dependent on your
entire system hardware configuration. For example, if this parameter is set to
50, the Ruby terminal allows either 20% fewer or 20% more promotions to
be set. Therefore, although you set the Maximum PLUs promo to 50, the
Ruby terminal may allow you to set up between 40 to 60 promotions and the
final number is determined by your hardware configuration.
October 4, 2002
Note:
If the value is changed, the file in Maintenance > Create Files must be
updated.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999.
Steps:

1.
2.
3-44 Manager
06 Maximum no of saved trans

Note:
Fast food is an optional feature which may require a Ruby Card. This
parameter is only enabled if you have the fast food option.
Description: This number determines how far back transaction receipts can be printed
using the ticket print function.
Values:
Numeric, 2 - 50.
Steps:

1.
2.
07 Maximum no of pending trans

Note:
Fast food is an optional feature which may require a Ruby Card. This
parameter is only enabled if you have the fast food option.
Description: This determines the number of sales transactions that can be suspended.
Note:
The number of pending transactions must be less than or equal to the value
of the Number of saved transactions parameter.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 50.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go to the first item.
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes and go to the first item.

Configuration menu.
1. SYSTEM CONFIG
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-45
Sales Configuration
Sales Configuration in the Configuration function contains parameters which set overall
sales operations values.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Sales Config function
appears.
2. SALES CONFIG
2. Press [Select].
01 PLU not found department #
Description: Sales are made to this department when a PLU that does not exist in the PLU
File is entered as a sale. The department number assigned here must also be
assigned as the PLU Not Found department in the Department File.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9999.
0000: Disables the PLU Not Found department.
Steps:

1.
2.
02 Maximum quantity
Description: The maximum quantity of any one item that may be sold in one transaction.
Note:
If the value is less than one then the item cannot be sold.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 9999.
Steps:

1.
2.
03 Maximum amount
Description: Sets the maximum amount that any one department item may cost if the
Manager > Department File > Dept Max parameter is set to 0. If the
Dept Max parameter is not 0, then its value overrides any value set here.
October 4, 2002
Note:
This parameter only applies to department items, not to PLU items.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
3-46 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
04 Minimum amount
Description: Sets the minimum amount that any one department item may cost if the
Manager > Department File > Dept Min parameter is set to 0. If the
Dept Max parameter is not 0, then its value overrides any value set here.
Note:
This parameter only applies to department items, not to PLU items.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
05 Maximum discount
Description: The maximum discount (either percent or dollar amount as set in Discount
(P, A)) that can be applied to an item when you use the [DISC] key.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
06 Minimum discount
Description: The minimum discount (either percent or dollar amount as set in Discount
(P, A)) that can be applied to an item when you use the [DISC] key.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
07 Discount per/G
FUEL DISCOUNT
Description: Dollar amount per gallon discount applied when a fuel discount key is used.
This function also allows you to give the discount a descriptive name.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99.99.

Up to 30 characters for the name.
Note:
To rename a discount, you must enter a value or re-enter the current value.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER]. Key the new discount name
and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-47
08 Discount (P, A)
Description: Type of discount that will be applied when the [DISC] key is used.
Values:
P(ercent) or A(mount).
P: The discount amount entered is calculated as a percentage of the price and
then subtracted from the price of the item.
A: The discount amount entered is directly subtracted as a dollar amount
from the price of the item.
Steps:

1.
2.
09 Fixed discount (Y/N)

Description: All discounts are automatically entered as a percent or value as set in the
Discount (P, A) parameter for the amount set in the Fixed disc. rate
parameter when the [DISC] key is used.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: All discounts are fixed at the rate set in the Fixed disc. rate parameter.
No: All discounts must be entered as individual amounts.
Steps:

1.
2.
10 Fixed disc. rate

Description: If the Fixed discount (Y/N) parameter is set to Y, then the amount set
here automatically applies when the [DISC] key is used. The value is
interpreted as a percent or amount as set in the Discount (P, A) parameter.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
11 Refund security
Description: Security level a user must have to perform a refund transaction. The cashier
number and password are requested. An employee with the same or greater
security level must approve the refund by entering their cashier number and
password. If the cashier approving the refund is not the same as the cashier
requesting the refund, the approving cashier is logged on the journal.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9.
0: Refunds do not require a security level check.
1 - 9: Refunds must be approved by a cashier/employee with a security level
of at least this number.
October 4, 2002
3-48 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
12 Void line security

Description: Security level a user must have to perform a void line transaction. The
cashier number and password are requested. An employee with the same or
greater security level must approve the void line by entering their cashier
number and password. If the cashier approving the void line is not the same
as the cashier requesting the void line, the approving cashier is logged on the
journal.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9.
0: Void lines do not require a security level check.
1 - 9: Void lines must be approved by a cashier/employee with a security
level of at least this number.
Steps:

1.
2.
13 Void transaction security

Description: Security level a user must have to perform a void ticket transaction. The
cashier number and password are requested. An employee with the same or
greater security level must approve the void ticket by entering their cashier
number and password. If the cashier approving the void ticket is not the
same as the cashier requesting the void ticket, the approving cashier is
logged on the journal.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9.
0: Void tickets do not require a security level check.
1 - 9: Void tickets must be approved by a cashier/employee with a security
level of at least this number.
Steps:

1.
2.
14 No sale security
Description: Security level a user must have to use the [NO SALE] key. The cashier
security level must approve the No Sale by entering their cashier number and
password. If the cashier approving the No Sale is not the same as the cashier
requesting the No Sale, the approving cashier is logged on the journal.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9.
0: No sales do not require a security level check.
1 - 9: No sales must be approved by a cashier/employee with a security level
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-49
Steps:

1.
2.
15 Vendor payment security

Description: Security level a user must have to use the [PAY OUT] key. The cashier
security level must approve the Pay Out by entering their cashier number
and password. If the cashier approving the Pay Out is not the same as the
cashier requesting the Pay Out, the approving cashier is logged on the
journal.
Note:
Refer to Soft Keys section in the Manager Reference for vendor Pay Out
steps.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9.
0: Pay Outs do not require a security level check.
1 - 9: Pay Outs must be approved by a cashier/employee with a security level
Steps:

1.
2.
16 Cash drawers connected

Description: The number of cash drawers connected to this terminal. In a multiterminal
system, all terminals are set for the number of cash drawers set here.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 2.
0: No cash drawers are connected.
1: Each terminal has no more than one cash drawer connected. No cash
drawer number is needed.
2: Each time the cashier enters Sales mode, the Ruby terminal asks the
cashier to enter the number of the cash drawer used.
Steps:

1.
2.
17 Cashier # required each sale

Description: This parameter is usually set to Y only when more than one cashier and
more than one cash drawer is used on a single Ruby terminal.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashier must enter their cashier number and password before
starting each sale.
No: The cashier is not requested to enter their cashier number and password
before each sale.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-50 Manager
18 Subtotal required
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The [TOTAL] key must be pressed before the MOP is chosen. A soft
key must be defined for the Total function.
No: The [TOTAL] key does not have to be pressed before the MOP is
chosen.
Steps:

1.
2.
19 Total in double
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Print the transaction total in double-wide letters on the receipt and
journal.
No: Print the transaction total in single-wide letters on the receipt and
journal.
Steps:

1.
2.
20 Print receipt
Note:
When this parameter is set to N, the Force Ticket Print parameter

appears in the MOP configuration file. Setting Force Ticket Print in the
MOP File to Y overrides the N setting in this parameter.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Print a receipt for every transaction.
No: A receipt prints for No Sale, Pay In, Pay Out, Clock In/Out, void, and
credit transactions or when requested using the [TICKET PRINT] key.
When set to N the following four parameters appear - Force VOID LINE,
VOID TICKET, NO SALE, and REFUND print, providing greater control
over receipt printing.
Steps:

1.
2.
21 Force VOID LINE print [Y/N]

Note:
Only appears if the Print receipt parameter is set to N.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: VOID LINE prints on the receipt and the journal when the cashier
voids a line in the Sales mode.
No: Does not print when a line is voided in Sales mode.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-51
22 Force VOID TICKET print [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: VOID TICKET prints on the receipt and the journal when the cashier
voids a ticket in the Sales mode.
No: VOID TICKET prints on the journal only.
Steps:

1.
2.
23 Force NO SALE print [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: NO SALE prints on the receipt and the journal when the cashier
presses [NO SALE].
No: NO SALE prints on the journal only.
Steps:

1.
2.
24 Force REFUND print [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: A refund receipt prints when the cashier performs a refund in the Sales
mode.
No: Refund prints on the journal only.
Steps:

1.
2.
26 Idle prompt displays due sales

Description: Sets the idle sales message which displays when the terminal is not in the
middle of a transaction.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: NO DUE SALES displays when the terminal is idle and no fuel
transactions are due. A list of due fuel sales displays when one or more fuel
sales are due.
No: Ready for sale displays when the terminal is idle. Due fuel sales can
be viewed by pressing just the [VIEW] key.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-52 Manager
27 Drawer open during sale

Description: Drawer open during sale.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cash drawer may remain open during transactions.
No: The cash drawer must be closed before the next transaction can be
started. If a sale is attempted with the cash drawer open a Close Cash
Drawer message displays and the Ruby terminal beeps every two seconds.
Steps:

1.
2.
28 Reset display on drawer close

Description: Sets when the idle sales message returns to the Operator Display after a
transaction is complete. Refer to the Reset Display Values table below for
operational values.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
29 Reset display on time-out

Description: Sets when the idle sales message returns to the Operator Display after a
transaction is complete. Refer to the Reset Display Values table below for
operational values.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Reset Display Values

On Drawer
Close
On Time-out
Ready for sale message

returns...
Yes
Yes
When the drawer closes or the timeout elapses.
Yes
No
When the drawer closes.
No
Yes
When the time-out elapses or the

drawer closes and a key is pressed.
No
No
When the drawer closes or the timeout elapses.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-53
30 Reset display time-out value

Description: Sets the time, in seconds, when the idle sales message returns to the Operator
Display after a transaction is complete. When the Reset display on timeout parameter is set to Y, a value must be entered here.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 3600.
Steps:

1.
2.
31 Canadian GST
Description: Identifies whether parameters related to Canadian Goods and Services Tax
(GST) appear in the Tax Rate File.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The site collects GST. If set to Y, the Reg. # and Fuel Includes
Tax parameters appear in the Tax Rate File, and the Canadian GST
percentage appears on the receipt.
No: The site does not collect Canadian GST.
Steps:

1.
2.
32 Value Added Tax - VAT

Description: Determines whether the receipt shows that VAT is included in the price of an
item. U.S. and Canadian sites usually do not collect VAT.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: VAT INCLUDED appears at the bottom of the receipt. The Price
Includes Tax parameter in the Tax File must also be set to Y for the tax
applied to the item.
No: VAT INCLUDED does not appear on the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.
33 Store number
Description: Number or name which identifies the store. This number or name prints on
all receipts, listings ([List]), and reports.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
3-54 Manager
34 Enable Fast Credit

Description: A Fast Credit transaction is one in which a customer prepays for fuel with a
credit card and the sale is pre-authorized for the amount entered by the
cashier, or pre-authorized for the dispenser limit if the cashier does not enter
an amount. After the fuel is dispensed, the actual amount dispensed is
charged to the card.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: A pre-authorization can be transferred to an outside sale.
No: A pre-authorization cannot be transferred to an outside sale.
Steps:

1.
2.
35 Check drawer amount on safe drop

Description: Determines whether the Ruby terminal compares the amount of the MOP
entered to the amount calculated to be in the drawer at this point.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The Ruby terminal compares the amounts and warns if too little of the
MOP is calculated to be in the drawer.
No: The Ruby terminal does not compare the amounts.
Steps:

1.
2.
36 Money Order Low Check Limit

Description: Sets the number of checks remaining before an alarm message is triggered to
load more checks.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
37 Log RTDS for EJournal

Description: Determines whether to save Real Time Data Sets intended for retrieval by a
back office/electronic journal computer system.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Save transaction details in the Ruby terminal for later retrieval by a
back office/electronic journal system.
No: Do not save transaction details.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go back to the next item.
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes and go back to the next item.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-55
38 POP Discount Enable [Y/N]

Description: Enables the POP discount feature so that POP discounts may be configured
and applied.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: POP discount feature is enabled and the feature may be configured.
No: POP discount is disabled.
Steps:

1.
2.
39 POP Discount Code Enable [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter only appears if POP Discount Enable is set to Y.
Description: Determines if a discount earned in one transaction may be applied to a

subsequent transaction within a predefined number of days.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Codes may be generated.
No: Codes cannot be generated.
Steps:

1.
2.
40 Discount ID for Free Code

Note:
Description: Can designate the discount to be awarded at the clerks discretion to

compensate a customer for a perceived inconvenience. This code references
the appropriate entry in the POP Definition Table within Fuel Manager.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 10.
Steps:

1.
2.
41 Free Code Security

Note:
Description: Determines the minimum security level required to issue a free POP award
code or coupon.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9
Steps:

1.
2.
3-56 Manager
42 Number of Days POP Code Valid

Note:
Description: Determines the number of days a POP award is valid.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 30
Steps:

1.
2.
43 Prompt for POP Recalc

Note:
Description: Alerts the cashier that the postpay transaction total is being adjusted for the
discount.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashier is alerted about the total being adjusted.
No: The total adjusts for the discount, with no alert to the cashier.
Steps:

1.
2.
44 One Cashier per Drawer

Description: Determines whether a single cash drawer can be shared by more than one
cashier.
Note:
If Y, the journal logs activity performed by someone with a higher security

level than the cashier. Any transactions made by overriding personnel in
Sales mode displays in the Cashier and Summary Reports.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Limits log in to one cashier per cash drawer until totals are closed. Only
personnel with security levels higher than that of the cashier, may override
this parameter.
No: More than one cashier is allowed per cash drawer.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go back to the first item.
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes and go back to the first item.
3.
45 Force DOB on ID Check? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether to force the cashier to check IDs by displaying
messages, beeping, and restricting sales until a birthdate is either entered,
scanned, or swiped.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Further sales are restricted until an ID is either entered, scanned, or
swiped.
No: Cashier is not forced to do an ID check.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-57
Steps:

1.
2.
46 Error Msg Prompt Timer [2-30]

Note:
This feature may be implemented in the future.
Description: Determines how long error messages display on the Ruby terminal.
Values:
Numeric, 2 - 30.
Steps:

1.
2.

Configuration menu.
2. SALES CONFIG
October 4, 2002
3-58 Manager
Gemcom Configuration
Use the Gemcom Configuration function to set the password for Gemcom
communications with the Ruby terminal. In order to send data to the Ruby terminal from a
back office computer, the password set up here must be used.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Gemcom Config option
appears.
3. GEMCOM CONFIG
2. Press [Select].
Set Gemcom Pwd: 1234567890
3. Key the new password (up to 10 digits) and press [ENTER].

4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Configuration menu.
3. GEMCOM CONFIG
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to list the Configuration files.
While in the Configuration menu, press [List] to print a list of the submenus
within the Configuration function.
Sample Configuration Menu Listing
10/04/02
10:07
CONFIGURATION FUNCTIONS
-------------------------------------1. SYSTEM CONFIG
2. SALES CONFIG
3. GEMCOM CONFIG
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-59
While in a Configuration submenu, press [List] to print a list of the values set
for the parameters in that submenu.
10/04/02
SYSTEM CONFIG PARAMETERS
10:07
Sample System Configuration

Submenu Listing
-------------------------------------01 Initialize all files

N
02 Maximum PLUs
1000
03 PLU Totals Storage Media 2
04 Maximum PLUs promo
0050
06 Maximum no of saved trans 0010
07 Maximum no of pending tra 0010
10/04/02
SALES CONFIG PARAMETERS
10:07
-------------------------------------01 PLU not found department #

0014
02 Maximum quantity
0000
03 Maximum amount
9999.99
04 Minimum amount
0.01
05 Maximum discount
80.00
06 Minimum discount
1.00
07 FUEL DISCOUNT
0.05
08 Discount (P, A)
P
09 Fixed discount (Y/N)
N
10 Fixed disc. rate
0.00
11 Refund security
5
0
5
14 No sale security
7
7
0001
17 Cashier # required each sale N
Y
19 Total in double
Y
20 Print receipt
N
21 Force VOID LINE print
Y
22 Force VOID TICKET print
Y
23 Force NO SALE print
Y
24 Force REFUND print
Y
26 Idle prompt displays due sale N
N
28 Reset display on drawer close Y
N
30 Reset display time-out value 0020
31 Canadian GST
N
N
33 Store number
AB123
34 Enable Fast Credit
N
35 Check drawer amount on safe d Y
9
Y
38 POP Discount Enable [Y/N]
Y
39 POP Discount Code Enable [Y/N]Y
0001
5
42 Number of Days POP Code Valid 0030
Y
Y
45 Force DOB on ID Check? [Y/N]
N
46 Error Msg Prompt Timer [2-30] 0003
October 4, 2002
Sample Sales Configuration

Submenu Listing
3-60 Manager
Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Configuration file on a standalone or controlling terminal for
the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your System for the order in which the system should
be set up.
1. Make copies of the worksheets and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Put a value in the value column for each parameter on the worksheet. There is a
description of each parameter in the sections.
3. Follow the steps in the each section to enter the site values into the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-61
System Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
October 4, 2002
Possible Values
01 Initialize all files
Yes or No
02 Maximum PLUs
0 - 10,000
03 PLU totals storage media
1 or 2
04 Maximum PLUs promotion
0 - 999
06 Maximum number of saved transactions
2 - 50
07 Maximum number of pending transactions
1 - 50
Value
3-62 Manager
Sales Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Possible Values
01 PLU not found department #
0 - 9999
02 Maximum quantity
1 - 9999
03 Maximum amount
0.00 - 9999.99
04 Minimum amount
0.00 - 9999.99
05 Maximum discount
0.00 - 99.99
06 Minimum discount
0.00 - 99.99
07 Fuel discount
0.00 - 99.99
08 Discount
P, A
09 Fixed discount
Yes, No
10 Fixed discount rate
0.00 - 99.99
11 Refund security
0-9
0-9
0-9
14 No sale security
0-9
0-9
0-2
17 Cashier # required each sale
Yes, No
Yes, No
19 Total in double
Yes, No
20 Print receipt
Yes, No
21 Force VOID LINE print
Yes, No
22 Force VOID TICKET print
Yes, No
23 Force NO SALE print
Yes, No
24 Force REFUND print
Yes, No
26 Idle prompt displays due sales
Yes, No
Yes, No
28 Reset display on drawer close
Yes, No
Yes, No
30 Reset display time-out value
0 - 9999
31 Canadian GST
Yes, No
Yes, No
33 Store number
1 - 5 characters
34 Enable fast credit
Yes, No
Value
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-63
Sales Configuration Worksheet (Continued)

Parameter
Possible Values
35 Check drawer amount on safe drop Yes, No
October 4, 2002
0 - 99
Yes, No
38 POP Discount Enable
Yes, No
39 POP Discount Code Enable
Yes, No
1 - 10
0-9
42 Number of Days POP Code Valid
0 - 30
Yes, No
Yes, No
45 Force DOB on ID Check
Yes, No
46 Error Msg Prompt Timer
2 - 30
Value
3-64 Manager
Register Configuration
3
Note:
This function is only available on workstation terminals.
Register Configuration sets specific data files to be downloaded from the controller to the
workstation.
Banner File
Logo/Slogan File
Menu Key File
Soft Key File

These data files can be downloaded from the controller if you want the workstation to be
set up the same way as the controller. Then you only have to set the information up or
change the information one time. When the workstation goes into Sales mode, the
workstation automatically downloads any changes you made to the data files on the
controller.
In some cases you may want the workstation to be set up differently. For example, your
workstation may be set up to sell only lottery tickets. The controllers Customer Display
Banner file displays THANK YOU/COME AGAIN. But you want the lottery-only
terminal to display GOOD LUCK.
Some terminal configurations may require that the workstation be set up differently. For
example, if the controller has 65 keys and the workstation has 120 keys, the soft key file
would need to be set up separately.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting the register configuration for each workstation.
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review the remaining considerations
and then follow the steps in Register Configuration Initial Setup.
Banner File
Decide if you want each workstation to have the same Banner File (Customer Display
information) as the controller. If you do, choose Yes at the Download Banner File
prompt.
If a workstation serves a different function than the controller, then the workstation may
not want to use the Banner File from the controller. Choose No at the Download Banner
File prompt.
Refer to Create Banner for more detailed information about the Customer Display.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-65
Logo/Slogan File
Decide if you want each workstation to have the same Logo/Slogan file (receipt header
and footer) as the controller. If you do, choose Yes at the Download Logo/Slogan File
prompt.
If a workstation serves a different function than the controller, then the workstation may
not want to use the Logo/Slogan file from the controller. Choose No at the Download
Logo/Slogan File prompt.
Refer to Logo/Slogan File for more detailed information about receipt header and footer
information.
Menu Key File
Decide if you want each workstation to have the same Menu Key file as the controller. If
you do, choose Yes at the Download Menu Key File prompt.
If a workstation has a different keyboard layout (for example, 65-key vs. 120-key) or
serves a different function (for example, general sales vs. deli sales) then the workstation
may not want to use the Menu Key file from the controller. Choose No at the Download
Menu Key File prompt.
Refer to Menu File for more detailed information about menus.
Soft Key File
Decide if you want each workstation to have the same keyboard configuration (Soft Key
File) as the controller. If you do, choose Yes at the Download Soft Key File prompt.
If a workstation has a different keyboard layout (for example, 65-key vs. 120-key) then the
workstation should not download the Soft Key File from the controller. Choose No at the
Download Soft Key File prompt.
Refer to Soft Key File for more detailed information about soft keys.
October 4, 2002
3-66 Manager
Register Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the Register Configuration function from any point in the
application and then make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Register Configuration
function appears.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Download Soft Key File [Y/N]
3. Press [Yes] or [No] and then [ENTER]. Press [-->] to go to the next item.
Download Menu Key File [Y/N]
Download Logo/Slogan File [Y/N]
Download Banner File [Y/N]
6. Press [Yes] or [No] and then [ENTER].

7. Press [EXIT] to return to the Manager menu.
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-67
File Maintenance
List
While in the Register Configuration menu item, press [List] to print the values of each
download parameter.
10/04/02
REGISTER CONFIG PARAMETERS
10:07
Sample Register
Configuration Listing
-------------------------------------Download
Download
Download
Download
Soft Key File

Menu Key File
Logo/Slogan File
Banner File
N
N
Y
Y
Register Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Register Configuration file for the first time. Refer to
Setting Up Your System for the order in which the system should be set up.
1. Make a copy of the Register Configuration Worksheet and use a pencil to complete
it.
2. For each workstation in your system, decide which files should be downloaded
from the controller.
3. Follow the steps in the Register Configuration Steps section to enter the
4. Put the worksheet in the pocket at the back of the binder for future reference.
October 4, 2002
3-68 Manager
Register Configuration Worksheet

Workstation
1
Download File
Yes/No
Download Soft Key File from the controller to this workstation?

Download Menu Key file from the controller to this workstation?
Download Logo/Slogan file from the controller to this workstation?
Download Banner file from the controller to this workstation?



October 4, 2002
Manager 3-69
Check Franking File

3
The Check Franking File function defines up to seven lines of information that can be
automatically printed on the back of checks in systems that use a slip printer.
The following information prints on the reverse side of the check.
Line 01 Information: User entered text
Line 06 Information: fixed

Register number
Cashier number
Transaction number
Amount of the check
Line 07 Information: fixed

Date
Time
Sample Check Franking
FOR DEPOSIT ONLY
TO THE FOLLOWING ACCOUNT
183475913847519
SAMPLE CREDIT UNION
CLEARWATER FLORIDA
0001 001 1005
12.58
10/04/02
16:33:36
October 4, 2002
3-70 Manager
Check Franking File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Check Franking File function from any point in the
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Check Franking File
function appears.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
LN01 _
3. Do one of the following:

Key the line of information (1 - 19 characters) to be printed on the back of the
check and press [ENTER]. The text automatically centers itself on the line.
LN01 _
FOR DEPOSIT ONLY
Delete the text by placing an asterisk, *, in the line, and press [ENTER].
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Manager menu.
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-71
File Maintenance
List
While in the Check Franking File function, press [List] to print the current Check
Franking File information.
10/04/02
CHECK FRANKING PARAMETERS
10:07
Sample Check Franking File

Listing
-------------------------------------LN01
FOR DEPOSIT ONLY
LN02
LN03
ACCOUNT 123412312345
LN04
SAMPLE CREDIT UNION
LN05
CLEARWATER FLORIDA
Check Franking File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Check Franking File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
Your System for the order in which the system should be set up.
In a multiterminal system, this setup must be done separately for each terminal.
1. Make a copy the Check Franking File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. You can enter up to five lines of text. Each line can contain 0 - 19 characters.
Decide what you need printed on the back of checks that you receive as a method
of payment.
3. Follow the steps in the Check Franking File Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
3-72 Manager
Check Franking File Worksheet

Information to Print on Check
LN01
LN02
LN03
LN04
LN05
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-73
Logo/Slogan File
3
The Logo/Slogan File contains the information that prints in the header (logo) and footer
(slogan) of your receipts.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating the receipt logo and slogan.
Logo
Note:
The logo lines may be overwritten in some applications by a logo

downloaded from the network.
The logo can contain up to five lines of information. Each line can be 40 single-wide
characters or 20 double-wide characters.
Usually the store name and welcome are placed here.
Example:
WELCOME TO
JOES FUEL STOP
Slogan
The slogan can contain up to five lines of information. Each line can be 40 single-wide
characters or 20 double-wide characters.
Usually a thank you message and wish for return service is placed here.
Example:
October 4, 2002
THANK YOU
PLEASE COME AGAIN
3-74 Manager
Logo/Slogan File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Logo/Slogan File function from any point in the application
and then make changes to the information.
1. Press the arrow keys until the Logo/Slogan File function appears.
6. LOGO/SLOGAN FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired logo (lines 1 - 5) or slogan (lines 6 - 10) line
appears.
4. Enter the indicated information for each line. The variable nn in each item
represents the current line number.
LNnn Mode (D,S)
Description: Determines the size of the letters which print on the receipt for this line.
Values:
D, S, *.
D: Double-wide characters. Up to 20 characters can be printed on the line.
S: Single-wide characters. Up to 40 characters can be printed on the line.
*: Do not print this line.
Steps:

1.
Key the print size value and press [ENTER] to go to the next line entry
item
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes to this logo/slogan line and go to the

next line.
LNnn
Description: The words that are to be printed on this line of the receipt.
Values:
Alphanumeric, 0 - 20 or 0 - 40 characters.
0 - 20: If you chose double-wide characters in the last step, enter up to 20
characters for this line.
0 - 40: If you chose single-wide characters in the last step, enter up to 40
characters for this line.
Steps:

1.
Starting at the left, key the words that should appear on this line of the
receipt. The words are automatically centered. Then press [ENTER] to
go to the next line number.
2.
Press [-->] to make no changes to this logo/slogan line and go to the

next line.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-75
5. Press [EXIT] to return to the Manager menu OR repeat step 3 to make additional
changes.
6. LOGO/SLOGAN FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
File Maintenance
List
While in the Logo/Slogan File function, press [List] to print the current logo and
slogan.
Sample Logo/Slogan File Listing
10/04/02
LOGO/SLOGAN FILE
10:07
-------------------------------------TICKET LOGO:
WELCOME TO
JOES FUEL STOP
TICKET SLOGAN:
THANK YOU
PLEASE COME AGAIN
Logo/Slogan File Initial Setup
Use this section to set up the Logo/Slogan File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
System for the order in which the system should be set up.
1. Make a copy of the Logo/Slogan File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. You can enter up to five lines of text for the logo and five lines of text for the
slogan. Each line can contain either 0 - 20 double-wide characters or 0 - 40 singlewide characters. Decide what you would like printed on the top and bottom of each
receipt.
3. Follow the steps in the Logo/Slogan File Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
3-76 Manager
Logo/Slogan File Worksheet

D/S/*
Logo
Logo/Slogan
LN01
LN02
LN03
LN04
LN05
Slogan
LN06
LN07
LN08
LN09
LN010
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-77
MOP File
3
The MOP File contains a description of every method of payment (MOP) type your store
accepts.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating MOP descriptions.
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review all the items in this section.
Then complete the MOP File Initial Setup section.
Changing/Deleting Used MOP Types
Once an MOP has been defined and used in your system, it should not be changed or
deleted. Changes or deletions affect the accuracy of the period reports.
Key Assignment
Assign each MOP to a soft key. The [OTHER MOP] key is used when not enough space
exists on the keyboard for every MOP used by your site. With the repeated pressing of the
[OTHER MOP] key, the Ruby terminal cycles through each MOP defined in the MOP
File that is not assigned to a soft key. These MOPs appear in the order they are assigned in
the MOP File. You can minimize keystrokes by defining the most often used MOPs before
those used less often.
MOP Types
Write down all the types of payment you accept in exchange for merchandise. For
example, you may accept cash, credit, checks, debit, and coupons. Then review the MOP
File parameters and decide how you would like each MOP to work.
A MOP system record number is almost always different from a MOP code. It is standard
to set MOP system record number 01 to be Code 00 which is the cash type.
Note:
MOP codes 0 to 9 display on the Ruby terminal without a leading zero, but
they list with a leading zero as 00 to 09.
VeriPASS
When an MOP record has the 18 VERIPASS code, only the Force Ticket Print
parameter appears. All of the other parameters are preset.
October 4, 2002
3-78 Manager
MOP File Steps

Use these steps to run the MOP File function and make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the MOP File function
appears.
7. MOP FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
MP01 Dsc CASH
*MANAGER MENU*
Enter values for all items for MOP number (nn) displayed.
Press the arrow keys until the desired MOP system number appears OR key
the MOP system number (1 to 20) and press [Select].
4. Enter the indicated information for each item. The variable nn in each item
represents the MOP number.
MPnn Dsc
Description: Description of the method of payment that appears on reports and receipts.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the MOP description and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the next item within this
MOP number (nn).
3.
Press the arrow keys to go to another MOP number (nn).
MPnn Code
Description: Method of payment type that determines how the MOP works. The MPnn
Dsc parameter determines the name for the MOP that appears in the
Cashier Report and in the Cashier Details section of the Summary Report.
In other reports, some MOPs are referred to differently, as described below.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 20.
00 CASH: To avoid confusion, set the MPnn Dsc parameter to CASH
for the first MOP that uses this code. In the Cashier and Summary Reports,
this MOP appears by the Name set in the Currency File under CASH. In
other reports, it may appear as CASH.
01 CREDIT: Use for credit cards sent through a credit card network. The
MPnn Tender amount required and MPnn Force Ticket Print parameters
do not appear. In some reports, this MOP may appear as CHARGES or by
card name.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-79
02 DEBIT: Use for debit cards sent through a credit card network. The
MPnn Tender amount required and MPnn Force Ticket Print parameters
do not appear. In reports, this MOP appears as a DEBIT item.
03 MANUAL CREDIT: To avoid confusion, set the MPnn Dsc parameter
to MAN CRED for the first MOP that uses this code. Use for credit cards
not sent through a credit card network. A voice authorization, imprinting, or
other procedure may be required to process the card. The MPnn Tender
amount required parameter does not appear.
04 MANUAL DEBIT: Use for debit cards not sent through a credit or debit
card network. A voice authorization, imprinting, or other procedure may be
required to process the card. The MPnn Tender amount required parameter
does not appear.
05 LOTTO: Use for winning lotto tickets tendered as MOPs.
06 CHECK: Use for checks. If customers are not permitted to write checks
for more than the amount of purchase, set MPnn Change allowed to N.
07 COUPON: Use for product coupons as MOPs. The MPnn Change
allowed parameter does not appear.
08 $1 CASH: Automatically expects a one dollar bill as payment and
calculates change based on that. In the Cashier and Summary Reports, this
MOP appears by the Name set in the Currency File under CASH. In
09 $5 CASH: Automatically expects a five dollar bill as payment and
10 $10 CASH: Automatically expects a ten dollar bill as payment and
11 $20 CASH: Automatically expects a twenty dollar bill as payment and
calculates change based on that.In the Cashier and Summary Reports, this
12 $50 CASH: Automatically expects a fifty dollar bill as payment and
13 FOOD STAMP: Use for paper food stamps only. Amounts must be
entered as whole dollars for this MOP. The MPnn Change allowed
parameter must be set to Y. The MPnn Tender amount required
parameter does not appear.
14 DRIVE OFF: Use to set up an MOP for clearing fuel sales for customers
that drive off without paying for dispensed fuel. The MPnn Change
allowed parameter does not appear.
15 HONOR ALL: Use to accept competing oil companies credit cards. A
voice authorization, imprinting, or other procedure may be required to
process the card. The MPnn Tender amount required parameter does not
appear. In some reports, this MOP appears as CHARGES.
October 4, 2002
3-80 Manager
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT: A specific discount is a discount which works

as an MOP. The cashier applies it after pressing [TOTAL]. A site may set up
this discount for special situations or groups of customers, such as students
or seniors. The Dept File and PLU File functions have Special Discount [Y/
N] parameters which enable the discount for specific departments or PLUs.
The MPnn Special Discount (P) parameter sets the percentage rate of the
discount. Only the MPnn Dsc, MPnn Code, Allow Money Order
Purchase, and Force Ticket Print parameters appear. These amounts do
not appear with promotions in the DISCOUNTS item in the Summary
Report.
17 ELECTR FS: Electronic, non-paper food stamps. Amounts for this MOP
can be entered as dollars and cents. This is usually used with food stamp
transactions performed with a standalone EBT terminal. The MPnn Tender
amount required parameter and the MPnn Allowed without sale do not
appear.
18 VERIPASS: Use to accept VeriPASS as an MOP. MPnn Force Ticket
Print is the only parameter which appears. Only the MPnn Dsc, MPnn
Code, and Force Ticket Print parameters appear. In some reports, this
MOP appears as CHARGES or by the name of the card assigned to the
VeriPASS.
19 IN-HOUSE: Store credit extended to local customers and set up outside
the network and the Ruby terminal. The Ruby terminal provides receipts for
transactions and reports sales on the Cashier and Summary reports. Enter
Account Number displays when the [In House] key is used for a
transaction. An alpha-numeric account number, up to ten digits, MUST be
entered. When the customer comes in to pay on the account, press [Pay
In], at which time you are prompted House Account? [Y/N]. Enter Y
and the prompt, Enter Amount and MOP 0.00 displays. After entering an
amount, the prompt, Enter House Acct# displays. If In-House MOP is
selected, the MPnnTender amount required and Force Ticket Print
parameters do not appear.
20 PUMP TEST: The Pump Test MOP closes out a sale where the store
pumps a test amount of fuel into a container and it is rung up as a sale. When
the fuel is returned to the tank, the sale is actually treated as a No Sale. Pump
Test MOP can only be used on post-pay fuel sales.
Steps:

1.
Key the MOP code and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Special Discount (P) nn.nn

Note:
nn.nn
This parameter only appears for MOPs with an MPnn Code value of 16
SPECIAL DISCOUNT.
Description: The amount of the special discount.

Values:
00.00 - 99.99 percent.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-81
Steps:

1.
Key the value and press [ENTER] to go to the Allow Money Order
Purchase parameter.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the Allow Money Order

Purchase parameter.
3.
MPnn Min
Note:
This parameter does not appear for MOPs with an MPnn Code value of
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT or 18 VERIPASS.
Description: The minimum amount accepted for this MOP. For example, some businesses
may have a credit card minimum.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the minimum and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Max
Note:
Description: The maximum amount accepted for this MOP. For example, some
businesses may not accept more than $50 in cash for any one transaction.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.

0.00: This MOP does not have a maximum amount.
Steps:

1.
Key the maximum and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Lim
Note:
Note:
The setting of the Force safe drop parameter determines whether a safe
drop must be performed.
Description: Determines whether the cashier is signaled with a DROP (MOP) message
on the display when the amount of the MOP entered here is in the drawer.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.

0.00: This MOP does not require a safe drop.
0.01 - 9999.99: The DROP (MOP) message appears on the display when
the amount entered here is in the drawer.
October 4, 2002
3-82 Manager
Steps:

1.
Key the limit and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Force safe drop [Y/N]

Note:
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT, 18 VERIPASS, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Note:
The journal records time, date, and cashier number when the cashier enters
the Safe Drop function and the drawer opens.
Description: Once the amount set in the MPnn Lim parameter is reached, this parameter
determines whether sales may continue or a safe drop of the MOP must be
performed first.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: A DROP MONEY FIRST message appears and the cashier cannot
continue sales functions until he or she has dropped the required amount of
the MOP in the safe.
No: Sales transactions can continue without the cashier performing the
recommended safe drop.
Steps:

1.
Key the value and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Open drawer on sale [Y/N]

Note:
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT, 18 VERIPASS, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Open the cash drawer when this MOP is chosen.
No: Do not open the cash drawer when this MOP is chosen.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-83
MPnn Tender amount required [Y/N]

Note:
01 CREDIT, 02 DEBIT, 03 MANUAL CREDIT, 04 MANUAL DEBIT,
13 FOOD STAMP, 15 HONOR ALL, 16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT,
17 ELECTRFS, 18 VERIPASS,19 IN-HOUSE, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The amount of this MOP must be entered before choosing the MOP.
No: The amount of the MOP does not have to be entered before choosing the
MOP.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Allowed without sale [Y/N]

Note:
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT, 17 ELECTR FS, 18 VERIPASS, or 20
PUMP TEST.
Description: Determines if a MOP can be accepted without a purchase. Set this to Y for
MPnn Code values of 05 LOTTO to redeem lottery tickets, 06 CHECK
to cash a check, and 02 DEBIT and 04 MANUAL DEBIT to allow cash
back on a debit card without a purchase.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This MOP can be accepted without a purchase.
No: This MOP can only be accepted with a purchase.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Refund allowed [Y/N]

Note:
16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT,18 VERIPASS, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Description: Determines if this MOP can be given to a customer when an item is

refunded. For example, checks cannot be refunded.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This MOP can be given to a customer when an item is refunded.
No: This MOP cannot be given to a customer when an item is refunded.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
3-84 Manager
MPnn Change allowed [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter must be set to Y for MOPs with an MPnn Code value of
13 FOOD STAMP.
Note:
07 COUPON, 14 DRIVE OFF, 16 SPECIAL DISCOUNT, 18
VERIPASS, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This MOP may be given to a customer as change when the amount
tendered is more than the sale amount.
No: This MOP cannot be given to a customer as change when the amount
tendered is more than the amount of the sale. This MOP must be less than or
equal to the sale amount.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Cashier Rprt Prmpt [Y/N]

Note:
Description: This parameter defines which MOPs are prompted for when running the
Print Cashier Report function in Reports mode. The cashier must enter the
drawer totals for these MOPs at the end of each shift.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Drawer totals for this MOP are prompted for when performing the Print
Cashier Report function.
No: Drawer totals for this MOP are not prompted for when performing the
Print Cashier Report function.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Allow $0.00 Entry [Y/N]

Note:
Description: This determines whether a drawer total of $0.00 can be entered for this MOP
in the Print Cashier Report function in Reports mode.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The value 0.00 can be entered as a drawer total for this MOP.
No: The dollar amount must be more than $0.00 for this MOP.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-85
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Allow Money Order Purchase? [Y/N]

Note:
18 VERIPASS or 20 PUMP TEST.
Note:
Money order must be installed for this prompt to appear.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This MOP can be used to purchase money orders.
No: This MOP cannot be used to purchase money orders.
Steps:

1.
2.
MOP number (nn).
3.
MPnn Force Ticket Print [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter only appears if the Print Receipt parameter in Manager >
Configuration > Sales Config is set to N, and if the MOP does not have an
MPnn Code value of 01 CREDIT, 02 DEBIT, or 20 PUMP TEST.
Note:
This parameter overrides a N setting for the Print Receipt parameter in

Manager > Configuration > Sales Config.
Description: This function forces a receipt to print when a MOP is used.

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Prints a receipt when this MOP is used.
No: Does not print a ticket when this MOP is used.
Steps:

1.
Key the value and press [ENTER] to go to the first item.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the first item within this
MOP number (nn).
3.

Manager menu.
7. MOP FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-86 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the MOP File function, press [List] to print a list of all methods of payments.
Sample MOP File Listing
10/04/02
METHOD OF PAYMENT FILE
10:07
PM NAME
CODE
MIN
MAX
LIMIT
---------------------------------------01 CASH
00
0.00 999.99 200.00
02 CHECK
06
5.00 999.99
0.00
03 CREDIT
01
5.00 999.99
0.00
04 DEBIT
02
5.00 999.99
0.00
.
.
16 $50 CASH 12
50.00
50.00 200.00
17 IN HOUSE 19
0.00
0.00
0.00
18 PUMP TEST 20
0.00
0.00
0.00
Special Discount Percentage
PAYMENT CODES
---------------------------------------00 CASH
01 CREDIT
02 DEBIT
03 MANUAL CREDIT
.
.
.
18 VERIPASS
19 IN HOUSE
20 PUMP TEST
F
O
R
C
E
S
A
F
E
O
P
E
N
A
M
O
U
N
T
A
L
L
O
W
A
L
L
O
W
A
L
L
O
W
A
L
L
O
W
C
A
S
H
R
P
T
$
0
.
0
0
M
O
N
E
Y
F
O
R
C
E
T
I
C
K
E
T
R W
E /
D Q O R C P
R U
E H R E O P
D A I S F A O N R R
R W R A U N M T D I
O E E L N G P R E N
P R D E D E T Y R T
----------------------------------------01 CASH
Y Y N N Y Y Y N Y N
02 CHECK
N N N N N N Y N Y N
03 CREDIT
N N N N Y N Y N Y Y
04 DEBIT
N N N N Y N Y N Y Y
.
.
.
17 IN HOUSE N N N N N N Y N N N
18 PUMP TEST N N N N N N Y N N N
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-87
Add an MOP Record

Adding a system record is the same as changing a system record.
1. Press the arrow keys until the desired MOP record appears OR key an MOP record
number.
2. Press [Select].
3. After keying the MOP number, the Ruby terminal attempts to choose the record.
If the record number is not within the 1-20 range, BAD RECORD
NUMBER appears briefly and the Ruby terminal beeps once. Key another
MOP record number.
If the record number exists, the record displays. Enter a new value or change
the desired values.
Note:
Do not delete an existing method of payment record.
Note:
Do not change the Code parameter for an MOP that has already
been set up.
MOP File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the MOP File on a standalone or controlling terminal for the first
time. Refer to Setting Up Your System for the order in which the system should be set
up.
1. Copy the MOP File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. Put a value in each column on the worksheet.
3. Follow the steps in the MOP File Steps section to enter the information into the
system.
October 4, 2002
3-88 Manager
MOP File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
MOP#
Description
Allowed Without Sale
Code
Refund Allowed
Minimum
Change Allowed
Maximum
Cashier Report Prompt
Limit
Allow $0.00 Entry
Force Safe Drop
Allow Money Order
Open Drawer
Force Ticket Print
Tender Amount Required

MOP#
Description
Code
Refund Allowed
Minimum
Change Allowed
Maximum
Limit
Allow $0.00 Entry
Force Safe Drop
Allow Money Order
Open Drawer
Force Ticket Print

MOP#
Description
Code
Refund Allowed
Minimum
Change Allowed
Maximum
Limit
Allow $0.00 Entry
Force Safe Drop
Allow Money Order
Open Drawer
Force Ticket Print
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-89
Currency File
3
The Currency File contains a description of the common currency and one non-common
currency and its exchange rate in relation to the common currency.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating currency definitions.
If you are setting up the terminal for the first time, review the remaining considerations
and then follow the steps in Currency File Steps and enter the requested information.
Currency Maintenance
The exchange rate must be updated daily.
Exchange Rate
Look in your newspaper for a list of the daily rates. The paper may list the rate in two
different ways.
Example:
Assume the common currency is U.S. dollars.
Choose the first listing (Foreign currency in U.S.$).
Argentina
Australia
Brazil
Britain
Canada
Costa Rica
Euro Dollar
Mexico
Fgn. currency
in U.S.$
0.4474
0.5229
0.4059
1.4225
0.6300
0.0027
0.8744
0.1102
U.S.$ in
fgn. currency
2.2350 Argentina Peso
1.9124 Australian Dollars
2.4634 Brazilian Real
0.7029 Britsh Pounds
1.5878 Canadian Dollars
361.9100 Costa Rician Colons
1.1436 Euro Dollars
9.0730 Mexican Pesos
If you take payment in Australian Dollars, you would choose the value
.5229.
Alternate Currency Symbol
The symbol defined for the alternate currency should be different from the symbol defined
for the base currency so that it is clear which is active on the Operator Display.
October 4, 2002
3-90 Manager
Changing the Alternate Currency

Once an alternate currency has been defined and used in your system, it should not be
changed or deleted; only the exchange rate should be changed. Changes or deletions affect
the accuracy of the period reports.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-91
Currency File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Currency File function from any point in the application and
then make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Currency File function
appears.
8. CURRENCY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
CURR01 Name DOLLAR
3. Enter the indicated information for each item.

CURR01 Name
Description: Descriptive name of the base (common) currency. All transactions take place
using this currency unless [OTHER CURR] is pressed.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the descriptive name of the standard currency and press [ENTER]
to go to the next item within the currency.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the next item within the currency without

making any changes.
3.
Press [-->] to make no changes and go to the alternate currency.
CURR01 Symbol
Description: Symbol, such as $ for U.S. currency, that appear on receipts.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the standard currency symbol and press [ENTER] to go back to the
first item within the currency.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the first item within the currency without

making any changes.
3.
CURR02 Name
Description: Descriptive name of the alternate currency. A transaction uses this currency
when the [OTHER CURR] key is pressed.
Values:
October 4, 2002
3-92 Manager
Steps:

1.
Key the alternate currency descriptive name and press [ENTER] to go

to the next item within the currency.
2.

making any changes.
3.
CURR02 Symbol
Description: Symbol, such as # for British currency, that appear on receipts.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the alternate currency symbol and press [ENTER] to go to the next
item within the currency.
2.

making any changes.
3.
CURR02 Exch
Description: The rate at which the alternate currency is compared to the base currency.
Values:
Numeric, 0.000000 - 999.999999.
Steps:

1.
Key the exchange rate and press [ENTER] to go back to the first item
within the currency.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the first item within the currency without

making any changes.
3.

Manager menu.
8. CURRENCY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-93
File Maintenance
List
While in the Currency File function, press [List] to print the current alternate currency
exchange rate.
Sample Currency File Listing
10/04/02
CURRENCY FILE
10:07
NBR CURRENCY NAME

SYM EXCHANGE RATE
---------------------------------------001 DOLLAR
$
1.000000
002 POUND
#
0.000000
October 4, 2002
3-94 Manager
Tax Rate File

3
The Tax Rate File contains definitions for up to four taxes. Each tax defined can be
applied to any department or PLU item.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating tax table definitions.
Initial Setup
The Tax Rate File should only be set up when the system is first installed or if the tax rates
you use change. Read this entire section carefully to determine the kind of taxes you need
to set up.
If you use the flat rate method, refer to Flat Rate Tax Steps.
If you use the break point method, refer to Break Point Tax Steps.
Canadian GST
If you use this tax type, the Canadian GST parameter must be set to Y in the Sales
Configuration function.
If you use the flat rate method, refer to Flat Rate Tax with Canadian GST Steps.
If you use the break point method, refer to Break Point Tax with Canadian GST
Steps.
In this type of tax, the order the taxes are defined is important:
Tax 1 must be a Canadian GST tax.
Tax 2 may be collected on Tax 1.
Tax 3 may be collected on Tax 1 and Tax 2.
Tax 4 may be collected on Tax 1, Tax 2, and Tax 3.

Department File
Each department can be assigned any combination of the taxes that are defined in the Tax
Rate File. Choose these carefully so that the taxes assigned for a department do not
conflict with the taxes assigned to the PLUs that use that department.
PLU File
Each PLU can be assigned any combination of the taxes that are defined in the Tax Rate
File.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-95
Price Includes Tax and Value Added Tax (VAT)

When Value Added Tax - VAT in Sales Configuration is set to Y and Price includes
tax for any tax in Tax File is set to Y, the phrase VAT INCLUDED appears near the
bottom of receipts with taxable items. Also, a line prints stating the tax, percentage, and
amount that is included. This line prints by itself when Value Added Tax - VAT is set to
N.
When the cashier presses [TOTAL], the display shows the tax amount as 0.00 if only
items in which the tax is included in the price are purchased. If a tax amount appears, then
one or more items were purchased on which a tax is applied that has the Price includes
tax parameter set to N.
VERIFONE
RUBY SUPERSYSTEM
16001 BAY VISTA DRIVE
CLEARWATER, FLORIDA
Descr.
qty
amount
-------------MED SODA
1
0.99
UNLD CA #02
13.580G
20.11
@ 1.399/ G
MILK
1
2.50
---------Sub Total
23.60
Tax
0.07
TOTAL
T Includes
CASH
Change
7.000% STATE
VAT INCLUDED
Tax
23.67
$
$
25.00
1.33
0.07
Tax Included Notice

VAT Included Notice
THANK YOU!
COME AGAIN
REG# 0001 CSH# 001 DR# 01
10/04/02 15:16
TRAN# 0008
ST# AB123
Tax Types
A tax is defined using either a flat rate or a break point rate. The rate type is decided by
the governing body that collects the tax. If more than one tax is used, they can be different
types.
A flat rate tax is calculated by multiplying the taxable amount by the appropriate tax rate.
A flat rate tax definition requires the percentage of the tax.
A break point tax is calculated by comparing the taxable amount to a tax table. The
amount of tax charged depends on where in that table the taxable amount falls. A break
point tax definition requires a table of break points. This process can be difficult for some
tax tables. Ask your distributor or company if they have already prepared a table that you
can use.
The procedure for entering each type of tax is very different, therefore they are described
in separate sections.
October 4, 2002
3-96 Manager
Tax Rate File Steps: General

Use these steps to reach the Tax Rate File function from any point in the application and
Refer to Flat Rate Tax Steps and Break Point Tax Steps for steps specific to each tax
type.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Tax Rate File function
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
3. Use the arrow keys to select which tax you would like to set up.
Taxn Name
Description: Name of the tax which appear for the remaining steps for this tax and on
reports. The n is the system record number (1 - 4).
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the tax name and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter
within the tax.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter in the tax without making

changes.
3.
Press [-->] to go to the next tax system record number.
(Tax Name) Indicator

Description: Character printed on receipts to identify that this tax was applied against the
item.
Values:
Alphanumeric, 1 character.
Steps:

1.
Key the indicator and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Price Includes Tax[Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The price of the item already includes this tax. A line prints at the
bottom of the receipt stating that the tax is included in the amount.
No: The price of the item does not include this tax.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-97
Steps:

1.
Press [Yes] or [No] and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Break Point[Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This tax contains break points.
No: This is a flat rate tax.
Steps:

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
(Tax Name) On Tax1[Y/N]

Note:
If the Canadian GST parameter is set to Y in the Manager >

Configuration > Sales Config function, (Tax Name) On Tax1 appears for
taxes 2, 3, and 4.
Description: Determines whether tax is collected on tax 1.

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This tax is collected on tax 1.
No: This tax is not collected on tax 1.
Steps:

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.

Note:

taxes 3 and 4.

Values:

Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
3-98 Manager

Note:

tax 4.

Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Percent

Description: Tax percent rate. This only applies to flat rate taxes and some break point
taxes if a percentage is applied above the tax table limit.
Values:
Numeric, 0.000 - 99.999.
Steps:

1.
Key the percent and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter within
the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Percent Start

Note:
This parameter appears when the BP table for all amounts parameter is
set to Y. It only applies to flat rate taxes and break point taxes which use a
percentage above the table limit.
Description: The minimum dollar amount that may be taxed.

Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the beginning dollar amount including two decimal places (cents)
and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Min taxable amt

Note:
This parameter only applies to break point taxes.
Description: The minimum dollar amount that may be taxed.

Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 999.99.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-99
Steps:

1.
Key the dollar amount including two decimal places (cents) and press
[ENTER] to go to the next parameter within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) BP table for all amounts[Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The break point table applies to all taxable amounts.
No: A percentage is used over the tax table limit.
Steps:

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Percent Start

Note:
This parameter only applies to break point taxes when the BP table for all
amounts parameter is set to N.
Description: Dollar amount at which the break point does not apply and a straight percent
is used.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 99999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the dollar amount including two decimal places (cents) and press
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Break Point nnn

Note:
Note:
The Break Point nnn and Tax Increment nnn parameters repeat until
an asterisk (*) is entered for the Break Point nnn parameter.
Description: The dollar amount difference, in cents, between the beginning and ending of
this specific break point. The nnn is the number of the break point/tax
increment combination.
Values:
October 4, 2002
Numeric, 1 - 999.
3-100 Manager
Steps:

1.
Key the break in cents and press [ENTER] to go to the Tax Increment
nnn parameter for this break point.
2.
Key [*] [ENTER] to end the break point table and go to the Repeat
Start parameter.
3.
(Tax Name) Tax Increment nnn

Note:
Note:
The Tax Increment nnn and Break Point nnn parameters repeat until an
asterisk (*) is entered for the Break Point nnn parameter.
Description: Dollar amount, in cents, that the tax is incremented for the break point. The
nnn is the number of the break point/tax increment combination.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 999.
Steps:

1.
Key the tax increment in cents (usually one cent) and press [ENTER] to
go to the next Break Point nnn parameter (to enter the next break
point).
2.
(Tax Name) Repeat Start

Note:
Description: The number of the first break point (nnn) in the repeating pattern.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the break point number that starts the repeating section and press
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Repeat End

Note:
Description: The number of the last break point (nnn) in the repeating pattern.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the break point number that ends the repeating section and press
2.

changes.
3.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-101
(Tax Name) Reg. #:

Note:
This parameter appears if the Canadian GST parameter is set to Y in

the Manager > Configuration > Sales Config function.
Description: Canadian GST ID (registration) number. This number prints on all receipts.
Values:
Numeric, up to 17 characters in length. Enter an [*] as the first number to

delete the registration number.
Steps:

1.
Key number and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter within the
tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Prompt for Exemption[Y/N]

Description: Determines whether pressing the [TAX EXEMPT] key causes the Ruby
terminal to prompt the cashier to verify whether this tax is to be removed. If
an item has more than one tax applied to it, the terminal prompts the cashier
to choose which taxes to remove.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: When the cashier presses the [TAX EXEMPT] key, a prompt appears
asking the cashier to verify whether this tax is to be removed.
No: When the cashier presses the [TAX EXEMPT] key, the terminal
automatically removes this tax.
Steps:

1.

within the tax.
2.

changes.
3.
(Tax Name) Fuel Includes Tax[Y/N]

Note:
This parameter appears if the Canadian GST parameter is set to Y in

the Manager > Configuration > Sales Config function.
Description: Determines whether the fuel price includes tax.

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This fuel price includes tax.
No: This fuel price does not include tax.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
Press [Yes] or [No] and press [ENTER] to go to the first parameter

within the tax.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the first parameter in the tax without making

changes.
3.
3-102 Manager

Manager menu.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-103
Break Points vs. Flat Rate

Most break point tax tables are based on a percentage. In fact, some tax tables are merely a
flat rate rounded to the nearest cent. If this is the case for your tax table, you may be able
to define the tax as a flat rate.
To find out if your tax table is a flat rate rounded to the nearest cent, find out the
percentage on which the tax is based and define the tax as a flat rate tax.
After you have defined the flat rate tax, list the tax table.
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
3. Press [List].
TAX FILE
Sample Tax File Listing
NBR NAME
PRT
INC
BP
ON1
ON2
ON3
PEX
FIN
RATE
START PIBOOOPF
PERAMT. RNPNNNEI
CENT
TC 123XN
---------------------------------------1 FLORIDA
7.000 100.00 TNY---NN
2 NOT DEFINED
3 NOT DEFINED
4 NOT DEFINED
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Indicator
Price Includes Tax
Break Point
GST on Tax 1
GST on Tax 2
GST on Tax 3
Prompt for Exemption
Fuel Indicates Tax
BREAK POINT ENTRIES FOR TAX 1

NO. ENTRY TAX-INCREMENT
----------------------1
4
1
2
13
0
3
14
1
4
14
1
REPEAT START: 1
REPEAT END:
7
Min taxable Amount:
0.10
Apply BP table for all amounts: N
LIST THE ACTUAL TABLE(Y/N)? _

COULD TAKE SEVERAL MINUTES
4. Press [No] to exit the List function OR press [Yes] to print a list of the first 50
increments and calculated tax for each tax defined. Messages are displayed to
show you the progress of the calculations.
October 4, 2002
3-104 Manager
Note:
The Ruby terminal stops printing tax break point entries when it reaches
a value of zero.
PRINTING TAX TABLE

COMPUTING TAX FOR
9.99
TAX TABLE FOR TAX 1

NO.
START
END
TAX
--------------------------1
0.00
0.09
0.00
2
0.10
0.28
0.01
3
0.29
0.43
0.02
4
0.44
0.58
0.03
5
0.59
0.72
0.05
6
0.73
0.96
0.06
7
0.97
1.15
0.07
8
1.16
1.30
0.08
9
1.31
1.45
0.09
10
1.46
1.59
0.11
etc. to 50 entries
Sample Tax File Actual Table

Listing
5. Compare the Actual Table listing to your tax table. If the tables match, your tax
table is a straight percent in table form and you may use the flat rate definition. If
the tables do not match, refer to Determining Break Points.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-105
Flat Rate Tax Steps

Use this procedure to define a flat rate tax that is not a Canadian GST tax (Canadian
GST parameter set to N in Sales Configuration). Refer to Tax Rate File Steps:
General for detailed information on each parameter.
Note:
Refer to Break Point vs. Flat Rate to decide if your tax table can be
entered as a flat rate.
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired tax (TAX1, TAX2, TAX3, or TAX4) appears.
(TAX1 is used in these steps.)
4. Key the name of the tax (1 - 10 characters) and press[ENTER]. (In this example
the tax name FLAT is used.)
FLAT
Indicator _
5. Key the letter, number, or symbol which identifies the tax and press[ENTER].
FLAT
Price Includes Tax[Y/N] _
6. Press [Yes] or [No] and then press [ENTER].

FLAT
Break Point[Y/N] _
7. Key [No][ENTER].
FLAT
October 4, 2002
Percent
9.999
0.000
3-106 Manager
8. Key the tax percentage rate, including three decimal places, and press [ENTER].
(For example, if the percentage rate is 7.5%, key[7][5][0][0][ENTER].)
FLAT
Percent Start
9.99
0.00
9. Key the dollar amount below which tax will not be applied and press [ENTER].
(For example, if tax begins at 10 cents, key [1][0][ENTER].)
FLAT Prompt for Exemption[Y/N] _

TAX1 Name FLAT
11. Repeat steps 3 through 10 for the next flat rate tax OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Manager menu.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-107
Flat Rate Tax with Canadian GST Steps

Use this procedure to define a flat rate tax when Canadian GST is to be collected
(Canadian GST is set to Y in Sales Configuration). Refer to Tax Rate File Steps:
Note:
Refer to Break Point vs. Flat Rate to decide if your tax table can be
entered as a flat rate.
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
4. Key the name of the tax (1 - 10 characters) and press[ENTER]. (In this example
the tax name FLAT is used.)
FLAT
Indicator _
5. Key the letter, number, or symbol which identifies the tax and press[ENTER].
FLAT

FLAT
Break Point[Y/N] _
7. Key [No][ENTER].
8. This step depends on the tax number you are setting up.
If you are setting up tax record number 1, then go to step 10.
October 4, 2002
3-108 Manager
If you are setting up tax system record number 2, 3, or 4, then the following
displays.
FLAT
On Tax n [Y/N] _
9. Repeat this step for each lower-numbered tax (record number) than the one you are
defining.
If the tax you are defining should be collected on the tax shown on the display,
key [Yes][ENTER].
If the tax you are defining should not be collected on the tax shown on the
display, key [No][ENTER].
10. The following prompt displays.
FLAT
Percent
9.999
0.000
11. Key the tax percentage rate, including three decimal places, and press [ENTER].
(For example, if the percentage rate is 7.5%, key [7][5][0][0][ENTER].)
FLAT
Percent Start
9.99
0.00
(For example, if tax begins at 10 cents, key[1][0][ENTER].)
FLAT Reg.#: _
13. Enter the registration number and press [ENTER].

FLAT Prompt for Exemption[Y/N] _

FLAT Fuel Includes Tax[Y/N] _
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-109

TAX1 Name FLAT
16. Repeat steps 3 through 15 for the next flat rate tax OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Manager menu.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-110 Manager
Break Point Tax Steps

Use this section to define a break point tax table that is not a Canadian GST tax
(Canadian GST parameter set to N in Sales Configuration). Refer to Tax Rate File
Steps: General for detailed information on each parameter.
To define a break point tax, first gather the following information:
Starting point
Various tax break points and their repeating pattern
Limit of the published tax table
Tax rate to apply above the limit
Refer to Determining Break Points.

These steps assume that you have already defined your break point tax table on paper.
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
4. Key the name of the tax (1 - 10 characters) and press [ENTER]. (In this example
the tax name BREAK is used.)
BREAK
Indicator _
5. Key the letter, number, or symbol which identifies the tax and press [ENTER].
BREAK
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-111

BREAK
Break Point[Y/N] _
7. Key [Yes][ENTER].
BREAK
Percent
9.999
0.000
8. If a percentage is used over the table limit, key the tax percentage rate, including
three decimal places, and press [ENTER]. (For example, if the percentage is
7.5%, key [7][5][0][0][ENTER].)
BREAK
Min taxable amt
9.99
0.00
BREAK
BP table for all amounts[Y/N] _
10. Determine if a percentage is used for taxes above the table limit.
Key [Yes][ENTER] if all taxable amounts are defined within the break point
table. Go to step 12.
Key [No][ENTER] if a percent is used above the tax table limit.
BREAK
Percent Start
999.99
0.00
11. Key the dollar amount which is the upper limit of the tax table, including two
decimal places, and press [ENTER]. (For example, if the upper limit is $100.00,
key [1][0][0][0][0][ENTER].)
12. The following appears. (Break point numbers nnn start at 001 and go up to
099.)
BREAK
October 4, 2002
Break Point nnn _
3-112 Manager

Key [*] to end the break point/tax increment cycle. Go to step 15.
Key the difference, in cents, between the this break point and the last break
point. For example, if this break point is $2.17 and the last break point was
$2.11 (a difference of six cents), key [6][ENTER].
BREAK
Tax Increment nnn _
14. Key the amount the tax increases in cents (usually one cent) and press [ENTER].
Repeat steps 12 through 14 until all break points are entered.
15. The following appears.
BREAK
Repeat Start _
16. Key the number of the break point where the pattern begins and press [ENTER].
BREAK
Repeat End _
17. Key the number of the break point where the pattern ends and press [ENTER].
BREAK Prompt for Exemption[Y/N] _

TAX1 Name BREAK
19. Repeat steps 3 through 18 for the next break point tax OR press [EXIT] to return
to the Manager menu.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-113
Break Point Tax with Canadian GST Steps

Use this section to define a break point tax table when Canadian GST is to be collected
(Canadian GST is set to Y in Sales Configuration). Refer to Tax Rate File Steps:
To define a break point tax, first gather the following information:
Starting point
Various tax break points and their repeating pattern
Limit of the published tax table
Tax rate to apply above the limit
Refer to Determining Break Points.

These steps assume that you have already defined your break point tax table on paper.
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired tax (TAX1, TAX2, TAX3, or TAX4)
displays. (TAX1 is used in these steps.)
4. Key the name of the tax (1 - 10 characters) and press [ENTER]. (In this example
the tax name BREAK is used.)
BREAK
Indicator _
5. Key the letter, number, or symbol which identifies the tax and press [ENTER].
BREAK
October 4, 2002
3-114 Manager

BREAK
Break Point[Y/N] _
8. This step depends on the tax number you are setting up.
If you are setting up tax system record number 1, then go to step 10.
If you are setting up tax system record number 2, 3, or 4, then the following
displays.
BREAK
On Taxn[Y/N] _
9. Repeat this step for each lower-numbered tax (system record number) than the one
you are defining.
If the tax you are defining should be collected on the tax shown on the display,
key [Yes][ENTER].
If the tax you are defining should not be collected on the tax shown on the
display, key [No][ENTER].
10. The following prompt displays.
BREAK
Percent
9.999
0.000
11. If a percentage is used over the table limit, key the tax percentage rate, including
three decimal places, and press [ENTER]. (For example, if the percentage is
7.5%, key [7][5][0][0][ENTER].)
BREAK
Min taxable amt
9.99
0.00
BREAK
BP table for all amounts[Y/N] _
13. Determine if a percentage is used for taxes above the table limit.
Key [Yes][ENTER] if all taxable amounts are defined within the break point
table. Go to step 15.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-115
Key [No][ENTER] if a percent is used above the tax table limit.

BREAK
Percent Start
999.99
0.00
14. Key the dollar amount which is the upper limit of the tax table, including two
decimal places, and press [ENTER]. (For example, if the upper limit is $100.00,
key [1][0][0][0][0][ENTER].)
15. The following appears. (Break point numbers nnn start at 001 and go up to
100.)
BREAK
Break Point nnn _

Key [*] to end the break point/tax increment cycle. Go to step 18.
Key the difference, in cents, between the this break point and the last break
point. For example, if this break point is $2.17 and the last break point was
$2.11 (a difference of six cents), key [6][ENTER].
BREAK
Tax Increment nnn _
17. Key the amount the tax increases in cents (usually one cent) and press [ENTER].
Repeat steps 15 through 17 until all break points are entered.
18. The following appears.
BREAK
Repeat Start _
19. Key the number of the break point where the pattern begins and press [ENTER].
BREAK
Repeat End _
20. Key the number of the break point where the pattern ends and press [ENTER].
BREAK Reg.#: _
October 4, 2002
3-116 Manager
21. Enter the registration number and press [ENTER].

BREAK Prompt for Exemption[Y/N] _

BREAK Fuel Includes Tax[Y/N] _

TAX1 Name FLAT
24. Repeat steps 3 through 23 for the next break point tax OR press [EXIT] to return
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-117
Determining Break Points

This section uses an example to demonstrate a method for determining and entering break
points.
The following tax table for the County Tax cannot be defined as a flat rate tax and is
used in the example.
Sample County Retail Sales Tax
Sale
Tax
Sale
Tax
Sale
Tax
Sale
Tax
.00 - .10
.00
2.51 - 2.67
.16
5.18 - 5.34
.32
7.85 - 8.10
.48
.11 - .17
.01
2.68 - 2.84
.17
5.35 - 5.50
.33
8.11 - 8.17
.49
.18 - .34
.02
2.85 - 3.10
.18
5.51 - 5.67
.34
8.18 - 8.34
.50
.35 - .50
.03
3.11 - 3.17
.19
5.68 - 5.84
.35
8.35 - 8.50
.51
.51 - .67
.04
3.18 - 3.34
.20
5.85 - 6.10
.36
8.51 - 8.67
.52
.68 - .84
.05
3.35 - 3.50
.21
6.11 - 6.17
.37
8.68 - 8.84
.53
.85 - 1.10
.06
3.51 - 3.67
.22
6.18 - 6.34
.38
8.85 - 9.10
.54
1.11 - 1.17
.07
3.68 - 3.84
.23
6.35 - 6.50
.39
9.11 - 9.17
.55
1.18 - 1.34
.08
3.85 - 4.10
.24
6.51 - 6.67
.40
9.18 - 9.34
.56
1.35 - 1.50
.09
4.11 - 4.17
.25
6.68 - 6.84
.41
9.35 - 9.50
.57
1.51 - 1.67
.10
4.18 - 4.34
.26
6.85 - 7.10
.42
9.51 - 9.67
.58
1.68 - 1.84
.11
4.35 - 4.50
.27
7.11 - 7.17
.43
9.68 - 9.84
.59
1.85 - 2.10
.12
4.51 - 4.67
.28
7.18 - 7.34
.44
9.85 - 10.00
.60
2.11 - 2.17
.13
4.68 - 4.84
.29
7.34 - 7.50
.45
2.18 - 2.34
.14
4.85 - 5.10
.30
7.51 - 7.67
.46
2.35 - 2.50
.15
5.11 - 5.17
.31
7.68 - 7.84
.47
Use 6% above $10.00.
A Break Point Tax Table worksheet is included on the following page. (Copy the
worksheet as needed.)
Complete the worksheet for the first 20 break points in the County tax table. Then refer to
the completed example on the page following the worksheet.
Note that the first entry in the tax table (.00 - .10) has a tax of .00, so increment
number 1 starts at 11 cents and ends at 17 cents. The difference is 17 minus 11
which is six cents. The tax increment is one cent.
Look for a repeating pattern of differences and increments. If there is one, you can
define the table for just the first repeating section instead of the whole table.
October 4, 2002
3-118 Manager
Break Point Tax Table Worksheet

Break Point Tax Table Worksheet
Number
Start
End
Difference
Increment
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-119
Example: Break Point Tax Table Worksheet for County Tax

County Break Point Tax Table Worksheet
Number
Start
End
Difference
Increment
.11
.17
.18
.34
16
.35
.50
15
.51
.67
16
.68
.84
16
.85
1.10
25
1.11
1.17
1.18
1.34
16
1.35
1.50
15
10
1.51
1.67
16
11
1.68
1.84
16
12
1.85
2.10
25
13
14
15
Without completing the entire worksheet, you can see that a pattern repeats every six
increments: increments 7 through 12 (the difference and the increment) are exactly the
same as increments 1 through 6. Therefore, only the first six increments need to be
defined.
Entering the Example Break Point Tax
These steps show how to enter the example break point table. In addition to the break
points listed above, the following information is important:
Name: County
Indicator: C
Price includes tax: No
On Taxn: Tax 1 does not use GST tax
Percent (rate used above the table limit): 6.00
Percent start: 10.01
Minimum taxable amount: 0.11
October 4, 2002
3-120 Manager
appears.
9. TAX RATE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
TAX1 Name _
3. Key [C][O][U][N][T][Y][ENTER].
COUNTY Indicator _
4. Key [C][ENTER].
COUNTY Price Includes Tax[Y/N] _
5. Key [No] [ENTER].

COUNTY Break Point[Y/N] _
COUNTY Percent
9.999
0.000
7. Key [6][0][0][0][ENTER].
COUNTY Min taxable amt
9.99
0.00
8. Key [1][0][ENTER].
COUNTY BP table for all amounts[Y/N] _
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-121
9. Key [No][ENTER] since a percent is used above the tax table limit.
COUNTY Percent Start
999.99
0.00
10. Key [1][0][0][1][ENTER].

COUNTY Break Point 001 0
11. Key [6][ENTER] which is the difference for break point 1.

COUNTY Tax Increment 001 0
12. Key [1][ENTER].

13. Key [1][6][ENTER]which is the difference for break point 2.

14. Key [1][ENTER].


16. Key [1][ENTER].

October 4, 2002
3-122 Manager

18. Key [1][ENTER].


20. Key [1][ENTER].

21. Key [2][5][ENTER] which is the difference for break point 6.

22. Key [1][ENTER].

23. Key [*][ENTER].

COUNTY Repeat Start 0
24. Key [1][ENTER] for the point at which the pattern starts.
COUNTY Repeat End 0
October 4, 2002
25. Key [6][ENTER] for the point at which the pattern ends.
COUNTY Prompt for Exemption[Y/N] _

TAX1 Name COUNTY
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-123
3-124 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Tax Rate File function, press [List] to print the current tax information.
1. Press [List].
TAX FILE
Sample Tax File Listing
NBR NAME
PRT
INC
BP
ON1
ON2
ON3
PEX
FIN
RATE
START PIBOOOPF
PERAMT. RNPNNNEI
CENT
TC 123XN
---------------------------------------1 FLORIDA
7.000 100.00 TNY---NN
2 NOT DEFINED
3 NOT DEFINED
4 NOT DEFINED
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Indicator
Price Includes Tax
Break Point
GST on Tax 1
GST on Tax 2
GST on Tax 3
Prompt for Exemption
Fuel Includes Tax
BREAK POINT ENTRIES FOR TAX 1

NO. ENTRY TAX-INCREMENT
----------------------1
4
1
2
13
0
3
14
1
4
14
1
REPEAT START: 1
REPEAT END:
7
Min taxable Amount:
0.10
Apply BP table for all amounts: N
LIST THE ACTUAL TABLE(Y/N)? _

COULD TAKE SEVERAL MINUTES
2. Press [No] to exit the List function OR press [Yes] to print a list of the first 50
increments and calculated tax for each tax defined. Messages are displayed to
show you the progress of the calculations.
PRINTING TAX TABLE
COMPUTING TAX FOR
9.99
TAX TABLE FOR TAX 1

NO.
START
END
TAX
--------------------------1
0.00
0.09
0.00
2
0.10
0.28
0.01
3
0.29
0.43
0.02
4
0.44
0.58
0.03
5
0.59
0.72
0.05
6
0.73
0.96
0.06
7
0.97
1.15
0.07
8
1.16
1.30
0.08
9
1.31
1.45
0.09
10
1.46
1.59
0.11
etc. to 50 entries
Sample Tax File Actual Table

Listing
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-125
Fee/Charge File
3
The Fee/Charge File contains a description of up to 50 fee/charge types. Use this function
to add an additional charge (for example, bottle deposits) to an item or a department.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating fee/charge definitions.
Combo File
Any fee or charge for a combo must be defined in the Combo File. Separate PLU fees or
charges are ignored.
Department File
You must create a department in the Department File for fees/charges before setting up
fee/charge types in this file. The Negative Department ? parameter in the Department
File determines if the fee/charge is positive or negative.
Positive fees may be attached to departments by assigning a fee number from the Fee/
Charge File to the Fee/Charge Type# parameter. However, if the Negative
Department ? parameter is set to Y, do not assign a fee to the department. For example,
if your site adds a bottle deposit fee when selling sodas, you could set up a department for
sodas and attach the corresponding fee type. However, to process refunds for returned
empty bottles, set up a Bottle Return Department with the Negative Department ?
parameter set to Y and the Fee/Charge Type# set to 0. Both bottle deposits and
returns would appear in the Department Report.
Mix and Match Files
Fees or charges for separate PLUs are set in the PLU File. There is no method for
discounting a fee or charge for a PLU.
PLU File
Make a list of the of items which have an associated fee/charge. These fee/charge types
can be assigned to PLU items using the Fee/Charge Type parameter in the PLU File.
When the PLU item is sold, the fee/charge is automatically added to the transaction.
The fee/charge type applied to a PLU item overrides a department fee/charge type.
Refunding Fees
In the Fee/Charge File, check that the Refundable parameter matches the policy at your
site.
October 4, 2002
3-126 Manager
Setting Single and Multiple Fees

If you want to charge the same fee for all items in a department, such as a disposal fee for
tires, leave the Range 1 end amount parameter set at its usual value of $999.99 and set
the Range 1 fee parameter to the desired amount.
Some items, such as money orders, lend themselves to setting fees that are charged based
on the amount of the item.
1. Set up the department in the Department File.
2. Set up a single fee number and name, such as M.O. Fee, Assign the same
department number which you set up in the Department File, usually 9031.
3. The Range n end amount parameters establish the ranges for the fees. Do one of
the following:
If you want to charge one fee for all items in a department, leave the Range 1
end amount at its usual value of $999.99. Set the Range 1 fee to the
amount you want.
If you want to charge different fees for items in a department which cost
different amounts, set the Range 1 end amount and Range 1 fee then repeat
these steps for up to four more ranges.
Note:
While you can set a fee for the fifth range, no parameter appears for
a range 5 end amount. Range 5 has a preset value of $.01 more than
the Range 4 end amount through the maximum for the department.
An example for setting up a range of fees is:
For money orders of $0.01 - $10.00 with a 50-cent fee, set the Range 1 end
amount to 10.00 and the Range 1 fee to 0.50.
For money orders of $10.01 - $25.00 with a one-dollar fee, set the Range 2 end
For money orders of $25.01 - $50.00 with a two-dollar fee, set the Range 3 end
For money orders of $50.01 - $75.00 with a three-dollar fee, set the Range 4 end
For money orders of $75.01 and above with a five-dollar fee, set the Range 5 fee
to 5.00.
Note:
The amount printed on the money order does not include the fee.
Taxes
Taxes can be applied to a fee/charge department by assigning a tax type in the Department
File.
If a fee/charge is applied to a PLU which is taxed, then the same taxes apply to the fee/
charge. If a fee/charge is applied to a department which is taxed, then the same taxes apply
to the fee/charge.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-127
Fee/Charge File Steps

Use these steps to choose the Fee/Charge File function and make changes to the
information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Fee/Charge File
function appears.
10. FEE/CHARGE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
FEE01 Name SMALL
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired fee/charge system record number appears
OR key the fee/charge number (1 - 50) and press [Select].
4. Enter the indicated information for each parameter. The variable nn in each
parameter represents the current system record number.
FEEnn Name
Description: Descriptive name of the fee/charge type.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the fee/charge description and press [ENTER] to go to the next

parameter within the fee/charge.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter without making any

changes.
3.
Press [-->] to go to the next fee/charge system record number.
FEEnn Dept#
Description: The department in which fee/charge transactions are assigned for report
totals.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9999.
Steps:

1.
Key the fee/charge department and press [ENTER] to go back to the

first parameter within the fee/charge file.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go back to the first parameter without making any

changes.
3.
3-128 Manager
FEEnn Refundable? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether the fee is refunded with the cost of the item when it is
returned.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.

within the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.
FEEnn Range 1 end amount ddd.cc

Description: Determines the highest cost for items for which the Range 1 fee will be
charged.
Note:
The default value for this parameter is '$999.99' and the maximum value is
$9999.99. If you reset it to $9999.99, two things occur: (1) all items in
this department are assessed the "Range 1 fee" and (2) you will not be able
to set the "Range 2 end amount."
Values:
0.00 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the value and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter within
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.
FEEnn Range 1 fee d.cc

Description: Items sold in this department will be charged this fee when they cost no
more than the Range 1 end amount.
Values:
$0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

charged. This parameter must be set at least $0.01 higher than the Range 1
end amount.
Note:
If you do not enter a value for the Range 2 end amount, the parameters
for ranges 3, 4, and 5 do not display.
Values:
At least $0.01 > the Range 1 end amount through $9999.99.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-129
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

Values:
$0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

end amount.
Note:
If you do not enter a value for the Range 2 end amount this and the rest of
the parameters for this fee do not display.
Values:
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

October 4, 2002
Note:
Values:
$0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.
3-130 Manager

end amount.
Note:
Values:
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

Note:
Values:
$0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
the fee/charge.
2.

changes.
3.

Description: Items sold in this department will be charged this fee when they cost more
than the Range 4 end amount.
Note:
Values:
$0.00 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the value and press [ENTER] to go back to the first parameter
within the fee/charge file.
2.
Press [ENTER] to go back to the first parameter without making any

changes.
3.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-131

Manager menu.
10. FEE/CHARGE FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-132 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Fee/Charge File function, press [List] to print a list of all fees/charges that
have been set up.
Sample Fee/Charge File Listing
10/04/02
FEE/CHARGE FILE
10:07
NBR FEE
DESCR
DEPT# REFUND
RANGE END
AMOUNT
-------------------------------------001 BTL DEP
9032
Y
999.99
10.00
002 6PK. DEP
9032
Y
999.99
0.30
003 ADF
9036
Y
999.99
0.01
004 M.O. FEE
9031
N
10.00
0.50
25.00
1.00
50.00
2.00
75.00
3.00
125.00
5.00
005 CS DEP
9032
Y
999.99
1.20
.
Money Orders Charged with Varying

Fees Based on Amount
Delete a Fee/Charge Record

1. Key the fee/charge record number you want to delete.
2. Press [Select].
3. Key [*] [ENTER]. All information within the fee/charge record is deleted.
Fee/Charge File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Fee/Charge file for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
1. Make copies of the Fee/Charge File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Follow the steps in the Fee/Charge File Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-133
Fee/Charge File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Fee # and Name:

Department #
Range 3 end amount
Refundable
Range 3 fee
Range 1 end amount
Range 4 end amount
Range 1 fee
Range 4 fee
Range 2 end amount
Range 5 fee
Range 2 fee
Fee # and Name:
Department #
Range 3 end amount
Refundable
Range 3 fee
Range 1 end amount
Range 4 end amount
Range 1 fee
Range 4 fee
Range 2 end amount
Range 5 fee
Range 2 fee
Fee # and Name:
Department #
Range 3 end amount
Refundable
Range 3 fee
Range 1 end amount
Range 4 end amount
Range 1 fee
Range 4 fee
Range 2 end amount
Range 5 fee
Range 2 fee
Fee # and Name:
Department #
Range 3 end amount
Refundable
Range 3 fee
Range 1 end amount
Range 4 end amount
Range 1 fee
Range 4 fee
Range 2 end amount
Range 5 fee
Range 2 fee
October 4, 2002
Value
3-134 Manager
Category File
3
The Category File contains a description of up to 50 categories.

Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating category definitions.
Category File
Decide if you need to keep totals by category. If you do not want to keep totals by
category, you do not need to define categories.
Department File
Departments may be grouped into categories for reporting purposes.
For example, you may have a deli department, a dairy department, and a snack
department. All of these can be grouped into a category such as Food to show a higher
level of totals on reports.
If you use categories, make sure you assign every department to a category. If you do not
assign every department to a category, then the totals on the Category report and
Department report do not match.
Report Configuration
If you do not use categories, set the Print Category Report parameter to N in each
period (Shift, Daily, Monthly, and Yearly) in the Report Configuration function in Reports
mode. This prevents a blank report from being printed.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-135
Category File Steps

Use these steps to choose the Category File function and make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Category File function
appears.
11. CATEGORY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Category # 1
3.
Choose a category to define by one of the following methods:
Press the arrow keys until the desired existing category system number
appears.
Key an existing category number (1 - 9999) and press [Select]. If the
category exists, it appears. If it does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER
appears briefly. Choose another category number.
Key a new category number (1 - 9999) and press [ENTER]. If the category
does not exist, it is created and displayed. If it already exists, E3003
RECORD ALREADY EXISTS appears briefly. Choose another category
number.
4. Press [ENTER].
Cat Desc _
5. Key the category description (up to 16 characters) and press [ENTER].

6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to set up another category OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Manager menu.
11. CATEGORY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-136 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Category File function, press [List] to print a list of all categories that
have been set up.
Sample Category File Listing
10/04/02
CATEGORY FILE
10:07
NBR NAME
-------------------------------------0001 FOOD
0002 AUTO PARTS
0003 BEER
0004 CANDY
0005 DELI
0006 FOUNTAIN
0007 LOTTO
0008 MISC.
0009 MONEY ORDER
0010 SODA
0011 TOBACCO
0012 PLU NOT FOUND
0014 FUEL
0015 BTL. DEPOSIT
0016 BTL. RETURN
0017 DAIRY
0018 FAST FOOD
0019 HEALTH
9999 FUEL DEPOSIT
Delete a Category Record

1. Key the user record identifier number to delete.
2. Press [Select].
3. The Ruby terminal attempts to find the record.
If the category record does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER displays
briefly and the Ruby terminal beeps once. Choose another record number.
If the record exists, it displays.
4. Key [*] [ENTER]. The record number and all information within it is deleted.
Category File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Category File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
1. Copy the Category File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Follow the steps in the Category File Steps section to enter the information into
the system.
3. If you used a copy of the worksheet, put it in the pocket at the back of the binder
for future reference.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-137
Category File Worksheet

Cat. #
October 4, 2002
Description
Cat. #
Description
3-138 Manager
Department File
3
The Department File contains a description of up to 100 departments. A department may

have no PLUs or may consist of a group of PLUs. Every PLU that is assigned to a
department is included in the report totals for that department.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating departments.
Blue Laws
If purchase of an item is prohibited during specific periods, the days and times must be
entered in the Blue Law Setup File. Set the Apply Blue Law - 1 parameter to Y in the
Department File. If it is needed, also set the Apply Blue Law - 2 parameter to Y.
Car Wash Department Setup
If you have the car wash option, set up a department for car wash sales in the Department
File. Set the Car wash department number parameter in Department Setup in the Car
Wash Manager mode to the same number.
Category File
If you want to use categories, the Category file must be set up before the Department file.
Deleting or Changing Departments
Once a department has been defined and used, it should not be deleted or changed unless
all the PLU items, PLU promotion items, and PLU soft keys which use that department
have been deleted or reassigned to an existing department and a report has been run and
totals closed.
Fee/Charge File
To report totals for fees, set up a department for each. Set the Negative Department ?
parameter to N if the fee should be added to a transaction. Set the same parameter to Y
if the fee should be subtracted. For example, if your site gives cash for returned bottles, set
up a Bottle Return Department with the Negative Department ? parameter set to Y.
The Negative Department ? parameter in each department record indicates whether the
amount transacted against this department adds or subtracts from report totals. A positive
department (Negative Department ? = N) adds the transaction to report totals. A
negative department (Negative Department ? = Y) subtracts the transaction from
report totals.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-139
Positive fees may be attached to departments by assigning a fee number from the Fee/
Charge File to the Fee/Charge Type# parameter. However, if you set the Negative
Department ? parameter to Y, do not assign a fee to the department.
Fractional Quantities
To sell specific department-keyed items by weight (e.g., sliced cheese in a deli) and
specific PLU-keyed items as units (e.g., packets of cheese), set the following parameters
for the items:
Manager > Dept File > Sold by fractional quantity to Y.
Manager > PLU File > Sold by fractional quantity to N.

To sell all items of a designated type by weight, whether keyed with a PLU key, PLU
number, department key, or department number, set the following parameters for the
designated items:

Manager > PLU File > Sold by fractional quantity to Y.
Note:
If Sold by fractional quantity is set to Y in the PLU File, Sold by

fractional quantity must be set to Y in the Department File. If it is not,
then the Ruby terminal reads a quantity keyed for a PLU as a whole
number, not as a decimal.
Note:
Department items sold in fractional quantities cannot be sold using at-for

pricing.
Fuel Deposit/Prepay Fuel Sale

The department number 9999 has been predefined as a fuel deposit department and cannot
be selected to change or delete. When a customer prepays for a fuel sale, that sale
automatically goes into department 9999. When the customer finishes dispensing fuel, the
sale moves to the department of the product dispensed. This allows you to see prepay fuel
sales on the period reports at the time of a close.
ID Checking
Note:
The ability to check an ID by swiping or scanning is an optional feature

called EASY ID. This option may require that your Ruby terminal have a Ruby
Card with this feature installed. If you do not have the EASY ID option, then
you may enter the birth date manually.
Sale of some products is restricted by age. To trigger ID checking during a transaction, set
the parameters in the Customer ID Info function then set the ID (n) Required parameters
in the Department File. When set up properly, the Ruby terminal requests birth date
information be provided prior to sale of these products. When Manager > Configuration
> Sales Config > 46. Force DOB on ID Check? [Y/N] is set to Y, the Ruby terminal
beeps and displays a message alerting the cashier that an ID check is pending. The Ruby
terminal rejects further entries until the date of birth is entered.
October 4, 2002
3-140 Manager
Three methods exist for the cashier to enter the birth date:
Key the birth date manually.
Swipe the magnetic stripe on a drivers license.
Scan the 2D bar code on a drivers license. Scanning can take place only when the
Ruby terminal is properly configured and an appropriate scanner is installed.
Note:
EASY ID is not a replacement for visually checking the identification to make

sure it is legal and valid.
Local Laws
Consult local laws before setting up the following parameters:
Apply blue law
ID required
Food stamps
Tax
Money Order Departments
Note:
Using the Ruby terminal to sell and print money orders with third-party
equipment is an optional feature which requires both a Ruby Card with the
Money Order option and specific software code. If you do not have the Ruby
Card or software code in your Ruby terminal, then the references to money
order equipment do not apply to your system.
The sale of a money order is the same as a department sale. Each money order is
purchased and processed as a separate line item. Similar to the Negative Department ?
and Fuel Department parameters, the Money Order Department? parameter identifies
the department as one for which money orders may be named.
A range of fees may be charged for different money order amounts. Refer to the Fee/
Charge File function discussion for information on setting up these fees. If you want to
expand the range beyond the five permitted for each fee, set up two or more money order
departments and assign different fees to them.
Money orders may be set up to print to a third-party printer through a money order
terminal, which is connected to a Ruby controller. Do not connect the money order printer
to a Ruby workstation.
To configure the Ruby terminal to allow money order sales, set the following parameters
in the Manager mode:
1. In the MOP File, select the MOPs and set the Allow Money Order Purchase?
parameter to Y.
2. In the Department File:
a. Set up a department for selling money orders by entering a department number
and name. The usual settings are MONEY ORDERS and 9030.
b. Set the Negative Department? parameter to N.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-141
c. Set the Money Order Department? parameter to Y.

3. Also, in the Department File:
a. Set up a department for money order fees by entering a department number and
name. The usual settings are M.O. FEE and 9031.
b. Set the Negative Department ? parameter to N.
c. Set the Money Order Department? parameter to N, since this is for
assessing a fee, not for selling a money order.
4. Set up a fee in the Fee/Charge File to associate a fee to a money order department.
a. Assign a fee number and name, such as M.O. FEE.
b. Assign the same department which you used in step 3. In this case, use 9031.
c. Check that the Refundable parameter matches the policy at your site.
d. If you want to charge one fee for all items in a department, leave the Range 1
end amount at its usual value of $999.99. Set the Range 1 fee to the
amount you want.
e. If you want to charge different fees for items in a department which cost
different amounts, set the Range 1 end amount and Range 1 fee then repeat
these steps for up to four more ranges.
PLU Not Found Department #
If you set the PLU Not Found Department # parameter in the Sales Configuration file to
a number other than 0, then you must also create a PLU not found department with the
same number in the Department File.
Product Department Setup
Fuel department files must be set up in the Department File before setting up fuel
departments in Fuel Manager mode. Use the same department numbers in the Product
Department Setup function as you set up in the Department File.
Soft Keys
Consider which departments you assign to department soft keys and make a note of them.
Set up an [OTHER DEPT] key in the Soft Key File to sell items that do not have a
department key assigned to them.
VeriPASS
A department that is set up to participate in a VeriPASS program includes all PLUs
assigned to that department.
The VeriPASS Loyalty program requires that the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE?
parameter in the selected Department File is set to Y because this program is designed to
increase sales for a particular department. The Club and EPC programs are awards for
specific products (PLUs); therefore, the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter in
the Department File is set to N.
October 4, 2002
3-142 Manager
If a specific fuel product is part of the Loyalty program, it must be configured as a

department by itself.
1. Set up a department for selling a specific fuel product, for example premium by
entering a department number and name.
2. Set the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter to Y.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-143
Department File Steps

Use these steps to choose the Department File function and make changes to the
information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Department File
function appears.
12. DEPT FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Dept # 1
*MANAGER MENU*
3.
Choose a department to define by one of the following methods:

Press the arrow keys until the desired existing department number appears.
Key an existing department number (1 - 9999) and press [Select]. If the
department exists, it appears. If it does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER
appears briefly. Choose another department number.
Key a new department number (1 - 9999) and press [ENTER]. If the
department does not exist, it is created and displayed. If it already exists,
RECORD ALREADY EXISTS appears briefly. Choose another department
number.
4. Press [ENTER].
5. Enter the indicated information for each parameter.
Dept Desc
Description: A description of the department which appears on the receipts and reports.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the next parameter.
Product code
Description: Number determined by the network which categorizes products sold. Use the
Print Product Codes function in Network Manager to determine which
number to assign to each department. The product code assigned to the
department overrides if a product and a department have different codes.
Values:
October 4, 2002
Numeric, 1 - 10, 12 - 44.
3-144 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
Negative Department? [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This is a negative department: sales made to the department are
subtracted from receipt and report totals.
No: This is a positive department: sales made to the department are added to
receipt and report totals.
Note:
Do not set both this parameter and Fuel Department? to Y.
Note:
If you set this parameter to Y, set Fee/Charge Type# to 0.
Note:
A PLU assigned a negative department cannot be used in a mix or combo

file.
Steps:

1.
2.
Fuel Department? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether this department is used to sell fuel products.
Values:
Yes or No.
Note:
Do not set this parameter and Negative Department? to Y.
Steps:

1.
2.
Money Order Department? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether this department is used to sell money orders.
Values:
Yes or No.
Note:
Do not set this parameter and Negative Department? to Y.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-145
Fee/Charge Type#
Description: Determines whether and/or which fee is automatically included when a
cashier enters this department.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 50.
0: This item does not have a fee/charge.
1 - 50: This record number is defined in the Fee/Charge File.
Note:
If you set Negative Department? to Y, set this parameter to 0.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 1) Tax [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether tax 1 is added when items in this department are sold.
Note:
This item only appears if tax 1 in the Tax Rate File is defined. The name
assigned in the Tax Rate File replaces (Tax 1).
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Calculate this tax on items sold in this department.
No: Do not calculate this tax on items sold in this department.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 2) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-146 Manager
(Tax 3) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 4) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Food Stamps ? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether food stamps may be used to purchase items in this
department.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Category #
Description: If categories are used, assign one of the category numbers defined in the
Category File. Only categories that have already been defined in the
Category File can be assigned.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 9999.
Steps:

1.
2.
Dept Min
Description: The smallest dollar amount a line item sale to this department can be.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-147
Steps:

1.
Key the minimum dollar amount including two decimal places (cents)
and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Dept Max
Description: The largest dollar amount a line item sale to this department can be.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.

0.00: There is no maximum dollar amount of this department that can be
sold.
Steps:

1.
Key the maximum dollar amount including two decimal places (cents)
and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
(ID 1) Required [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether the customer must pass an age requirement to purchase
items in this department.
Note:
The description that is defined in the Customer ID Info file replaces (ID 1).
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether the customer must pass an age requirement to purchase
items in this department.
Note:
The description that is defined in the Customer ID Info file replaces (ID 2).
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Special Discount [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The items in this department may have a special discount, such as a
senior citizen discount, applied to them. When this parameter is set to Y,
the Special Discount MOP should be set up in the MOP File.
No: The items in this department do not have any special discounts applied
to them.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-148 Manager
Apply Blue Law - 1 [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether purchase of an item is restricted on the designated day
or days as set for Blue Law 1 in the Blue Law Setup function.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The items in this department are restricted by Blue Law 1.
No: The items in this department are not restricted by Blue Law 1.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether purchase of an item is restricted on the designated day
or days as set for Blue Law 2 in the Blue Law Setup function.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The items in this department are restricted by Blue Law 2.
No: The items in this department are not restricted by Blue Law 2.
Steps:

1.
2.
Sold by Fractional Quantity [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether this item may be sold in fractional quantities. Use this
parameter to permit items to be sold by weight, for example.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The Ruby terminal reads all quantities entered in Sales mode for this
PLU as decimals. For example, if the quantity is 1 pounds of cheese, key
[1] [2] [5] [QTY] for 1.25 pounds.
No: The Ruby terminal reads all quantities entered in Sales mode as whole
numbers. For example, key 15 items as [1] [5] [QTY].
Note:
When this parameter is set to Y, At-for pricing sales are not allowed.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go back to the next
parameter.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go back to the next parameter.
LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether sales in this department are LOYALTY REDEEM
ELIGIBLE.
Note:
Set this parameter as Y only if all of the PLUs in the selected department
are included in the Loyalty awards program. Set this parameter to N for
Club and EPC awards.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Sales in this department are eligible to be redeemed as a Loyalty award.
No: Sales in this department are not eligible to be redeemed.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-149
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go back to the first parameter.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go back to the first parameter.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for another department OR press [EXIT] to return to

the Manager mode menu.
12. DEPT FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-150 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Department File function, press [List] to print a list of all departments that
have been set up.
Note:
Some departments hardcoded into the system may display on the listing, but
cannot be changed in the Department File function.
Sample Department File Listing
10/04/02
DEPARTMENT FILE
10:07
DEPT#
DESCR
T1 T2 T3 T4 PC# CTG#
FEE#
MIN
MAX
FS NEG FUEL MO FQ SD ID1 ID2 B1 B2 VPS
---------------------------------------9001 BAKERY
Y N N N
007 0006
0
0.00
0.00
N N
N
N N N
N
N N N
9002 CANDY
Y N N N
007 0006
0
0.00
0.00
N N
N
N N N
N
N N N
9003 HBA
Y N N N
007 0006
0
0.00
0.00
N N
N
N N N
N
N N N
etc.
Dept# - Department number

DESCR - Description
T1-T4 - Taxes 1 through 4 [Y/N]
PC# - Product code
CTG# - Category number
Fee# - Fee/Charge number
MIN - Minimum dollar amount
MAX - Maximum dollar amount
FS - Food stamps [Y/N]
NEG - Negative department [Y/N]
FUEL - Fuel department [Y/N]
MO - Money Order department [Y/N]
FQ - Fractional quantity [Y/N]
SD - Special discount
ID1 and ID2 - Age requirement
[Y/N]
B1 and B2 - Blue law setup [Y/N
VPS - VeriPass Loyalty Redeem
Eligible [Y/N]
Delete a Department
1. Key the department number to delete.
2. Press [Select].
3. The Ruby terminal attempts to find the department number.
If the department does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER displays briefly
and the Ruby terminal beeps once. Choose another department number.
If the department exists, it appears.
4. Key [*] [ENTER]. The department number and all information within it is
deleted.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-151
Department File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Department File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
1. Make copies of the Department File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. If you are using categories refer to the Category File worksheet or print a list.
3. Using the Print Product Codes function in Network Manager mode, print a list of
product codes for reference.
4. Print a listing of the Fee/Charge File.
5. Follow the steps in the Department File Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
3-152 Manager
Department File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
Department:
Description
Category #
Product code
Dept Min
Neg Dept
Dept Max
Fuel Dept
Alcohol ID Check
Money Order Department
Tobacco ID Check
Fee/Charge Type#
Special Discount
Tax 1
Blue Law 1
Tax 2
Blue Law 2
Tax 3
Fractional Quantity
Tax 4
Loyalty Redeem Eligible
Food Stamps
Department:
Description
Category #
Product code
Dept Min
Neg Dept
Dept Max
Fuel Dept
Alcohol ID Check
Money Order Department
Tobacco ID Check
Fee/Charge Type#
Special Discount
Tax 1
Blue Law 1
Tax 2
Blue Law 2
Tax 3
Fractional Quantity
Tax 4
Food Stamps
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-153
PLU File
3
The PLU File contains a description of every item that can be entered into a transaction.
The number of PLUs you can define depends on your systems hardware and the limit set
in the Maximum PLUs parameter in the System Configuration function.
Note:
A PLU is a number that is used to identify a specific product. Some stores assign their own
PLUs and other stores use the numbers that appear below the bar code printed by the
manufacturer. A bar code is a pattern of lines read by a scanner.
Bar Code
PLU
Modifiers
A PLU is made up of a PLU number and a modifier number. A single PLU can have up to
255 modified versions. Modifiers let you group similar items into the same PLU number.
For example, you might want to group all Coke products:
Product
PLU
Modifier
Coke - six-pack cans
100
Coke - two-liter plastic
100
Coke - single can
100
Coke - 16-oz. bottle
100
By assigning similar items to a single PLU number, you can access an item one of two
ways:
If the item is accessed by the PLU number, then all modified versions of the PLU
can be accessed through the one number by pressing [MODIFY] until the correct
item appears. Only one PLU number needs to be learned.
If the PLU is assigned to a soft key, then all modified versions of the PLU can be
accessed through the one key by pressing [MODIFY] until the correct item
appears.
October 4, 2002
3-154 Manager
The first PLU/modifier combination created must use modifier 0. All other modifiers of
the PLU can be any number between 1 and 255. If no modifier is entered during a
selection, the modifier is assumed to be 0.
The PLU can be entered into the system by one of the following methods:
Scan the bar code.
Key the modifier number, press [MODIFY], and scan the bar code.
Key the PLU number and press [ENTER].
Key the modifier number, press [MODIFY], and key the PLU number.
PLU Types
If your store uses PLUs specific to your site, key those numbers into the Ruby terminal.
If your store uses the numbers on the bar code, you must first identify the type of bar code
printed on the item. Bar codes print in various patterns. The codes you are most likely to
see are referred to as UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN-8, and EAN-13. UPC stands for Universal
Product Code. The UPC patterns are the most common bar codes in the United States.
EAN stands for European Article Numbering. The EAN patterns are sometimes used in
the United States but are much more common throughout the rest of the world.
The PLU in each code must be keyed differently so that the item is entered into the system
properly. Look at the arrangement of the numbers and refer to the following examples to
decide how many and which numbers to key.
UPC-A
The UPC-A code has 12 digits: n 12345 12345 c. The first digit is a numbering system
digit and the last is a check digit. If the numbering system digit, n, is a 0, refer to
example 1. If the numbering system digit is not a 0, refer to example 2.
Example 1:
If n is a 0, do one of the following:

Key the middle 10 digits.
[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
or
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-155
Key the first 11 digits.

[0] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
or
Key all 12 digits.
[0] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [5]
Example 2:
If n is not a 0, then you must key it. Do one of the following

Key the first 11 digits.
[6] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
or
Key all 12 digits.
[6] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [5]
UPC-E
The UPC-E code has eight digits: n 123456 c. You may either key the first digit (the
numbering system digit, n) or not. Refer to example 3.
Note:
Never key the check digit, c, in a UPC-E code. If you do, the system confuses
it with an EAN-8 code.
Example 3:

Key the first seven digits.
[0] [0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
or
October 4, 2002
3-156 Manager
Key the middle six digits.

[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
EAN-8
The EAN-8 code has eight digits, seven digits plus a check digit: 1234 123c. Refer to
example 4.
Example 4:
Key all eight digits.

[4] [0] [8] [2] [2] [7] [7] [8]
EAN-13
The EAN-13 code has 13 digits (12 digits plus a check digit): 1 123456 12345c. Refer to
example 5.
Example 5:
Key all 13 digits.

[6] [2] [8] [1] [0] [3] [6] [1] [1] [1] [1] [0] [4]
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-157
Considerations
Consider these items before creating or entering PLUs.
Blue Laws
If purchase of a PLU is prohibited during specific periods, the days and times must be
entered in the Blue Law Setup File and the Apply Blue Law - 1 and Apply Blue Law 2 parameters set to Y in the PLU File.
Note:
Both parameters must be set to Y for the restriction to take place.
Car Wash PLUs

If you have the car wash option, set up car wash sale items in the PLU File before setting
up Car Wash Manager mode functions.
Note:
Do not assign an open PLU as a car wash item. An undefined price displays
at the dispenser.
Car Wash-Related PLUs

Car wash-related products, such as coupon books, special promotions and/or discounts
can be assigned a PLU that can be tracked as part of the car wash department. Set up the
PLU using the parameters in the PLU File, and enter the 000000000000 Dept#
parameter.
Fee/Charge File
Fees, such as bottle deposits, can be assigned to PLU items using the Fee/Charge Type
parameter. When the PLU item is sold, the fee automatically adds to the transaction. If you
assign a fee/charge to a PLU which is taxed, then the same taxes apply to the fee/charge.
Forced Cashier Response
Distinctive beeps and enhanced display messages automatically alert cashiers whenever:
The PLU entered is not found

The PLU is an Open PLU, or
The PLU entered is for an item that cannot be sold because of blue-law restrictions
The warnings force the cashier to respond because the Ruby terminal rejects further
entries until a price is entered for Open PLUs or PLUs not found, or if the item is covered
by blue-law restrictions.
The length of time the messages display is set in Manager > Configuration > Sales
Config > 47. Error Msg Prompt Timer.
October 4, 2002
3-158 Manager
Fractional Quantities
To sell specific department-keyed items by weight (e.g., sliced cheese in a deli) and
specific PLU-keyed items as units (e.g., packages of cheese), set the following parameters
for the items:
Manager > PLU File > Sold by fractional quantity to N.

To sell all items of a designated type by weight, whether keyed with a PLU key, PLU
number, department key, or department number, set the following parameters for the
designated items:
Manager > PLU File > Sold by fractional quantity to Y.

Note:
If Sold by fractional quantity is set to Y in the PLU File, Sold by

fractional quantity must be set to Y in the Department File. If it is not,
then the Ruby terminal reads a quantity keyed for a PLU as a whole
number, not as a decimal.
HPV-20
When HPV-20 is installed, a Ruby Card is required for storing PLU totals.
ID Checking
Note:

called EASY ID. This option requires that your Ruby terminal have a Ruby
Card with this feature installed. If you do not have the EASY ID option, you
can enter the birth date manually.
Sale of some products is restricted by age. To trigger ID checking during a transaction, set
the parameters in the Customer ID Info function then set the (ID n) Required parameters
in the PLU File. When set up properly, the Ruby terminal requests birth date information
be provided prior to sale of these products. If Manager > Configuration > Sales Config
> 46. Force DOB on ID Check? [Y/N] is set to Y, the Ruby terminal beeps and
displays a message alerting the cashier that an ID check is pending. The Ruby terminal
rejects further entries until the date of birth is entered, scanned, or swiped or the
transaction is cancelled.
Three methods exist for the cashier to enter the birth date:
Key the birth date manually.
Swipe the magnetic stripe on a drivers license.
Scan the 2D bar code on a drivers license. Scanning can take place only when the
Ruby terminal is properly configured and a Symbol LS 4800 hand-held scanner is
installed.
Note:

October 4, 2002
Manager 3-159
Local Laws
Consult local laws before setting up parameters related to the following:
Blue laws
ID checking
Food stamps
Local and state taxes
Refundable items
Open PLUs
The capability exists for keying Open PLUs with no defined price. Set up Open PLUs for
items that have frequent price changes. When the Open PLU is keyed, the Ruby terminal
prompts the cashier to Enter item price.
Price Includes Tax
Refer to the Configuration section earlier in this chapter for information on the effects of
including tax in the price of the item.
Promotional Items
If a PLU is on an automatic discount (promotion), the promotion must be defined in the
PLU Promotion File. Additionally, the PLU Promotion parameter in each PLU/modifier
combination affected by the promotion must be set to Y.
Soft Keys
Consider which PLUs to assign to soft keys and make a note of them.
Value-Added Tax (VAT)
Refer to the Configuration section earlier in this chapter for information on VAT.
VeriPASS
VeriPASS includes three awards programs: VeriPASS Club, Electronic Punch Card (EPC),
and Loyalty. In the PLU File, the Loyalty Redeem Eligible parameter must be set to Y
to allow a customer to purchase the item with Loyalty dollars. The setting of this
parameter has no effect on Club or EPC items.
Car wash and car wash-related PLUs can be set up as VeriPASS Club items. If a car wash
is awarded in a Club or EPC program, the customer can only receive the award during an
inside transaction.
Refer to the the discussions in the VeriPASS chapter on the following functions for
more information on setting up PLUs for frequency programs:
Merchant Preferences
VeriPASS Club Configuration
VeriPASS EPC Configuration
October 4, 2002
3-160 Manager
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration

VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration
Scanners
If your site is equipped with a compatible product scanner, PLU numbers can be scanned
in from the bar codes.
1. Key the modifier number.
2. Press [MODIFY].
3. Scan the bar code.
Press [ENTER] to create the item.
Press [Select] to choose an existing item.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-161
PLU File Steps

Use these steps to reach the PLU File function from any point in the application and then
make changes to the information.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the PLU File function
appears.
13. PLU FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
PLU # 000000000012
3.
Choose a PLU to define by one of the following methods:

Press the arrow keys until the desired existing PLU/modifier combination
appears.
Key an existing PLU/modifier combination: key the modifier and press
[MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press [Select]. If the PLU
exists, it appears. If it does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER appears
briefly. Choose another PLU.
Key a new PLU/modifier combination: key the modifier and press
[MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press [ENTER]. The PLU number
can be up to 12 numbers long and the modifier number can be up to three
numbers long. If the PLU does not exist, it is created and displayed. If it
already exists, RECORD Already Exists appears briefly. Choose another
PLU.
Note:
The Ruby terminal automatically puts leading zeros in front of PLU

numbers with fewer than 12 digits.
4. Press [ENTER].
PLU Desc
Description: A description of the item which appears on receipts and reports.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
3-162 Manager
(PLU#) Dept#
Description: The department number in which the PLU is reported.
Note:
A PLU assigned a negative department cannot be used in a mix or combo

file.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 9999.
Steps:

1.
2.
(PLU#) Product code

Description: Number determined by the network which categorizes products sold. Use the
Print Product Codes function in Network Manager to determine which
number to assign to each PLU. The product code assigned to the department
overrides if a product and a department have different codes.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 37.
Steps:

1.
2.
Open PLU? [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether this is an open PLU. Each time an open PLU is used,
the Ruby terminal prompts for a price on that item.
Note:
Set this parameter to N for car wash PLUs.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Identifies an open PLU where there is no defined price. When this PLU
is sold the Ruby terminal requests a price.
No: The PLU has a defined price. When this PLU is sold a price displays on
the Ruby terminal.
Steps:

1.
Key the price including two decimal positions (cents) and press
[ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Price
Description: The price of one unit of the item. The current price is shown on the left. The
new price is entered on the right.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the price including two decimal positions (cents) and press
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-163
(Tax 1) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
This item applies to inside sales only.
Description: This item only appears if tax 1 in the Tax Rate File is defined. The name
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Calculate this tax on this item.
No: Do not calculate this tax on this item.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 2) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 3) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
(Tax 4) Tax [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
October 4, 2002
3-164 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
Food Stamps ? [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Food stamps may be used to purchase this item.
No: Food stamps may not be used to purchase this item.
Steps:

1.
2.
PLU Promotion [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This item is on promotion. The item must also be defined in the PLU
Promotion File. If you set it to Y for all items, then when you set up a
specific promotion, no other steps are needed.
No: This item is not on promotion.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: The description defined in the Customer ID Info file replaces (ID1).
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The customer must pass the age requirement necessary to purchase this
item.
No: The customer does not have to pass this age requirement to purchase this
item.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: The description defined in the Customer ID Info file replaces (ID2).
Values:
Yes or No.
item.
No: The customer does not have to pass this age requirement to purchase this
item.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-165
Fee/Charge Type
Description: Determines whether and/or which fee is automatically included when a
cashier enters this PLU.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 50.
1 - 50: This record number of the fee/charge is defined in the Fee/Charge
File.
Steps:

1.
2.
PLU May Be Sold [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This item may be sold.
No: This item may not be sold.
Steps:

1.
2.
PLU Returnable [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This item may be returned for refund.
No: This item may not be returned for refund.
Steps:

1.
2.
Special Discount [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This item may have a special discount applied to it. Make sure a Special
Discount MOP is set up in the MOP File.
No: This item does not have any special discounts applied to it.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Blue Law 1 applies to this item.
October 4, 2002
Note:
Set up Blue Law 1 with the Blue Law Setup function.
Values:
Yes or No.
3-166 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Sold by Fractional Quantity [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether this item may be sold in fractional quantities. Use this
parameter to permit items to be sold by weight, for example.
Note:
If you set this parameter to Y, also set the Sold by Fractional Quantity
parameter in the Dept File function to Y for the Dept # you set above.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The Ruby terminal reads all quantities entered in Sales mode for this
PLU as decimals. For example, if the quantity is 1 pounds of cheese, key
[1] [2] [5] [QTY] for 1.25 pounds.
No: The Ruby terminal reads all quantities entered in Sales mode as whole
numbers. For example, key 15 items as [1] [5] [QTY].
Steps:

1.
2.
LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? [Y/N]

Note:
A PLU assigned to a VeriPASS awards program cannot be used in a Mix

File.
Description: Determines whether this item is part of the Loyalty awards program.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The PLU can be redeemed in the Loyalty awards program.
No: The PLU cannot be redeemed in the Loyalty awards program.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to go back to the first parameter.
2.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return

October 4, 2002
Manager 3-167
Note:
When you edit the PLU File then exit, a Please Wait... message appears
indicating that the changes you have made are being processed. You can
continue using the Ruby SuperSystem once this message disappears.
13. PLU FILE

*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-168 Manager
File Maintenance
List
PLUs can be listed several ways.
1. While in the PLU File, press [List].
List by:
1. All PLUs
2. Specific Dept.
Choice: _

If you select All PLUs, the following display appears:
Sort by:
1. PLU
2. Name
3. Promo PLU
4. Dept
Choice: _
5. Price
6. Product Code
Press the number of the sort method and press [ENTER]. The list prints and
the Operator Display returns to the PLU File.
If you select Specific Dept., enter the department number of the PLUs you
would like to print and press [ENTER]. The following display then appears:
List by:
1. PLU
2. Name
Choice: _
3. Price
Press the number of the list method and press [ENTER]. The list prints and the
Operator Display returns to the PLU File.
Note:
Applications with greater than 5,000 PLUs automatically print in PLU

order.
Sample PLU File Listing
10/04/02
PLU FILE
10:07
PLU NUMBER
PC# DESCRIPTION
DEPT# QTY/HAND FEETYPE FQTY OPN PRICE
P S R F S I I B B T T T T V
R E E / P D D L L X X X X P
0 L T S D 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 S
---------------------------------------000000000032/000 007
BREAD
9001
0.00
0
N
Y
N/A
N Y Y N N N N N N Y N N N N
000000000145/000 007
SGL DONUT
9001
0.00
0
N
N
0.30
000000000145/001 007
DZN DONUTS
9001
0.00
0
N
N
4.00
etc.
PC# - Product code

Dept# - Department number
QTY/HAND - Quantity on hand
FEETYPE - Fee/Charge type
FQTY - Sold by Fractional
quantity [Y/N]
OPN - Open PLU? [Y/N]
PRO - PLU promotion [Y/N]
SEL - PLU may be sold [Y/N]
RET - PLU returnable [Y/N]
F/S - Food stamps [Y/N]
SPD - Special discount [Y/N]
ID1 and ID2 - Age requirement
check
BL1 and BL2 - Blue law setup [Y/N]
TX1-TX4 - Taxes 1 through 4 [Y/N]
VPS - VeriPASS Loyalty Redeem
Eligible [Y/N]
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-169
Delete a PLU
1. Key the PLU modifier and press [MODIFY].
2. Key the PLU number and press [ENTER].
3. The Ruby terminal attempts to find the PLU.
If the PLU does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER displays briefly and
the Ruby terminal beeps once. Choose another PLU number.
If the PLU exists, it displays.
4. Key [*] [ENTER]. The PLU modifier/number and all information within it is
deleted.
PLU File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the PLU File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
1. Make copies of the PLU File Worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Print a list of product codes to refer to using the Print Product Codes function in
Network Manager mode.
3. Print a list of departments from the Department File in Manager mode.
4. Print a list of fees/charges from the Fee/Charge file in Manger mode.
5. Follow the steps in the PLU File Steps section to enter the information into the
system for each PLU.
October 4, 2002
3-170 Manager
PLU File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
PLU#:
Modifier
PLU Promotion
Description
Alcohol ID Check Required
Department #
Tobacco ID Check Required
Product Code
Fee/Charge Type
Open PLU
May Be Sold
Price
Returnable
Tax 1
Special Discount
Tax 2
Apply Blue Law 1
Tax 3
Apply Blue Law 2
Tax 4
Fractional Quantity
Food Stamps
PLU#:
Modifier
PLU Promotion
Description
Alcohol ID Check Required
Department #
Tobacco ID Check Required
Product Code
Fee/Charge Type
Open PLU
May Be Sold
Price
Returnable
Tax 1
Special Discount
Tax 2
Apply Blue Law 1
Tax 3
Apply Blue Law 2
Tax 4
Fractional Quantity
Food Stamps
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-171
PLU Promotion File

3
The PLU Promotion File contains a description of a time limited discount on a specific
PLU/modifier combination. The number of promotions you can define depends on your
systems hardware and the limit set in the Maximum PLUs promo parameter in the
System Configuration function.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating promotions.
Combo File
If a PLU is defined as part of a combo and that PLU is also in promotion, the combo price
overrides the price set in the PLU Promotion File.
Discounts on Car Washes
1. If you have not already set up your car washes, follow the procedure described at
the beginning of chapter 7, Car Wash Manager.
2. Set Manager > PLU File > PLU Promotion to Y for every car wash.
For example, if your site uses the following PLUs for car washes, set PLU
Promotion to Y for each one:
PLU
000000000150
000000000150
000000000150
Modifier
0
1
2
Car Wash
Hand Wash
Deluxe Wash
Super Wash
3. Enter values for all the Manager > PLU Promotion File parameters.
4. Run Fuel Manager > Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization to send the changes to
the pumps.
5. Run Fuel Manager > Initialize DCRs to send the changes to the DCRs.
Mix n Match Files
If a PLU in a promotion is assigned to a match, the promotional price for the PLU is
charged. When this happens, the PLU is no longer part of the match.
PLU File
A PLU/modifier combination must be set up with the PLU Promotion parameter set to
Y before it can be entered as a promotion. (Refer to PLU File in the Manager
chapter.)
October 4, 2002
3-172 Manager
Scanners
If your site is equipped with a compatible product scanner, PLU numbers can be scanned
in from the bar codes. To do this, key the modifier number, press [MODIFY], scan the bar
code, and press [ENTER] to create the item or [Select] to choose an existing item.
VeriPASS
A PLU can be part of a VeriPASS program and a promotion. Awards are based on the
promotion price.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-173
PLU Promotion File Steps

Use these steps to reach the PLU Promotion File function from any point in the
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the PLU Promotion File
function appears.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
0
PLU # 000000000123
3.
Choose a PLU promotion to define using one of the following methods:

Press the arrow keys until the desired existing PLU/modifier combination
appears.
Key an existing PLU/modifier combination: key the modifier and press
[MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press [Select]. If the PLU
exists, it appears. If it does not exist, E3004 INVALID INPUT appears
briefly. Choose another PLU.
4. Press [ENTER].
Disc Beg Date mmddyy
Description: The date the discount starts.
Values:
Date.
mmddyy: The date must be entered in month/day/year order. If any part of
the date is less than 10, a zero must be entered. For example, if the date is
January 8, 2002, key [0] [1] [0] [8] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
Key the date and then press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Disc Beg Time hhmm

Description: The time the discount starts.
Values:
Time.
hhmm: The time must be entered in hours/minutes order. If any part of the
time is less than 10, you must enter a zero. Time is calculated in 24-hour
time. For example, if the start time is 6:00 A.M., key [0] [6] [0] [0]. If
the start time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
October 4, 2002
3-174 Manager
Steps:

1.
Key the time and then press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Disc End Date mmddyy

Description: The date the discount ends.
Values:
Date.
the date is less than 10, you must enter a zero. For example, if the date is
January 8, 2002, key [0] [1] [0] [8] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
2.
Disc End Time hhmm

Description: The time the discount ends.
Values:
Time.
time is less than 10, a zero must be entered. Time is calculated in 24-hour
time. For example, if the end time is 6:00 A.M., key [0] [6] [0] [0]. If
the start time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
Percent or Amt [P/A]

Description: The type of discount.
Note:
If the discount type is changed, the Discount Amount and Minimum

Value automatically reset to zero.
Values:
P(ercent) or A(mount).
P: The discount value is calculated as a percent of the items price.
A: The discount value is calculated as a dollar amount.
Steps:

1.
Press [P] or [A] and press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Disc Value P
Description: The amount of the discount. The current discount appears on the left. Key
the new discount on the right. The type of discount, P or A, chosen in the
last parameter appears after the words Disc Value.
Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 99.99.

0.01% - 99.99%: If the discount type is a percent (P), then the promotion
value is a percent of the item price subtracted from the item price.
$0.01 - $99.99: If the discount type is an amount (A), then the promotion
value is a dollar amount subtracted from the item price.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-175
Steps:

1.
Key the discount including two decimal places and press [ENTER] to
go to the next parameter.
2.
Discount Type [1-3]

Note:
This parameter only appears for car wash PLUs.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 3.
1: The customer receives a discount with the purchase of a minimum
quantity of fuel.
2: The customer receives a discount with the purchase of a minimum
quantity of the fuel product set in the Fuel Product ID# parameter.
3: The customer receives a discount with the purchase of a minimum dollar
amount of fuel.
Note:
Discount types 2 and 3 above, apply to post pays only.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Key the number of the discount you wish to use and press [ENTER] to
go to the next parameter.
2.
Minimum Purchase Amount p

Note:
This parameter only appears for car wash PLUs.
Description: The minimum amount that the customer must purchase to receive a discount.
The type of discount, P or A, appears after the words Minimum
Purchase Amount.
Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 99.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the minimum purchase amount including two decimal places and
press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
Fuel Product ID#

Note:
This parameter only appears for car wash PLUs which have the Discount
Type parameter set to 2.
Description: The type of fuel that the customer must purchase to receive a discount when
the Discount Type parameter is set to 2. To review the fuel product IDs
entered in your Ruby terminal, use the Fuel Manager > Product ID Setup
function.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 9.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Key the product number and press [ENTER] to go to the first

parameter.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go to the first parameter.
3-176 Manager
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return

*MANAGER MENU*
File Maintenance
List
PLUs can be listed by PLU or date.
1. While in the PLU Promotion File, press [List].
List by:
1. PLU
2. Date
Choice: _
2. Press the number of the sort method and press [ENTER]. The list prints and the
Operator Display returns to the PLU Promotion file.
Sample PLU Promotion File Listing
10/04/02
PLU PROMOTION FILE
10:07
PLU NUMBER
BEGIN DISCOUNT
END DISCOUNT
TYPE DISC.
AMOUNT DISC.
CW DISC TYPE
MIN PURCH
PRODUCT
---------------------------------------000000000054/000
[02/01/02 10:00]
[02/02/02 10:00]
P
2.50
Delete a PLU Promotion

1. Key the PLU modifier, and press [MODIFY].
2. Key the PLU number and press [ENTER].
3. The Ruby terminal attempts to find the PLU in the PLU Promotion File.
If the PLU does not exist, BAD RECORD NUMBER appears briefly and the
Ruby terminal beeps once. Choose another PLU number.
If the PLU exists, E3003 RECORD ALREADY EXISTS appears briefly and
the PLU appears.
4. Key [*] [ENTER]. The PLU modifier/number and all information within it is
deleted.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-177
PLU Promotion File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the PLU Promotion File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
1. Make copies of the worksheet and use a pencil to complete the them.
2. Follow the steps in the PLU Promotion File Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
3-178 Manager
PLU Promotion File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
PLU #:
Beg Date
Value
Beg Time
Type
End Date
Minimum Purchase
End Time
Fuel Product ID
Percent or Amt
PLU #:
Beg Date
Value
Beg Time
Type
End Date
Minimum Purchase
End Time
Fuel Product ID
Percent or Amt
PLU #:
Beg Date
Value
Beg Time
Type
End Date
Minimum Purchase
End Time
Fuel Product ID
Percent or Amt
PLU #:
Beg Date
Value
Beg Time
Type
End Date
Minimum Purchase
End Time
Fuel Product ID
Percent or Amt
PLU #:
Beg Date
Value
Beg Time
Type
End Date
Minimum Purchase
End Time
Fuel Product ID
Percent or Amt
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-179
PLU Tracking File

3
The PLU Tracking File allows you to track PLU sales. Set up the PLUs you wish to track
using this function. Up to 50 separate PLUs can be tracked. A PLU Tracking Report prints
at the end of a Cashier Report.
Considerations
Consider these items before tracking PLUs.
PLU File
A PLU/modifier combination must already be set up in the PLU File before it can be
tracked.
Cashier Closes
The PLU Tracking File records clear with every fourth Close Cashier Totals performed.
Combo, Mix, and Match Files
PLUs used in the Combo, Mix, and Match functions are tracked in the same way other
PLUs are tracked. The PLU Tracking Report does not separately list combo, mix, and
match PLUs. The amount listed on the PLU Tracking Report is the total of all sales for
that PLU, whether it is discounted. Any PLU discount amount is included in its assigned
department on the Department Tracking Report.
VeriPASS
PLUs used in VeriPASS awards programs are tracked in the same way other PLUs are
tracked. The PLU Tracking Report does not separately list Club, EPC, and Loyalty PLUs.
The amount listed on the PLU section of the Tracking Report is the total of all sales for
that PLU whether it is discounted.
October 4, 2002
3-180 Manager
PLU Tracking File Steps

Use these steps to reach the PLU Tracking File function from any point in the application
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the PLU Tracking File
function displays.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
01. 000000000000
0 UNKNOWN PLU
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired tracking number displays.
4. Key an existing PLU/modifier combination: key the modifier, if there is one, and
press [MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press [ENTER]. If the PLU
exists, it appears. If it does not exist, E3004 INVALID INPUT appears briefly.
Choose another PLU.
01. 000000000001
0 CHEESE
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set up another PLU to track OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Manager menu.
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-181
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the PLU Tracking File:
List
While in the PLU Tracking File, press [List] to print the contents of the current tracked
PLUs.
Sample PLU Tracking File Listing
10/04/02
PLU TRACKING FILE
10:07
PLU NUMBER DESCRIPTION

-------------------------------------01. 000000000051 000 SMALL DRINK
02. 000000000051 001 MED. DRINK
03. 000000000051 002 LARGE DRINK
04. 000000000026 000 LG.
DECAF
.
.
.
50. 000000000046 003 LOTTO
Delete a PLU from the Tracking File

1. Press the arrow keys until the desired tracking number and PLU appear.
2. Press [*] [ENTER]. The PLU modifier/number is deleted.
PLU Tracking File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the PLU Tracking File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
1. The worksheet has space for 30 PLUs. If you plan to track more than 30 PLUs,
make copies of the worksheet.
2. Use a pencil to complete the worksheet.
3. Follow the steps in the PLU Tracking File Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
3-182 Manager
PLU Tracking File Worksheet

Item #
PLU/Modifier
Description
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-183
Department Tracking File

3
The Department Tracking File allows you to track department sales. Set up the
departments you wish to track using this function. Up to 10 separate departments can be
tracked. A Department Tracking Report prints at the end of a Cashier Report.
Considerations
Consider these items before tracking departments.
Cashier Closes
The Department Tracking File records clear with every fourth Close Cashier Totals
performed.
Combo, Mix, and Match Files
PLUs used in the Combo, Mix, and Match functions are tracked in the same way other
PLUs are tracked. The Department Tracking Report does not separately list departments
for combo, mix, and match PLUs. Discounts as a result of selling combos and matches are
added to the discounts column of the Department Tracking Report.
Department File
A department must already be set up in the Department File before it can be tracked.
VeriPASS
Club and EPC redeemed items do not list separately in the department section of the
Tracking Report. The amount listed on the Tracking Report is the total of all sales for that
department whether it is discounted.
October 4, 2002
3-184 Manager
Department Tracking File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Department Tracking File function from any point in the
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Department Tracking
File function appears.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
01.
0 UNKNOWN DEPARTMENT
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired tracking number appears.
4. Key an existing department number and press [ENTER]. If the department exists,
it appears. If it does not exist, E3004 INVALID INPUT appears briefly. Choose
another department.
01. 0230 MAGAZINES
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to set up another department to track OR press [EXIT] to

return to the Manager menu.
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-185
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Department Tracking File:
List
While in the Department Tracking File, press [List] to print the contents of the current
tracked departments.
10/04/02
DEPARTMENT TRACKING FILE
10:07
Sample Department Tracking File

Listing
DEP. NUMBER DESCRIPTION

-------------------------------------01. 9001 BAKERY
02. 9012 BEER/WINE
03. 9020 CANDY
04. 9500 COFFEE
.
.
.
10. 9103 FUEL
Delete a Department from the Tracking File

1. Press the arrow keys until the desired tracking number and department appear.
2. Press [*] [ENTER]. The department number is deleted.
Department Tracking File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Department Tracking File for the first time. Refer to Setting
Up Your System for the order in which the system should be set up.
2. Follow the steps in the Department Tracking File Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
3-186 Manager
Department Tracking File Worksheet

Item #
Department #
Description
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-187
Soft Key File

3
The Soft Key File defines each key on the keyboard that does not have a fixed function.
For example, the [ENTER] key is a fixed key; its use cannot be changed. All the keys that
are blank or have just small characters at the bottom of the key are soft keys. The following
items can be assigned to a soft key:
PLU
Department
Method of Payment
Menu
Combo
Other Keys
Soft keys provide a direct access to often used items.
Up to 103 soft keys can be defined depending on your keyboard layout.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating soft keys.
Note:
Caution should be observed when changing assigned soft key functions.

Preassigned soft key functions can be changed unintentionally.
Menu File
A menu must already be set up in the Menu File before it can be assigned to a soft key.
One soft key should be available for each menu you define. If you define more menus than
there are soft keys available, then some of the menus are not available for use.
The Menu File holds up to 50 menus. However, the number of menus you can actually use
depends on your keyboard. For example, if you have a 65-key keyboard, you may have up
to 49 soft keys. Some of the soft keys are used for MOPs, departments, and PLUs.
Determine how many you want to assign as menus and then create that number of menus.
Modify Function
Note:
It is recommended that the Modify function be left on the keyboard as

initially installed.
When an application is installed on a Ruby terminal, the keyboard layout is based on the
release data. The release data is shown in the keyboard samples at the end of this section.
Release data includes the [MODIFY] key in the location shown in each picture. Before
you change the location of this key, please review the following information.
October 4, 2002
3-188 Manager
The Modify function is used in two modes:
Manager: When you create a PLU item in the PLU File, you press [MODIFY] to
select a specific item within that PLU number. This function of Modify cannot be
moved or deleted from the keyboard.
Sales: When you add a PLU to a transaction, you can press [MODIFY] to display
the next item (modifier number) for that PLU number. This Modify function can
be moved on the keyboard. If you move it, please note that the Modify function as
used in Manager mode does not move with it.
Multiterminal Systems
In a multiterminal system, soft key setup is usually done separately for each terminal. The
controllers current Soft Key File is downloaded to the workstation when it enters Sales
mode if both of the following are true:
The workstation(s) and the controller have the same layout.
The Download Soft Key File [Y/N] parameter in the Register Configuration is
set to Y.
Soft Key Assignment
Soft key assignments can be changed by directly accessing the menu list. Be sure that the
soft key you wish to change is selected.
Combo File: Combo files must be defined before they can be assigned a soft key.
When you have more combos to assign than soft keys available, set up an [OTHER
COMBO] key by using 6. Other Keys.
Department File: A department must already be set up in the Department File

before it can be assigned to a soft key. When you have more departments to assign
than soft keys available, set up an [OTHER DEPT] key 6. Other Keys.
Fuel Functions: If you have more fuel functions to assign than soft keys available,
instead of assigning the following functions to separate keys, assign [OTHER
FUEL] to a key. These functions appear in a menu format when the cashier presses
[OTHER FUEL].
Convert Price Level
Delivery
Free POP Award
Fuel Discount
Move Fuel Point (Prepay Move)
Preset Fuel
MOP File: A method of payment must already be set up in the MOP File before it
can be assigned to a soft key. When you have more MOPs to assign than soft keys
available, set up an [OTHER MOP] key by using 6. Other Keys.
PLU File: A PLU/modifier combination must be set up in the PLU File before it
can be assigned to a soft key.
October 4, 2002
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-189
Sales Management Functions: If you have more sales management functions to

assign than soft keys available, set up an [OTHER FUNC] key by using 6. Other
Keys. These functions appear in a menu format when the cashier presses the
[OTHER FUNC].
Clock In/Out
Pay In
Pay Out
Safe Drop
Safe Loan
3-190 Manager
Soft Key File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Soft Key File function from any point in the application and
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Soft Key File function
appears.
17. SOFT KEY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Soft key #001 (
1. PLU
3. MOP
2. Dept
4. Menu
APPROVE) Choice: 33
5. Combo
6. Other Keys
3. Choose a soft key using one of the following methods:

Press the arrow keys until the desired soft key number appears.
Press the soft key on the keyboard. The soft key number appears.
[MODIFY], [QTY], [TICKET PRINT], [LIST], [<--], and [-->]
keys: Press a key next to one of these keys, then press an arrow key until the
current name of the key you desire appears.
Note: The number keys cannot be reassigned.
4. Choose one of the following soft key types (1 - 6) and follow the steps.
1. PLU
Description: Assign a PLU/modifier combination to a soft key. When this soft key is
pressed, the PLU/modifier is entered into the transaction. If there are
additional modifiers for this PLU, you can then press [MODIFY] until the
one you want displays.
Values:
PLU/modifier combinations already defined in the PLU File.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [1] [ENTER] to assign a PLU to the soft key.
2.
Key the modifier and press [MODIFY].
3.
Key (or scan if applicable) the PLU number and press [ENTER]. The
PLU, modifier, and description display.
4.
Press [ENTER] to return to the soft key screen.
2. Dept
Description: Assign a department to a soft key.
Values:
Department already defined in the Department File.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-191
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [2] [ENTER] to assign a department to the soft key.
2.
Key the department number and press [ENTER]. The department

number and description display.
3.
3. MOP
Description: Assign a method of payment to a soft key.
Values:
MOP already defined in the MOP File.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [3] [ENTER] to assign a method of payment to the soft key.
2.
Key the MOP number and press [ENTER]. The MOP number and
description display.
3.
4. Menu
Description: Assign a menu to a soft key.
Values:
Menu already defined in the Menu File.
Note:
Select [*] from the menu list and press [ENTER] to delete a menu assigned
to a soft key.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [4] [ENTER] to assign a menu to the soft key.
2.
Key the menu number or use the arrows keys to point to the menu
number and press [ENTER]to return to the soft key screen.
3.
The menu name and number appears in the soft key description.
5. Combo
Description: Assign a combo to a soft key.
Values:
Combo already defined in the Combo File.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [5] [ENTER] to assign a combo to the soft key.
2.
Key the combo number and press [ENTER]. The combo number and
description appears.
3.
6. Other Keys
Description: Assign a predefined function from a group of choices to a soft key.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Refer to the Other Keys table below.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [6] [ENTER] to assign Other Keys to the soft key.
2.
Press the arrow keys to scroll through the available soft keys until the
desired soft key appears OR press the soft key number and then
[ENTER] to select the desired soft key.
3.
Press [ENTER].
3-192 Manager
Other Keys
Key #
Name
Description
25
Amount
Discount
Discounts the last entered sales item as a dollar amount.
33
Approve
Approves all or a specific pump for fuel dispensing.
35
Clock In/Out
Adds and removes employees from the Ruby terminals

internal timeclock. This is also under [OTHER FUNC]
key.
10
Convert Cash/
Credit
Changes fuel pricing systems (usually between cash and

credit) when different fuel prices are charged based on
the method of payment.
24
Discount
Discounts the last entered sales item as a dollar amount

or percent depending on the Sales Configuration setup.
40
Food Stamp
Allows the item that is entered to be purchased with

food stamps.
44
FREE POP
AWARD
Allows the cashier the discretion to issue a free POP

code or coupon to a customer (e.g., when a customer
returns after being incorrectly charged for an item on a
previous visit).
29
Fuel Discount
Discounts a specified quantity of fuel.
15
Fuel Prepay
Allows the customer to pay for a fuel sale before

pumping.
14
Fuel Preset
Presets a pump for a specific dollar or quantity.

Payment may be made before or after dispensing.
13
Fuel Sale
Enters the most recent fuel sale for the specified pump
into the current transaction.
27
Modify PLU
Modifies the current PLU sales entry so that the next

modifier defined for the PLU, if any, displays.
Note:
Please review the Considerations before

moving this key.
31
Network
Functions
Contains a menu of functions that relate to your credit

card network.
21
No Sale
Opens the cash drawer between sales transactions.
42
Other Combo
Allows entry of a combo number that is not already

assigned to a specific soft key.
30
Other
Currency
Changes the total dollar amount due from the local

currency to another currency.
Other Dept
Allows entry of a department number for a sales item

for all departments not already assigned to a specific
soft key.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-193
Other Keys
Key #
Name
Description
12
Other Fuel
Funct.
Contains a menu of the following functions: Move Fuel

Point, Convert Price Level, Fuel Discount, Preset Fuel.
26
Other
Functions
Contains a menu of the following functions: Safe Drop,

Safe Loan, Clock In/Out, Pay In, Pay Out.
Other MOP
Allows entry of a method of payment number that is not

already assigned to a specific soft key.
16
Pay In
Logs that a dollar amount has been added to the cash

drawer without a sales transaction. This is also under
[OTHER FUNC] key.
17
Pay Out
Logs that a dollar amount has been removed from the

cash drawer without a sales transaction. This is also
under [OTHER FUNC] key.
Note:
October 4, 2002
(Continued)
To make vendor payments by money order, use

the Pay Out function under the
[OTHER FUNC] key.
23
Percent
Discount
Discounts the last entered sales item as a percent.
28
PLU Price
Override
Changes the defined price of a PLU item to the price

you enter.
11
Prepay Move
Moves a prepay fuel sale to another pump number.
39
Quantity
Indicates that two or more of an item (PLU or

department) will be entered.
38
Refund
Allows items from a previous sale to be returned.
19
Safe Drop
Logs that a specific amount of an MOP is removed from

the drawer and placed in the safe. This is also under
[OTHER FUNC].
20
Safe Loan
Logs that a specific amount of cash was removed from

the safe and placed in the cash drawer. This is also
under [OTHER FUNC].
34
Stop
Stops all or a specific pump from dispensing.
22
Suspend
Transaction
Suspends one transaction to allow other transactions to

be processed.
18
Tax Exempt
Removes one or more taxes from the current item.
Ticket Print
Reprints up to the last 50 indoor sales receipts or the last

card reader receipt.
32
Total
Adds up the dollar amount of the current transaction.
43
VeriPASS
Functions
Contains a menu of functions that relate to the

VeriPASS function.
View Fuel
Sales
Displays the status of a specific pump or all due sales.
3-194 Manager
Other Keys
Key #
Name
(Continued)
Description
36
Void Line
Removes the specified item from the current

transaction.
37
Void Ticket
Deletes the entire current transaction and resets the

terminal to start a new one.

the Manager menu.
17. SOFT KEY FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Soft Key File:
List
While in the Soft Key File, press [List] to print the current list of soft keys that the user
can assign, in key number order. To print the list of Other Keys sorted by key name, press
[6], [ENTER] and then [List].
10/04/02
SOFT KEY FILE
10:07
Sample Soft Key File Listing

(Key Number Order)
KEY TYPE
NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
-------------------------------------01 Approve
02 Approve
03 Prepay
04 View
05 Fuel Sale
06 Preset
07 Void Line
08 Ticket Print
09 No Sale
10 Discount
11 Menu
12 Price Override
13 Void Ticket
14 Network Functions
15 MOP
009
LOTTERY
16 Other MOP
17 PLU
000000000006/000 SODA
18 PLU
000000000013/000 EGG BISCUI
19 PLU
000000000019/001 BREAD
20 Menu
08
BOT SODA
21 Menu
10
STAMPS
22 Combo
02
SAND SPEC
.
.
103
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-195
Add/Change a Soft Key

To add or change soft keys, use the same steps that are given in Soft Key File Steps.
Soft Key File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Soft Key File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
Refer to the keyboard layouts that follow the table to help you set up your keyboards. The
first two keyboards show the numbered soft keys, and the second two keyboards show the
key assignments (release data) that initially come with the system.
In a multiterminal system, this setup is usually done separately for each terminal unless
your system is set to automatically download soft key information to the workstation(s).
1. Make copies of the worksheet and use a pencil to complete them.
2. Use the sample keyboards following the worksheet to decide on the layout of your
keyboard.
3. Follow the steps in the Soft Key File Steps section to enter the information into
the system.
October 4, 2002
3-196 Manager
Soft Key File Worksheet

Key #
Soft Key Type
Value
October 4, 2002
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-197
3-198 Manager
October 4, 2002
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-199
3-200 Manager
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-201
Menu File
3
The Menu File defines sets of one to six PLU items. Each set, or menu, can then be
assigned to a soft key for direct access. When the menu soft key is pressed, the description
of each PLU item, as defined in the PLU File, displays next to its menu number. The
cashier then only has to press the menu number to add the item to the transaction.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating menus.
Menu Items
The PLU items in a menu can be arranged in any order. Numbers can be skipped within a
menu if desired. For example, if you arrange the items in all menus in a specific order, you
can skip numbers that you do not have products for (i.e., assign products to only numbers
2, 4, and 5).
Number of Menus
The Menu File holds up to 50 menus. However, the number of menus you can actually use
depends on your keyboard.
For example, if you have a 65-key keyboard, you may have up to 49 soft keys. Some of
the soft keys are used for MOPs, departments, and PLUs. Determine how many you want
to assign as menus and then create that number of menus.
PLU File
A PLU/modifier combination must already be set up in the PLU File before it can be
assigned as a menu item.
Soft Key File
One soft key should be available for each menu you define. If you define more menus than
there are soft keys available, then some of the menus are not available for use.
Soft key assignments can be changed by directly accessing the menu list. Be sure that the
soft key you wish to change is selected.
Note:
Caution should be observed when changing assigned soft key functions.

Preassigned soft key functions can be changed unintentionally.
Menus can be added, modified, or deleted in the soft key file. An entry labeled,
*Undefined, is used to assist in this process.
October 4, 2002
3-202 Manager
Menu File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Menu File function from any point in the application and then
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Menu File function
displays.
18. MENU FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
MENU #01 Desc
LOTTERY
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired menu appears or key a menu number and
press [Select].
MENU #17 Desc
MENU 17
4. Key the new menu name, up to 10 characters, and press [ENTER].

5. Key an existing PLU/modifier combination: key the modifier, if there is one, and
press [MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press [ENTER]. If the PLU
exists, it appears. If it does not exist, E3004 INVALID INPUT appears briefly.
Choose another PLU.
MENU #01
ITEM1
PLU# 000000000001

Press [ENTER] to go to the next item in this menu and set up another PLU in
the same menu number. Repeat step 5.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 to set up another menu.
Press [EXIT] to return to the Manager menu.
18. MENU FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-203
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Menu File:
List
While in the Menu File, press [List] to print the contents of the current menus.
Sample Menu File Listing
10/04/02
MENU FILE
10:07
NUMBER DESCRIPTION
ITEM PLU NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
-------------------------------------02
FOUNTAIN DRINKS
1 000000000051/000 SMALL DRINK
2 000000000051/001 MED. DRINK
3 000000000051/002 LARGE DRINK
03
1
2
3
4
5
COFFEE
000000000026/000
000000000026/005
000000000026/002
000000000026/001
000000000026/003
LG. DECAF
MED.REG.COFFEE
LG. REG.COFFEE
SM.DECAF
MED.DECAF
Delete a Menu
1. Press the arrow keys until the desired menu appears.
2. For each menu item you want to delete, do the following:
Key [*] [ENTER].
The PLU/modifier combination is deleted. Press [ENTER] to go to the next
item in this menu.
3. Repeat step 2 to delete another item in the chosen menu OR repeat steps 1 and 2 to
delete items in another menu.
Menu File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Menu File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Menu File Steps section to enter the information into the
system.
October 4, 2002
3-204 Manager
Menu File Worksheet

Item #
PLU/Modifier
Description
Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-205
Customer ID Info
3
The Customer ID Info function defines two age identification requirements that a
customer may have to provide in order to purchase a product.
Note:
Considerations
Consider these items before creating purchase ID requirements.
Department File
The ID check must be set in each department in the Department File to which it applies.
For example, if you set up a minimum age check for alcohol, then each department under
which alcohol can be sold must have the parameter for an alcohol age check set to Y.
PLU File
The ID check must be set for each PLU in the PLU File to which it applies. For example,
if you set up a minimum age check for cigarettes, then each PLU/modifier combination
that is a cigarette product must have the parameter for a cigarette age check set to Y.
ID Checking
The cashier can do one of the following to check a customers ID:
Manually input birth date information
Swipe the drivers license on the Ruby terminal
Scan the bar code on the license.

When Manager > Configuration > Sales Config > 46. Force DOB on ID Check?
[Y/N] is set to Y, the Ruby terminal beeps and displays a message alerting the cashier
that an ID check is pending. The Ruby terminal rejects further entries until the date of
birth is entered.
Note:

called EASY ID. This option may require that your Ruby have a Ruby Card
with this feature installed. If you do not have the EASY ID checking option,
then manually enter the birth date.
Note:

October 4, 2002
3-206 Manager
Customer ID Info Steps

Use these steps to reach the Customer ID Info function from the Manager menu and then
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Customer ID Info
function appears.
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
CUST ID1 Name _
3. Press the arrow keys until the customer ID number you wish to change appears.
4. For each ID, do the following:
CUST ID1 Name
Description: The name given to the ID check which usually includes a description of the
product being checked.
Values:
Alphanumeric, up to 16 characters.
Steps:

1.
2.
customer ID number.
3.
Press the arrow keys to go to another customer ID number.
CUST ID1 Age

Description: The minimum age of the person who can purchase the item.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and go back to the first item within
this customer ID number.
3.
Press the arrow keys to go to another customer ID number.

the Manager menu.
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-207
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Customer ID Info file:
List
While in the Customer ID Info function, press [List] to print the current ID
requirements.
Sample Customer ID File Listing
10/04/02
CUSTOMER ID FILE
10:07
ID# NAME
AGE
-------------------------------------1 ALCOHOL ID CHECK
21
2 TOBACCO ID CHECK
18
Delete a Customer ID Type

1. Press the arrow keys until the customer ID number you wish to delete appears.
2. Key [*] [ENTER].
Customer ID Info Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Customer ID Info function for the first time. Refer to Setting
2. Follow the steps in the Customer ID Info Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
3-208 Manager
Customer ID Info Worksheet

ID #
Name (Description)
Age
1
2
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-209
Training Mode
3
The Training Mode function changes the terminal so that Sales mode functions can be
practiced without creating real transactions or affecting report totals.
Considerations
Consider these items before using Training Mode.
Fuel Functions
It is not recommended to practice fuel control or fuel sales functions in Training Mode.
Fuel control functions are not turned off in Training Mode. For example, if Training Mode
is on when a pump calls for approval and the cashier presses [APPROVE], then that pump
is approved and the customer can dispense fuel.
Operations
While in Training mode, the following occurs:
The bottom line of the Operator Display displays TRAINING MODE.
The line Training Mode prints in double-wide letters on all receipts.
The date and time Training Mode is turned on or off is logged on the journal.
Manager Functions
In Training Mode, all changes to Manager and Fuel Manager mode data are real.
Network Functions
Note:
This consideration only applies to systems that are connected to a network.
Since all network processing is performed on the controller, use Training Mode on the
controller with caution. When the controller is placed in Training Mode, the workstations
and/or dispenser card readers (DCRs) do not handle credit transactions normally. Instead,
they are handled as Training Mode transactions. The following procedures are
recommended:
Multiterminal installations should run Training Mode on workstations only.
Single terminal installations with DCR support should only use Training Mode
while the DCRs are not operational.
Reports Functions
You may still close and print period reports while Training Mode is on. Transactions, other
than fuel transactions that were created while in Training Mode have no effect on the
totals.
October 4, 2002
3-210 Manager
Training Mode Steps

Use these steps to reach the Training Mode function from the Manager menu and then turn
it off or on.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Training Mode function
appears.
2. Press [Select].
20. TRAINING MODE
*MANAGER MENU*
3. Press [Yes] to turn it on OR [No] to turn it off and then press [ENTER].
Training Mode [Y/N] N
20. TRAINING MODE

*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-211
Create Banner
3
The Create Banner function changes the message displayed on the Customer Display
when Sales mode is active but no sales transactions are in process. The Customer Display
has two lines. Each line is 20 characters wide.
Considerations
Consider these items before changing your Customer Display message.
Banner Message
Think carefully about what you want your message to say. Do you want to greet the
customer or do you want to thank them for coming and ask them to come again?
Make sure that your message is spelled correctly.
October 4, 2002
3-212 Manager
Create Banner Steps

Use these steps to reach the Create Banner function from the Manager menu and then
change the message.
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Create Banner function
appears.
2. Press [Select].
21. CREATE BANNER
*MANAGER MENU*
3. Press the arrow keys until the line you want to change appears.
LINE1 Message _
4. For each message line, do the following:

a. Key the new message (up to 20 characters). Press [ENTER].
LINE1 Rotate[Y/N] _
b. Press [Yes] to make the line rotate OR press [No] to make the line stay still
in the center of the display. Press [ENTER].
LINE1 Message THANK YOU
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change another message line OR press [EXIT] to return
to the Manager mode menu.
21. CREATE BANNER
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-213
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Create Banner file:
List
While in the Create Banner function, press [List] to print the current banner
information.
Sample Banner File Listing
10/04/02
BANNER FILE
10:07
LINE# MESSAGE
ROTATE
-------------------------------------1
THANK YOU
Y
2
COME AGAIN
Y
Delete Banner Line

To delete a line from the banner, follow these steps:
1. Press the arrow keys until the line you want to delete appears.
2. Key [*] [ENTER]. The banner line is deleted.
Create Banner Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Create Banner function for the first time. Refer to Setting
1. Make a copy of the worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the Create Banner Steps section to enter the information into
the system.
3. Put the worksheet put in the pocket at the back of the binder for future reference.
October 4, 2002
3-214 Manager
Create Banner Worksheet

Line #
Message
Rotate (Y/N)
1
2
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-215
Blue Law Setup

3
The Blue Law Setup function is used to prevent sales of specific items during specific
periods of time. Two separate laws can be set up. Each law can be set up for one or more
days of the week. Each day can have up to two periods of time specified for restricting
sales.
Considerations
Combo File
The Blue Law - n check parameter must be set to Y in the Combo File for the
restriction to take effect. This setting overrides any parameters set in the PLU File.
Department File
The Apply Blue Law - n parameter must be set to Y in the Department File for the
restriction to take effect for items set up in a department.
PLU File
The Apply Blue Law - n parameter must be set to Y in the PLU File for the restriction
to take effect.
October 4, 2002
3-216 Manager
Blue Law Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Blue Law Setup function from any point in the application and
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Blue Law Setup
function appears.
22. BLUE LAW SETUP
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
BLUE LAW-1 Restrict on Sun [Y/N]
3. Use the arrow keys to select Blue Law 1 or Blue Law 2.

To enter a Blue Law restriction for the day shown, key [Yes][ENTER] when
that day appears. Key the requested information for each parameter.
BLUE LAW-1 SUN Start Time
To skip a day, key [ENTER]until the next day in the week appears.
To disable a blue law restriction, key [No] [ENTER]. The next day in the
week appears.
BLUE LAW-n DAY Start Time 1 0000

Description: This is the time, on a 24-hour clock, which starts the first period during a day
when a product cannot be purchased.
Note:
The start time cannot be the same as the end time.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.
Steps:

1.
Key the start time. Press [ENTER].
2.
BLUE LAW-n DAY End Time 1 0000

Description: This is the time, on a 24-hour clock, which ends the first period during a day
when a product cannot be purchased.
Note:
To set the end time as midnight, key the end time as 2359. The Ruby
terminal displays End at midnight? [Y/N]. If you press [Yes] the end
time is set as midnight.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-217
Steps:

1.
Key the end time. Press [ENTER].
2.
BLUE LAW-n DAY Start Time 2 0000

Description: This is the time, on a 24-hour clock, which starts the second period during a
day when a product cannot be purchased.
Note:
The start time cannot be the same as the end time.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.
Steps:

1.
Key the start time. Press [ENTER].
2.
BLUE LAW-n DAY End Time 2 0000

Description: This is the time, on a 24-hour clock, which ends the second period during a
day when a product cannot be purchased.
Note:
To set the end time as midnight, key the end time as 2359. The Ruby
terminal displays End at midnight? [Y/N]. If you press [Y], the end time
is set as midnight.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.
Steps:

1.
Key the start time. Press [ENTER] to cycle to the next day in the week.
2.

22. BLUE LAW SETUP
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-218 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Blue Law Setup menu item, press [List] to print the blue law schedule.
10/04/02
Store# 1
Register ID#1
BLUE LAW FILE
10:07
Sample Blue Law Setup

Listing
# DAY
REST PERIOD 1
PERIOD 2
---------------------------------------1 SUNDAY
Y
0200 - 1300 0000 - 0000
1 MONDAY
N
0000 - 0000 0000 - 0000
1 TUESDAY
N
0000 - 0000 0000 - 0000
1 WEDNESDAY
N
0000 - 0000 0000 - 0000
.
.
.
2 FRIDAY
N
0000 - 0000 0000 - 0000
2 SATURDAY
N
0000 - 0000 0000 - 0000
Blue Law Setup Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Blue Law Setup file. Refer to Setting Up Your System for
the order in which the system should be set up.
1. Copy the Blue Law Setup Worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the Blue Law Setup Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-219
Blue Law Setup Worksheet

Blue Law
#
1
October 4, 2002
Day
Start Time 1
End Time 1
Start Time 2
End Time 2
3-220 Manager
Log In/Out Prompt

3
The Log In/Out Prompt function provides a means of displaying a message to the cashier
while logging in or out of Sales mode. The login prompt displays after the cashier
successfully enters his or her password.
Managers may use this function to leave reminder messages or notices for their
employees. The messages display until the cashier presses [ENTER].
Note:
Log In/Out Prompt Steps

Use these steps to reach the Log In/Out Prompt function from any point in the application
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Log In/Out Prompt
function appears.
23. LOG IN/OUT PROMPT
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Enter Log In Prompt Line 1:
YOU MUST CHECK ID FOR ALL PURCHASERS OF
3. Use the arrow keys to select the login prompt or the logout prompt.
Key the first line of the message (up to 40 characters).
Press [*] to leave the line blank.

5. Press [ENTER].
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-221

Key the second line of the message (up to 40 characters).
TOBACCO PRODUCTS THAT APPEAR TO BE
Press [*] to leave the line blank.

7. Press [ENTER].
Key the third line of the message (up to 26 characters). The Ruby terminal
automatically inserts the phrase Press [ENTER] at the end of the third line.
UNDER AGE 27
Press [ENTER]
Press [*] to leave the line blank. The Ruby terminal automatically inserts the
phrase Press [ENTER] in the third line.
Note: If all lines are blank, no message displays.

9. Press [ENTER].
Display Log In Prompt [Y/N]: N

Press [Yes] to display the prompt.
Press [No] to not display the prompt.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes.
Press an arrow key to edit the other prompt.
23. LOG IN/OUT PROMPT
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-222 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the Log In/Out Prompt menu item, press [List] to print the login and logout
prompts.
10/04/02
Store# 1
Register ID#1
LOG IN/OUT PROMPT FILE
10:07
Sample Log In/Out Prompt

Listing
---------------------------------------LOG IN PROMPT
TOBACCO PRODUCTS THAT APPEAR TO BE
UNDER AGE 27
Press [ENTER]
DISPLAYED: YES
LOG OUT PROMPT
REMEMBER TO CLOCK OUT ON THE RUBY AT THE
END OF YOUR SHIFT. ALWAYS RUN THE
CASHIER REPORT.
Press [ENTER]
DISPLAYED: YES
Log In/Out Prompt Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Log In/Out Prompt file. Refer to Setting Up Your System
for the order in which the system should be set up.
1. Copy the Log In/Out Prompt Worksheet and use a pencil to complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the Log In/Out Prompt Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-223
Login Prompt Worksheet

Line #
# of
Characters
40
40
26
Message
Logout Prompt Worksheet

Line #
# of
Characters
40
40
26
October 4, 2002
Message
3-224 Manager
Combo File
3
The Combo File function allows you to set up time-limited discounts on a group of PLUs
which receive a discount when sold as a single item. The file can hold up to 50 combos
with up to five PLUs each. The Deal Report lists the number of combos sold. Refer to the
Flash Reports chapter of the Reports Reference for more information.
Note:
The cashier must be trained to recognize the items being sold as a combo and
enter them as a single item. Otherwise, the discount does not apply.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating combos.
Assigning PLUs
When setting up or changing a combo, consider the following;
Do not mix taxable and non-taxable PLUs in the same combo.
Do not mix PLUs set up for food stamps with PLUs that are not in the same
combo.
Do not mix PLUs which have blue laws assigned to them with PLUs that do not in
the same combo.
Do not mix PLUs where Refund Allowed is set to Y with PLUs with that
parameter set to N.
Do not use PLUs where LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? is set to Y.
If a PLU requiring an ID check is sold with PLUs that do not require an ID check,
set the ID n Required parameter to Y for the combo.
Do not mix PLUs set up for VeriPASS Club, EPC, and Loyalty awards.
Car wash PLUs can be used as part of a combo. The car wash function must be
installed and enabled.
A PLU with a fee/charge can be assigned to a combo. However, the Ruby software
only applies the Fee Type assigned in the Combo File.
Do not use PLUs which are assigned to a negative department. If you do, the
combo is disabled and cannot be sold.
If the PLU Promotion parameter is set to Y for a PLU in a combo, the combo
price overrides the promotion price.
Limits
The following limits have been established for combos, mix, and match files:
100 PLUs set up in any combination
Maximum of 40 combos, mix, and match discounts per transaction
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-225
Local Laws
Consult local laws before setting up the following parameters:
Blue Law Check
ID Required
Pay by Food Stamp
Tax 1 - Tax 4
Refund Allowed
Refunds
The Refund Allowed setting in the Combo File overrides any separate PLU setting.
When accepting a combo return, the cashier must verify all items in the combo are
returned. If a partial combo is returned, the cashier must adjust the prices of the items
returned so the value of the return does not exceed the original value of the combo.
Scanners
Combos do not have separate bar codes for scanning purposes. Do not use a scanner for
combo price entry.
Soft Key Assignment
A specific combo can be assigned to a soft key and a soft key can be set up as an
[OTHER COMBO] key. The cashier can then sell combos by pressing a key. The
procedure is located in the Soft Key File.
October 4, 2002
3-226 Manager
Example
A convenience store owner wants to sell a sandwich combo consisting of a sandwich,
medium french fries, and a medium soft drink for $3.40 plus 7% sales tax. The discounted
price of the individual items excluding tax appears in the table below.
Sandwich Combo Price Comparison
Discounted Item
Original Price
Discounted Price
Sandwich
$2.00
$1.50
Medium French Fries
$1.20
$1.00
Medium Soft Drink
$1.10
$0.90
Total
$4.30
$3.40
The combo discounts the total by $0.90. When the transaction is rung up, the following
receipt prints.
WELCOME TO
OUR STORE
00000125498-00
1000 VISTA BLVD
Descr.
-----LUNCH COMBO
BENS STORE
CLEARWATER FL
qty
--1
amount
-----3.40
-------3.40
0.24
Sub Total
Tax
TOTAL
3.64
CASH $
Change $
5.00
-1.36
THANKS,COME AGAIN
REG# 0001 CSH# 001 DR# 01
10/04/02 15:31:00
TRAN# 10001
ST#
1
Combo Setup
1. PLU File: Set up the PLUs to be sold in the combo. Refer to PLU File for set up
instructions.
2. Combo File: Create the combo following the steps listed on the next page.
3. Soft Key File: Set up the combo to sell from a soft key or the [OTHER COMBO]
key. Refer to Soft Key File for instructions.
PLU Set up
Combo File Set up
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-227
Combo File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Combo File function from any point in the application and
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Combo File function
appears.
24. COMBO FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
COMBO01 Desc _
3. Do one of the following to set up a combo:

Press the arrow keys to reach an empty combo record. Key a new combo name.
Press [ENTER].
Press the arrow keys until the desired existing combo appears.
COMBOxx Begin Date mmddyy
Description: The date the combo starts.
Values:
Date.
September 1, 2000, key [0] [9] [0] [1] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Begin Time hhmm

Description: The time the combo starts.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.

time is less than 10, enter a zero. Time is calculated on a 24-hour clock. For
example, if the start time is 6:00 A.M., key [0] [6] [0] [0]. If the start
time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-228 Manager
COMBOxx End Date mmddyy

Description: The date the combo ends.
Values:
Date.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx End Time hhmm

Description: The time the combo ends.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Product Code

Description: A code set up by the network to identify products. Use the Print Product
Codes function in Network Manager to decide which number to assign to
each combo. If a product and a department have different codes, use the
product code assigned to the department.
Note:
Fuel-related products cannot be used in combos.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 37.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Price
d.cc
d.cc
Description: The price of the combo calculated by the Ruby from the price of the PLUs
that you enter below. The current price displays on the left.
Note:
This is a read-only value.
Values:
The sum of all PLUs in the combo.
Steps:
COMBOxx Fee Type

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 50.
1 - 50: This item has the fee/charge defined in the Fee/Charge File.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-229
COMBOxx (TAX1)
Tax[Y/N]
Note:
Note:
Be sure that this tax agrees with the taxes set up for the PLUs in the PLU
File.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx (TAX2) Tax[Y/N]

Note:
Note:
File.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Note:
Note:
File.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-230 Manager

Note:
Note:
File.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Refund Allowed [Y/N]

Note:
Consult local laws to see if the item can be returned for a refund.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This item may be returned for refund.
No: This item may not be returned for refund.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Pay by Food Stamp [Y/N]

Note:
Consult local laws to see if this item can be paid for by food stamps.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Food stamps may be used to purchase this item.
No: Food stamps may not be used to purchase this item.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx (ID 1) Required [Y/N]

Description: The description defined in the Customer ID Info File replaces (ID1).
Note:
Consult local laws to see if this item needs to have an ID check performed. If
so, is ID 1 the correct check?
Values:
Yes or No.
item.
No: The customer does not have to pass the age requirement to purchase this
item.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-231
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx (ID 2) Required [Y/N]

Description: The description defined in the Customer ID Info File replaces (ID2).
Note:
Consult local laws to see if this item needs to have an ID check performed. If
so, is ID 2 the correct check?
Values:
Yes or No.
item.
No: The customer does not have to pass the age requirement to purchase this
item.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Special Discount [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This combo may have a special discount applied and overrides any
special discount applied to PLUs by the PLU File.
No: This combo does not have any special discounts applied.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx Blue Law1 check [Y/N]

Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:
Do one of the following.

1.
2.
COMBOxx Blue Law2 check [Y/N]

October 4, 2002
Note:
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
3-232 Manager
COMBOxx All items on Receipt [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Prints all PLU information on the receipt.
No: No PLU information prints on the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx PLUn 000000000000
Description: The 12-digit PLU number. Key a new PLU/modifier combination: key the
modifier and press [MODIFY], then key the PLU number and press
[ENTER]. The PLU number can be up to 12 numbers long and the modifier
number can be up to three numbers long.
Note:
Fuel-related products cannot be used in combos.
Note:
The letter n after PLU indicates the PLU number of the combo. Each
combo can have up to five PLUs.
Values:
000000000000 - 999,999,999,999.
Steps:

1.
2.
COMBOxx PLUn Price
d.cc
d.cc
Description: The discounted price for this PLU.

Note:
PLUn indicates the PLU number of the combo. Each combo can have up
to five PLUs.
Values:
0.00 - 99999.99.
Steps:

1.
Enter up to five PLUs for each combo.
2.
Press an arrow key to go to the next combo.

24. COMBO FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-233
File Maintenance
List
1. While in the Combo File, press the arrow keys to find the combo you wish to list.
COMBO01 Desc _
2. Press [List].
Sample Combo File Listing
10/04/02
COMBO FILE
10:07
COMBO# DESCR
BEGIN DISCOUNT - END DISCOUNT
PC EE ID BL SFR I TAX
TOTAL
12 12
1234
PLU#
DESC
PRICE
---------------------------------------01
SNACK COMBO
01/01/02 18:00 - 01/29/02 23:59
07 00 NN NN NNN NN NNNN
0.94
000000000145/002 SGL COOKIE
0.39
000000000145/003 PINT 2% MILK
0.55
Header Details:
PC: Product code
EE: Fee type
ID1-ID2: Identification required
1: Cust ID 1
2: Cust ID 2
BL1-BL2: Blue laws
S: Special discount
F: Pay by food stamp
R: Refund allowed
I: All items on receipt
Tax 1234: Tax applied
Delete a Combo
1. Press [LIST] to review the existing combo.
10/04/02
COMBO FILE
10:07
COMBO# DESCR
TOTAL
12 12
1234
PLU#
DESC
PRICE
---------------------------------------01
SNACK COMBO
01/01/02 18:00 - 01/29/02 23:59
0.94
000000000145/002 SGL COOKIE
0.39
000000000145/003 PINT 2% MILK
0.55
2. Press the arrow keys to find the combo you wish to delete.
COMBO01 Desc TEST COMBO
October 4, 2002
3-234 Manager
3. When the correct combo is found, press [*] then [ENTER].

COMBO01 Desc *
4. Press [LIST] to confirm the deletion.

10/04/02
COMBO FILE
10:27
COMBO# DESCR
TOTAL
12 12
1234
PLU#
DESC
PRICE
---------------------------------------*** NO RECORDS FOUND ***

confirming Combo Deletion
Deleted Combo
Delete a PLU from a Combo

1. Press [LIST] to review the existing combos.
10/04/02
COMBO FILE
10:07
COMBO# DESCR
TOTAL
12 12
1234
PLU#
DESC
PRICE
---------------------------------------01
SNACK COMBO
01/01/02 18:00 - 01/29/02 23:59
0.55
000000000145/002 SGL COOKIE
0.39
000000000145/003 PINT 2% MILK
0.55
2. Press the arrow keys until the correct combo appears.

COMBO01 Desc TEST COMBO
3. Press [ENTER] until the PLU you want to delete appears.

COMBO01 PLU1 000000000145
*MANAGER MENU*
4. On the first digit of the PLU number, press [*]and then [ENTER].
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-235
10/04/02
COMBO FILE
10:07
COMBO# DESCR
TOTAL
12 12
1234
PLU#
DESC
PRICE
---------------------------------------01
SNACK COMBO
01/01/02 18:00 - 01/29/02 23:59
0.55
000000000145/003 PINT 2% MILK
0.55
October 4, 2002

Confirming Deletion of the PLU
from the Combo
Deleted PLU
3-236 Manager
Combo File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Combo File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Combo File Steps section to enter the information into
the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-237
Combo File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Combo # and Name:

Begin Date
Special Discount
Begin Time
Blue Law1 check
End Date
Blue Law2 check
End Time
All items on Receipt
Product Code
PLU 1 Name
Price
PLU 1 Price
Fee Type
PLU 2 Name
Tax 1
PLU 2 Price
Tax 2
PLU 3 Name
Tax 3
PLU 3 Price
Tax 4
PLU 4 Name
Refund Allowed
PLU 4 Price
Pay by Food Stamp
PLU 5 Name
ID1 Check
PLU 5 Price
ID2 Check
October 4, 2002
Value
3-238 Manager
Mix File
3
Use the Mix File function to set up mixes to use in the Match File. The Mix File holds up
to 20 mixes with a maximum of ten PLUs in each.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating mixes.
Limits
The following limits have been established for combo, mix, and match files:
Altogether 100 PLUs may be set up in the Combo File and Mix File.
A single transaction can have no more than 40 combo items and mix n match
discounts.
Mix n Match Setup

1. Set up, or review the setup, for the PLUs to be entered into the mix records. (Refer
to PLU File for set-up instructions.) When assigning PLUs to mix records, keep
the following in mind:
The same PLU can be assigned to more than one mix but those mixes cannot
be assigned to the same match.
Do not assign a PLU to the same mix more than once.
Use only PLUs which are assigned to departments with the parameter
Negative Department? set to N in the Dept File.
PLUs with fees/charges assigned to them do not receive discounts on the fees/
charges.
Use only PLUs which have the PLU Promotion parameter set to Y. If the
PLU is used in a promotion, then the Ruby terminal charges the promotion
price and the item no longer meets the match standards.
2. Create the mix following the steps listed in the Mix File steps.
PLU Set up
Mix File Set up
3. Use the Match File function to set up the discounts. Refer to Match File in the
next section.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-239
VeriPASS
PLUs set up for VeriPASS Club or EPC programs cannot be used in a Combo or Mix File.
However, if Combo and Mix File PLUs are in a VeriPASS Loyalty department, they can
both earn Loyalty dollars and be redeemed for Loyalty dollars.
Mix File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Mix File function from any point in the application and then
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Mix File function
displays.
25. MIX FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
MIX01 Desc TEST MIX 01

New mix record: Press an arrow key to reach an empty mix record. Key a
name between 1 and 16 characters.
Existing mix record: Press an arrow key until the desired mix file appears.
4. Key the modifier for a PLU and press [MODIFY].
5. Press [ENTER].
6. Key the PLU number and press [Select]. One of the following occurs:
If the PLU exists, the next PLU displays for information entry.
If it does not exist, E3004 INVALID INPUT appears briefly. Choose another
PLU.
MIX02 PLU2
000000000000

Press [ENTER] to set up another PLU in the same mix file. Repeat steps 4 and
6 until all the PLUs for the mix are keyed.
Repeat steps 3 through 6 to set up another mix.
October 4, 2002
3-240 Manager
Press [EXIT] to return to the Manager menu. When exiting, a File Change
message with the name of the file logs on the journal.
25. MIX FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-241
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the Mix File:
List
While in the Mix File, press [List] to print the contents.
Sample Mix File Listing
10/04/02
MIX FILE
10:07
MIX# DESCR
PLU#
DESCR
-------------------------------------01
SOFT DRINK SPECIAL
000000000151/000 SMALL DRINK
000000000241/001 MEDIUM DRINK
02
COFFEE SPECIAL
000000000026/000 LARGE DECAF
000000000026/005 SMALL DECAF
000000000026/006 MEDIUM DECAF
Delete a Mix
1. Press the arrow keys to find the mix you wish to delete.
MIX01 Desc SOFT DRINK SPECIAL
2. On the first letter of the title of the mix press [*] and then [ENTER].
MIX01 Desc *
3. Press [List] to confirm the deletion.

10/04/02
MIX FILE
10:07
MIX# DESCR
PLU#
DESCR
---------------------------------------02
COFFEE SPECIAL
000000000026/000 LARGE DECAF
000000000026/005 SMALL DECAF
000000000026/006 MEDIUM DECAF
October 4, 2002

Confirming Deletion of MIX01
SOFT DRINK SPECIAL
3-242 Manager
Delete a PLU from a Mix

1. Press the arrow keys until the correct mix appears.
MIX01 Desc SOFT DRINK SPECIAL

MIX01 PLU1 000000000145
*MANAGER MENU*
3. On the first digit of the PLU number, press [*]and then [ENTER].
MIX01 PLU1 000000000000
*MANAGER MENU*
4. Press [List] to confirm the deletion.

10/04/02
MIX FILE
10:07

Confirming Deletion of the SMALL
DRINK PLU in MIX01
MIX# DESCR
PLU#
DESCR
---------------------------------------01
SOFT DRINK SPECIAL
000000000241/001 MEDIUM DRINK
02
COFFEE SPECIAL
000000000026/000 LARGE DECAF
000000000026/005 SMALL DECAF
000000000026/006 MEDIUM DECAF
Mix File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Mix File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Mix File Steps section to enter the information into the
system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-243
Mix File Worksheet

Item #
Mix # and Name:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Mix # and Name:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
October 4, 2002
PLU/Modifier
Description
3-244 Manager
Match File
3
Use the Match File to set up special discounts for items whose PLUs are assigned to
mixes. (Refer to Mix File.) As sales transactions take place, the Ruby terminal tracks the
PLUs that qualify for mix n match pricing. When the standards are met, a match is made
and a discount price applies. The Match File can contain up to 50 records and each match
record can have up to five mix records in it.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating matches.
Assigning PLUs
You can put the same PLUs in different mixes and use the same mixes in different
matches. However, if two mix records contain the same PLU, you cannot assign both to
the same match. For instance, if a medium soda was assigned to two different mix records,
those mix records cannot be assigned to the same match record.
If a PLU in a mix record is also used in a promotion, then the Ruby terminal charges the
promotion price when the customer purchases it then the item no longer meets the match
standards.
Refer to Mix File for other guidelines on assigning PLUs to the mix records used in the
match records.
Processing Refunds
An item is returnable if the PLU Refundable parameter in the PLU File is set to Y. To
gain a full refund, all of the following must be true:
The entire match must be returned.
The match time period must be in effect.
The match record must still be in the Match File.

The Ruby terminal recognizes that a match exists and applies the discount price to the
transaction. The Ruby terminal cannot recognize a match, if any of these conditions is not
met. In such a case, follow your sites policy for processing refunds.
Setting Match Record Order
The order of match records within the Match File affects the number of matches found
during a sales transaction. Position the match that you want to sell most often at the
beginning of the file. Set up the next most important one as Match #02, the third most
important as Match #03, and so on.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-245
The Ruby terminal searches the matches in record order and applies the discount to the
first match it finds. When multiple quantities of an item are sold and only one is required
to form a match, the Ruby terminal compares the remaining quantities with other mix n
match combinations for possible discounts.
Setting Prices
A matchs discount price (the total of the separate PLUs discount prices) recalculates
when the match standards are changed. For example, if you replace a more expensive PLU
with a less expensive one in a mix, the price for the match changes.
Setting up Matches
Use the following diagram and procedure to set up the Match File:
1. Set up, or review the setup, for the PLUs to be entered into the mix records. (Refer
to PLU File for set-up instructions.)
2. Create the mixes to be used in the match. The mix files contain the PLUs that are
sold. Refer to Mix File for instructions.
3. Set up the matches. Be sure to place the matches you want to sell the most near the
beginning of the Match File.
PLU Set up
Mix File Set up
Match File Set up
Voids and Error Corrections

When [VOID LINE] or [ERROR CORR] is used to remove an item from the receipt but
that item is needed for a match that the Ruby software had already made, then the items no
longer form a match. When this occurs, the Ruby terminal recalculates all the totals and
the subtotal.
T
T
T
Descr.
-----CHEESEBURGER
FRENCH FRIES
ICED TEA
1
TV FRENCH FRIES
qty
--1
1
1
amount
-----2.00
1.20
1.10
-------Sub Total
4.30
LUNCH Discount
-0.70
Sub Total
3.60
1
-1.20
-------Sub Total
3.10
Tax
0.22
TOTAL
CASH $
Change $
October 4, 2002
3.32
10.00
-6.68
3-246 Manager
Examples
The following examples show how mix and match files are used:
Example 1: Buy three items and get a discount
Example 2: Buy three and get one free
Example 3: Buy many and get a discount on all

Example 1: Buy three and receive a discount
A manager wants to sell the combination of any sandwich, any medium side dish, and any
medium drink for a reduced price. Sandwich options include a hamburger, cheeseburger,
chicken sandwich, or fish sandwich. Medium side dish options include an order of french
fries, onion rings, or steak fries. Medium drinks include cola, root beer, lemonade, or iced
tea.
1. Mix File: Set up three mixes: one for sandwiches, one for side orders, and one for
drinks. Include the PLU numbers for each item in its group.
Example 1 Worksheet
Item #
Item Description
Original Price
Mix 1 - Sandwich
Match Price
$1.90
Hamburger
$2.00
Cheeseburger
$2.25
Chicken Sandwich
$1.99
Fish Sandwich
$2.10
Mix 2 - Medium Side Dishes
$1.00
French Fries
$1.20
Onion Rings
$1.30
Steak Fries
$1.25
Mix 3 - Medium Drinks
$0.70
Cola
$1.10
Root Beer
$1.10
Lemonade
$1.10
Iced Tea
$1.10
2. Match File: Set up a match using the three mixes defined above. Set up one match
with three mixes. Enter the quantity of 1 for each mix in the match. The price of
an item from Mix 1 - Sandwiches is $1.90. The price of a side dish is $1.00 and a
drink is $0.70. The Ruby terminal calculates and displays the total price for the
match.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-247
3. Sales mode: The cashier sells a cheeseburger, french fries, and an iced tea. The
Ruby terminal first displays the total based on the original price. When the Ruby
software recognizes that a match has been sold, it applies the discount price to the
total. The tax recalculates based on the new, discounted total. An additional line on
the receipt prints indicating the name of the match and the amount of the discount.
T
T
T
1
Descr.
-----CHEESEBURGER
FRENCH FRIES
ICED TEA
qty
--1
1
1
amount
-----2.00
1.20
1.10
-------Sub Total
4.30
LUNCH Discount
-0.70
Sub Total
3.60
Tax
0.25
TOTAL
CASH $
Change $
October 4, 2002
3.85
10.00
-6.15
3-248 Manager
Example 2: Buy three and receive one free

A manager wants to offer a dessert free when three food items are sold at regular price.
This setup assumes that the items you enter into each mix have about the same price.
1. Mix File: Set up a mix for the each of the qualifying food items, similar to the
items shown in the table below.
Example 2 Worksheet
Qty #
Item Description
Original Price
Match Price
Mix 1 - Sandwich
$2.99
Roast Beef
$3.19
Turkey Breast
$2.99
Tuna Salad
$2.99
Mix 2 - Salad
$1.79
Garden Salad
$1.79
Caesar Salad
$1.89
Mix 3 - Fried Side

1
$0.99
French Fries
$0.99
Mix 4 - Dessert
$0.00
Apple Pie Slice
$1.00
Carrot Cake Slice
$1.00
2. Match File: Set the quantity to 1 and the price to the original price for each mix
except Mix 4 - Dessert.
3. Match File: For Mix 4 - Dessert, set the quantity to 1 and the price to $0.00.
4. Sales mode: When the cashier enters the items into a transaction, the Ruby
terminal prints the original price for each item then reduces the total by a $1.00 for
the Mix 4 - Dessert item.
T
T
T
T
1
Descr.
-----ROAST BEEF
GARDEN SALAD
FRENCH FRIES
CHERRY PIE SLICE
qty
--1
1
1
1
Sub Total
LUNCH SPH Discount
Sub Total
Tax
amount
-----2.99
1.79
0.99
1.00
-----6.77
-1.00
5.77
0.42
TOTAL 6.19
Cash
Change $
7.00
-0.81
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-249
Example 3: Buy many and receive a discount

A manager wants to offer a discount when a customer purchases at least 10 packs of
generic cigarettes.
1. Mix File: Set up a mix with the generic cigarettes PLU. Assign a quantity of 1
and a price of $2.15.
Example 3 Setup
Item
Match 1 - 10 PACK
Mix 1 - Generic Cigs
Qty
Original Price
Match Price
10
--
$19.00
2.15
--
2. Match File: Set up a match with this mix in it. Assign a quantity of 10 and a
price of $1.90.
3. Sales mode: When a customer purchases cigarettes, the cost per packup to a
quantity of nineis $2.15. If a customer purchases 10 packs of cigarettes, the
price is $1.90 per pack. The Ruby terminal recognizes the match, displays the
discounted price, and prints it on the receipt.
T
1
Descr.
-----CIGARETTES
qty
--10
amount
-----21.50
-------Sub Total
21.50
10 PACK Discount
-2.50
Sub Total
19.00
Tax
1.33
TOTAL
20.33
CASH $
Change $
October 4, 2002
25.33
-5.00
3-250 Manager
Match File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Match File function from any point in the application and then
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Match File function
appears.
26. MATCH FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
MATCH01 Desc _
3. Choose a match to define using one of the following methods:

Press an arrow key until the desired existing match appears.
Press an arrow key until an empty match record appears.
4. Enter or edit the indicated information for each parameter.
MATCHnn Begin Date mmddyy
Note:
nn is the match file number.
Description: The date this match configuration starts.

Values:
Date.
the date is less than 10, enter a zero. For example, if the date is January 8,
2002, key [0] [1] [0] [8] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Begin Time hhmm

Description: The time of day the match begins.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.

time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-251
MATCHnn End Date mmddyy

Description: The date the match ends.
Values:
Date.
the date is less than 10, enter a zero. For example, if the date is January 8,
2002, key [0] [1] [0] [8] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn End Time hhmm

Description: The time the match ends.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.

time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Price
d.cc
d.cc
Description: The price of the match calculated by the Ruby from the price of the mixes
that you enter below.
Note:
This is a read-only value.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 9999.99.
Steps:
Press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
MATCHnn Mix01# nn XXXXX

Description: nn, the number of the first mix which you want in this match record.
Mix01# refers to the first mix in this match, not to MIX01. XXXXX
changes to the name which was assigned to the mix using the Mix File
function when you enter the numeric value for this parameter.
Values:
Numeric, 01 - 20.
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Mix01 Quantity (No Fractions) nn

Description: The number of mix items which must be purchased to qualify for the
discount.
Values:
October 4, 2002
0 - 99.
3-252 Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Mix01 Price
d.cc
d.cc
Description: The price of the items in the mix record.

Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to enter another mix for this
match. You can enter up to five mixes for each match record.
2.
Press an arrow key to go to another match.
3.
Go to step 5.

Description: nn, the number of another mix which you want in this match record.
Mix02# refers to the second mix in this match, not to MIX02. XXXXX
Values:
Numeric, 01 - 20.
Steps:

1.
2.

discount.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Mix02 Price
d.cc
d.cc

Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
3.
Go to step 5.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-253

Description: nn, the number of another mix in this match record. Mix03# refers to the
third mix in this match, not to MIX03. XXXXX changes to the name
which was assigned to the mix using the Mix File function when you enter
the numeric value for this parameter.
Values:
Numeric, 01 - 20.
Steps:

1.
2.

discount.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Mix03 Price
d.cc
d.cc
Description: The discounted price of the items in the mix record.

Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
3.
Go to step 5.

Description: nn, the number of another mix which you want in this match record.
Mix04# refers to the fourth mix in this match, not to MIX04. XXXXX
Values:
Numeric, 01 - 20.
Steps:

1.
2.

discount.
October 4, 2002
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
3-254 Manager
MATCHnn Mix04 Price
d.cc
d.cc

Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
2.
3.
Go to step 5.

Description: nn, the number of the last mix which you want in this match record.
Mix05# refers to the last mix in this match, not to MIX05. XXXXX
Values:
Numeric, 01 - 20.
Steps:

1.
2.

discount.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
MATCHnn Mix05 Price
d.cc
d.cc

Values:
Numeric, 0.01 - 9999.99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to return to the first parameter.
2.
5. Press [EXIT] to return to the Manager menu. A File Change message displays
and the file name logs to the journal.
26. MATCH FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-255
File Maintenance
List
1. While in the Match File, press the arrow keys to find the match you wish to list.
MATCH01 Desc SAND SPEC
2. Press [List].
Sample Match File Listing
10/04/02
MATCH FILE
10:07
MATCH# DESCR
DEAL PRICE
MIX#
DESCR
QTY
PRICE
---------------------------------------01
BUY 3 GET 1
4.98
11/01/00 18:00 - 11/30/00 23:59
01
SANDWICHES
1.99
04
FRIED SIDE
1.00
05
SALAD
1.99
03
DESSERT
0.00
02
LUNCH SPECIAL
11/01/00 18:00 - 11/30/00 23:59
01
SANDWICHES
02
DRINKS
04
FRIED SIDE
3.60
2.25
0.60
0.75
Repeats for other match records
Delete a Match
1. Press the arrow keys to find the match you wish to delete.
MATCH01 Desc LUNCH SPECIAL
2. The cursor positions automatically on the first letter of the title of the match. Press
[*] and then press [ENTER].
MATCH01 Desc *
October 4, 2002
3-256 Manager

10/04/02
MATCH FILE
10:07

Confirming Match Deletion
MATCH# DESCR
DEAL PRICE
MIX#
DESCR
QTY
PRICE
---------------------------------------*** No Records Found ***
Delete a Mix File within a Match File

1. Press the arrow keys until the correct match appears.
MATCH01 Desc BRKFST SPECIAL

MATCHNN PLU1 000000000145
*MANAGER MENU*
3. The cursor positions automatically on the first digit of the number, press [*].
10/04/02
MATCH FILE
10:07

Confirming Deletion of PLU
MATCH# DESCR
DEAL PRICE
MIX#
DESCR
QTY
PRICE
---------------------------------------07
BRKFST SPECIAL
1.25
11/01/00 18:00 - 11/30/00 23:59
11
LG COFFEE
.50
15
EGG BISCUIT
.75
Note:
The cost of the match automatically recalculates when a mix file is

deleted from a match file.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-257
Match File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Match File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Match File Steps section to enter the information into the
system.
October 4, 2002
3-258 Manager
Match File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
MATCH # and Name:

Begin Date
Mix 02 Mixnn Price
Begin Time
Mix 03 Mixnn Name
End Date
Mix 03 Mixnn Quantity
End Time
Mix 03 Mixnn Price
Price
Mix 04 Mixnn Name
Mix 01 Mixnn Name
Mix 04 Mixnn Price
Mix 01 Mixnn Price
Mix 05 Mixnn Name
Mix 02 Mixnn Name
Mix 05 Mixnn Price
MATCH # and Name:

Begin Date
Mix 02 Mixnn Price
Begin Time
Mix 03 Mixnn Name
End Date
End Time
Mix 03 Mixnn Price
Price
Mix 04 Mixnn Name
Mix 01 Mixnn Name
Mix 04 Mixnn Price
Mix 01 Mixnn Price
Mix 05 Mixnn Name
Mix 02 Mixnn Name
Mix 05 Mixnn Price
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-259
POP Discount File

3
The POP (Point of Purchase) feature allows you to sell fuel at discounted prices on a
transaction-by-transaction basis. You can select from five options to configure the
requirements for a qualifying transaction and assign the discount that applies. You can also
allow a customer to make a qualifying purchase and apply the discount to a subsequent
fuel purchase up to 30 days later. Additionally, you can print coupons based on a minimum
fuel purchase in order to promote inside sales purchases; these coupons can be configured
to print at the DCR or inside at the Ruby terminal.
Overview
The POP Discount File function allows you to define the requirements that a transaction
must meet in order to earn a POP discount. The same discount definition can be used in
more than one record.
Transaction requirements can be configured in the following five ways:
Purchase of a defined quantity of a specific PLU item
Payment with a specific credit card type
Payment with a specific MOP
Purchase of a minimum amount and/or quantity (volume) from a specific

department
Purchase of a minimum pre-tax transaction total

Note:
A purchase of a minimum amount and/or quantity from a specific

department earns either a fuel discount or a coupon for an inside
purchase. All other qualifying purchases may earn codes.
When a purchase qualifies for a POP Discount, but does not include a fuel purchase of a
specified grade, the Ruby terminal can issue a POP code. The code prints on the receipt
with a note telling the customer what the code is for and when it expires.
The POP Report lists the amount of discounts redeemed by fuel grade. Refer to the Flash
Reports chapter of the Reports Reference for more information.
Configuring for Different Pump Types

POP discounts are configured differently depending on dispenser types. The standard
configuration may be used for sites with Dresser/Wayne and Tokheim dispensers, and for
some sites with Schlumberger dispensers. The alternate configuration must be used for all
sites with Gilbarco dispensers, and should be used for sites with Schlumberger dispensers
that encounter performance slowdowns with the standard configuration.
October 4, 2002
3-260 Manager
With the standard configuration:
Up to two POP cents-off discounts may be set for each grade and type of fuel.
Either of these two discounts may be set for each grade and type of fuel for up to
10 POP discount setups.
The site may use POP discounts and cash/credit pricing at the same time.
With the alternate configuration:
Only one POP discount price is available for each grade and type of fuel.
This discount price is set using the cents difference set up in the cash/credit pricing
parameters.
Either POP discounts or cash/credit pricing may be used at any time, but not both
together.
Note:
The preliminary steps in Manager mode are the same for both standard and
alternate configurations.
See the Fuel Manager chapter for details on setting up the appropriate configuration.
Considerations
When setting up or changing a POP discount, consider the following:
Two configurations exist for setting up POP discounts. The configuration you must
choose depends on your dispenser types.
The POP Discount File uses the information in the POP Discount Table and
POP Definition Table set up in Fuel Manager > POP Discount.
The POP Discount Enable parameter must be set to Y in Manager >

Configuration > Sales Config.
Do not define Special Discounts, Foodstamps, VeriPASS, Electronic Food Stamps,

Coupons, or Electronic Benefits Transfer (EBT) to the POP Discount File; they are
processed automatically as non-disqualifying. (See Mutiple MOPs later in this
chapter for more information.)
Note: These MOPs vary depending on your application.

Car wash PLUs can be used; however, the car wash function must be installed and
enabled.
Thirty days is the maximum number of days a code is valid.
If a transaction qualifies for more than one POP discount, the first one set up in the
POP Discount File applies.
When a qualified credit card is used at the DCR, the pump authorizes the sale at
the discounted price.
When a transaction at the DCR earns a coupon award, the coupon prints at the
DCR or Ruby terminal; however, it can only be redeemed inside at the Ruby
terminal.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-261
A code can be generated for use in a subsequent fuel purchase.

A customer can provide a code, redeem a POP discount, and earn another code all
in the same transaction. This could occur for both inside and outside sales.
A PLU with a fee/charge can be used.
Do not use PLUs that are assigned to a negative department.
If the PLU Promotion parameter in the PLU File is set to Y for a PLU that is
also used in a POP discount, the PLU still qualifies for the POP discount.
If a POP Discount Type parameter is configured for a minimum purchase or
minimum department purchase, only the net price charged is considered for the
discount.
Limits
The following limits apply for POP discounts:
No more than a total of 10 POP discounts can be configured.
Only one POP discount per transaction can be awarded.
Only one coupon format can be configured per site.
Up to two discount levels per fuel grade can be defined; each with a third implied
discount level of NONE (or $0.00 discount).
Multiple MOPs
By default, certain MOPs are already set up in the Ruby terminal as non-disqualifying.
Non-disqualifying MOPs do not prevent a discount from occurring if a customer
chooses to pay with two MOPs. Those MOPs, which by default are non-disqualifying,
are 07 Coupons, 13 Food Stamps, 16 Special Discount, 17 Electronic Food Stamps,
18 VeriPASS, 26 EBT Food Stamps, 27 EBT Cash Benefits, and 28 Manual EBT
CB.
Note:
These MOPs vary depending on your application.
Other MOPs may be configured as non-disqualifying, but they must be set up as

follows:
To set up an MOP so that it does not cancel out a discount when used with a qualified
MOP, the Definition ID must be set to 0 for the unqualified MOP. Keep this in mind for
those customers who pay with multiple MOPs just to qualify for a POP discount. Then,
when a sale is entered, the Ruby terminal checks the POP Discount File configuration to
determine if the sale qualifies for a discount.
October 4, 2002
3-262 Manager
The following are examples of how you could configure discounts to handle multiple
MOPs:
Example 1: Pay with Cash and Receive a POP Discount

A customers total amount due is $20.00. He pays $.05 in cash and $19.95 with a
check. He will not receive a POP discount if you do nothing to configure the check
MOP. For this sale not to be eligible for a POP discount, configure the POP
Discount File as follows:
Pay with Cash: No Award Earned Setup
Customer
pays
MOP
Award
Type
Definition
ID
Discount
Type
$0.05
cash
code
01
2-MOP
$19.95
check
not set up
not set up
not set up
Discount
Awarded?
No
However, if you do want the sale to be valid for a POP discount, configure the
check MOP Definition ID to 00 in the POP Discount File. This setup defines the
check MOP as non-disqualifying and the sale is eligible for a POP discount:
Pay with Cash: Award Earned Setup
Customer
pays
MOP
Award
Type
Definition
ID
Discount
Type
$0.05
cash
code
01
2-MOP
$19.95
check
none
00
2-MOP
Discount
Awarded?
Yes
Example 2: Pay with Prepaid Card and Receive a POP Discount

A customers total is $18.00, and he does not have enough money on his prepaid
card to pay for the purchase. He uses his debit card to complete the purchase. To
award the customer a POP discount, configure the debit MOP as nondisqualifying.
Pay with Prepaid Card: Award Earned Setup
Customer
pays
MOP
Award
Type
Definition
ID
Discount
Type
$10.00
Prepaid Card
code
04
2-MOP
$8.00
Debit Card
none
00
2-MOP
Discount
Awarded?
Yes
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-263
If, instead, you do not want to award a POP discount in this multiple MOP
situation, do nothing in the setup of a debit MOP within the file, as shown:
Pay with Prepaid Card: No Award Earned Setup
Customer
pays
MOP
Award
Type
Definition
ID
Discount
Type
$10.00
Prepaid Card
code
04
2-MOP
$8.00
Debit Card
not set up
not set up
not set up
Discount
Awarded?
No
Example 3: Pay with Specific Credit Card and Receive a POP Discount
A customers total is $25.50. She pays $22.00 with her credit card and $3.50 with a
coupon. Since coupons are non-disqualifying by default, it is not necessary to set
them up with a Definition ID value of 00. Therefore, the customer is awarded the
discount.
Note:
Default non-disqualifying MOPs do not print on the listings. Only

those MOPs you set as non-disqualifying print.
Pay with Specific Card: Award Earned by Default Setup
Customer
pays
MOP
Award
Type
Definition
ID
Discount
Type
$22.00
Credit Card
code
02
2-MOP
$3.50
coupon
not set up
not set up;

defaults to
00
not set up
Discount
Awarded?
Yes
Refunds
If a transaction is refunded in which a POP discount was applied, refer to your sites
policies regarding refunds.
Soft Key Assignment
A soft key may be assigned to produce a Free POP Award for a customer, at the clerks
discretion. For example, a clerk could issue a POP code or coupon to a customer who
returned after being incorrectly charged for an item on a previous visit.
This key is located in the Other Keys subfunction in the Soft Key File.
Note:
October 4, 2002
If the store does no have an available soft key to use, the FREE POP
AWARD function can be accessed from the OTHER FUEL function soft
key.
3-264 Manager
POP Discount File Steps

Use these steps to reach the POP Discount File function from any point in the application
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the POP Discount File
function appears.
27. POP DISCOUNT FILE
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select] or [ENTER].

POPnn Descr _
3. Do one of the following to set up a POP Discount:

Press the arrow keys to reach an empty POP Discount record. Key a new POP
discount name. Press [ENTER].
Press the arrow keys until the desired existing POP Discount appears.
POPxx Beginning Date mmddyy
Description: The date the POP discount program starts.
Values:
Date.
September 1, 2002, key [0] [9] [0] [1] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
2.
POPxx Beginning Time hhmm

Description: The time the POP discount program starts.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.

time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-265
POPxx End Date mmddyy

Description: The date the POP discount program ends.
Values:
Date.
September 1, 2002, key [0] [9] [0] [1] [0] [2].
Steps:

1.
2.
POPxx End Time hhmm

Description: The time the POP discount program ends.
Values:
Numeric, 0000 - 2359.

time is 3:00 P.M., key [1] [5] [0] [0].
Steps:

1.
2.
POP Award Type

Description: Determines the type of award earned when the transaction requirements are
met.
Note:
The option,2. CODE is a valid entry only if the POP Discount Code
Enable parameter is set to Y in Manager > Configuration > Sales Config.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 3
1. NONE: Any discount earned must be redeemed in the same transaction
for a fuel purchase of the appropriate grade.
2. CODE: When a transaction qualifies for a discount but does not include a
fuel purchase of the appropriate grade, the system generates a code and
prints it on the receipt. The code is then used to redeem a discount on a
subsequent fuel purchase of the appropriate grade within a predefined
number of days.
3. COUPON: When the transaction qualifies, the award earned is a printed
coupon that must be redeemed inside at the Ruby terminal.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
3-266 Manager
POP Discount Definition ID xx

Description: Identifies which discount (previously defined) applies when specific
requirements are met in a transaction.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 10.
0: Does not qualify for a POP discount.
Note:
This value corresponds to the POP definitions set up in Fuel Manager >
POP Discount > POP Definition Table (e.g., DEF01; the 01 is the
Discount Definition ID).
Steps:

1.
2.
Discount Type x
Description: Determines how a transaction qualifies for the discount identified by the
POP Discount Definition ID entry.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 5
1. PLU
2. MOP
3. Credit Card
4. Min Purchase
5. Min Dep Purch
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Key the Discount Type and press [ENTER].

Discount Type __
1. PLU
3. Credit Card
5. Min Dep Purch
2. MOP
4. Min Purchase
2.
Follow the appropriate steps to set up the selected Discount Type.

a. PLU Discount - Configure a POP discount based on a PLU purchase.
For example, customers who purchase a Deluxe Car Wash get a 5
cents-per-gallon discount on a Premium fuel purchase.
Note: PLU scanning is accepted, as well as entry of modifiers with
PLU numbers.
1.) Key [1] to select a Discount Type of PLU and press
[ENTER].
PLU# 000000000000
0 NAME __
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-267
2.) Key the quantity needed to receive the discount.

PLU Qty __
3.) Press [ENTER] to return to the POP Discount description

window
POPnn Descr _
4.) Press the arrow keys to go to another record or press [EXIT] to

*MANAGER MENU*
b. MOP Discount - Configure a POP Discount based on a specific

method of payment. For example, customers who pay with cash
receive discounts on select fuel products.
Note: See Mutiple MOPs earlier in this chapter before you set up
POP Discounts based on an MOP.
1.) Key [2] to select a Discount Type of MOP Press [ENTER]..
MOP Number xx [NAME]
__
2.) Key in the two-digit MOP number (not the MOP Code). (To find
the correct number, refer to the MOP File, locate the appropriate
MOP, and note the number on the far left. This is the number you
should enter.)
3.) Press [ENTER] to return to the POP Discount description
window.
POP02 Descr _

*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-268 Manager
c. Credit Card - Configure a POP Discount based on the use of a

specific credit card type. For example, customers who use their
YourStore credit card receive a 2 cents-per-gallon discount on any
fuel purchase.
1.) Key [3] to select a Discount Type of Credit Card. Press
[ENTER]. The card type menu displays.
Card Type
NAME
__
2.) Press the arrow keys to search for the desired card type.
3.) Press [ENTER] to return to the POP Discount Name display.
POPnn Descr _

*MANAGER MENU*
d. Minimum Purchase - Configure a POP Discount based on a

minimum purchase amount. For example, during the month of
September, customers who purchase a minimum of $20.00 receive a
3 cents-per-gallon discount on premium fuel or a 2 cents-per-gallon
discount on all other fuel grades.
1.) Key [4] to select Discount Type of Min Purchase and press
[ENTER].
Minimum Amount _
2.) Key in the Minimum Amount (value: 0 - 9999999999).

3.) Press [ENTER].
POP04 Descr _

*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-269
e. Minimum Department Purchase - Configure a POP Discount based

on a minimum purchase within a specific department. For example,
customers who purchase $10.00 worth of grocery items get a 2 centsper-gallon discount on premium fuel or 1 cent-per-gallon discount on
all other fuel grades.
Note: Any fuel grade purchase with a qualifying minimum amount or
volume, must be defined as its own department.
1.) Key [5] to select Discount Type of Min Dep Purch and press
[ENTER].
Dept # 0000
2.) Key the department number in which to set up the discount and
press [ENTER].
Min Type (A=Amount, Q=Quantity) __
3.) Do one of the following:

Key [A] to select a discount based on a minimum dollar
amount.
Key [Q] to select a discount based on a minimum quantity
(volume).
Minimum Amount __
4.) Key the minimum amount (value: 0 - 9999999999). Press

[ENTER] to return to the POP Discount menu.
POPnn Descr __

*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-270 Manager
File Maintenance
List
1. While in the POP Discount File, press the arrow keys to find the POP discount you
wish to list.
POP01 Descr _
2. Press [List].
Sample POP Discount File Listing
10/04/02
POP DISCOUNT CONFIG
10:07
ID
DESCR
AW-TYP
DEF ID TYPE
DISC START
DISC END
QUALIFYING PURCHASE INFO
---------------------------------------01 CW DEAL
CODE
01
1-PLU
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
9039 CAR WASH
MIN PURCH = 1410065
Header Details:
ID:
AWD-TYP: Award type
1. NONE
2. CODE
3. COUPON
DEF ID: ID definition
01: Cust ID 1
02: Cust ID 2
TYPE: Discount type
1. PLU
2. MOP
3. Credit Card
4. Min Purchase
5. Min Dep Purch
DISC START: Start date
DISC END:
End date
02
CHK MOP
NONE
00
2-MOP
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
CHECK
03
VISA DEAL CODE

04
3-CARDTYPE
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
VI VISA
04
DISCOVER
NONE
05
3-CARDTYPE
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
DS DISCOVER
05
MIN AMT
CODE
06
4-MIN PURC
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
MIN PURCH = 100
06
MIN DEP AM COUP

00
5-DEPT
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
9005 DAIRY
MIN PURCH = 050 AMT
07
MIN EP QT COUP
00
5-DEPT
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
9042 PREM.
MIN PURCH = 005 VOL
08
MILK PLU
NONE
09
1-PLU
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
000000000031
MILK
QTY=02
09
ALLOW MOP NONE

00
2-MOP
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
DEBIT
IDs 02 and 09 are set up as

Non-disqualifying MOPs; their
Definition IDs are set to 00.
10
MC DEAL
NONE
01
3-CARDTYPE
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
MC MASTERCARD
Note: The default MOP non

disqualifiers will not print on
this listing; only those
manually set up print here.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-271
Delete a POP Discount

1. Press [LIST] to review the existing POP Discount.
10/04/02
POP DISCOUNT CONFIG
ID
01
10:07
DESCR
AW-TYP
DEF ID TYPE
DISC START
DISC END
CW PLU
COUP
00
4-MIN PURC
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
MIN PURCH = 100
02
CHK MOP
CODE
10
4-MIN PURC
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
MIN PURCH = 050
03
VISA DEAL CODE

04
3-CARDTYPE
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
SN SINCLAIR
.
.
.
10
MC DEAL
CODE
09
1-PLU
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
000000000174
BRAKE FLUID QTY=50
2. While in the POP Discount File, press the arrow keys to find the POP discount you
wish to delete.
POP02 Descr CHK MOP
3. When the correct POP discount is found, press [*] then [ENTER].
POP02 Descr *

ID
01
02
Not Used
03
VISA DEAL CODE

04
3-CARDTYPE
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
SN SINCLAIR
.
.
.
10
October 4, 2002
DESCR
AW-TYP
DEF ID TYPE
DISC START
DISC END
CW PLU
COUP
00
4-MIN PURC
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
MIN PURCH = 100
MC DEAL
CODE
09
1-PLU
01/02/02 01:00 06/02/02 13:00
000000000174
BRAKE FLUID QTY=50

confirming deletion
Deleted discount
3-272 Manager
POP Discount File Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the POP Discount File for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
2. Follow the steps in the POP Discount File Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-273
POP Discount File Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
POP # and Name:

Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
Discount Definition ID
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
POP # and Name:
Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
POP # and Name:
Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
POP # and Name:
Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
POP # and Name:
Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
POP # and Name:
Begin Date
Award Type
Begin Time
End Date
Discount Type
End Time
October 4, 2002
Value
3-274 Manager
POP Discount Coupon

3
The POP Discount Coupon function allows you to set up one coupon using up to three
lines of information that automatically print at the DCR or at the Ruby terminal whenever
a qualified fuel sale is made. The transaction requirements to earn coupons are defined in
Manager > POP Discount File.
Note:
Changes to the POP Discount Coupon file print to the journal.
The following information prints:

Sample POP Discount Coupon
10/04/02
10:07
POP DISCOUNT COUPON
---------------------------------------LINE 1
SAMPLE COUPON INFORMATION
LINE 2
CONTINUATION OF INFORMATION
LINE 3
AND MORE INFORMATION
Considerations
Only one coupon format is available per site.

Only lines containing actual characters print on the coupon. A line that contains
only spaces prints as a blank line.
A deleted line does not print.
Lines containing less than 20 characters are automatically centered.
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-275
POP Discount Coupon Steps

Use these steps to reach the POP Discount Coupon function from any point in the
1. At the Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the POP Discount Coupon
function appears.
28. POP DISCOUNT COUPON
*MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
LINE 1 _
3. Edit the first line or press the arrow keys until the line of information you want to
change appears.
4. Key the line of information (1 - 20 characters) to be printed as a coupon receipt
and press [ENTER]. You will receive a message reminding you to download your
new changes to the DCRs.
Requires DCR Download
<Press ENTER Key to Acknowledge> _
5. Press [ENTER] to acknowledge the reminder and move to the next display.
Note:
LINE 1
To download changes to the DCRs, run Fuel Manager > Initialize DCRs.
50 CENTS OFF MERCH
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return to the

Manager menu.
28. POP DISCOUNT COUPON
*MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
3-276 Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the POP Discount Coupon function, press [LIST] to print the current discount
coupon information.
Sample POP Discount Coupon
10/04/02
10:07
POP DISCOUNT COUPON
---------------------------------------LINE 1
50 CENTS OFF MERCH
LINE 2
PURCHASE OF $10
LINE 3
OR MORE
POP Discount Coupon Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the POP Discount Coupon for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
2. Follow the steps in the POP Discount Coupon Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
Manager 3-277
POP Discount Coupon

Information to Print on Receipt
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
October 4, 2002
3-278 Manager
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
Fuel Manager mode contains functions which define fuel control and sales conditions.
Note:
If you make a change to any of the parameters in the first 10 functions,

always run the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function, followed by the
Initialize DCRs > All DCRs function. These steps send the changes you have
made to the pumps and DCRs. Do both steps even if you have only made a
change to a fuel parameter or to a DCR parameter, but not to both.
Tank Names
Product Configuration
Product Code Setup
Product ID Setup
Pump Configuration
Fuel Product Prices
DCR Configuration
Cash Acceptor Configuration
Site Parameters
Initialize Fuel
Initialize DCRs
Clear Pumps On Hold
Reset Controller
RFID Configuration
POP Discount
Note:
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager mode is only available on standalone or controlling terminals.
4-2 Fuel Manager
Start Fuel Manager Mode

Use these steps to enter Fuel Manager mode from any point in the application. Then refer
to the chapter that describes the fuel function you wish to run.
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Fuel Manager mode appears.
[ FUEL MANAGER ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

1. TANK NAMES
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
6. Continue with the appropriate Fuel Manager function.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-3
Tank Names
4
The Tank Names function defines one to eight tanks by name for the fuel tanks at the site
and designates which tanks are manifolded.
Note:
This function should only be used when the system is first installed or if
changes are made to the available products.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up tank names.
Sending Changes to the Pumps
If the changes you make to the Tank Names function are the last ones to be made in the
Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function, followed
by the Initialize DCRs > All DCRs function. These steps send changes you have made to
the pumps and the DCRs.
Manifolded Tanks
If you have manifolded tanks at your site, you must designate the primary tank for each
fuel product. The primary tank is manifolded to itself. The secondary tank is manifolded
to the primary tank.
For your reference when setting up this function, make a list of all primary tanks and the
tanks that are manifolded to them.
Naming Tanks
Tank names can be one to six characters long. The name should describe the contents of
the tank. For example, if a tank contains diesel fuel, name the tank DIESEL.
If you have tanks that are not used, do not name the unused products NONE. This
name is reserved for indicating that no product is serving a hose in the Hose Assignments
function. Name the unused tanks something general or leave them with the default names
(e.g., tank06, tank07). For example, if the eighth tank is not used, call it tank08 or
unused.
Each product in the Product Configuration function is defined as either fuel from one tank
or as a combination of two tanks. The tank names defined in Tank Names are used to
create the product.
October 4, 2002
4-4
Fuel Manager
Reports
The Blend Product report contains a listing of the blended products and the tank
names used to create the products. This is only used by sites that support blended
fuel products.
The Tank Monitor report reads and prints information on the status (level,
temperature, etc.) of each tank by tank name. This is used by sites that have tank
level sensors.
The Tank Reconciliation report compares the beginning and ending contents of
each tank. This is used by sites that have tank level sensors.
Refer to the Reports Manual for more details on these reports.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-5
Tank Names Steps for Non-manifolded Tanks

Use these steps to reach the Tank Names function from the Fuel Manager menu and then
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Tank Names
function appears.
1. TANK NAMES
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. tank01 Manifold? [Y/N] N
2. tank02 Manifold? [Y/N] N
* TANK NAMES *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > is pointing at the tank name you wish to change.
4. Key the new name (one to six characters) and press [ENTER].
Note:
Never assign the name NONE to a tank.
>1. REGLR1 Manifold? [Y/N] N

* TANK NAMES *
5. Key [No] [ENTER] if the tank is not manifolded to another tank.

>1. REGLR1 Manifold? [Y/N] N
* TANK NAMES *
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 to change another non-manifolded tank name OR press

[EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
1. TANK NAMES
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
7. If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, run the
Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the pumps.
October 4, 2002
4-6
Fuel Manager
Tank Names Steps for Manifolded Tanks

Use these steps to reach the Tank Names function from the Fuel Manager menu and then
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Tank Names
function appears.
1. TANK NAMES
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. tank01 Manifold? [Y/N] N
* TANK NAMES *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > is pointing at the tank name you wish to change.
Note:
Never assign the name NONE to a tank.
1. REGLR1 Manifold? [Y/N] N

* TANK NAMES *
5. Press [Yes] and [ENTER] if the tank is manifolded to another tank.

Note:
If the tank is not manifolded to another tank, follow the procedure on the
previous page.
6. If necessary, press the arrow keys until the name of the primary tank appears in the
right column.
7. Press [ENTER].
1. REGLR1 Manifold? [Y/N] Y REGLR1
* TANK NAMES *
8. Press the arrow keys until the > is in front of the manifolded (secondary) tank for
that product.
>2. tank02 Manifold? [Y/N] N
* TANK NAMES *
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-7
9. Key the manifolded product name (one to six characters) and press [ENTER].
>2. MREGL1 Manifold? [Y/N] N
* TANK NAMES *
Note:
You may want to include an M at the beginning of the secondary tanks

name. In this example the primary tank is REGLR1 and the secondary
tank is MREGL1.
10. Press [YES] [ENTER] to indicate that the tank is manifolded to another tank.
11. Press the arrow keys until the name of the primary tank appears in the right column
and press [ENTER].
>2. MREGL1 Manifold? [Y/N] Y REGLR1
* TANK NAMES *

Repeat steps 3 through 11 to change another manifolded-tank name.
Press [EXIT] to return to return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
1. TANK NAMES
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
13. If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, run the
Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the pumps.
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Tank Names file:
List
While in the Tank Names function, press [List] to print the tank names.
Sample Tank Names Listing
10/04/02
FUEL TANK NAMES
10:07
# NAME
MANIFOLD
PRIMARY TANK
---------------------------------------1. tank01
Y
tank1a
2. tank02
Y
tank2a
3. tank03
Y
tank3a
4. tank04
Y
tank4a
5. tank05
Y
tank5a
6. tank06
N
7. tank07
N
8. tank08
N
October 4, 2002
4-8
Fuel Manager
Tank Names Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the tank names for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Tank Names Steps section to enter the information into
the system.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-9
Tank Names Worksheet

#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
October 4, 2002
Name
Manifold [Y/N]
Primary Tank
4-10
Fuel Manager
4
The Product Configuration function defines one to nine fuel products that are sold at the
site.
Note:
changes are made to the available products.
Considerations for All Dispensers

Consider these items before setting up products.
If the changes you make to the Tank Names function are the last ones to be made in the
Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function, followed
by the Initialize DCRs > All DCRs function. These steps send changes you have made to
the pumps and the DCRs.
Blended Products
If your site uses blended fuels, you can choose a percentage of two different tanks to
create the blended fuel. When you set the first tank to a percent less than 100, the second
tank choice appears. The second tank is automatically set to 100 minus the percent set for
the first tank.
If your site uses Dresser/Wayne dispensers, please refer to Dresser/Wayne Product
Configuration Considerations for additional information.
Fuel Product Prices
Prices are defined for each service level/MOP combination for each product defined in the
Product Configuration function.
Naming Products
Fuel product names can be one to six characters long. The name should describe the fuel
product. For example, if a fuel product contains mostly diesel fuel, name the fuel product
DIESEL or DIESL.
If you have products that are not used, do not name the unused products NONE. This
name is reserved for indicating that no product is serving a hose in the Hose Assignments
function. Name the unused products something general. For example, if the ninth product
is not used, call it prod09 or unused.
Pump Configuration: Hose Assignments
The products defined in the Product Configuration function are used to assign a product to
each hose that dispenses fuel.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-11
Pure Products
A pure product comes 100% from one tank. If you set a product to 100% from the first
tank, the second tank is not displayed.
Reports
The PR/Price Level Report lists fuel sales by product and method of payment.
The Tier/PR Report lists fuel sales by price tier and product.
The FP/Hose, FP/Hose Running, Dispenser, and Blend Product Reports list fuel
sales by fueling point and product.
Dresser/Wayne Dispensers Considerations

Sites which use Dresser/Wayne dispensers must set up fuel products in a specific manner.
Configure the Ruby terminal for non-blending and blending dispensers using the
following two steps:
1. Assign tank names using the Tank Names function in Fuel Manager mode. Tanks
are numbered 1 through 8. Use default tank names (e.g., tank07, tank08) to
identify unused tanks.
2. Assign fuel products using the Product Configuration function in Fuel Manager
mode. Fuel products are numbered 1 through 9.
Non-blending Dispensers
Use this setup if your system uses only pure, unblended products. Nine products,
numbered 1 through 9, are available. Refer to example 1 for a sample setup.
Example 1
A site has the following setup:
October 4, 2002
Tanks:
4 tanks
Products:
4 pure products - regular unleaded, midgrade

unleaded, highgrade unleaded, diesel
Dispensers:
1 three-product dispenser
1 one-product dispenser
4-12
Fuel Manager
1. Set up the tanks in the Tank Names function.

2. Use Product Configuration to set up the products as follows:
First Tank Used
Name
Tank Name
Percentage
Second Tank
Used
Tank Name
1. REG
REG
100
N/A
2. MID
MID
100
N/A
3. HIGH
HIGH
100
N/A
4. DIESEL
DIESEL
100
N/A
Note:
Products 1 through 3 are used by the three-product dispenser. Product 4

is used by the one-product dispenser. Products 5 through 9 are not used
and do not need to be defined.
To print a list of the product configuration, press [List].

Sample Product Configuration
Listing
10/04/02
FUEL PRODUCT CONFIGURATION
10:07
# NAME
TANK1
PCT
TANK2
---------------------------------------1. REG
REG
100%
2. MID
MID
100%
3. HIGH
HIGH
100%
4. DIESEL
DIESEL
100%
5. MID3
tank01
100%
6. MID4
tank01
100%
7. DIESL
tank01
100%
8. KERSN
tank01
100%
9. REG
tank01
100%
Blending Dispensers
Use this setup if one or more products are blended. The PIB requires that ALL nine
products be defined (product percentages assigned) even if they are not going to be used.
Products 1 through 3: Pure products, if used
Products 4 through 5: Products used to make blended products

Product 4 must be 100% from tank 4 and must be the product with the lower of
the two grades. Often tank 4 is named REG for regular unleaded, low,
regular, etc.
Product 5 must be 100% from tank 5 and must be the product with the higher
of the two grades. Tank 5 is often named HIGH for highgrade, premium,
supreme high, etc.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-13
Products 6 through 9: Products which are the result of blending percentages of

products 4 and 5
Whether they are used, you must assign blended products in order of
descending percentages of tank 4. This means that the first blended product
(product 6) has the highest percentage of product 4. Product 7 has the next
highest percentage of tank 4. Product 8 has the next highest and product 9 has
the lowest percentage of tank 4. (See examples 2, 3, and 4 below.)
If your site uses pure products, assign them positions 1, 2, or 3. Draw from the tank
in the same position.
Example 2
A site has the following setup:
Tanks:
2 tanks
Products:
2 pure products - regular unleaded,

highgrade unleaded
1 blended product - midgrade 1 unleaded
Dispensers:
1 three-product dispenser
1. Set up the tanks in the Tank Names function.

Tank Names
Number
Name
Number
Name
TANK01
TANK01
TANK05
HIGH
TANK02
TANK02
TANK06
TANK06
TANK03
TANK03
TANK07
TANK07
TANK04
REG
TANK08
TANK08
2. Use Product Configuration to set up the products as follows:

First Tank Used
Name
October 4, 2002
Tank Name
Percentage
Second Tank
Used
Tank Name
4. REG
REG
100
N/A
5. HIGH
HIGH
100
N/A
6. MID
REG
60%
HIGH
7. PROD07
REG
50%
HIGH
8. PROD08
REG
40%
HIGH
9. PROD09
REG
30%
HIGH
4-14
Fuel Manager
Note:
Products 1 through 3 are not used. Products 7 through 9 are uniquely

defined but not used.
To print a list of the product configuration, press [List].

10/04/02
10:07

Listing
# NAME
TANK1
PCT
TANK2
---------------------------------------1. UNUSED
NONE
100%
2. UNUSED
NONE
100%
3. UNUSED
NONE
100%
4. REG
REG
100%
5. HIGH
HIGH
100%
6. MID
REG
60%
HIGH
7. PROD07
REG
50%
HIGH
8. PROD08
REG
40%
HIGH
9. PROD09
REG
30%
HIGH
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-15
Product Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the Product Configuration function from the Fuel Manager menu
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Product
Configuration function appears.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%

T1 REGULR PCT 100%
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
* PRODUCT CONFIGURATION *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the product you wish to change.
1. REGULR T1 REGULR PCT 100%
>2. UNLD
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
Note:
Correct spelling of the fuel product name is very important for proper
operation of the Ruby terminal software. For example, if your site
dispenses diesel, always spell it as DIESEL or DIESL. If a name
change is the only operation performed, proceed to step 8.
5. Press the arrow keys to cycle through the available tank names. When the correct
tank appears, press [ENTER].
>2. UNLD
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
6. Key the percent of the tank that is used to create the product.
If the product is a pure product, key [1] [0] [0] [ENTER]. Go to step 7.
If the product is a blended product, key the percent of this first tank and press
[ENTER].
>2. UNLD
T1 REGULR PCT 80% T2 NONE
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
October 4, 2002
4-16
Fuel Manager
A second tank appears. Press the arrow keys to cycle through the available tank
names for the second tank. When the correct tank appears, press [ENTER].
T1 REGULR PCT 80% T2 SUPER
>2. UNLD
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 to change another product OR press [EXIT] to return to

the Fuel Manager mode menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
8. If these are the last changes you are making before exiting Fuel Manager mode,
run the Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the pumps.
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Product Configuration file:
List
While in the Product Configuration function, press [List] to print the current product
configuration.
10/04/02
10:07

Listing
# NAME
TANK1
PCT
TANK2
---------------------------------------1. REG
REGULR
100%
2. UNLD
REGULR
80% T2 SUPER
3. PREM
SUPER
100%
4. UNUSED
NONE
100%
5. UNUSED
NONE
100%
6. UNUSED
NONE
100%
7. UNUSED
NONE
100%
8. UNUSED
NONE
100%
9. UNUSED
NONE
100%
Change Product Order

Some software applications have preset products or product names that cannot be
changed. Some dispenser systems require that the products be in a specific order. You can
change the order of the products by using these steps.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-17
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%

T1 SUPER PCT 100%
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the first product you wish to switch. Press
[Select].
> 1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%

T1 SUPER PCT 100%
* Product 1 Selected *
4. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the second product you wish to switch
with the first. Press [Select].
1. UNLD
> 2. REG
3. PREM
T1 REGULR PCT 100%

T1 SUPER PCT 100%
* Swapping Prods 2 and 1
Product Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the products for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Product Configuration Steps section to enter the
3. Put the copies of the worksheet in the pocket at the back of the binder for future
reference.
October 4, 2002
4-18
Fuel Manager
Product Configuration Worksheet

#
Product Name
Tank 1
Percent of
Tank 1
Tank 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-19
Product Code Setup

4
The Product Code Setup function defines product codes for fuel products.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up product codes.
If the changes you make to the Product Code Setup function are the last ones to be made in
the Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function,
followed by the Initialize DCRs > All DCRs function. These steps send changes you
have made to the pumps and the DCRs.
Set up fuel product names in the Product Configuration file before entering product codes.
October 4, 2002
4-20
Fuel Manager
Product Code Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Product Code Setup function from the Fuel Manager menu
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Product Code
Setup function appears.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. UNLD
2. MID1
3. PREM
2 (UNLEAD
16 (MIDGRADE 1
3 (PREMIUM 1
* PRODUCT CODE SETUP *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the fuel product whose product code you
wish to change.
4. Key the product code (one to two digits) and press [ENTER].
1. UNLD
> 2. MID1
3. PREM
2 (UNLEAD
16 (MIDGRADE 1
3 (PREMIUM 1
* PRODUCT CODE SETUP *
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change another product code OR press [EXIT] to return
to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
6. If these are the last changes you are making before exiting Fuel Manager mode,
run the Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the pumps.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-21
File Maintenance
While in the Product Code Setup function, press [List] to print the product codes.
Sample Product Code Listing
10/04/02
PRODUCT CODE CONFIGURATION
10:07
# NAME
C# CODE
---------------------------------------1. UNLD
02 UNLEAD
2. MID1
16 MIDGRADE 1
3. PREM
03 PREMIUM 1
4. MID2
25 MIDGRADE 2
5. MID3
27 MIDGRADE 3
6. PREM2 30 PREMIUM 2
7. DIESL 31 PREMIUM 2 FS
8. KERSN 05 KEROSENE
9. DIESL2 34 DIESL 2 TAXED
AVAILABLE FUEL PRODUCT CODES
02
03
04
05
06
12
13
16
UNLEAD
PREMIUM 1
FUEL
KEROSENE
DIESEL
UNLEAD FS
PREMIUM 1 FS
MIDGRADE
etc.
Product Code Setup Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the product codes for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Product Code Setup Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
4-22
Fuel Manager
Product Code Setup Worksheet

#
Fuel Product
Product
Code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-23

4
The Product Department Setup function defines the department numbers for fuel products.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up department numbers.
If the changes you make to the Product Department Setup function are the last ones to be
made in the Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization
function, followed by the Initialize DCRs > All DCRs function. These steps send
changes you have made to the pumps and the DCRs.
Department File
Fuel department files must be set up in the Department File before entering information in
Product Department Setup. The Product Department Setup numbers should be the same as
the fuel department numbers.
Set up fuel product names in the Product Configuration file before entering department
numbers.
October 4, 2002
4-24
Fuel Manager
Product Department Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Product Department Setup function from the Fuel Manager
menu and then make changes to the information.
Department Setup function appears.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
0
0
0
* PRODUCT DEPT SETUP *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the fuel product whose department
number you wish to change.
4. Key the department number (1 - 9999) and press [ENTER]. The department name
automatically appears to the right of the department number.
1. REG
>2. UNLD
3. PREM
11 REG
0
0
* PRODUCT DEPT SETUP *
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change another department number OR press [EXIT] to

return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
6. If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, do the
following:
a. Run the Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the
pumps.
b. Run the Initialize DCRs function to send the changes you have made to the
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-25
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Product Department Setup file:
List
While in the Product Department Setup function, press [List] to print the product
departments.
Sample Product Department Listing
10/04/02
PRODUCT DEPT CONFIGURATION
10:07
# NAME
# DEPT
---------------------------------------1. REG
39 REG.
2. UNLD
40 UNLEAD
3. PREM
42 PREM.
4. MID1
41 MID
5. MID2
41 MID
6. MID3
41 MID
7. KERSN 44 KEROS.
8. DIESL 43 DIESEL
9. MID4
41 MID
Product Department Setup Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the product departments for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
2. Follow the steps in the Product Department Setup Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
4-26
Fuel Manager
Product Department Setup Worksheet

#
Fuel Product
Dept #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-27
Product ID Setup
4
The Product ID Setup function defines identification numbers for fuel products. This is
used in the following general situation:
A fuel company has more than nine fuel products available. It assigns a number
(1 - 99) to each product.
Each of the companys sites selects up to nine of the available products and defines
them in the Product Configuration function.
Each site enters the company-assigned number for each fuel product in the Product
ID Setup.
If the company uses back office software to gather data on fuel sales, then all fuel
product sales can be compared equally based on the Product IDs.
Example:
Company
ID
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Product
Leaded
Regular
Midgrade 1
Midgrade 2
Midgrade 3
Premium 1
Premium 2
Diesel
Kerosene
CNG
Back Office Data
Site 1 uses: 01
02
04
06
08
Leaded
Regular
Midgrade 2
Premium 1
Diesel
Site 2 uses: 01
02
04
06
07
08
10
Leaded
Regular
Midgrade 2
Premium 1
Premium 2
Diesel
CNG
The Company sets the Product IDs for each of its fuel products.
Site 1 sets up five products in the Product Configuration function. Site 1 then
assigns the company-assigned IDs to those five products in the Product ID
Setup function.
Site 2 does the same for its seven products.
The company then receives fuel sale data via backoffice software and can compare
the sales of fuel products by their product IDs.
October 4, 2002
4-28
Fuel Manager
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up fuel product ID numbers.
If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, run the
Initialize Fuel function after editing the product IDs to send the changes to the pumps.
Set up fuel product names in the Product Configuration file before entering identification
numbers.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-29
Product ID Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Product ID Setup function from the Fuel Manager menu and
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Product ID Setup
function appears.
5. PRODUCT ID SETUP
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
0
0
0
* PRODUCT ID SETUP *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the fuel product whose ID number you
wish to change.
4. Key the ID number (1 - 99) and press [ENTER].
1. REG
>2. UNLD
3. PREM
11
0
0
* PRODUCT ID SETUP *
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to change another ID number OR press [EXIT] to return to

the Fuel Manager mode menu.
5. PRODUCT ID SETUP
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
following
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
4-30
Fuel Manager
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Product ID Setup file:
List
While in the Product ID Setup function, press [List] to print the product ID numbers.
Sample Product ID Listing
10/04/02
PRODUCT ID CONFIGURATION
10:07
# NAME
ID
---------------------------------------1. REG
01
2. UNLD
02
3. PREM
03
4. MID1
04
5. MID2
05
6. MID3
06
7. KERSN 07
8. DIESL 08
9. MID4
09
Product ID Setup Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the product ID numbers for the first time. Refer to Setting Up
2. Follow the steps in the Product ID Setup Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-31
Product ID Setup Worksheet

#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
October 4, 2002
Fuel Product
ID #
4-32
Fuel Manager
Pump Configuration
4
The Pump Configuration function defines how each of up to 32 pumps operates and which
fuel products dispense through their hoses.
Note:
changes are made to the dispenser setup.
Considerations
Consider these items before defining pump operation.
If the changes you make to the Pump Configuration function are the last ones to be made
in the Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function,
Attributes
Review all the parameters in the Attributes function and decide how you want your system
to run. Use the Attributes worksheet in Setting Up Your System.
Hose Assignments
You can only assign fuel products to the pumps that have been turned on in the Attributes
function in Pump Configuration by setting the Access parameter to Y.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-33
Start Pump Configuration

Use these steps to reach the Pump Configuration function from the Fuel Manager menu.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Pump
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. ATTRIBUTES
2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS
* PUMP CONFIGURATION *
3. Continue with either the Attributes or Hose Assignments function OR press

[EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
Initial Pump Configuration

You can start selling fuel quickly by following these steps the first time you enter the
Pump Configuration function. You can go back later to set up more specific options for
fuel pumps and dispenser card readers.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Pump
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
How many pumps are there? [1-32]
3. This sets the Access parameter in Attributes in Pump Configuration to Y for

the number of pumps you enter. Key the number of fuel pumps at your site and
press [ENTER].
October 4, 2002
4-34
Fuel Manager
Note:
If your pumps are not numbered consecutively beginning with 1, key the
number of the highest pump number. For example, if your pumps are
numbered 7 through 12, enter 12. Go back and disable the pump
numbers that do not exist.
Do they all have DCRs? [Y/N]

Press [Yes] if all of your fuel pumps have dispenser card readers. The
terminal automatically enables DCR sales at all pumps. The DCR in
dispenser and Pay at pump parameters in DCR Attributes in DCR
Configuration are set to Y.
Press [No] if only some pumps have dispenser card readers OR if there are
none. You must manually enable the DCR for each pump that has one using the
DCR Attributes function in DCR Configuration.
5. The following screen displays.
> 1. ATTRIBUTES
2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS

Continue with the Attributes function (discussed next).
Continue with the Hose Assignments function (discussed later in this section).
Press [EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
Start fuel sales right away by pressing [EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager
menu and then running the Initialize Fuel function and the Initialize DCRs
function.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-35
Attributes Steps
The Attributes function sets up how each pump at the site operates.
1. At the Pump Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the > points at the
Attributes function.
> 1. ATTRIBUTES
2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS
2. Press [Select].
PUMP #01
* SET ATTRIBUTES *
3. Press the arrow keys until the pump number you wish to set up appears. Press
[Select].
> 1. Access [Y/N]
2. Preset prepay [Y/N]
3. Preset postpay [Y/N]
* ATTRIBUTES FP #01 *
Y
Y
Y

1. Access [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This pump can be accessed by the Ruby terminal.
No: This pump cannot be accessed by the Ruby terminal.
Steps:

1.
2.
2. Preset prepay [Y/N]

Description: A preset/prepay fuel sale, also called a prepay fuel sale, occurs when the
cashier presets fuel for a specific dollar or volume amount and the customer
must pay for the fuel before it can be dispensed. This type of fuel sale uses
the [PREPAY] key.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Prepay fuel sales can be done on this pump.
No: Prepay fuel sales cannot be done on this pump.
October 4, 2002
4-36
Fuel Manager
Steps:

1.
2.
3. Preset postpay [Y/N]

Description: A preset/postpay fuel sale, also called a preset fuel sale, occurs when the
cashier presets fuel for a specific dollar or volume amount and the customer
can then pay for the fuel either before or after it is dispensed. This type of
fuel sale either uses the [FUEL PRESET] key or the Fuel Preset option of
the [OTHER FUEL] key.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Preset fuel sales can be done on this pump.
No: Preset fuel sales cannot be done on this pump.
Steps:

1.
2.
4. Stacking [Y/N]
Description: One fuel sale may remain uncollected while a second fuel sale dispenses and
completes.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The pump can accept two due fuel sales at one time.
No: The pump only allows one due fuel sale at a time.
Steps:

1.
2.
5. First in/first out [Y/N]

Description: This parameter requires that the Stacking parameter be set to Y.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The first sale that becomes due on this pump must be cashed out first.
No: Either sale on the pump can be cashed out first.
Steps:

1.
2.
6. Autoapproval [Y/N]
Note:
The first sale must be cashed out before a second sale can be autoapproved.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashiers approval is not required before the customer can dispense
fuel from this pump.
No: A cashier must approve a sale as a preset, as a prepay, or by pressing
[APPROVE] before the customer can dispense fuel from this pump.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-37
Note:
If you set Autoapproval to Y and DCR Configuration > Handle Up

Calling to Y, unintentional drive-offs may occur.
Steps:

1.
2.
7. Autocollect [0-2] (0=Disable)

Description: An employee outside collects payments directly from the customer at the
pump as at a full service island. The Autocollect report for the period shows
the totals for these sales.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 2.
0: NONE (Disabled) - Collect any type of MOP payment inside at the Ruby
terminal only.
1: CASH - Collect cash payments only at this pump.
2: ALL - Collect any type of MOP payment at this pump.
Steps:

1.
2.
8. Autodisapproval [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: An approved pump switches to disapproved status if it remains inactive
for the period of time set in the Delay autodisapproval [0-10] parameter in
the Fuel Site Parameters.
No: If this pump is approved, it stays approved until it is manually changed.
Note:
In DCR transactions, the pump disapproves after three minutes regardless of

this setting or that of the Delay autodisapproval parameter. Prepays never
time out.
Steps:

1.
2.
9. Mode [$/G] ?
Description: The units in which the pumps fuel is measured. Use this parameter with the
Limit parameter.
Values:
$ or G.
$: The pumps limit is measured in dollars.
G: The pumps limit is measured in gallons.
October 4, 2002
Note:
If this parameter is set to G and a customer prepays for fuel, the limit
becomes the amount of money tendered by the customer, not the amount set
in the Limit parameter.
Steps:

1.
2.
4-38
Fuel Manager
10. Limit
Description: The maximum amount that the pump dispenses in one sale. Use this
parameter with the Mode parameter.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 999.99 dollars or gallons.
Note:
The current limit appears to the right of the parameter.
Steps:

1.
2.
11. Slow flow

Description: The point at which the pump slows the flow of fuel as it approaches the
preset amount. The value depends on the pump brand.
Values:
Numeric, 2 - 9999.
Gilbarco: This value is set at the pump. Settings at the Ruby terminal do not
affect the pump.
Tokheim: The slow flow value is multiplied by 0.05 times the volume units
(gallons or liters).
Dresser/Wayne: The slow flow value is multiplied by 0.001 gallons.
Steps:

1.
2.
12. Default service level

Description: This is the default service level assigned to this pump.
Values:
Predefined service level types, SELF, FULL, and MINI (in areas where
self service is not permitted).
Steps:

1.
Press [Select] until the desired value displays and press [-->] to
go to the next item.
2.
13. Default MOP

Description: This is the default method of payment type assigned to this pump.
Values:
Predefined MOP types, CASH, CRED, and CHEC.
Steps:

1.
Press [Select] until the desired value displays and press [-->] to
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-39
14. Blend type

Description: This is used for sites which blend fuel. Blending can be set at either the
pump or at the Ruby terminal (using the Product Configuration function).
Values:
Predefined fuel blending types, ELEC, FIX, MECH, NONE, VARI.

ELEC: Electrical Blender (Tokheim only): Can be set at either the pump or
the terminal as a fixed blend percentage.
FIX: Fixed Blender (Dresser/Wayne or Gilbarco only): can be set at either
the pump or the terminal. It requires a three-product dispenser that uses two
pure products (one high grade and one low grade) to create a third, blended
product. This is a fixed blend percentage.
Gilbarco - 0% to 100% in 1% increments.
Dresser/Wayne - 1% to 99% in 1% increments.
MECH: Mechanical Blender (Tokheim only): can be set at the terminal as a
fixed blend percentage in a range of 5% to 95% in 5% increments.
NONE: Blending is not used. For Schlumberger, use this setting.
VARI: Variable Blender (Tokheim, Dresser/Wayne, or Gilbarco): can be set
at the terminal and is used with a three- to five-product pump.
Gilbarco - 1% to 99% in 1% increments.
Tokheim - 0% to 100% in 1% increments.
Dresser/Wayne - 1% to 99% in 1% increments.
Steps:

1.
Press [Select] until the desired value appears then press [-->] to
2.
15. View Buzzer Off [Y/N]

Description: This parameter affects sites with DCRs. It is usually used during a prepay
when the customer lifts the handle, leaves the nozzle off the pump, and
comes inside to pay.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: When [VIEW] is pressed, the beeping at the Ruby terminal stops; the
request for approval continues.
No: Beeping at the Ruby terminal continues until the customer has paid.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-40
Fuel Manager
16. Ignore Pump Error [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether a pump resumes service after an authorization failure.
Sites that have full-service attendants at the pumps, but no cashier inside at
the Ruby terminal, use this feature to provide full-service autocollect.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: If an authorization fails, the Ruby terminal automatically continues to
approve the transactions on the pump without a cashier pressing
[APPROVE]. For this feature to work, set Autoapproval to Y,
Autocollect to 2, and Default service level to Full.
No: If an authorization fails, a cashier must press [APPROVE] to start the
next transaction on the pump.
Steps:

1.
2.

To define another pump, press [EXIT] and repeat steps 3 and 4. If you just
defined a pump, you have the option of setting the next one exactly like the one
you just completed. Press [Yes] or [No] and then press [ENTER].
Same as Pump 01 [Y/N] ?
To return to the Pump Configuration menu, press [EXIT] [EXIT].

> 1. ATTRIBUTES
2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS
To return to the Fuel Manager menu, press [EXIT] [EXIT] [EXIT].

*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
following:
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-41
Hose Assignment Steps

The Hose Assignment function sets up the products that are dispensed from each hose at
each pump. One to six hoses can be defined for each pump that was set up in the Attributes
section. Assign product name NONE to hoses that do not exist or are not used.
1. At the Pump Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the > points at the
Hose Assignments function.
1. ATTRIBUTES
> 2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS
2. Press [Select].
> 1. REG
UNLD
2. REG
UNLD
3. DIESL NONE
PREM
PREM
NONE
* HOSE
NONE NONE NONE

NONE NONE NONE
NONE NONE NONE
ASSIGMENT *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the pump number of the hoses (fuel
products) you wish to change. There may be more than one screen of choices.
Press [ENTER].
4. For each hose of the pump, do one of the following:
Press the arrow keys until the fuel product to be dispensed from that hose
appears. Press [ENTER] to select the fuel product and go to the next hose.
Press [ENTER] to go to the next hose without making changes.
Repeat step 4 to change the fuel product of another hose.
Press [EXIT] and repeat steps 3 and 4 to change the fuel products for another
hose.
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Pump Configuration menu.
1. ATTRIBUTES
> 2. HOSE ASSIGNMENTS
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager menu.

*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
6. Run the Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the pumps.
October 4, 2002
4-42
Fuel Manager
File Maintenance
While in the Pump Configuration function, press [LIST] to print the current Pump
Attributes and Hose Assignment settings. To print a list of a particular submenu, press
[LIST] when the display shows the parameters in the submenu.
Sample Pump Configuration Listing
10/04/02
PUMP ATTRIBUTES
10:07
---------------------------------------FP
LIMIT
SLOW
SERVICE DEFAULT
FLOW
LEVEL
MOP
---------------------------------------1. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
2. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
3. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
4. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
5. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
6. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
7. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
8. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
9. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
10. $ 500.00
6
SELF
CASH
---------------------------------------V
P
A B I I
F
P R
F A A U L E G
U
R E S I U U T E W N
E
E S T F T T O N
O
L
A S
A O O O
D B R
C
P C
D
U E
P
C P O K R A C I T Z
U
E R S I E P O S Y Z E
M
S E T N Q P L A P E R
P
S P P G D R L P E R R
---------------------------------------01. Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N
02. Y Y Y Y N N N N N N N
While in a Pump Configuration submenu (Attributes or Hose Assignments), press

[List] to print a list of that submenu.
10/04/02
PUMP/HOSE ASSIGNMENT
10:07
Sample Pump Configuration Submenu

Listing (Hose Assignments)
---------------------------------------FP HOSE1 HOSE2 HOSE3 HOSE4 HOSE5 HOSE6

---------------------------------------1. REG
UNLD PREM MID1 NONE NONE
2. REG
3. REG
4. REG
5. REG
6. REG
7. REG
8. REG
9. REG
10. REG
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-43
Pump Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the pumps for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your System
Complete the following three steps in this section:
1. Complete the Attributes worksheet.
2. Complete the Hose Assignments worksheet.
3. Complete the Initial Pump Configuration steps the first time you start this function.
Attributes
2. Follow the Initial Pump Configuration steps.
3. Follow the steps in the Attributes Steps section to enter the worksheet
Hose Assignments
2. Follow the Initial Pump Configuration steps.
3. Follow the steps in the Hose Assignments Steps section to enter the worksheet
information into the system
October 4, 2002
4-44
Fuel Manager
Pump Attributes Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
Pump#:
Access
Mode
Preset prepay
Limit
Preset postpay
Slow flow
Stacking
Default service level
First in/first out
Default MOP
Autoapproval
Blend type
Autocollect
View buzzer off
Autodisapproval
Ignore Pump Error
Pump#:
Access
Mode
Preset prepay
Limit
Preset postpay
Slow flow
Stacking
First in/first out
Default MOP
Autoapproval
Blend type
Autocollect
View buzzer off
Autodisapproval
Ignore Pump Error
Pump#:
Access
Mode
Preset prepay
Limit
Preset postpay
Slow flow
Stacking
First in/first out
Default MOP
Autoapproval
Blend type
Autocollect
View buzzer off
Autodisapproval
Ignore Pump Error
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-45
Hose Assignments Worksheet

Pump
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
October 4, 2002
Prod 1
(Hose 1)
Prod 2
(Hose 2)
Prod 3
(Hose 3)
Prod 4
(Hose 4)
Prod 5
(Hose 5)
Prod 6
(Hose 6)
4-46
Fuel Manager
Fuel Product Prices

4
The Fuel Product Prices function defines prices for each product at each combination of
service level and method of payment. FUEL CHANGES: Fuel Prices with the employee
number, date, and time prints on the journal whenever someone changes fuel prices in the
Ruby terminal.
Note:
Price changes do not take effect until the Initialize Fuel function is run.
Considerations
Consider these items before changing fuel prices.
Pricing Tiers
You can set two pricing tiers, or periods of time, in which different sets of fuel prices are
active. For example, you may use tier pricing if your site sells fuel products for different
prices during the day from those used during the night. To set up tier pricing, do the
following three steps:
1. Set the start time for tier 2 with the Start tier parameter in Fuel Manager > Site
Parameters > Fuel Site Parameters function.
2. Set the number of tier hours with the Number of tier hours parameter in Fuel
Manager > Site Parameters > Fuel Site Parameters function.
Note:
If you do not set the start time or the number of tier hours to a number
greater than 0, tier 2 prices do not appear in the Fuel Product Prices
function.
3. Set up prices for both tiers using the Fuel Product Prices function. If you do not set
prices for tier 2, the prices are the same as those set for tier 1.
Note:
If you are not using tier pricing, only set prices for tier 1.
Pump Configuration: Hose Assignments

Only the products that have been assigned to a hose in the Hose Assignments function in
Pump Configuration are available for pricing.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-47
Ignore MOP Conflict

Note:
If the Ignore MOP Conflict parameter is set to N and prices for cash and
credit are not the same, the dispensers must have separate [CASH] and
[CREDIT] keys to be compliant with US Weights and Measures
requirements.
If the Ignore MOP Conflict parameter in the Fuel Site Parameters function is set to Y,
no difference exists between cash and credit pricing. If this is the case, when a price is
entered for the cash MOP level of a product, the credit MOP level of the product
automatically changes to the same price. The credit price can still be changed to be a
different price if necessary.
Note:
If you are setting up POP discounts using the alternate configuration, you
may have to enter a cash price that is different from the credit price. (See the
POP Discount section, later in this chapter, for more information on
setting up the POP discount alternate configuration.)
Force .9 Cents Per Gallon

The setting of the Force .9 Cents Per Gallon parameter in the Fuel Site Parameters
function determines whether a 9 is automatically added to the third decimal place of the
fuel price.
October 4, 2002
4-48
Fuel Manager
Fuel Product Prices Steps

Use these steps to reach the Fuel Product Prices function from the Fuel Manager menu and
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Fuel Product
Prices function appears.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select]. If you have two-tier pricing set up, a choice of tiers appears.
> 1. TIER1
2. TIER2
* FUEL PRICES *
3.
Press the arrow keys until the > is pointing at the price tier you wish to change.
Press [Select]. A choice of products appears.
> 1. REG
2. UNLD
3. PREM
4. DIESL
* FUEL PRICES TIER1 *
4. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the product whose prices you wish to
change. There may be more than one screen of choices. Press [Select].
>1. SELF CASH 1.111
0.000
2. SELF CRED 1.121
3. SELF CHEC 1.131
* PRICES TIER1 REG
5. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the service level/MOP combination price
you wish to change.
6. Key the new price (between $0.000 and $9.999) and press [ENTER].
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to change another price for the product.
Press [EXIT] and then repeat steps 4 through 6 to change the prices of
another product.
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] and then repeat steps 3 through 6 to change the prices
in another price tier. If tier pricing is not set up, you return to the Fuel Manager
mode menu.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-49
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
8. If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, do one
of the following:
If you have edited product prices but no other functions, run
Fuel Manager > Initialize Fuel > Prices Only function.
Run the Initialize Fuel function to send the changes you have made to the
pumps, and run the Initialize DCRs function to send the changes you have
made to the DCRs.
Note:
October 4, 2002
Refer to the List function on the following page to confirm the price
change.
4-50
Fuel Manager
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Fuel Product Prices file:
List
While in the Fuel Product Prices function, press [List] to print the current fuel prices. If
you have two tiers set up and press [List] while at the tier menu, fuel prices for both
tiers print. When you are in an individual tier, only prices for that tier print.
10/04/02
FUEL PRICES
10:07
Sample Fuel Product Prices

Listing
---------------------------------------CASH
CRED
CHEC
---------------------------------------REG
SELF
1.111
1.121
1.131
REG
FULL
1.211
1.221
1.231
REG
MINI
1.311
1.321
1.331
UNLD
UNLD
UNLD
SELF
FULL
MINI
2.111
2.211
2.211
2.121
2.221
2.321
2.131
2.231
2.331
PREM
PREM
PREM
SELF
FULL
MINI
3.111
3.211
3.311
3.121
3.221
3.321
3.131
3.231
3.331
Fuel Product Prices Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the fuel prices for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. If you use a two-tier system, label the copies as Tier 1 or Tier 2.
3. Fill in a price for each product at each service level/MOP combination. The default
service levels and MOP names have been put in the worksheet. If you use a third
service level or MOP, please fill those in and assign prices.
4. Follow the steps in the Fuel Product Prices Steps section to enter the information
into the system.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-51
Fuel Product Prices Worksheet

Service
Level
MOP
Price
Service
Level
MOP
Product # and Name:
Product # and Name:
SELF
CASH
SELF
CASH
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CHECK
SELF
CHECK
FULL
CASH
FULL
CASH
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CHECK
FULL
CHECK
MINI
CASH
MINI
CASH
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CHECK
MINI
CHECK
Product # and Name:
Product # and Name:
SELF
CASH
SELF
CASH
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CHECK
SELF
CHECK
FULL
CASH
FULL
CASH
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CHECK
FULL
CHECK
MINI
CASH
MINI
CASH
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CHECK
MINI
CHECK
Product # and Name:
Product # and Name:
SELF
CASH
SELF
CASH
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CREDIT
SELF
CHECK
SELF
CHECK
FULL
CASH
FULL
CASH
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CREDIT
FULL
CHECK
FULL
CHECK
MINI
CASH
MINI
CASH
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CREDIT
MINI
CHECK
MINI
CHECK
October 4, 2002
Price
4-52 Fuel Manager
DCR Configuration
4
The DCR Configuration function defines general operating procedures for dispenser card
readers at the site.
Considerations
Cash Acceptors
Cash Acceptors are disabled when the Pay at the Pump parameter is set to N.
Enable DCR
The Enable DCR [Y/N] parameter in Network Manager > Configuration > Credit
Card Configuration determines whether a credit card is accepted at the DCR.
The Enable Hot DCR [Y/N] parameter in Network Manager > Configuration >
Credit Card Configuration determines whether a customer can begin fueling before a
purchase is authorized by the network for a specific credit card.
Full-Service Preset without [CASH] Key
If your dispensers do not have a [CASH] key and you want the full-service preset prompt
to display when the customer lifts the handle of an idle pump, do the following:
Set the Handle Up Calling parameter to N.

Set the Full Service Preset at Pump parameter to Y.
Set the Autocollect parameter to 0.
Sending Changes to the DCRs

If the changes you make to the Pump Configuration function are the last ones to be made
in the Fuel Manager mode, perform the Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization function,
Setting the Primary Graphic Side for Gilbarco Dispensers
If your site has Gilbarco dispensers with graphics, you must designate one DCR on each
pump as the primary DCR. Set the primary DCR with the Primary graphic side [1-32]
parameter, described later in this section.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-53
For example, if your site has eight pumps and each pump has two sides, A and B, you
probably number the sides 1 - 16. If pump 1 has A side numbered as 1 and B side
numbered as 2, set the Primary graphic side parameter to 1 for side A and side B. On
pump 2, which has sides A and B numbered as 3 and 4, set Primary graphic side to
3 for both A and B. On pump 3 set Primary graphic side to 5 for both sides and so on.
Remember three important points regarding setting the primary side:
Setting more than one side on the same pump as primary stops the pump
from working. In other words, do not set side A to 1 and side B to 2.
Setting a side as primary on one pump has no effect on other pumps. You must set
one side as primary for each pump.
If the DCR stops working on the side designated as primary, you must set the other
side as primary for the graphics to display on the working DCR.
Start DCR Configuration

Use these steps to reach the DCR Configuration function from the Fuel Manager menu.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR
8. DCR CONFIGURATION
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
*DCR SETUP MENU*
3. Continue with the appropriate DCR Configuration function.
October 4, 2002
4-54 Fuel Manager
DCR Attributes
The DCR Attributes function in DCR Configuration sets up specific information for each
dispenser card reader.
Steps
1. At the DCR Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Attributes function
appears.
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
*DCR SETUP MENU*
2. Press [Select].
DCR # 01
* DCR ATTRIBUTES *
3. Use the arrow keys to select the dispenser card reader you would like to configure
and press [Select].
> 1. DCR in dispenser [Y/N]
N
2. DCR out of service [Y/N]
N
3. Pay at pump [Y/N]
N
* DCR #01 ATTRIBUTES *

1. DCR in dispenser [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The fuel pump has a dispenser card reader.
No: The fuel pump does not have a dispenser card reader.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-55
2. DCR out of service [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The DCR is out of order. A message appears on the DCR telling the
customer to pay inside. The card reader and the receipt printer are disabled.
Downloads to the dispenser are not done.
No: The DCR is functioning normally.
Steps:

1.
2.
3. Pay at pump [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The fuel pump has a dispenser card reader and is available for use by
the customer.
No: Customers are not able to pay for fuel at the dispenser card reader OR
there is no dispenser card reader at this fuel pump.
Note:
Setting this parameter to N disables the cash acceptor.
Steps:

1.
2.
4. Pay at pump only [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Customers are only able to perform sales at the dispenser card reader.
No: The customers are able to perform sales at the dispenser card reader as
well as inside.
Steps:

1.
2.
5. Prepay only [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Only prepaid fuel sales are allowed. Some stores require fuel to be
prepaid after dark.
No: Fuel sales can be paid for either before or after the customer dispenses
fuel.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-56 Fuel Manager
6. Hot DCR mode [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: A customer is able to begin dispensing fuel at the DCR before their
credit card is fully authorized. This reduces the time the customer has to wait
before dispensing fuel. If the card is not fully authorized and the customer
has already dispensed fuel, the pump shuts off and the customer is prompted
to see the cashier inside.
No: A customer cannot dispense fuel at the DCR until their credit card is
fully authorized.
Steps:

1.
2.
7. Push to start button [Y/N]

Description: This parameter ensures that the correct instructions are displayed on the
DCR.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The dispenser has a button that must be pressed to begin fueling.
No: The dispenser has a lever or handle that must be raised to begin fueling.
Steps:

1.
2.
8. Grade select button [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The customer must select a type of fuel product by pressing a
corresponding button at a dispenser that dispenses multiple fuel products
from a single hose.
No: The hose at a dispenser only dispenses one type of fuel. The customer is
not required to press the corresponding button of the fuel they wish to
dispense.
Steps:

1.
2.
9. Instant On [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The pump is automatically approved for 20 seconds when the customer
presses a payment key at the DCR.
No: The pump is not automatically approved when a payment key is pressed.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-57
10. Lever On Pump [Y/N]

Description: This setting is used for sites that have DCRs where a dispenser has a grade
select button but not a lever.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The DCR prompts accurately reflect instructions for starting to fuel for
dispensers with a lever.
No: The DCR prompts accurately reflect instructions for starting to fuel for
dispensers without a lever.
Steps:

1.
2.
11. Handle Up Calling [Y/N]

Description: This setting determines when the DCR calls the cashier for approval to
dispense fuel. This setting is also dependent on the value of the Ignore
MOP Conflict parameter in the Fuel Site Parameters function.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The pump calls for approval to dispense fuel when the customer lifts the
handle. There must be no difference in cash and credit fuel prices. (Set
Ignore MOP Conflict parameter to Y.)
No: The pump calls for approval to dispense fuel when the customer presses
a payment key. This is used when: (1) A difference exists between cash and
credit fuel prices (set Ignore MOP Conflict parameter to N) and (2)
When the DCR keypad does not have a [CASH] key (Set Full Service
Preset at Pump to Y).
Steps:

1.
2.
12. Full Service Preset At Pump [Y/N]

Note:
If you are using the Autocollect Inside feature, set this parameter to Y.
Note:
Set this parameter to Y and the Handle Up Calling parameter to N if

the DCR keypad has no [CASH] key.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: If the customer uses credit, the cashier can preset the fuel amount up to
the cards floor limit. If an MOP other than credit is used, the cashier can
preset the fuel amount to the amount set in the Limit parameter in the
Attributes function in Pump Configuration. To skip setting an amount, the
cashier can press [ENTER].
No: Normal fuel sale procedures apply.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-58 Fuel Manager
13. Enable graphic support [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
14. Primary graphic side [1-32]

Note:
Gilbarco only.
Description: Because the graphics for both sides of a pump are operated by one controller,
you must select one and only one side of each pump as primary.
Note:
Refer to the example in the Considerations at the beginning of this section.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 32.
Steps:

1.
2.
15. Graphic keypad [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The pump has an extended keypad.
No: The pump has a single-line emulation keypad.
Steps:

1.
2.
16. Graphic display [M/C/N]

Values:
M, C, or N.
M: The display is in monochrome.
C: The display is in color.
N: The display does not have graphics.
Steps:

1.
2.
17. Graphic printer [Y/N]

Note:
Tokheim only.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The printer prints graphics.
No: The printer does not print graphics.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-59

Repeat step 4 to change the value of another parameter.
Press [EXIT] and repeat steps 3 and 4 to configure another dispenser card
reader.
Key [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the DCR Configuration menu.
1. DCR ATTRIBUTES
*DCR SETUP MENU*
6. If these are the last changes to be made to the DCRs before exiting Fuel Manager,
do the following:
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
4-60 Fuel Manager
DCR Receipt Header

The DCR Receipt Header in DCR Configuration defines the message that prints on the
first three lines of the DCR receipt.
Note:
If the header contains no text the receipts length is three lines shorter.
Steps
1. At the DCR Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Receipt Header
function appears.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
2. Press [Select].
LINE1:_
LINE2:
LINE3:
WELCOME
:
:
:
* DCR RECEIPT HEADER *
3. Do the following:
a. Press the arrow keys until the desired line is selected.
LINE1:
LINE2:_
LINE3:
WELCOME
:
:
:
b. Key the new message (up to 20 characters).

LINE1:
WELCOME
:
LINE2:TO OUR STORE_
:
LINE3:
:
c. Press [ENTER]. The line is automatically centered.

LINE1:
LINE2:
LINE3:_
WELCOME
TO OUR STORE
:
:
:
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-61
4. Repeat step 3 to change another message line OR press [EXIT] to return to the
DCR Configuration menu.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
run the Initialize DCRs function to send the changes you have made to the DCRs.
October 4, 2002
4-62 Fuel Manager
DCR Receipt Trailer

The DCR Receipt Trailer in DCR Configuration defines the message that prints on the last
three lines of the DCR receipt.
Note:
If the trailer contains no text the receipts length is three lines shorter.
Steps
1. At the DCR Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Receipt Trailer
function appears.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
2. Press [Select].
LINE1:_
LINE2:
LINE3:
THANK YOU
:
:
:
* DCR RECEIPT TRAILER *
a. Press the arrow keys until the desired line is selected.
LINE1:
LINE2:_
LINE3:
THANK YOU
:
:
:
b. Key the new message (up to 20 characters).

LINE1:
THANK YOU
:
LINE2:COME BACK SOON_
:
LINE3:
:
c. Press [ENTER]. The line is automatically centered.

LINE1:
LINE2:
LINE3:_
THANK YOU
COME BACK SOON
:
:
:
4. Repeat step 3 to change another message line OR press [EXIT] to return to the
DCR Configuration menu.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-63
October 4, 2002
4-64 Fuel Manager
Fueling/Promo Message
The Fueling/Promo Message in DCR Configuration defines the promotional message that
scrolls across the DCR display while the customer pumps fuel.
Steps
1. At the DCR Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the Fueling/Promo Message
function appears.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Fueling/Promo message (up to 80 chars)
WELCOME. THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING WITH US
TODAY.
* DCR FUEL/PROMO MESG *
3. Key the new message (up to 80 characters) and then press [ENTER].
*DCR SETUP MENU*
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-65
DCR Enable/Disable
The DCR Enable/Disable function in DCR Configuration enables or disables a DCR that
may be down for servicing. The customer must pay for fuel inside if the DCR is disabled.
Steps
1. At the DCR Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Enable/Disable
function appears.
*DCR SETUP MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. ALL DCRs
2. ONE DCR
* DCR ENABLE/DISABLE *
If you would like to enable or disable all of the DCRs at your site, follow the
instructions under 1. ALL DCRs below.
If you would like to enable or disable only one DCR, follow the instructions
under 2. ONE DCR below.
1. ALL DCRs
1. Press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of the ALL DCRs option and then
press [Select].
> 1. DISABLE ALL DCRs
2. ENABLE ALL DCRs
2. Use the arrow keys to select whether you would like to enable or disable the
pumps and then press [ENTER].
* DCR SETUP *
October 4, 2002
4-66 Fuel Manager
2. ONE DCR
1. Press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of ONE DCR and then press
[Select].
Disable/Enable one DCR [# then ENTER]_
2. Enter the pump number you would like to enable or disable then press [ENTER].
> 1. DISABLE DCR
2. ENABLE DCR
3. Use the arrow keys to select whether you would like to enable or disable the pump
and press [ENTER].
*DCR SETUP MENU*
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-67
File Maintenance
While in the DCR Enable/Disable menu, press [List] to print a list of the settings in
DCR Attributes, Fueling/Promo Message, DCR Receipt Header, and DCR Receipt Trailer.
To print a list of a particular submenu, press [List] when in the submenu.
Sample DCR Configuration Listing
10/04/02
DCR PARAMETERS
10:07
---------------------------------------DCR ATTRIBUTES
O
H P
U
P
A R
I T
A
S G
N E
N
P Y P
T R
D S
O A
R
A A I L L E
D F Y P E
R D N E E T
I
U P
T E S V
D
S S A M A H
T E U A
C
P E T P Y O B B A R P T
R
E R
T U U N
N V P O O
T T T P C P
N
S I U N N D T T
U A U
O
E C M L L C O O O M L M
.
R E P Y Y R N N N P L P
---------------------------------------01. Y Y Y N N N Y N N Y N N
02. Y Y Y N N N Y N N Y N N
G
R
F
X
G
R
F
X
G
R
F
X
G
R
F
X
G
R
F
X
D
C
R
E P
D P
N R K I R
A I E S I
B M Y P N
N
L A P L T
O
E R A A E
.
D Y D Y R
---------------------------------------01. Y Y Y N N
02. Y Y Y N N
03. Y Y Y N N
04. Y Y Y N N
1. Fueling/Promo message:
WELCOME. THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING WITH US
TODAY.
2. Pay at pump receipt header:
Line 1:
WELCOME
Line 2:
Line 3:
3. Pay at pump receipt trailer:
Line 1:
THANK YOU
Line 2:
HAVE A NICE DAY
Line 3:
October 4, 2002
4-68 Fuel Manager
DCR Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the DCRs for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your System
2. Follow the steps in the DCR Attributes, DCR Receipt Header, DCR Receipt
Trailer, and Fueling/Promo Message sections to enter the information into the
system.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-69
DCR Attributes Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
DCR#
In Dispenser
Lever On Pump
Out of Service
Handle Up Call
Pay at Pump
Preset at Pump
Pay at Pump Only
Enable Graphic Support
Prepay Only
Primary Graphic Side
Hot DCR
Graphic Keypad
Start Button
Graphic Display
Grade Button
Graphic Printer
Instant On
DCR#
In Dispenser
Lever On Pump
Out of Service
Handle Up Call
Pay at Pump
Preset at Pump
Pay at Pump Only
Prepay Only
Hot DCR
Graphic Keypad
Start Button
Graphic Display
Grade Button
Graphic Printer
Instant On
DCR#
In Dispenser
Lever On Pump
Out of Service
Handle Up Call
Pay at Pump
Preset at Pump
Pay at Pump Only
Prepay Only
Hot DCR
Graphic Keypad
Start Button
Graphic Display
Grade Button
Graphic Printer
Instant On
October 4, 2002
Value
4-70 Fuel Manager
DCR Receipt Header Worksheet

Line #
Message
DCR Receipt Trailer Worksheet

Line #
Message
Fueling/Promo Message Worksheet

Message
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-71
Cash Acceptor Configuration

4
The Cash Acceptor Configuration function defines general operating procedures for cash
acceptors at the site.
Considerations
Consider these items before defining cash acceptor operation.
Attributes
Review all parameters in the Attributes function and decide how you want your system to
run. Use the Attributes worksheet at the end of this section.
Disabled Cash Acceptors
Cash acceptors are disabled when the Pay at Pump parameter in DCR Configuration is
set to N.
Start Cash Acceptor Configuration

Use these steps to reach the Cash Acceptor Configuration function from the Fuel Manager
menu.
Steps
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Cash Acceptor
9. CASH ACCEPTOR CONFIGURATION
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. CASH ACCEPTOR ATTRIBUTES
* CA SETUP *
3. Continue with the appropriate Cash Acceptor Configuration function.
October 4, 2002
4-72
Fuel Manager
Cash Acceptor Attributes

The Cash Acceptor Attributes function in Cash Acceptor Configuration sets up specific
information for each cash acceptor.
Steps
1. At the Cash Acceptor Setup menu, press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of
the Cash Acceptor Attributes function.
* CA SETUP *
2. Press [Select].
CASH ACCEPTOR # 01
* CA ATTRIBUTES *
3. Use the arrow keys to select the cash acceptor you would like to configure and
press [Select].
> 1. Cash acceptor in dispenser [Y/N]
2. Reset printer error [Y/N]
3. Print totals now [Y/N]
* CA #01 ATTRIBUTES *
N
N
N

1. Cash acceptor in dispenser [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The fuel pump has a cash acceptor.
No: The fuel pump does not have a cash acceptor.
Steps:

1.
2.
2. Reset printer error [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter is not currently supported.
Description: Enables the printer after the cash acceptor has been disabled and later
brought back on line.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-73
3. Print totals now [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter is not currently supported.
Description: This parameter prints the amount of money in the cash acceptor.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:
5. If you have just configured a cash acceptor, you are offered the option of setting up
the next one exactly like the one you just completed. Do one of the following:
Press [YES] and then press [ENTER]. The display automatically advances to
the next cash acceptor. Repeat step 4.
Press [NO] and then press [ENTER]. The next units cash acceptor
parameters appear for setting up. Repeat step 4.
Key [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Cash Acceptor Configuration menu.
* CA SETUP *
October 4, 2002
4-74
Fuel Manager
File Maintenance
While in the Cash Acceptor Setup menu, press [List] to print a list of the settings in
Cash Acceptor Attributes.
10/04/02
10:07
CASH ACCEPTOR CONFIGURATION
----------------------------------------
Sample Cash Acceptor Attributes

Listing
C
A
S
H
C
A
S
H
A
C
C
E
P
T
O
R
A
C
C
E
P
T
O
R
I
N
01.
02.
03.
04.
05.
06.
07.
08.
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
R
E
S
E
T
P
R
I
N
T
E
R
P
R
I
N
T
T
D
O
I
T
S
A
P
L
E
E
S
N
R
N
S
R
N
O
E
O
O
.
R
R
W
---------------------------------------N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-75
Site Parameters
4
The Site Parameters function defines general operating procedures for all pumps,
dispenser card readers (DCRs), cash acceptors, and tank level sensors at the site.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting the site parameters.
Autocollect Inside Setup
Autocollect Inside is used by sites which have an attendant collecting fuel sale payments
outside. They can set up the system to recall an outside sale on the Ruby terminal. Set the
parameters as described in the following table.
Autocollect Inside Configurations
Function
Pump Configuration:
Attributes
Parameter
Values
Autoapproval
Yes
No
Yes
No
Stacking
Yes
Yes
No
No
Autocollect
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
DCR Configuration:
DCR Attributes
Full Service
Preset at Pump
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Site Parameters: Fuel

Site Parameters
Autocollect
inside
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Site Parameters: DCR

Site Parameters
Always print
receipt
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
When next
customer
starts fueling
Transaction
is not
available for
recall
The pump is
approved for
the next
customer
Transaction is available for recall on the

Ruby terminal...
When next
customer
completes
fueling
Sending Changes to the Pumps and DCRs

If these are the last changes you make before exiting Fuel Manager mode, run the
Initialize Fuel function after editing the site parameters to send the changes to the pumps
and run the Initialize DCRs function to send the changes to the DCRs.
October 4, 2002
4-76 Fuel Manager
Start Site Parameters

Use these steps to reach the Site Parameters function from the Fuel Manager menu.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Site Parameters
function appears.
10. SITE PARAMETERS
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
>1. FUEL SITE PARAMETERS
2. DCR SITE PARAMETERS
3. CASH ACCEPTOR SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
3. Continue with the desired Site Parameters function.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-77
Fuel Site Parameters Steps

The Fuel Site Parameters function in Site Parameters sets up how all pumps at the site
operate.
1. At the Site Parameters menu, press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of the
Fuel Site Parameters function.
* SITE PARAMETERS *
2. Press [Select].
> 1. Unit of measure [G/L]
2. Ignore MOP conflict [Y/N]
3. Halt mode [H/S]
* FUEL PARAMETERS *
G
Y
S

1. Unit of measure [G/L]
Values:
G or L.
G: Dispensers measure fuel in gallons.
L: Dispensers measure fuel in liters.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: This parameter defines whether cash and credit method of payments use the
same or different fuel prices.
Note:
If this parameter is set to N and prices are different for cash and credit fuel
sales, the dispensers must have separate [CASH] and [CREDIT] keys to
be compliant with US Weights and Measures requirements.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Cash and credit fuel purchases are priced the same.
No: Cash and credit fuel purchases are priced differently.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-78 Fuel Manager
3. Halt mode [H/S]

Description: This parameter is only applicable to Tokheim dispensers. All other
dispensers automatically use the soft halt.
Values:
H(ard) or S(oft).
H: Hard halt mode. A fuel sale that is stopped with the [STOP] key on the
terminal becomes due.
S: Soft halt mode. A fuel sale that is stopped with the [STOP] key on the
terminal can be restarted with the [APPROVE] key as long as the nozzle
was not replaced (or the lever put down) at the dispenser.
Steps:

1.
2.
4. Maximum active pumps [1-32]

Description: This defines the maximum number of pumps that can be active at one time.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 32.
Steps:

1.
2.
5. Delay autodisapproval [0-10]

Description: This parameter works with the Autodisapproval parameter of each pump
in the Pump Configuration function. It defines the number of minutes of
inactivity that must pass before a pump is automatically disapproved.
Values:
Numeric, 0.0 - 10.0 minutes, in half-minute increments. For example, key

[7] [5] for a 7.5-minute delay.
Steps:

1.
2.
6. Start postpay hours [0-23]

Description: This is the time, in 24-hour time, that postpay fuel sales are allowed. For
example, if you want postpay transactions to start at 4:00 P.M., enter 16.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 23.
Steps:

1.
2.
7. Number of postpay hours [0-24]

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 24.
0: Postpay fuel sales are not allowed.
1 - 23: Postpay fuel sales are only allowed for the number of hours entered,
starting from the time defined in the Start postpay hours parameter.
24: Postpay fuel sales are always allowed.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
Steps:
4-79

1.
2.
8. Start manual approval [0-23]

Description: This is the time, in 24-hour time, that every postpay fuel sale must be
approved by the cashier. For example, if you want manual approval
transactions to start at 8:00 P.M., enter 20.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 23.
Steps:

1.
2.
9. Number manual appr hours [0-24]

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 24.
0: Manual approval is not required at any time.
1 - 23: Manual approval must be done for the number of hours indicated
starting at the time defined in the Start manual approval parameter.
24: Manual approval must always be done.
Steps:

1.
2.
10. Start tier [0-23]

Description: This is the time, in 24-hour time, that tier 2 fuel prices will be used. For
example, if you want tier 2 prices to start at 12 midnight, enter 0. Refer to
Fuel Product Prices.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 23.
Steps:

1.
2.
11. Number of tier hours [0-24]

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 24.
0: Tier 2 prices are not used.
1 - 23: Tier 2 prices are used for the number of hours indicated starting at the
time defined in the Start tier parameter.
24: Tier 2 prices are always used.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-80 Fuel Manager
12. Approve all enabled [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: To approve any calling pump, the cashier presses [APPROVE].
No: To approve a calling pump, the cashier must identify which pump is
requesting approval, press that pump number, and then press [APPROVE].
Steps:

1.
2.
13. Force .9 cents per gallon [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Adds .9 cents to a price entered in the Fuel Product Prices function.
For example, if you enter $1.00 as the price of fuel, the terminal converts it
to $1.009.
No: Does not add .9 cents to prices entered in the Fuel Product Prices
function.
Steps:

1.
2.
14. Journal Cashier Approval

Description: Determines whether the cashiers approval prints on the journal.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
15. Autocollect Inside [Y/N]

Description: This feature allows sites that have full serve attendants outside collecting
cash and processing credit transactions to recall transactions and give the
customer a receipt inside.
Note:
Review the Considerations at the start of this section for a list of the settings
for related parameters.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Autocollect sales can be recalled on the Ruby terminal.
No: Autocollect sales cannot be recalled on the Ruby terminal.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-81
16. POP Preset Timer [0-90]

Note:
This parameter is only available with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby Customer
Support Center.
Note:
This parameter is for adjustments to Gilbarco dispensers only.
Description: Allows an increase in the time allowed before dispensers time out while
setting up to serve a POP discount customer.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 90
Steps:

1.
2.
17. Enable POP Levels [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter must be set to Y for Gilbarco dispensers and is

recommended for Schlumberger and other dispenser types that experience
slow operation with POP discount in use. (Refer to Alternate
Configuration in Fuel Manager > POP Discount for more information.)
When set to Y, this parameter overrides the POP Award Type parameter
set in Manager > POP Discount File.
Description: Determines whether the POP award is given during the same transaction
using either the cash or credit fuel price as the discounted price for the
award.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
18. Default POP Level [1/2]

Note:
This parameter must be set if Enable POP Levels [Y/N] is set to Y.
Description: This sets the POP discount price method used when the alternate POP
discount configuration is in use.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 2
1: Cash
2: Credit
Steps:

1.
2.
4. Repeat step 3 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return to the Site
Parameters menu.
* SITE PARAMETERS *
October 4, 2002
4-82 Fuel Manager
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-83
DCR Site Parameters Steps

The DCR Site Parameters function in Site Parameters sets up the operation of all DCRs at
the site.
DCR Site Parameters function.
1. FUEL SITE PARAMETERS
>2. DCR SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
2. Press [Select].
> 1. Cashier approval
2. Customer name on
3. Cust acct num on
* DCR
all sales [Y/N]

N
receipt [Y/N]
N
receipt [Y/N]
N
SITE PARAMETERS *

1. Cashier approval all sales [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashier must approve all outside sales.
No: The customer can dispense fuel without approval from the cashier.
Steps:

1.
2.
2. Customer name on receipt [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether the customers name prints on the DCR receipt. Some
companies have policies against printing this information on the receipt.
Check your companys policy before setting this parameter.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
3. Cust acct num on receipt [Y/N]

Note:
If the Network Manager > Configuration > Credit Card Configuration >
Hide Acct# on DCR Receipt is set to N, this parameter may not display.
Description: Determines whether the customers account number prints on the DCR
receipt. Some companies have policies against printing this information on
the receipt. Check your companys policy before setting this parameter.
October 4, 2002
4-84 Fuel Manager
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
Handle up help message [0-99]

Description: Determines the length of time that a help message displays on the Ruby
terminal to alert the attendant that the handle on the DCR is raised and no
MOP has been selected during the specified time.
Note:
This parameter only works when DCR Configuration > Handle Up

Calling is set to Y and Full Service Preset is set to N.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99 seconds.
Steps:

1.
2.
5. Always print receipt [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether a receipt automatically prints at the pump after every
DCR sale.
Note:
Setting this parameter to Y overrides a N set for both Receipt Prompt

Before Sale [Y/N] and Receipt Prompt After Sale [Y/N]. A receipt always
prints whenever a car wash is sold. If you are using the Autocollect Inside
feature, set this parameter to Y.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: A receipt prints at the pump after every DCR sale.
No: The prompt Receipt Y/N? appears after every DCR sale and the
customer must choose whether to print the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.
6. Scrolling rate [1-10]

Description: The speed a prompt appears on the DCR display. This parameter applies to
Schlumberger and Dresser/Wayne DCRs.
Values:
Numeric, 1 -10. 1 is the fastest, 10 is the slowest.
Steps:

1.
2.
7. Enable Outside DEBIT Equip. [Y/N]

Note:
If you set this parameter to Y and your pumps are either Schlumberger or
Tokheim, you must set the Menu presentation parameter in the DCR
Display Setup function in Car Wash Manager mode to N. Otherwise, the
car wash menu displays, but the customer is not able to select an option.
Values:
Yes or No.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-85
Yes: The customer is able to use the debit method of payment at the
No: The customer is not able to use the debit method of payment at the
Steps:

1.
2.
8. Low Paper Alarm [Y/N]

Note:
You must reboot the Ruby terminal for changes to this parameter to take
effect.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: When the DCR is low on receipt paper, the pump number, car, and
nozzle icons flash to alert the cashier. When the cashier views the pump
status, the terminal prompts that the receipt paper is low.
No: The cashier is not alerted when the DCR is low on receipt paper.
Steps:

1.
2.
9. Card Takeover Enabled [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether a pump continues to dispense fuel if a customer inserts
a card after the pump has been approved.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: If a customer inserts a card, the DCR displays PLEASE SEE
CASHIER and the pump will not dispense fuel until the cashier cashes out
the sale (if the customer lowers the handle, hangs up the nozzle, and/or
drives off).
No: The card reader is disabled once a pump is approved.
Steps:

1.
2.
10. Graphic animation delay [0-99]

Note:
This feature may be implemented in the future.
Description: Sets the time delay between animation frames.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
4-86 Fuel Manager
11. Receipt Prompt Before Sale [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
12. Receipt Prompt After Sale [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
13. Armed Forces Restriction [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether ARE YOU AUTHORIZED [Y/N] appears on the
DCR display, intended to discourage civilians from purchasing discounted
fuel on armed forces bases.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
14. Enable Surcharge Fee [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether a surcharge fee is charged for use of a debit card at sites
in California.
Note:
This option is for future use.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
15. Enable Surcharge Prompt [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether the DCR or Ruby terminal displays a warning message
when the Enable Surcharge Fee is set to Y. The message offers the
customer the chance to continue or stop the transaction.
Note:
The prompt appears on the DCR after the authorizing (prompt) and prior to
the remove nozzle prompt.
Note:
This option is for future use.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-87
16. Debit Encryption Type

Description: Determines the type of debit encryption used.
Values:
None: No encryption selected.

MS: Master/Session encryption selected.
DUKPT: Derived Unique Key Per Transaction encryption selected.
Steps:

1.
Press [SELECT] to change the encryption selection. Press[ENTER].
2.
17. Error Prompt Time [5-300]

Note:
This parameter is only available with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby
Customer Support Center.
Description: Determines the length of time DCR errors display to the customer.
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
18. Info Prompt Time [5-300]

Note:
Description: Determines the length of time the last message on the DCR displays for the
customer.
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
19. User Prompt Time [5-300]

Note:
Description: Determines the length of time any Yes/No prompt displays for the
customer.
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
Parameters menu.
>2. DCR SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
October 4, 2002
4-88 Fuel Manager
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-89
Cash Acceptor Site Parameters Steps

The Cash Acceptor Site Parameters function in Site Parameters sets up the operation of all
cash acceptors at the site.
Note:
When a bill is rejected by a cash acceptor or jams in the cash acceptor, a

message prints on the journal.
Cash Acceptor Site Parameters function.
>3. CASH ACCEPTOR SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
2. Press [Select].
> 1. Disable if cheated [Y/N]
2. Disable if paper low [Y/N]
3. Disable if no printer [Y/N]
* CA SITE PARAMETERS *
N
N
N

1.
Disable if cheated [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether a cash acceptor is turned off or left in operation if
someone tries to cheat it.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Turn the cash acceptor off if someone tries to cheat it.
No: Leave the cash acceptor on if someone tries to cheat it.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether a cash acceptor is turned off or left in operation if the
receipt tape is running out.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Turn a cash acceptor off if the receipt tape is running out.
No: Leave a cash acceptor on if the receipt tape is running out.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-90 Fuel Manager

Description: Determines whether a cash acceptor is turned off or left in operation if the
printer is not working.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Turn a cash acceptor off if the printer is not working.
No: Leave a cash acceptor on if the printer is not working.
Steps:

1.
2.
4. Prompt insert cash [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether the phrase OR INSERT CASH appears at the end of
the idle prompt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Display the Insert Cash prompt.
No: Do not display the Insert Cash prompt.
Steps:

1.
2.
5. $1 bill enable [Y/N]

Description: Determines whether one dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether two dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether five dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-91

Description: Determines whether ten dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether twenty dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether fifty dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.

Description: Determines whether one-hundred dollar bills are accepted.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
12. Bill orientation [Y/N]

Note:
This parameter does not apply to Tokheim dispensers.
Description: Determines whether the black seal or the green seal on the bill should be
inserted into the cash acceptor first. The black seal appears on the front of
the bill to the left of the face. The green seal appears on the front of the bill
to the right of the face.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Bills must be inserted face-up with the black-seal end first.
No: Bills can be inserted face-up in either direction.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
4-92 Fuel Manager
13. Timeout (Seconds) [10-99]

Description: Determines the time in seconds between when a customer inserts a bill and
when the pump shuts off if no fuel has been pumped.
Values:
Numeric, 10 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
Parameters menu.
>3. CASH ACCEPTOR SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
pumps.
DCRs.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-93
TLS Site Parameters Steps

The TLS Site Parameters function in Site Parameters sets up how all pumps at the site
operate.
TLS Site Parameters function.
>4. TLS SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
2. Press [Select].
> 1. Unit of measure [G/L]
2. Tank Variance
[0-999]
G
000
* TLS PARAMETERS *

1. Unit of measure [G/L]
Note:
Refer to the Flash Reports chapter in the Reports Reference for

information on the Tank Monitor Report.
Values:
G(allons) or L(iters).
G: The Tank Monitor Report shows the amounts in English.
L: The Tank Monitor Report shows the amounts in metric.
Steps:

1.
2.
2. Tank Variance [0-999]

Description: The number of gallons or liters in which fuel tank totals are allowed to vary
from the actual amount.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999.
Steps:

1.
2.
4-94 Fuel Manager
Parameters menu.
>4. TLS SITE PARAMETERS
* SITE PARAMETERS *
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
4-95
File Maintenance
While in the Site Parameters function, press [List] to print the current Fuel, DCR, Cash
Acceptor, and TLS Site Parameters settings. To print a list of a particular subfunction,
press [List] when the display shows the parameters in the subfunction.
Sample Site Parameters Listings
10/04/02
FUEL PARAMETERS
10:07
---------------------------------------1. Unit of measure [G/L]

G
Y
3. Halt mode [H/S]
S
4. Maximum active pumps [1-32]
32
5. Delay autodisapproval [0-10]
5
6. Start postpay hours [0-23]
0
7. Number of postpay hours [0-24]
24
8. Start manual approval [0-23]
0
9. Number manual appr hours [0-24]
0
10. Start tier [0-23]
0
11. Number of tier hours [0-24]
0
12. Approve all enabled [Y/N]
0
13. Force .9 cents per gallon [Y/N]
N
14. Journal Cashier Approval
N
15. Autocollect Inside [Y/N]
N
16. POP Preset Timer [0-90]
N
17. Enable POP Levels [Y/N]
N
18. Default POP Level [1/2]
1
10/04/02
DCR SITE PARAMETERS
10:07
---------------------------------------1. Cashier approval for all sales

N
2. Customer name on receipt
N
3. Customer acct number on receipt
N
4. Handle up help message
30
5. Always print receipt
Y
6. Scrolling rate
3
7. Enable Outside DEBIT Equipment
N
8. Low Paper Alarm
Y
9. Card Takeover
N
10. Graphic animation delay
0
11. Receipt Prompt Before Sale
Y
12. Receipt Prompt After Sale
N
13. Armed Forces Restriction
N
14. Enable Debit Surcharge Fee
N
15. Enable Surcharge Prompt
N
16. Debit Encryption Type
N
17. Error Prompt Time (Sec)
15
18. Info Prompt Time (Sec)
15
19. User Prompt Time (Sec)
15
October 4, 2002
4-96 Fuel Manager
10/04/02
CASH ACCEPTOR SITE PARAMETERS
10:07
---------------------------------------1. Disable if cheated [Y/N]

Y
N
N
4. Prompt insert cash[Y/N]
Y
5.
$1 Bill enable [Y/N]
Y
6.
Y
7.
Y
8. $10 Bill enable [Y/N]
Y
Y
Y
Y
12. Bill orientation [Y/N]
Y
13. Timeout (seconds) [10-99]
10
10/04/02
TLS SITE PARAMETERS
10:07
---------------------------------------1. Unit of measure [G/L]

G
2. Tank Variance [0-999]
99
Site Parameters Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the fuel parameters for the first time. Refer to Setting Up Your
2. Follow the steps in the Fuel Site Parameters Steps, DCR Site Parameters
Steps, Cash Acceptor Site Parameters Steps, and TLS Site Parameters
sections to enter the information into the system.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
Fuel Site Parameters Worksheet

#
October 4, 2002
Parameter
Unit of measure [G/L]
Ignore MOP conflict [Y/N]
Halt mode [H/S]
Maximum active pumps [1-32]
Delay autodisapproval [0-10]
Start postpay hours [0-23]
Number of postpay hours [0-24]
Start manual approval [0-23]
Number manual appr hours [0-24]
10
Start tier [0-23]
11
Number of tier hours [0-24]
12
Approve all enabled [Y/N]
13
Force .9 cents per gallon [Y/N]
14
Journal Cashier Approval
15
Autocollect Inside [Y/N]
16
POP Preset Timer [0-90]
17
Enable POP Levels [Y/N]
18
Default POP Level [1/2]
Value
4-97
4-98 Fuel Manager
DCR Site Parameters Worksheet

#
Parameter
Cashier approval on all sales [Y/N]
Customer name on receipt [Y/N]
Customer account number on receipt

[Y/N]
Handle up help message [0-99]
Always print receipt [Y/N]
Scrolling rate [1-10]
Enable Outside DEBIT Equipment [Y/N]
Low Paper Alarm [Y/N]
Card Takeover Enabled [Y/N]
10
Graphic animation delay [0-99]
11
Receipt Prompt Before Sale [Y/N]
12
Receipt Prompt After Sale [Y/N]
13
Armed Forces Restriction [Y/N]
14
Enable Surcharge Fee [Y/N]
15
Enable Surcharge Prompt [Y/N]
16
Debit Encryption Type
17
Error Prompt Time [5-300]
18
Info Prompt Time [5-300]
19
User Prompt Time [5-300]
Value
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager
Cash Acceptor Site Parameters Worksheet

#
Parameter
Disable if cheated [Y/N]
Disable if paper low [Y/N]
Disable if no printer [Y/N]
Prompt insert cash [Y/N]
10
11
12
Bill orientation [Y/N]
13
Timeout (Seconds) [10 - 99]
Value
TLS Site Parameters Worksheet

#
October 4, 2002
Parameter
Unit of measure [G/L]
Tank Variance [0-999]
Value
4-99
4-100
Fuel Manager
Initialize Fuel
4
The Initialize Fuel function sends any changes made to Fuel Manager mode to the
dispensers. Changes made in Fuel Manager mode do not take effect unless the Initialize
Fuel function is run.
Considerations
If you have only changed fuel prices, choose the Prices Only function.
If you have changed any parameter other than fuel product prices, you must run the Full
Initialization function to put the changes into effect.
Initialize Fuel Steps

Use these steps to reach the Initialize Fuel function from the Fuel Manager menu and send
all changes made in Fuel Manager mode to the dispensers.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Initialize Fuel
function appears.
11. INITIALIZE FUEL
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. PRICES ONLY
2. FULL INITIALIZATION
* INITIALIZE FUEL *
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the type of initialization you want to do.
Press [Select].
If you are changing prices, CHANGING PRICES... displays during the
process.
If you are doing a full initialization, INITIALIZING... displays during the
process.
4. The alarm line on the Ruby terminal indicates when the initialization has finished.
To return to the Fuel Manager mode menu, press [EXIT].
11. INITIALIZE FUEL
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-101
Initialize DCRs
4
The Initialize DCRs function sends any changes made to Fuel Manager mode to the
dispenser card readers. Changes made in Fuel Manager mode do not take effect unless the
Initialize DCRs function is run.
Initialize DCRs Steps

Use these steps to reach the Initialize DCRs function from the Fuel Manager menu and
send all changes made in Fuel Manager mode to the dispensers.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Initialize DCRs
function displays.
12. INITIALIZE DCRs
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. DOWNLOAD TO ALL DCRs
2. DOWNLOAD TO A DCR

If you would like to download information to all of the DCRs at your site,
follow the instructions under 1. DOWNLOAD TO ALL DCRs below.
If you would like to download information to only one DCR, follow the
instructions under 2. DOWNLOAD TO A DCR below.
DOWNLOAD TO ALL DCRs
1. Press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of 1. DOWNLOAD TO ALL
DCRs.
2. Press [Select].
Download to all DCRs [ENTER]_
October 4, 2002
4-102
Fuel Manager
3. Press [ENTER]. DOWNLOADING... and INITIALIZING... display during

the downloading process.
12. INITIALIZE DCRs
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
DOWNLOAD TO A DCR
1. Press the arrow keys until the > is to the left of 2. DOWNLOAD TO A DCR and
then press [Select].
1. DOWNLOAD TO ALL DCRs
> 2. DOWNLOAD TO A DCR
2. Press [Select].
Download to one DCR [# then ENTER]_
3. Enter the pump number you wish to download information to and then press
[ENTER]. DOWNLOADING... and INITIALIZING... display during the
downloading process.
12. INITIALIZE DCRs
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-103
Clear Pumps On Hold

4
The Clear Pumps On Hold function clears fuel sales in the HOLD state so they may be
brought back and completed.
Note:
This function must be used with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby Customer
Support Center.
Clear Pumps On Hold Steps

Use these steps to reach the Clear Pumps On Hold function from the Fuel Manager menu.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Clear Pumps On
Hold function appears.
13. CLEAR PUMPS ON HOLD
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
CURRENT SALE ON PUMP 1 IS ON HOLD
Do you want to clear [Y/N]?
Press [Yes] to clear the pump on hold.

Press [No] return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
13. CLEAR PUMPS ON HOLD
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
4-104
Fuel Manager
Reset Controller
4
The Reset Controller function performs a cold reset on the pump controller and initializes
all fuel information.
Note:
This function only applies to Tokheim sites.
Considerations
The Reset Controller function takes about 30 seconds to complete; however, it is followed
by a full initialization which takes much longer.
Fuel cannot be dispensed while this function is processing.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-105
Reset Controller Steps

Use these steps to reach the Reset Controller function from the Fuel Manager menu.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Reset Controller
function appears.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Are You Sure (Y/N) ? _
* RESET CONTROLLER *
Press [Yes] to reset the controller.

CONTROLLER RESETTING
CONTROLLER RESET

*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
Press [No] to cancel the reset and return to the Fuel Manager mode menu.
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
4-106
Fuel Manager
RFID Configuration
4
Note:
The RFID Configuration function may be implemented in the future.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-107
POP Discount
4
The POP Discount function in Fuel Manager configures the discount levels that can be
assigned for each grade (POP Discount Table) and then selects one of those levels to
create a discount definition (POP Discount Definition).
Depending on the dispenser types at your site, two different configurations exist: standard
or alternate. The standard configuration should be used for sites with Dresser/Wayne and
Tokheim dispensers, and for sites with Schlumberger dispensers. The alternate
configuration must be used for sites equipped with Gilbarco dispensers that encounter
slowdowns with the standard configuration.
Note:
Since the alternate configuration uses cash/credit pricing parameters to

configure POP discounts, sites using this alternate configuration may have
either POP discounts or cash/credit pricing differences, but not both.
Standard Configuration
The standard configuration uses the cents-off POP discount setup. With the standard
configuration:
Up to two POP cents-off discounts may be set for each grade and type of fuel.
Either of these two discounts may be set for each grade and type of fuel for up to
10 POP discount setups.
The site may use POP discounts and cash/credit pricing at the same time.
Alternate Configuration
This alternate configuration uses the cash/credit pricing setup to establish discount prices.
With the alternate configuration:
Only one POP discount price is available for each grade and type of fuel.
This discount price is set using the cents difference set up in the cash/credit pricing
parameters.
Either POP discounts or cash/credit pricing may be used at any time, but not both
together.
Since the alternate POP discount configuration gets its fuel price discount from the
difference between cash and credit prices set up in Fuel Manager > Fuel Product Prices,
you must enter a cash price and a different credit price here for each type and grade of fuel
and fuel service for which a POP discount is wanted.
October 4, 2002
4-108
Fuel Manager
Note:
It is recommended that a lower cash price be used as the POP discount

price and that the credit price be set higher for each type and grade of fuel
and fuel service for which a POP discount is wanted. This works with most
dispenser configurations. However, if the discount price tests out to be a
higher price than the regular price, set the cash price higher and retest the
configuration.
Considerations
POP Discount Table
A discount price of 0.000 is permitted but not recommended.

More fuel grades than those configured at a site may display.
Up to two discount levels may be defined per fuel grade.
Changes update at the DCR when Fuel Initialization is run.
POP Definition Table
Up to 10 discount definitions may be defined.

If no discount applies, select level NONE. Do not use 0.000.
Changes update at the DCR when Fuel Initialization is run.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-109
POP Discount Steps

The POP Discount function requires set up in two files within Fuel Manager.
POP Discount Table
The POP Discount Table subfunction defines up to two levels of discounts for each grade
of fuel. Use these steps to reach the POP Discount Table function.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the POP Discount
function appears.
16. POP DISCOUNT
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [ENTER].
>
1. POP DISCOUNT TABLE

2. POP DEFINITION TABLE
POP DISCOUNT MENU
3. Press the arrow keys until the > appears to the left of the 1. POP DISCOUNT
TABLE subfunction. Press [ENTER]. The various fuel products display.
Note:
>
All fuel grades may appear on these displays as opposed to only those
grades assigned to fueling points at your site.
UNLD .000 .000

MID1 .000 .000
PREM .000 .000
POP DISCOUNT MENU
4. Press the arrow keys until the > appears next to the fuel product in which you want
to set up a discount.
Note:
A maximum of two discounts can be configured for each grade.
Note:
Although all fuel grades may display, only discounts defined for fuel
grades that are actually configured at the site would be applied.
5. Press [ENTER] to access the first level of discounts. Key the discount amount,
(between .000 and .999), and press [ENTER].
Note:
No decimal point appears while you key in the numbers. After they are
entered, the decimal point precedes the first figure. For example, a fivecent discount is keyed in as [0] [5] [0] and displays as .050 after
pressing [ENTER].
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to continue entering all fuel discounts or press [EXIT] to
return to the POP Discount menu.
October 4, 2002
4-110
Fuel Manager
POP Definition Table

The POP Definition Table subfunction defines up to 10 groups of discount levels; each
group designates a specific discount level for each grade of fuel. Those discounts are then
applied, depending on the qualifying purchase (defined in Manager > POP Discount
File). Use these steps to reach the POP Definition Table function.
1. At the Fuel Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the POP Discount
function appears.
16. POP DISCOUNT
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
2. Press [ENTER].
>
1. POP DISCOUNT TABLE

2. POP DEFINITION TABLE
POP DISCOUNT MENU
3. Press the arrow keys until the > appears to the left of the 2. POP DEFINITION
TABLE subfunction. Press [ENTER]. The first three discount definition
descriptions appear.
>1. DEF01
2. DEF02
3. DEF03
POP DEFINITION TABLE
4. Press the arrow keys to select an available discount definition. Press [ENTER]. A
maximum of ten discount definitions are available.
>DEF01.
DEF01.
DEF01.
UNLD
MID1
PREM
NONE
NONE
NONE
POP DEFINITION #1
5. Press the arrow keys to select the fuel grade and press [ENTER]. The cursor
moves to the price level column.
DEF01.
DEF01.
DEF01.
UNLD
MID1
PREM
NONE
>NONE
NONE
POP DEFINITION #1
6. Press [Select] to access the discount Level 1 price, discount Level 2 price
(previously set up in the POP Discount Table function), or NONE meaning no
discount applies for that fuel grade.
Note:
If no discount applies, select NONE instead of a discount of 0.000

at either Level 1 or Level 2. If 0.000 is entered and that level is later
modified to a non-zero amount, the discount will be applied for any POP
definition in which that grade and level is specified.
October 4, 2002
Fuel Manager 4-111
7. Press [ENTER] when the appropriate discount amount displays.

DEF01.
DEF01.
DEF01.
UNLD
MID1
PREM
NONE
>.099
NONE
POP DEFINITION #1
8. Press [ENTER] to proceed to the next level entry.

DEF01.
DEF01.
>DEF01.
UNLD
MID1
PREM
NONE
.099
NONE
POP DEFINITION #1
9. Repeat steps 4 through 7 to continue entering all fuel definitions or press [EXIT]
to reach the other discount definitions.
>1. DEF01
2. DEF02
3. DEF03
10. Press [EXIT] to return to the POP Discount Menu.

16. POP DISCOUNT
*FUEL MANAGER MENU*
October 4, 2002
4-112
Fuel Manager
File Maintenance
List
While in the POP Discount Menu function, press [List] to print the current POP
Discount Table and POP Definition Table.
Sample POP Discount Table Listing
10/04/02
10:07
POP DISCOUNT TABLE
-------------------------------------GRADE
LEVEL 1
LEVEL 2
-------------------------------------UNLD
.099
.099
MID1
.050
.099
PREM
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
UNLD
.099
.099
10/04/02
10:07
-------------------------------------ID
GRADE
DISCOUNT
-------------------------------------01
UNLD
0.099
MID1
0.099
PREM
0.025
02
MID2
0.040
03
DIES
0.055
Sample POP Definition Table

Listing
October 4, 2002
Maintenance
Maintenance mode contains functions which are used to update general terminal
information and maintain the system software and hardware:
March 8, 2002
Version Information
Set Date and Time
Display I/O Configuration
Data Files Version
Enable Printer
Disable Printer
Flush Printer Queue
Get Latest Data
Set Totals
Create Files
Start Remote Dial-In
File Information
Feature Information
Registration Information
Set Store Telephone Number
Set Store Postal Code
CPU Exception Information
Start Debugger
Execute Load Module
Reset Soft Key File
Adjust Buzzer Volume
Reset Modem
Printer Error Log
5-2 Maintenance
Reset Tank Delivery

Monitor Tank Communication
Backup Print Log
Print Installation Information
Reboot System
Display IP Stats
e-pc Status Report
March 8, 2002
Maintenance 5-3
Start Maintenance Mode

Use these steps to enter Maintenance mode from any point in the application. Then refer to
the chapter that describes the maintenance function you wish to run.
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Maintenance mode appears.

[ MAINTENANCE ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
6. Continue with the desired Maintenance function.
March 8, 2002
5-4 Maintenance
Version Information
5
The Version Information function displays the software version that is running on the
terminal. It also prints a general system description on the receipt and journal printers.
Version Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the Version Information function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Version
Information function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
3. The first screen of information appears. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the
version information OR press the [List] key to print the information.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the Maintenance mode menu.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
Gempak - 10/04/02 K -- Version 3.05.03

Term 1 Gemix v2.5.9 Registered
Running since: 08/13/02 11:34
Elapsed time: 74.6 hours
Sample Version Information

Listing
System Configuration Information:

P1 Nbr Shifts: 3
Electronic ID:0000000ffb1d
Installed by: Vern Vasco
System
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
SRAM
DRAM
DRAM
DRAM
DRAM
Memory
size
free
contig
frag
size
free
contig
frag
Information:
= 8388608
= 2506728
=
249980
=
3%
=
0
=
0
=
0
=
1%
Gembus Device Information:

/dev/kbd1 KEYBOARD/MSR v4.04
/dev/dsp1 DISPLAY Oper 2x20 v3.04
/dev/dsp2 DISPLAY Cust 2x20 v2.07
/dev/led DISPLAY Led-Icon v1.00
/dev/prn1 (NOT FOUND)
/dev/prn2 (NOT FOUND)
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-5
Set Date and Time

5
The Set Date and Time function sets the date and time the terminal uses on reports and
receipts. In general, the date and time only need to be changed for daylight savings.
If the date or time is changed, the new time and the employee who made the change (by
employee number) is noted on the journal printer.
The date is entered as six digits (month, day, and year). If the month or day is only one
digit, put a 0 in front of it.
Example:
April 15, 2002, should be entered as 041502.
The time can be entered as either four digits (hour and minutes) or six digits (hour,
minutes, and seconds).
The hour is entered as two digits based on a 24-hour clock.
The minutes are entered as two digits, 01 - 59.
The seconds are optional and are entered as two digits, 01 - 59.
Examples:
2:25:32 P.M. should be entered as 142532.

6:08 A.M. should be entered as 0608.
October 4, 2002
5-6 Maintenance
Set Date and Time Steps

Use these steps to reach the Set Date and Time function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Set Date and Time
function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Date 081602 _
3. Key the new six-digit date and press [ENTER] or just press [ENTER] to accept
the date shown.
Time 141514 _
4. Key the four-digit time (hour and minutes) and press [ENTER] or just press
[ENTER] to accept the time shown.
14:15:14
10/04/02_

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-7
Display I/O Configuration

5
The Display I/O Configuration function displays how all input and output devices are set.
The information can also be printed by pressing the [List] key while the information
displays.
Display I/O Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the Display I/O Configuration function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Display I/O
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
station
255
3. The first screen of information appears. Press the arrow keys to look at additional
information OR press the [List] key to print the information.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-8 Maintenance
Sample I/O Configuration Listing

IO CONFIG
10/04/02
10:29
---------------------------------------station
255
kbd.ldm
/dev/kbd1
0 - 0 0 00000000
odsp.ldm
/dev/dsp2
0 - 0 0 00000000
cdsp.ldm
/dev/dsp1
0 - 0 0 00000000
rprt.ldm
/dev/prn2
0 - 0 0 00000000
jprt.ldm
/dev/prn1
0 - 0 0 00000000
lprt.ldm
/dev/lpt
9600 - 8 1 00000000
mag.ldm
/dev/msr
0 - 0 0 00000000
lan.ldm
/dev/lan
115200 n 8 1 00000000
net1.ldm
/dev/modem
2400 n 8 1 10000000
cwdriv.ldm
/dev/com8
9600 n 8 1 00000000
net2.ldm
/dev/com1
2400 n 8 1 00000000
tm930.ldm
/dev/com4
9600 n 8 1 00000000
gcomms.ldm
/dev/com5
19200 n 8 1 00000000
fueldrv.ldm
/dev/com2
pp.ldm
/dev/com7
.
.
.
print.ldm
/dev/xxxx
9600 e 7 2 00000000
1200 n 8 2 00000000
0 - 0 0 00000000
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-9
Data Files Version

5
The Data Files Version function prints a list of all data files used by the register and the
last time each file was changed. This is used to check that a controller and all workstations
have the same files. If the dates on the Data Files Version listing on a workstation are not
exactly the same as the controllers, then the workstation should perform a Get Latest Data
to update its files.
Data Files Version Steps

Use these steps to reach the Data Files Version function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Data Files Version
function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Printing ..._

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-10 Maintenance
10/04/02
DATA FILES REGISTER #1
PLU File
Dept File
Category File
Promo File
Employee File
MOP File
Fee File
Tax File
Currency File
Cust ID File
Plu Tracking
Dept. Tracking
Soft Key File
Menu Key File
Logo/Slogan File
Banner File
Check Valid File
Network File
CCard File
Dealer File
CW Param File
Car Wash Key File
Blue Law File
Log In/Out File
Ruby EasyID File
Combo File
Mix File
Match File
VP Club File
VP EPC File
Dept Loyal File
Redeem File
POP File
System Config
Sales Config
Sec levl
Report Config
Jrnl Approve
VeriPASS File
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
15:02
Sample Data Files Version Listing
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
11:05
15:08
10:12
10:12
10:12
14:28
10:12
16:08
10:12
10:12
10:12
12:02
12:20
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
10:12
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-11
Enable Printer
5
The Enable Printer function reconnects the Ruby terminal with a printer that has been
disabled.
The printer must be connected to the Ruby terminal.
Enable Printer Steps

Use these steps to reach the Enable Printer function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Enable Printer
function appears.
5. ENABLE PRINTER
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
> 1. Receipt Printer
2. Journal Printer
3. The available printer types display. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the
printer type you want to enable.
4. Press [Select].
Receipt Printer enabled
5. ENABLE PRINTER
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-12 Maintenance
Disable Printer
5
The Disable Printer function disconnects the Ruby terminal from a printer that is not
working or is preventing the Ruby terminal from continuing transactions.
The printer must be connected to the Ruby terminal.
After the printer is disabled, the error message (printer name) DISABLED displays on
the bottom line of the Operator Display until the printer is enabled.
Disable Printer Steps

Use these steps to reach the Disable Printer function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Disable Printer
function appears.
6. DISABLE PRINTER
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
2. Journal Printer
3. The available printer types are displayed. Press the arrow keys until the > points at
the printer type you want to disable.
4. Press [Select].
Receipt Printer disabled
6. DISABLE PRINTER
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-13
Flush Printer Queue

5
The Flush Printer Queue function stops the current print job.
Flush Printer Queue Steps

Use these steps to reach the Flush Printer Queue function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Flush Printer
Queue function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
2. Journal Printer
3. The available printer types display. Press the arrow keys until the > points at the
printer type you want to stop.
4. Press [Select].
Canceling all printer jobs
All printer jobs canceled

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-14 Maintenance
Get Latest Data

5
The Get Latest Data function downloads data files from the controller to the workstation.
Only data files that have changed since the last download are downloaded.
Note:
This function is only available on workstation terminals.
Get Latest Data Steps

Use these steps to reach the Get Latest Data function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Get Latest Data
function appears.
8. GET LATEST DATA
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Downloading data files - Please Wait_
3. Any data files that have been changed on the controller download to the
workstation and print on the journal printer. When the process is complete, the
display returns to the Maintenance mode menu.
8. GET LATEST DATA
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
Troubleshooting
If the data files do not download successfully, check these items.
Are the LAN cables between the workstation and the controller correctly installed?
Are the LAN cables connected to COM port 3?
Is the controller powered up?
Review the journal printer listing of data files. Note the files that were not
downloaded successfully. These can then be reported to the VeriFone Customer
Support Center.
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-15
Set Totals
5
The Set Totals function sets totalizer and fuel running totals to user-defined values. In
general, these values come from use of a previous version of the software.
Before loading the new software, close all the cashiers and run the next period report.
Enter the totals so that they are not lost. For example, if the software is upgraded at
midnight, just before the upgrade, run the Close Daily. Do not perform any transactions
until after the software is upgraded and the totals are set.
Note:
This function is only available on standalone and controlling terminals.
Start Set Totals

Use these steps to reach the Set Totals function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Set Totals function
appears.
9. SET TOTALS
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
1. Totalizers
2. Fuel Running Totals
CHOICE: _
3. Continue with the specific Set Totals function.
October 4, 2002
5-16 Maintenance
Totalizers Steps
Use these steps to change the totalizers for each period for each register and for each
period for all registers. Refer to the Summary report section of the last closed period. Only
the existing register/period combinations display.
1. At the Set Totals menu, press [1] [ENTER].
Register #1 - SHIFT
GRAND
0.00
SALES
0.00
0.00
2. Press the arrow keys until the register and period for which you want to change the
totals appear.
3. Key the dollar amount of the grand totalizer for the register/period combination
and press [ENTER].
Register #1 - SHIFT
GRAND
12589.32
SALES
0.00
12589.32
0.00
4. Key the dollar amount of the sales totalizer for the register/period combination and
press [ENTER].
Register #1 - DAILY
GRAND
0.00
SALES
0.00
0.00

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to change the totals for another register/period
combination.
Press [List] to print the totals.
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Maintenance mode menu.
9. SET TOTALS
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-17
Fuel Running Totals Steps

Use these steps to change the running totals for each fueling point/hose combination.
Refer to the FP/Hose Running report totals. Only the fueling points that have been set up
in the Product Configuration: Attributes function display.
1. At the Set Totals menu, press [2] [ENTER].
FP# 1 HOSE# 1
VOLUME
AMOUNT
0.00
0.00
0.00
2. Press the arrow keys until the fueling point and hose for which you want to change
the totals appear.
3. Key the volume for the fueling point/hose combination and press [ENTER].
FP# 1 HOSE# 1
VOLUME
AMOUNT
949.21
0.00
949.21
0.00
4. Key the dollar amount for the fueling point/hose combination and press
[ENTER].
FP# 1 HOSE# 2
VOLUME
AMOUNT
0.00
0.00
0.00

Repeat steps 2 through 4 to change the totals for another fueling point/hose
combination.
Press [List] to print the totals.
Press [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Maintenance mode menu.
9. SET TOTALS
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-18 Maintenance
List All Totals

To print the totals for all the registers and fueling points press [List] at the opening
screen for the Set Totals function.
1. Totalizers
2. Fuel Running Totals
CHOICE: _
CURRENT BEGINNING TOTALIZER VALUES
Set Totals Listing: Register/

Period Combination
REGISTER #1
Period
Grand
Sales
________________________________________
SHIFT
100.00
100.00
DAILY
100.00
100.00
MONTHLY
100.00
100.00
YEARLY
100.00
100.00
REGISTER #2
Period
Grand
Sales
________________________________________
SHIFT
100.00
100.00
DAILY
100.00
100.00
MONTHLY
100.00
100.00
YEARLY
100.00
100.00
ALL REGISTERS
Period
Grand
Sales
________________________________________
SHIFT
200.00
200.00
DAILY
200.00
200.00
MONTHLY
200.00
200.00
YEARLY
200.00
200.00
FUELING POINT RUNNING HOSE TOTALS
Set Totals Listing: Fueling

Point/Hose Combination
FP#
Hose#
Volume
Amount
________________________________________
01
01
1.00
1.00
02
1.00
1.00
03
1.00
1.00
04
1.00
1.00
02
01
1.00
1.00
02
1.00
1.00
03
1.00
1.00
04
1.00
1.00
03
01
1.00
1.00
02
1.00
1.00
03
1.00
1.00
04
1.00
1.00
etc.
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-19
Create Files
5
Note:
This function should only be used with the assistance of the VeriFone
The Create Files function replaces missing or damaged files by creating new data files on
a file-by-file basis. Data files are usually created before the application is installed. This
function should only be used under the following three conditions:
Specific data files have been erased or damaged
The maximum number of PLU promotions has changed in Manager >

Configuration > System Configuration > Maximum PLUs promo
You have the assistance of the VeriFone Customer Support Center.

Note:
Considerations
Please keep the following items in mind:
Do not create the totals file unless you do not need the current totals for the Close
Shift.
Creating some files requires creating other files. For example, if you recreate the
PLU File, you must also create the PLU Promotional File.
The data file names that are displayed are actually the program file names. The
names are not exactly the same as the names that appear in the Manager menu.
The file that was created and the employee who logged in to Maintenance mode
print on the journal.
October 4, 2002
5-20 Maintenance
Create Files Steps

Use these steps to reach the Create Files function from the Maintenance menu and create
data files.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Create Files
function appears.
10. CREATE FILES
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
002
/ram/employee.dat
3. Press the arrow keys until the data file you want to create appears.
4. Press [Select].
Creating...
CREATION OK
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to create another data file OR press [EXIT] to return to the
Maintenance mode menu.
10. CREATE FILES
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-21
Start Remote Dial-In

5
The Start Remote Dial-In function sets the terminal software up so that a computer at
another location can connect to and communicate with the terminal. This function
provides a means of transmitting remote software service and upgrades.
Note:
This function should only be used with the help of the VeriFone Ruby
Customer Support Center or their representative.
Considerations
The terminal is not available to perform transactions while dial-in and remote services are
in progress.
The terminal must be connected to an active telephone line. Refer to Hardware Setup at
the end of this section.
Start Remote Dial-In Steps

Use these steps to reach the Start Remote Dial-In function from the Maintenance menu
and connect to a computer at another location.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Start Remote
Dial-In function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Are you sure? (Y/N) _
3. Press [Yes] to indicate you are sure you want to run this function OR press
[No] to cancel the function. The terminal reboots into the System Manager
(SysMgr) program.
4. Follow any directions given by the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center or
their representative.
5. When the dial-in session is finished, unplug the terminals power cord at the power
brick. After the terminal is completely off, plug the power cord back in to the
power brick.
October 4, 2002
5-22 Maintenance
Hardware Setup
The Ruby terminal must be installed in one of the following ways to allow remote dialins:
Dedicated telephone service line
Shared voice/data telephone service line

The following symbols are used to represent the telephone lines in the diagrams in this
section:
D: Data
S: Shared data and voice
V: Voice
Dedicated Telephone Service Line
Single Terminal Setup

Plug one end of the RJ-11 cord into one of the Telco ports on the back of the Ruby
terminal, and the other end into a data line wall jack. If a telephone is also used, it
must be connected to a separate voice line jack with a separate telephone number.
Multiterminal Setup
Plug one end of the RJ-11 cord into one of the Telco ports on the back of the Ruby
terminal and the other end into a data-line wall jack. Connect each workstation
with RJ-11 cords to the controller as shown in the illustration below. If a telephone
is also used, you must connect it to a separate voice-line jack with a separate
telephone number.
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-23
Shared Voice/Data Telephone Service Line
Single Terminal Setup

Unplug the telephone from the wall jack. Plug one end of the RJ-11 cord into one
of the Telco ports on the back of the Ruby terminal, and the other end into a wall
jack. Then plug the telephone into the other Telco port on the back of the Ruby
terminal.
Multiterminal Setup
Unplug the telephone from the wall jack. Plug the single end of a split (Y) RJ-11
cord into the wall jack. Plug one of the free ends of the split RJ-11 into the
telephone. Plug the remaining free end of the split RJ-11 into one of the Telco ports
on the back of the Ruby terminal. Then connect each workstation with RJ-11 cords
to the controller as shown in the illustration below.
Note:
October 4, 2002
Although a telephone can be connected through or shared with a Ruby

terminal, it is recommended that the Ruby terminal be connected to a
dedicated line. If the line is shared, then support service modem calls
may be intercepted if a person answers the voice line. A shared line also
eliminates the ability to run dial-in diagnostics and talk to someone at the
site at the same time. If the line is shared with a network, credit card
processing and other network functions are available while the phone
line is used for conversation or dialins.
5-24 Maintenance
File Information
5
The File Information function displays system file data, including file size and creation
date and time. Files are displayed by subsystem function with registration status, version
number and other information.
File Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the File Information function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the File Information
function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Terminal Number: 1
SUBSYSTEM NAME
VERSION_
3. The first screen of information appears. Press the arrow keys to read additional
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-25
Sample File Information Listing

FILE INFORMATION LISTING
10/04/02
16:08
---------------------------------------Terminal Number: 1
SUBSYSTEM NAME
VERSION
LICENSE STATUS REGISTRATION
FCW
LOAD MODULE NAME
SIZE DATE
TIME
---------------------------------------(Application)
v4.01(00)
Std Feature
Reg 081502 2057 0000
(Hardware)
v2.02.08(a4)
Std Feature
Reg 081502 2057 0000
(Options)
v3.00.00(00)
Std Feature
Reg 081502 2057 0000
Alarm Manager
v1.00.00(00)
/ram/alarms.ldm
7536 030200 0747
Fast Food
v1.00.00(00)
Authorized
Reg 081502 2057 0000
File Manager
v1.00.00(00)
/ram/files.ldm
32544 030702 0142
Fuel Subsystem
v1.00.00(00)
/ram/fueldrv.ldm
8232 030702 0146
/ram/coc.ldm
9464 030702 0146
/ram/fuelmgr.ldm
70610 030702 0320
/ram/fuelsrv.ldm
14554 030702 0148
/ram/fuelcli.ldm
13994 030702 0148
.
.
.
(All Files are listed)
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
5-26 Maintenance
Feature Information
5
The Feature Information function lists the purchase options installed in your system,
including the version number, authorization status, and registration status.
Feature Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the Feature Information function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Feature
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Terminal Number: 1
FEATURE CARD_
3. The first screen of information appears. Press the arrow keys to read additional
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-27
FEATURE LISTING
10/04/02
15:02
---------------------------------------Terminal Number: 1
FEATURE CARD
------------NAMERuby Card
-FEATURESCar Wash
Fast Food
Proprietary
SUBSYSTEM NAME
VERSION
LICENSE STATUS REGISTRATION
FCW
---------------------------------------Car Wash
v1.00.00(00)
Authorized
Fast Food
v1.00.00(00)
Authorized
HPV20
NOT AUTHORIZED NOT REGISTERED
0000
Proprietary
Authorized
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
Sample Feature Information

Listing
5-28 Maintenance
5
The Registration Information function allows you to view registration information and
register your system. If you need to initially register your system, a reminder prompt
appears on the Operator Display. To register your system, provide the information in this
file to the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center and enter the number given to you
into the terminal. Entering this number into the terminal registers your system.
Note:
Registration Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the Registration Information function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Registration
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Registration Status: NOT REGISTERED
(Use arrow keys, LIST, or EXIT)_
3. The first screen of information appears. Press the arrow keys to look at additional
information OR press [List] to print the information.
4. To register or reregister the system, read the displayed information to the VeriFone
5. Press [Select].
Gemkey: 0
Status: NOT REGISTERED
6. Enter the number given to you and press [ENTER].

Gemkey: 2397865033
Status: Registered 10/04/02
NEW GEMKEY ACCEPTED
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-29
7. Press [EXIT] [EXIT] to return to the Maintenance mode menu.

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
REGISTRATION INFORMATION LISTING

10/04/02
15:02
---------------------------------------Registration Status: REGISTERED 10/04/02
(Use arrow keys, LIST, or EXIT)
FEATURE
(REF#)
---------------------------------------BASE SYSTEM
App Name: GEMPAK
App Version: 4.01
Shifts: 3
(772)
O/S Version: 2.2.8
SRAM Size: 6
DRAM Size: 0
EID: ffb1d
(779)
Installed by: (UNKNOWN)
Site Phone Nbr: 8133731789
Postal Code: 32601
Feature card: (NONE)
FCW: 0
(768)
CAR WASH
v1.00.00
(423)
FAST FOOD
v1.00.00
(820)
PROPRIETARY
v1.00.00
(468)
--- end---
October 4, 2002
Sample Registration Information

Listing
5-30 Maintenance
Set Store Telephone Number

5
The Set Store Telephone Number function allows you to update your telephone number
within the system if it should change. This number is kept on file as part of the systems
registration information. The store telephone number is initially downloaded to the system
during installation.
Note:
Set Store Telephone Number Steps

Use these steps to reach the Set Store Telephone Number function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Set Store
Telephone Number function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Telephone Nr: _
(use 0-9 only, no separators)
3. Key the stores telephone number (up to 15 digits) and press [ENTER]. Do not put
any spaces or dashes in the number.
Telephone Nr: 8135554321
(use 0-9 only, no separators)
ACCEPTED

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-31
Set Store Postal Code

5
The Set Store Postal Code function allows you to update your postal code within the
system if it should change. This number is kept on file as part of the systems registration
information. The postal code is initially downloaded to the system during installation.
Note:
Set Store Postal Code Steps

Use these steps to reach the Set Store Postal Code function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Set Store Postal
Code function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Postal Code:_
(please do not use separators)
3. Key the stores postal code (up to 11 characters) and press [ENTER]. Do not put
any spaces or dashes in the number.
Postal Code:32601
(please do not use separators)
ACCEPTED

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-32 Maintenance
CPU Exception Information

5
The CPU Exception Information function allows you to review system information after
an abnormal system operation is encountered. Information in this file can assist the
VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center in troubleshooting the system.
CPU Exception Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the CPU Exception Information function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the CPU Exception
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Select Log: 1
3. Key the desired log number (1 - 3) and then press [ENTER]. Log number 1 is
the most recent and log number 3 is the oldest.
4. The contents of the file appear. Use the arrow keys to read additional information
OR press [List] to print the information.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-33
Start Debugger
5
The Start Debugger function is used by authorized VeriFone personnel to troubleshoot the
system.
Note:
Support Center.
Start Debugger Steps

Use these steps to reach the Start Debugger function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Start Debugger
function appears.
18. START DEBUGGER
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Select File System: _
1. Static Ram
3. Hard Drive
2. Card
4. Floppy Drive
3. The available modules to start the debugger from appear. Press the corresponding
number of the module you wish to work on and then press [ENTER].
Select File Name: _
1. /ram/gembug.ldm
2. /ram/cstartup.ldm
4. The file names appear. Press the corresponding number of the file you wish to
execute and press [ENTER].
Task Successfully Started
Debugger Started on com port 3
<Press ENTER Key to Acknowledge>
5. The display shows that the debugger has started. Press [ENTER] to return to the
file system menu and then press [EXIT] to return to the Maintenance mode
menu.
1. Static Ram
3. Hard Drive
2. Card
4. Floppy Drive
October 4, 2002
5-34 Maintenance
18. START DEBUGGER

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-35
Execute Load Module

5
The Execute Load Module function is a tool for VeriFone authorized representatives to
upgrade and troubleshoot the system.
Note:
Support Center.
Execute Load Module Steps

Use these steps to reach the Execute Load Module function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Execute Load
Module function appears.
19. EXECUTE LOAD MODULE
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
1. Static Ram
3. Hard Drive
2. Card
4. Floppy Drive
3. The available file systems appear. Press the corresponding number of the file
system you wish to use and then press [ENTER].
Start /ram/tm930.ldm? <ENTER>
4. Press an arrow key until the desired file name appears. Then do one of the
following:
Press [EXIT] to return to the previous menu.
Press [ENTER] to start.
19. EXECUTE LOAD MODULE
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-36 Maintenance
Reset Soft Key File

5
The Reset Soft Key File function resets the keyboard to the same soft key designations
originally in the Ruby terminal when it shipped. Use this function if you make a mistake
while programming the soft keys and would like to start over. Be aware that this function
clears all the keys you programmed.
Reset Soft Key File Steps

Use these steps to reach the Reset Soft Key File function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Reset Soft Key File
function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
WARNING!! This process will overwrite
your current soft key file!
Are you sure? (Y/N) _

Press [No] to cancel the function.
Press [Yes] to clear all soft keys from the memory.
4. The following screen appears, and the terminal then returns to the Maintenance
mode menu.
Soft Key File Reset Successfully_

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-37
Adjust Buzzer Volume

5
The Adjust Buzzer Volume function allows you to increase or decrease the volume of
alarms. This function is only available for CPU-4 terminals. If you do not have a CPU-4
terminal, the message Use Back Panel Adjustment displays.
To adjust the alarm volume of a terminal that is not a CPU-4 terminal, locate the dial
labeled BUZ VOL on the back of the Ruby terminal. Using a flathead screwdriver (or
similar tool), turn the dial. Turn the dial clockwise to decrease the volume or counterclockwise to increase the volume.
Adjust Buzzer Volume Steps

Use these steps to reach the Adjust Buzzer Volume function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Adjust Buzzer
Volume function appears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
To Increase Volume Press --->
To Decrease Volume Press <---
3. Press the arrow keys until you hear the desired buzzer volume.
Press [-->] to increase the volume.
Press [<--] to decrease the volume.
4. Press [EXIT]to return to the Maintenance mode menu.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-38 Maintenance
Reset Modem
5
The Reset Modem function resets the modem without rebooting the terminal.
Reset Modem Steps

Use these steps to reach the Reset Modem function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Reset Modem
function appears.
22. RESET MODEM
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
Modem reset successful_
22. RESET MODEM

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-39
Printer Error Log

5
The Printer Error Log function displays the last 10 printer status messages.
Printer Error Log Steps

Use these steps to reach the Printer Error Log function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Printer Error Log
function appears.
23. PRINTER ERROR LOG
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select]. The first screen of information displays.

3. Press the arrow keys to scroll through the information OR press [List] to print
the information.
23. PRINTER ERROR LOG
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
Sample Printer Error Log Listing

PRINTER ERROR LOG
10/04/02
16:50
---------------------------------------Terminal Number: 1
---------------------------------------08/15 16:46:50 PRINTER OFFLINE - OFF
08/15 16:48:32 PRINTER OFFLINE - ON
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
5-40 Maintenance
Reset Tank Delivery

5
The Reset Tank Delivery function clears a false delivery message from the Operator
Display.
Note:
Support Center.
Reset Tank Delivery Steps

Use these steps to reach the Reset Tank Delivery function from the Maintenance menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until Reset Tank Delivery
appears.
24. RESET TANK DELIVERY
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
RESET TANK [Y/N] _
Press [Yes] to reset the delivery status flags on the tank level sensor to off
and remove the delivery message from the Operator Display.
Press [No] to make no changes.
24. RESET TANK DELIVERY
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-41
Monitor Tank Communication

5
Tank monitoring is performed to assist in troubleshooting. A record of communication

with the tank level sensors can be recorded on the journal tape or in an internal file on the
Ruby terminal. If the communication is written to an internal file, the VeriFone Ruby
Customer Support Center can upload the information. Tank monitoring can also be turned
off so that no information is stored.
Note:
This function only appears if the site has TLSs installed and with the aid of
the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center.
Monitor Tank Communication Steps

Use these steps to reach the Monitor Tank Communication function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Monitor Tank
Communication function appears.
25. MONITOR TANK COMM
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
MONITOR TANK COMM [P/Y/N]

Press [P] to print to the journal instead of to an internal file.
Press [Yes] to print to an internal file instead of to the journal.
Press [No] to stop monitoring tank communication.
25. MONITOR TANK COMM
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-42 Maintenance
Backup Print Log

5
The Backup Print Log function copies the print log file to a backup file to assist the
VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center with troubleshooting.
Note:
Support Center.
Backup Print Log Steps

Use these steps to reach the Backup Print Log function from the Maintenance mode menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Backup Print Log
function appears.
26. BACKUP PRINT LOG
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. To make a copy of the print log file, press [Select].

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
When the print log file has been copied to your system, the alarm line displays
E7032 HLP DSK UPLD CPRNT. CPRNT is the name of the file.
*E7032 HLP DSK UPLD CPRNT*
This alarm message indicates that the file copied successfully and is ready to be
uploaded by the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center representative.
3. When the file has been uploaded, the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center
representative can remove the file from your system. When this is done, the alarm
message clears.
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-43
Print Installation Information

5
The Print Installation Information function lists the current hardware and software
configuration of your system. When troubleshooting a problem, the VeriFone Ruby
Customer Support Center will help you obtain a printout of this listing.
The Print Installation Information function lists:
Application Configuration
Software Configuration
Hardware Configuration
I/O Configurations
System Upgrades (since the original application was installed)
Print Installation Information Steps

Use these steps to reach the Print Installation Information function from the Maintenance
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Print Installation
27. PRINT INSTALLATION INFORMATION
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select]. Installation information begins to print.

PRINTING...
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
27. PRINT INSTALLATION INFORMATION

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-44 Maintenance
** SYSTEM SUMMARY **
Sample Print Installation

Information
REGISTRATION INFORMATION:
========================================
Serial No:
V Part No:
Sites Phone:
Postal Code:
---------------------------------------APPLICATION CONFIGURATION
========================================
Appl_Name =CITPAK-A B140 10/04/02
Appl_Name8=CITPAK
Appl_Ver =4.03.00
OpSys_Ver =2.2.8
TEMPFILES =200
RAMFILES =500
---------------------------------------SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
========================================
DEMO 10/04/02 10:54
Keyboard: 120 Key
Secure-Simm: Present
Lan: Multi-Term
Multi_Term: Controller ID:0
Report_Confi:3Shift
Cashier_Conf:30_Cashiers
Plu: 1000 PLU Config
Printer: Multi-station Printer Com4
Mux: No_Mux
Scanner: No_Scanner
BO_Intf:None (No BO, No HPV-20Diags, No
EJ)
Back Office: No_Back Office Port
HPV-20_Pri: HPV-20 not installed
HPV-20_Diags:No HPV-20 Diagnostics Port
Electronic_J: No Electronic Journal Port
Fuel: Nofuel
Dcr: No_dcr
Gsm: N0_Gsm
Keypad_Dcr: No_Keypad_Dcr
Gilb_Prompt_:No_Prompt-Dcr
Sch_Prompt_D:No_Prompt-Dcr
Tok_Prompt_D:No_Prompt-Dcr
Tcsa_Prompt_:No_Prompt-Dcr
Way_Prompt_D:No_Prompt-Dcr
Ben_Prompt_D:No_Prompt-Dcr
First_Networ:ADS_Dial modem
Second_Netwo:No_Second_Network
PinPad: PinPad com7
Carwash: No_carwash
Coin dispens:No_Coin_Dispenser
Tank Sensor: None
VERIPASS: No_VeriPASS_DCRs
Dcr_Graphic: No_Graphic_Dcr
MOPrinter: No_MOPrinter
---------------------------------------HARDWARE CONFIGURATION
========================================
System time : 10/04/02 14:08
SRAM Size
: 6291456
SRAM free
: 2897708
SRAM contig : 2129954
DRAM size
: 0
DRAM free
: 0
DRAM contig : 0
EID
: 0000028514e
CPU Speed
: 24 mHz (est.)
Gemix opsys : V2.5.9
Modem
: v1.08
Mezz board
: present
Secure SIMM : present
----------------------------------------
October 4, 2002
I/O CONFIGURATION
========================================
station
0
kbd.ldm
/dev/kbd1
0 - 0
odsp.ldm
/dev/dsp2
0 - 0
cdsp.ldm
/dev/dsp1
0 - 0
rprt.ldm
/dev/prn2
0 - 0
jprt.ldm
/dev/prn1
0 - 0
lprt.ldm
/dev/lpt
9600 - 8
mag.ldm
/dev/msr
0 - 0
lan.ldm
/dev/lan
115200 n 8
net1.ldm
/dev/modem
2400 n 8
cwdriv.ldm
/dev/com8
9600 n 8
net2.ldm
/dev/com1
2400 n 8
tm930.ldm
/dev/com4
9600 n 8
gcomms.ldm
/dev/com5
19200 n 8
fueldrv.ldm
/dev/com2
9600 e 7
pp.ldm
/dev/com7
1200 n 8
.
.
.
molib.ldm
/dev/mux
9600 n 8
---------------------------------------date: 10/04/02
Time: 14:08
installed by:
X_______________________________________
Name:
Comments:
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------NO UPGRADES SINCE INSTALLATION
----------------------------------------
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-45
Sample Print Installation

Information (Continued)
5-46 Maintenance
Reboot System
5
The Reboot System function reboots the Ruby terminal and allows access to the HPV-20
Functions.
Note:
For information on HPV-20 Functions, refer to chapter 9 of this manual.
Reboot System Steps

Use these steps to reach the Reboot System function from the Maintenance mode menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Reboot System
function appears.
29. Reboot System
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select].
WARNING!! System will shutdown!
Are you sure?
(Y/N) _
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
Press [Yes] to reboot the Ruby terminal.

Note:
For information on the reboot process, refer to Starting Sales in

the Sales Reference.
Press [No] to return to the Reboot System function.
29. Reboot System
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-47
Display IP Stats
5
The Display IP Stats function displays statistical information exchanged between the
HPV-20 and the Ruby terminal.
Note:
Display IP Stats Steps

Use these steps to reach the Display IP Stats function from the Maintenance mode menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Display IP Stats
function appears.
30. DISPLAY IP STATS
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select] to display communication information.

When no IP stats are available to the Ruby terminal, the following Op Display
appears.
NO IP STATS!
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
When IP stats are present, the first screen of information appears. Press the
arrow keys to look at additional information.
Reg : GEMIXLAN
INCOMING
GPRec
n/a
n/a
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
3. Press the [List] key to print the information.

30. DISPLAY IP STATS
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-48 Maintenance
Sample Display IP Stats Listing

IP STATS
10/04/02
10:29
---------------------------------------Reg : GEMIXLAN
n/a
n/a
INCOMING
GPRec
Non-IP
0
0
0
Dscrds
0
0
0
Errors
0
0
0
Unicst
67
0
0
NUcst
0
0
0
Octets
11849
0
0
NPRec
Delvrd
67
0
0
Forwrd
0
0
0
OUTGOING
Origin
63
0
0
Forwrd
0
0
0
GPSnt
Non-IP
0
0
0
Unicst
63
0
0
NUcst
0
0
0
Octets
4732
0
0
Dscrds
0
0
0
Errors
0
0
0
NPSnt
Outbnd
63
0
0
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
Maintenance 5-49
e-pc Status Report

5
The e-pc Status Report function displays version and time/date information for HPV-20/
UpTime running on the e-pc.
Note:
e-pc Status Report Steps

Use these steps to reach the e-pc Status Report function from the Maintenance mode
menu.
1. At the Maintenance mode menu, press the arrow keys until the e-pc Status Report
function appears.
31. e-pc STATUS REPORT
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
2. Press [Select] to display version information.

When no e-pc Status Report is available to the Ruby terminal, the following
information appears.
NO ePC STATUS REPORT!
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
When an e-pc is present, the following information appears.

HPV-20 UpTime
2.00.00
Mon 10/04/02
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
3. Press the [List] key to print the information.

31. e-pc STATUS REPORT
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
5-50 Maintenance
Sample e-PC Status Report Listing

ePC STATUS REPORT
10/04/02
10:29
---------------------------------------HPV-20 UpTime
2.00.00
Mon 10/04/02
4:35p
--- end ---
October 4, 2002
Network Manager
Network Manager mode contains functions that define network sales and
communications:
Pre-authorization
Mail
Batch Details
Prepaid Functions
Quick Credit
Communication Statistics
Print Network Log
Print Parameters
Network Configuration
Print Product Codes
Configuration
Store and Forward
The Network Manager mode is only available on standalone or controlling terminals.
October 4, 2002
6-2 Network Manager
Start Network Manager Mode

Use these steps to enter Network Manager mode from any point in the application. Then
refer to the chapter that describes the function you wish to run.
Steps
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Network Manager mode appears.
[ NETWORK MGR ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

*NETWORK MANAGER MENU*
6. Continue with the appropriate Network Manager function.
October 4, 2002
Network Manager 6-3
Pre-authorization
6
The Pre-authorization function authorizes a given credit card amount before a sales
transaction.
Note:
These steps may vary depending on the type of credit card being preauthorized.
Pre-authorization Steps
Use these steps to reach the Pre-authorization function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Preauthorization function appears.
2. Press [Select].
SLIDE CARD OR ENTER ACCOUNT NUMBER
Note:
If Manual Entry Enable [Y/N] in Network Manager > Configuration

> Dealer Configuration is set to N, only SLIDE CARD displays.
1. Credit Cards
Key the account number and press [ENTER]then key the expiration date and
press [ENTER].
Swipe the credit card.
ESTIMATED TOTAL $ SALE
$
2. Key the amount to be pre-authorized and press [ENTER]. Various network

messages display.
October 4, 2002
6-4 Network Manager
3. When you receive an approval number, press [ENTER] to return to the Network
Manager mode menu.
APPROVAL # 123456
PRESS ENTER KEY TO CONTINUE
2. Prepaid Cards
1. Swipe the CITGO Cash Card.
Note: Prepaid card numbers are not accepted if they are manually keyed.
2. The Ruby terminal calls the network for the balance. Either the balance displays on
the Ruby terminal and a Prepaid Balance Inquiry Receipt prints showing the
available balance on the card, or the Ruby terminal displays one of the following
messages:
DO NOT ACCEPT/BALANCE $ddd.cc

This means the balance is frozen.
INVALID CARD
INACTIVE CARD
HOST UNAVAILABLE/CANNOT PROCESS
This means the network cannot be accessed.
BALANCE $DD.CC
October 4, 2002
Network Manager 6-5
Mail
6
The Mail function displays all mail messages from the network since mail was last
printed. The messages are cleared after printing. If there are no messages waiting, the
terminal will dial out for mail.
Mail Steps
Use these steps to reach the Mail function from the Network Manager mode menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Mail function
appears.
2. MAIL
2. Press [Select]. If there is no mail, NO MORE MAIL appears briefly.

DIALING...
PRINTING...
2. MAIL
Sample Mail Listing

***********
MAIL REPORT
***********
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.01
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
1***
1***
MAIL MESSAGE TEST TYPE 1

MAIL MESSAGE TEST TYPE 2
***
***
****************************************
October 4, 2002
6-6 Network Manager
Batch Details
6
The Batch Details function prints details of the current batch, the last 10 pending batches,
the last five unbalanced batches, and the last five balanced batches.
Batch Details Steps

Use these steps to reach the Batch Details function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Batch Details
function appears.
3. BATCH DETAILS
2. Press [Select].
1. CURRENT
*BATCH DETAILS MENU*
3. Use the arrow keys to select which type of batch you would like to print.
1. CURRENT
Description: Prints the current open batch.
Steps:
Press [Select] [Select]. If the batch type is not available, NO

BATCH AVAILABLE appears briefly.
2. PENDING
Description: Prints a batch that has been closed but hasnt been settled yet.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.
Press [Select]. If the batch type is not available, NO BATCH

AVAILABLE appears briefly.
>01. #001
02. #002
03. #003
2.
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
08:43
14:36
17:12
Use the arrow keys to select the batch number you would like to print
and press [Select].
October 4, 2002
Network Manager
6-7
3. OUT OF BALANCE
Description: Prints a closed batch where the totals do not match the hosts totals.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.

>01. #001
02. #002
03. #003
2.
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
08:43
14:36
17:12
and press [Select].
4. IN BALANCE
Description: Prints a closed batch where the totals agree with the hosts totals.
Steps:
Do the following:
1.

>01. #001
02. #002
03. #003
2.
10/04/02
10/04/02
10/04/02
08:43
14:36
17:12
and press [Select].
4. Repeat step 3 to print another batch detail report OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Network Manager mode menu.
3. BATCH DETAILS
October 4, 2002
6-8 Network Manager
Sample Batch Detail Report

BATCH CURRENT
10/04/02
14:34
UNIT ID: 00140080294 TERMINAL ID: 02

OPENED AT: 10/04/02 14:01
BATCH# 01
TYPE
CHARGES
CORRECTIONS
NET
AWARDS
ACTIVATIONS
COUNT
AMOUNT
5
26.56
0
0.00
-----------------------5
26.56
1
0
0.00
BATCH# 01 BY TERMINAL
TERMINAL# 1
CHARGES
2
11.70
CORRECTIONS
0
0.00
-----------------------NET
2
11.70
AWARDS
1
ACTIVATIONS
0
0.00
TERMINAL# 2
CHARGES
CORRECTIONS
NET
TYPE
CHARGES
3
14.86
0
0.00
-----------------------3
14.86
CARD
COUNT
AMOUNT
VI
DS
3
17.85
2
8.71
--------------------5
26.56
TOTAL
CITGO SETTLEMENT
TOTAL
5
26.56
QUICK CREDIT APPLICATIONS
TOTAL QUICK CREDIT APPLICATIONS
0
TRANSACTION DETAILS
TR TIME
ACT#
CARD AMOUNT
2 14:08:09 4012860000000120 mVI
4.49
D 14:15:43 6011000998980605 rMC
4.32
2 14:17:10 4005550000000019
DS
4.39
2 14:19:32 4012860000000088
AE
5.98
1 14:31:44 4012860000000070 vDI
7.38
The number of Quick Credit

applications.
Transaction Details
October 4, 2002
Network Manager
6-9
Prepaid Functions
6
Prepaid Functions activates a prepaid card for the specified amount. This function can also
be used to add value to a card which has already been activated.
Prepaid Functions Steps

Use these steps to reach Prepaid Functions from the Network Manager mode menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until Prepaid Functions
appears.
4. PREPAID FUNCTIONS
** USE ARROW KEYS **
2. Press [Select].
1. ACTIVATE
*PREPAID FUNCTIONS MENU*
3. Press [Select].
ENTER CARD VALUE
$
4. Key a card value in whole dollars between $5 and $999, without the decimal point.
For example, a value of $25 would be keyed as [2][5][0][0].
5. Press [ENTER].
SLIDE CARD OR ENTER ACCOUNT NUMBER$
6. Swipe the card.

Note:
Prepaid card numbers are not accepted if they are manually keyed.
CARD ACTIVATED
BALANCE $DD.CC
October 4, 2002
6-10 Network Manager
A receipt prints.
1. ACTIVATE
*PREPAID FUNCTIONS MENU*
7. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to activate another prepaid card OR press [EXIT] to return
to the Network Manager mode menu.
4. PREPAID FUNCTIONS
CARD ACTIVATED
Sample Prepaid Card Activation

Receipt
CARD TYPE: PREPAID

CARD NAME: CITGO CUSTOMER
ACCT NUMBER: 10012345600000000789
CARD BALANCE: $50.00
EXP.DATE: 12/02 TRANS TYPE: ACTIVATION
AUTH # 005000
SYSTEM TRACE AUDIT NUMBER: 001462
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:00:27
****************************************
PREPAID CARD RECEIPT
CARD ACTIVATED
Sample Prepaid Card

Receipt for a Card with Value
Added
CARD TYPE: PREPAID

CARD NAME: CITGO CUSTOMER
ACCT NUMBER: 10012345600000000789
CARD BALANCE: $70.00
EXP.DATE: 12/02 TRANS TYPE: ACTIVATION
AUTH # 005057
SYSTEM TRACE AUDIT NUMBER: 001493
ORIGINAL BALANCE : $ 50.00
ACTIVATION AMOUNT : $ 20.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:00:27
****************************************
PREPAID CARD RECEIPT
October 4, 2002
Network Manager 6-11
Quick Credit
6
The Quick Credit function speeds the credit application process by cutting paperwork and
mail time. Upon approval of the customers credit card and required information, a receipt
prints with a temporary account number. This account number is available for the
customers immediate use.
A frequency award program rewards the customer with prizes. The network sets a flag
sent in the parameter download which determines how often the prizes are awarded. The
frequency is tied to the number of applicants signing up for Quick Credit. A receipt prints
telling the customer You have won a prize, redeem with cashier.
Quick Credit Steps

Use these steps to reach the Quick Credit function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
Note: The customer keys information on the PINpad.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Quick Credit
function appears.
5. QUICK CREDIT
2. Press [Select]. The following prompt appears:

SLIDE CARD
3. The customer slides the card.

If the credit card is not valid, the terminal displays CARD NOT ALLOWED
and cancels the transaction.
If the credit card is valid, the Ruby terminal displays the following:
ENTER SOC SEC # ON PINPAD
4. The customer keys a Social Security Number on the PINpad.

If the number is valid, the Quick Credit process continues.
If the number is not valid, the transaction ends.
October 4, 2002
5. The customer keys a street address and zip code.

ENTER STREET # ON PINPAD
ENTER ZIP CODE ON PINPAD
The Ruby terminal prompts the customer for the following information:
AT ADDRESS LESS THAN 6 MONTHS
ENTER = YES, CLEAR = NO
If Yes, the Ruby terminal goes back to step 5 and prompts the customer to
ENTER PREVIOUS STREET # ON PINPAD and ENTER PREVIOUS
ZIP CODE ON PINPAD.
If No, the Quick Credit process continues with the following prompt:
ENTER PHONE NUMBER ON PIN PAD
6. The customer keys the telephone number on the PINpad and the Ruby terminal
displays the following:
DIALING. . .
PLEASE WAIT . . .
If credit is approved, a temporary account number is sent to the Ruby terminal

and a Quick Credit receipt automatically prints. The account number is
available immediately for purchases.
ACCT # 01143478999
If credit is not approved, a message, APPLICATION PENDING, NOTIFY

BY MAIL displays on the terminal.
October 4, 2002
7. Press [Select] or press [EXIT] to return to the Network Manager mode menu.
5. QUICK CREDIT
QUICK CREDIT RECEIPT
Sample Quick Credit Receipt
****************************************
NAME: APPROVE/ALWAYS
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 08:48 a.m.
TEMPORARY ACCT. # 860000353001
THANK YOU, EVANGELO DASCAL FOR APPLYING
FOR A CITGO CREDIT CARD
****************************************
QUICK CREDIT RECEIPT

****************************************
NAME: APPROVE/ALWAYS
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 08:48 a.m.
YOU HAVE WON A PRIZE

REDEEM WITH CASHIER
****************************************
October 4, 2002
Sample of Frequency Award Receipt
Communication Statistics
6
The Communication Statistics function prints a report of all communication with the
network. The statistics are cleared after the report prints.
Communication Statistics Steps

Use these steps to reach the Communication Statistics function from the Network
Manager mode menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the
Communication Statistics function appears.
6. COMM STATISTICS
2. Press [Select].
PLEASE WAIT...
ANOTHER COPY?

Press [Yes] to print another copy. Repeat step 2.
Press [No] to return to the Network Manager mode menu.
6. COMM STATISTICS
October 4, 2002
****** COMMUNICATION STATISTICS ******

****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
PRIMARY
TOTAL CALLS
NO RESPONSE
LOST CARRIER
AVG CONNECT TIME
AVG RESPONSE TIME
AVG CALL SET-UP TIME
FALLBACK TRANSACTIONS
- CODE 57
- OTHER
SECONDARY
002
000
000
020
003
009
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
000
TIMER ACTIVATED
000
****************************************
October 4, 2002
Sample Communication Statistics

Report
Print Network Log

6
The Print Network Log function prints a report of up to the last 1,000 network
communication records. This function also clears the network log and allows you to print
by category. The most recent transaction prints first.
Print Network Log Steps

Use these steps to reach the Print Network Log function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Print Network
Log function appears.
7. PRINT NETWORK LOG
2. Press [Select].
1. PRINT ALL
*NETWORK LOG MENU*
3. Use the arrow keys to select the desired network log function.
1. PRINT ALL
Description: Prints up to the last 1,000 network communication records.
Steps:
Press [Select].
2. PRINT BATCH TRANSACTIONS

Description: Prints all transactions in a specific batch.
Steps:
Do the following.
1.
Press [Select].
ENTER BATCH NUMBER:
_
2.
Enter the batch number you would like to print transactions from and
press [ENTER].
3. PRINT BATCH SUMMARY

Description: Prints a summary of all batches in the network log and gives the status of
batch closings.
Steps:
Press [Select].
October 4, 2002
4. PRINT BY DATE
Description: Prints network communication records for a specific date.
Steps:
Do the following.
1.
Press [Select].
ENTER DATE (MMDDYY):
_
2.
Key the date you would like to print transactions from and press
[ENTER].
5. CLEAR LOG
Description: Erases all entries in the network log.
Steps:
Do the following.
1.
Press [Select].
CLEAR NETWORK LOG [Y,N]_
2.
Press [Yes] or [No] to confirm.
4. Repeat step 3 to print another network log or press [EXIT] to return to the
Network Manager mode.
7. PRINT NETWORK LOG
Sample Network Log

**********
NETWORK LOG
*********
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
DATE
TIME
DESC
REFERENCE
01/16 17:59:52
P
01/16 17:40:47
C
9700001002
01/16 17:40:09
C
9700001001
****************************************
October 4, 2002
Network Log Descriptions

Value
Description
A settlement has been made. This code is followed by one of the these
messages:
IN BALANCE indicates the batch is in balance.
RESEND indicates the batch is out of balance. This code causes the terminal
to retransmit the batch to the host.
OUT OF BALANCE indicates the batch is out of balance, but no
retransmission is required. This code is a final out of balance condition.
A sale or credit transaction has been collected by the host. The reference
number of the transaction collected follows this code.
An end of day process has occurred from the user running the end of shift
report.
The terminal experienced a power failure.
A sale or credit transaction has been retransmitted to the host. This occurs
when the host requests the batch to be retransmitted, and is indicated by the
host signaling the terminal that the batch is out of balance. The transactions
reference number also follows this code.
This code indicates that an end-of-shift process occurred from the user closing
period 1.
This code indicates a retry timer has expired. This code is followed by the
message DC-RESTART, indicating the previous data collection
process,which was interrupted by error, is to be restarted; or the message
RTB-RESTART, indicating the previous batch settlement process, which
was interrupted by error, is to be restarted.
An attempt to have the host collect a sale or credit transaction failed.

Additionally, the reference number for that transaction is followed by a twodigit code describing why the collection failed.
October 4, 2002
Print Parameters
6
The Print Parameters function prints a summary report of station parameters.
Print Parameters Steps

Use these steps to reach the Print Parameters function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Print
Parameters function appears.
8. PRINT PARAMETERS
2. Press [Select].
PRINTING...
8. PRINT PARAMETERS
Sample Station Parameters Report

STATION PARAMETERS
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
BATCH SIZE
MANUAL ENTRY
DIAL MODE
BAUD RATE
ACCESS CODE
PRIMARY
SECONDARY
DOWNLOAD
CARD TYPE
AMERICAN EXPRSS
VISA
MASTERCARD
DISCOVER
WRIGHT EXPRESS
DEBIT
October 4, 2002
35
YES
TONE
1200
18009319332#
18009319332#
18009319332#
REG
NO
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
DCR FLR VOICE PHONE#

YES 35 18005282121
YES 35 18003435792
YES 35 18003435792
YES 35 18003471111
YES
0 18008420071
YES
0
Network Configuration
6
The Network Configuration function sets up network parameters. Up to nine networks can
be configured using this function.
Note:
These values should not be changed. This function must be used with the aid
of the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center.
Network Configuration Steps

Use these steps to run the Network Configuration function and make changes to the
information.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Network
9. NETWORK CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
Note:
Running a Close Daily may be required before entering the Network

Configuration function.
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired network appears.
4. Enter the indicated information for each network item. The variable nnnnnn in
each item represents the network name.
nnnnnn NETWORK ENABLED [Y/N]:
Note:
This parameter is only available through a VeriFone Ruby Customer

Support Center password.
Values:
Yes or No.
Y: This network is enabled.
N: This network is not enabled.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn MERCH ID:

Description: Merchant ID number. This account number is given to the store by the
network.
Values:
October 4, 2002
Steps:

1.
Key the new merchant number and press [ENTER] to go to the next
item.
2.
nnnnnn ACCESS CODE

Note:

Description: Prefix number for dialing access to an outside line.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new access code and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnnnnn PRI PHN#:

Note:

Description: Primary phone number. This is the first phone number that the Ruby dials to
attempt to connect to the host. If the Ruby cannot connect using this number,
it dials using the secondary phone number.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new telephone number with no breaks or dashes and press
[ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnnnnn SEC PHN#:

Note:

Description: Secondary phone number. The Ruby dials this when the primary number is
not available. If you do not enter a secondary number, the Ruby retries the
primary phone number.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new telephone number with no breaks or dashes and press
[ENTER].
2.
nnnnnn DNLOAD PHN#:

Note:

Description: Download phone number. This phone number is dialed in order to download
software from the host. This value is not currently used.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Steps:
Press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
nnnnnn BATCH NUMBER:

Note:

Description: The current batch number. This number should be entered during an upgrade
procedure to keep track of the appropriate batch number.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new number and then press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnnnnn SEQUENCE NUMBER:

Note:

Description: Current transaction number within a batch. This number should be entered
during an upgrade procedure to keep track of the appropriate transaction
number within a batch.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn POLL CODE:

Note:

Description: The network supplied identification number for a terminal line to a leasedline.
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn BAUD RATE:

Note:

Description: Identifies the speed the terminal communicates with the host.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 3.
0: None.
1: 1200 baud.
2: 300 baud.
3: 2400 baud.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
nnnnnn TERM TYPE:

Note:

Description: Number supplied by the network which identifies the terminal as a Ruby.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn TERM ID:

Description: Terminal ID number. This number, supplied by the network, identifies each
terminal and is part of the merchant ID number.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new ID number and then press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnnnnn DATA SIZE:

Note:

Description: Used in modem communications. The default should not be changed.

Values:
Numeric, 7 or 8.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn PARITY:
Note:


Values:
Numeric, 0 - 2.
0: No parity.
1: Odd parity.
2: Even parity.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn STOP BIT:

Note:


Values:
October 4, 2002
Numeric, 0 - 9.
Steps:

1.
2.
nnnnnn LOGON STR:

Note:

Description: String used to log on to the network. The default should not be changed.
Values:
Numeric, up to 9 characters.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nnnnnn PASSWORD:
Note:

Description: Password used to log on to the network. The default should not be changed.
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the new password and then press [ENTER] to return to the first
item.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and return to the first item.
nnnnnn LOGON TRIES:

Note:

Description: The number of attempts allowed for logging on to the network.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to return to the next item.
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and return to the next item.
nnnnnn APPEND # TO PHONE# IN PDL[Y/N]:

Note:

Description: Determines whether phone numbers received from the host through PDLs
require a pound sign (#) at the end. Y is the default for the primary network
and N is the default for all other networks.
Values:
Yes or No.
Y: A pound sign # is requred at the end of telephone numbers.
N: A pound sign # is not required at the end of telephone numbers.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to return to the first item.
2.
October 4, 2002

the Network Manager menu.
9. NETWORK CONFIGURATION
October 4, 2002
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the network configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of all enabled networks and their parameters.
Note:
You are only able to print those functions in which you have access.
NETWORK INFORMATION
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
Sample Network Configuration

Listing
Network Status: Enabled (Local Net)

Merchant ID:
80200960341
Terminal ID:
02
Access Code:
Primary Phone#:
18005551234
Secondary Phone#:
18005554321
Download Phone#:
18005559876
Batch Number:
11
Trans (Sequence) Number: 54
Poll Code:
Baud Rate:
1 (BAUD1200)
Terminal Type:
92
Data Size:
8
Parity:
2 (EVEN)
Stop Bit:
1
Logon String:
014
Password:
ABCD
Logon Tries:
3
Append # to PDL Phone#
N
Network Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up Configuration on a standalone or controlling terminal for the first
up.
1. Make a copy of the Network Configuration Worksheet and use a pencil to
complete it.
parameter in the sections.
October 4, 2002
Network Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Network:
Network Enabled [Y/N]
Terminal Type
Merchant ID
Terminal ID
Access Code
Data Size
Primary Phone #
Parity
Secondary Phone #
Stop Bit
Download Phone #
Logon String
Batch Number
Password
Sequence Number
Logon Tries
Poll Code
Append # to Phone # in PDL

[Y/N]
Baud Rate
Network:
Network Enabled [Y/N]
Terminal Type
Merchant ID
Terminal ID
Access Code
Data Size
Primary Phone #
Parity
Secondary Phone #
Stop Bit
Download Phone #
Logon String
Batch Number
Password
Sequence Number
Logon Tries
Poll Code
Append # to Phone # in PDL

[Y/N]
Baud Rate
October 4, 2002
Value
Print Product Codes

6
The Print Product Codes function prints a list of all product codes.
Print Product Codes Steps

Use these steps to reach the Print Product Codes function from the Network Manager
mode menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Print Product
Codes function appears.
10. PRINT PRODUCT CODES
2. Press [Select].
PRINTING...
10. PRINT PRODUCT CODES

October 4, 2002
Sample Product Codes Listing

PRODUCT FILE
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.05
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:20
****************************************
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
October 4, 2002
UNLEAD
PREMIUM 1
FUEL
KEROSENE
DIESEL TAXED
MISC MDSE
B & A
LABOR
TIRES
UNLEAD FS
PREMIUM 1 FS
OIL
LUBE
MIDGRADE 1
MIDGRADE 1 FS
COUPON
CNG
TAX
CAR WASH
TOWING
REPAIRS
PARTS
MIDGRADE 2
MIDGRADE 2 FS
MIDGRADE 3
MIDGRADE 3 FS
AUTO MDSE
PREMIUM 2
PREMIUM 2 FS
DIESEL FS TAXED
PREPAID CARD
DIESEL 2 TAXED
DIESEL 2 FS TAX
GASOHOL
DISCOUNT
DIESEL NO TAX
DIESEL FS NO TA
DIESEL 2 NO TAX
DIESEL 2 FS NO
ETHANOL
E85 (ETHANOL 85
MISC SERVICE
DISABLED
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
DISABLED
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
Enabled
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
DISABLED
Configuration
6
The Configuration function contains the following subfunctions:
Parameter Download
Credit Card Configuration
Modem Configuration
Batch Configuration
Dealer Configuration
Debit Configuration
Proprietary Card Configuration
October 4, 2002
Start Configuration Menu

Use these steps to reach the Configuration function from any point in the application.
Steps
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Configuration
function appears.
11. CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
1. PARAMETER DOWNLOAD
3. Continue with the appropriate Configuration function.
October 4, 2002
Parameter Download
The Parameter Download function in the Configuration menu downloads information
from the network to the Ruby terminal.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Parameter Download
function appears.
2. Press [Select].
START PARAMETER DOWNLOAD? [Y/N] _

Press [Yes] to start the download.
PLEASE WAIT...
Press [No] to cancel the download.

4. The Operator Display returns to the Configuration menu.
October 4, 2002
Credit Card Configuration

The Credit Card Configuration function in the Configuration menu sets parameters for
credit cards used at the Ruby terminal.
Note:
Support Center.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Credit Card
2. CREDIT CARD CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired credit card abbreviation appears.
4. Enter the indicated information for each item. The variable nn in each item
represents the credit card abbreviation.
nn CC DISPLAY CODE:
Note:

Description: Determines whether or not the card is active.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 2.
0: Not active. This card type will not appear on network reports.
1: The first active card of its type or the only active card of its type. This card
will show up on network reports and can be configured without a password.
2: A subsequent active card of its type. For example, one card type may have
two different track 2 lengths, so it requires two credit card files. If there is
more than one active card type, all subsequent, active cards of the same type
should be assigned a 2.
Steps:

1.
Key the new number and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nn CC ABBREV:
Note:

Description: Credit card abbreviation. This abbreviation appears in network logs.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Alphanumeric, 2 characters.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn CC TYPE:
Note:

Description: Credit card type. The values of these numbers are determined by the
network.
Values:
Numeric, 1 - 29.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn CC NAME:
Note:

Description: The descriptive name of the credit card. This name is usually found on the
card.
Values:
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ENABLED: [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: This credit card can be used.
No: This credit card cannot be used.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn FLOOR LIMIT:
Description: Maximum amount that the terminal can authorize when the network is not
available.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 255.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn PROD RESTRICT: [Y/N]

Note:

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The card is restricted to fuel-only purchases.
No: The card is not restricted to a specific type of purchase.
October 4, 2002
Steps:

1.
2.
nn V/AUTH PHONE#:
Description: Phone number which displays on the Operator Display when voice
authorization is required.
Values:
Numeric, 11 digits.
Steps:

1.
Key 1, the area code, and the phone number with no breaks and then
press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nn ISO PART 1:
Note:

Description: Beginning account number range for a card type.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999999.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ISO PART 2:
Note:

Description: Ending account number range for a card type.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999999.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn AUTH NETWK:
Note:

Description: Determines through which network the card is approved.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 4.
0: No network
1: Local Network
2: ADSNET
3: PFleet Network
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
nn V/AUTH NETWK:
Note:

Description: Determines which network voice approvals are received through.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 4.
0: No network
1: Local Network
2: ADSNET
3: PFleet Network
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ACCT VAL INDEX:

Note:

Description: Account validation required for card.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 255.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn PAN LEN1:
Note:

Description: First primary account number length.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new length and then press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
nn PAN LEN2:
Note:

Description: Second primary account number length.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
nn TRACK II LEN:
Note:

Description: Track 2 length.

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ENABLE PIN PROMPT [Y/N]:

Note:

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The Ruby terminal prompts the customer to enter a PIN on the PINpad.
No: The customer is not required to enter a PIN on the PINpad.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ENABLE EXP DATE [Y/N]:

Note:

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The Ruby terminal validates the cards expiration date in month/year
format, MMYY. The expiration date prints on the receipt.
No: The Ruby terminal does not validate the cards expiration date. The
expiration date does not print on the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn PIN PROMPT INDEX:

Note:

Description: Identifies special PINpad prompts (i.e., driver ID, odometer reading, etc.)
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn MAX AUTH LIMIT:

Note:

Description: Maximum dollar amount that the terminal can approve with local approval.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 9999.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn TERM TIME OUT:

Note:

Description: Required network response time (seconds).

Values:
Numeric, 0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
Key the new response time and then press [ENTER] to go to the next
item.
2.
nn DISPENSER LIMIT:
Note:

Description: Maximum credit transaction amount allowed at a fuel pump. If the amount
reaches this limit, the pump automatically shuts off.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 999.
Steps:

1.
2.
NN DISPENSER AUTH:
Note:

Description: Maximum dollar amount that can be pre-authorized for a fuel sale.
Note:
This parameter sets the pre-authorized amount for DCR debit transactions.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 255.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
nn ENABLE DCR [Y/N]:

Note:

Note:
Also, refer to DCR Configuration and Site Parameters for information on

setting other DCR parameters.
Description: This parameter determines whether this credit card is accepted at the DCR.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The credit card is accepted.
No: The credit card is not accepted. If N is entered, the next four
parameters do not appear.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn ENABLE HOT DCR [Y/N]:

Note:

Support Center password. Also, it appears only if ENABLE DCR [Y/N] is
set to Y.
Note:
Also, refer to DCR Configuration for information on setting other DCR

parameters.
Description: Determines whether the customer can begin fueling before a purchase and
credit card is authorized by the network.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn HIDE ACCT# ON DCR RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

set to Y.
Note:
This parameter overrides the Customer account number on receipt

parameter in Fuel Manager > Site Parameters > DCR Site Parameters.
Description: Determines whether the account number prints on the DCR receipt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Does not print the account number.
No: Prints the account number.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
nn ALLOW DCR FALLBACK [Y/N]:

Note:

set to Y.
Description: Determines whether DCR transactions are permitted when the network is
down.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn MASK ACCT# ON DCR RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

set to Y.
Description: This parameter determines how the credit card number prints on the DCR
receipt. This parameter is overridden if the HIDE ACCT# ON DCR
RECEIPT parameter is set to Y.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Replacesw the beginning numbers with *s and prints the last four
digits of the account number.
No: Prints the whole account number.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn EXPANDED AUTH AMOUNT [Y/N]:

Note:

Description: Determines whether the network authorization field is expanded to include

dollars and cents information for credit cards.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The authorization field contains dollars and cents information.
No: The authorization field does not contain dollars and cents information.
Steps:

1.
2.
October 4, 2002
nn MASK ACCT# ON CUST RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

Description: This parameter determines how the credit card number prints on the
customers inside sales receipt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Replace the beginning numbers with *s and prints the last four digits
of the account number.
No: Print the whole account number.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn HIDE DATE ON CUST RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

Description: This parameter determines whether the expiration date prints on the
customers inside sales receipt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Does not print the expiration date on the receipt.
No: Prints the expiration date on the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.
nn MASK ACCT# ON STORE RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

Description: This parameter determines how the credit card number prints on the stores
inside sales receipt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Replaces the beginning numbers with *s and prints the last four digits
of the account number.
No: Prints the whole account number.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
2.
nn HIDE DATE ON STORE RECEIPT [Y/N]:

Note:

Description: This parameter determines whether the expiration date prints on the stores
inside sales receipt.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Does not print the expiration date on the receipt.
No: Prints the expiration date on the receipt.
Steps:

1.
2.

the Configuration menu.
2. CREDIT CARD CONFIGURATION
October 4, 2002
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the credit card configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of all credit cards and their parameters.
Note:
Only the functions you have access to print.
CREDIT CARD INFO FILE

****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
AE AMERICAN DISABLED 35
18005282121
CC Type: 5
Display Status: 1
Product Restrictions:
N
ISO Part 1:
340
ISO Part 2:
349
Auth Network:
2 (JCPBSI Net)
Voice Auth Network:
0 (No Network)
Account Validation Index:
16
Pan Len 1:
15
Pan Len 2:
0
Track II len:
0
Pin Prompt:
N
Exp Date:
Y
Pin PAD Prompt Index:
000
Max Authorizatio Limit:
$ 0
Terminal Time Out:
040
Dispenser Floor Limit:
$ 050
Dispenser Auth Amount:
$ 001
Dispenser Enabled:
Y
Dispenser Hot Pump Enabled:
N
Dispenser Acct Hide Enabled:
Y
Dispenser Fallback Enabled:
Y
Dispenser Acct Mask Enabled:
Y
Expanded Auth Amount
N
Mask Acct on Cust Receipt
Y
Hide Date on Cust Receipt
Y
Mask Acct on Store Receipt
Y
Hide Date on Store Receipt
Y
AE AMERICAN DISABLED 35
18005282121
CC Type: 5
Display Status: 1
Product Restrictions:
N
ISO Part 1:
340
ISO Part 2:
349
Auth Network:
2 (JCPBSI Net)
Voice Auth Network:
0 (No Network)
Account Validation Index:
16
Pan Len 1:
15
Pan Len 2:
0
Track II len:
0
Pin Prompt:
N
Exp Date:
Y
Pin PAD Prompt Index:
000
Max Authorizatio Limit:
$ 0
Terminal Time Out:
040
Dispenser Floor Limit:
$ 050
Dispenser Auth Amount:
$ 001
Dispenser Enabled:
N
(Repeats for each card)
October 4, 2002
Sample Credit Card Configuration

Listing
Modem Configuration
The Modem Configuration function in the Configuration menu contains parameters which
set modem values.
Note:
These values should not be changed. This function must be used with the aid
of the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Modem Configuration
function appears.
3. MODEM CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
PULSE OR TONE [P/T]: T

PULSE OR TONE [P/T]:
Values:
P or T.
P: Pulse.
T: Tone.
Steps:

1.
2.
MODEM RESET STR:

Note:

Description: Resets the modem.

Values:
Alphanumeric, up to 20 characters. The default string is

ATV0&D2S11=50.
Steps:

1.
2.
MODEM DIAL STR:

Note:

Description: Tells the modem to dial out.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Alphanumeric, up to 15 characters. The default string is

ATX4S9=1S7=24DT.
Steps:

1.
2.

Configuration menu.
3. MODEM CONFIGURATION
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the modem configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of modem parameters.
Note:
You are only able to print those functions in which you have access.
PHONE CONTROL FILE

****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
PHONE CONTROL FILE
Pulse / Tone:
Modem Reset String:
ATVO$D2S11=50
Modem Dial String:
October 4, 2002
T
ATX4S9=1S7=24DT
Sample Modem Configuration

Listing
Batch Configuration
The Batch Configuration function in the Configuration menu contains parameters which
control batch settings.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Batch Configuration
function appears.
4. BATCH CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
BATCH SIZE:

BATCH SIZE:
Description: Number of credit transactions allowed in a batch.
Values:
Numeric, 0-99.
Steps:

1.
2.
DISPLAY PRINT BATCH ALARM: [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The print batch alarm displays on the Operator Display when the batch
needs to be closed.
No: The print batch alarm does not display on the Operator Display when the
batch needs to be closed.
Steps:

1.
2.
BATCH CLOSE PERIOD [1,2]:

Values:
Numeric, 1 or 2.
1: The network shift is closed in the Close Shift.
2: The network shift is closed in the Close Daily.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and press [ENTER] to return to the first item.
2.
October 4, 2002

Configuration menu.
4. BATCH CONFIGURATION
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the batch configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of batch parameters.
BATCH CONFIG
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
Batch Size:
Display Batch Alarm:
Batch Close Period:
October 4, 2002
35
DISABLED
2
Sample Batch Configuration

Listing
Dealer Configuration
The Dealer Configuration function in the Configuration menu contains parameters which
set up basic store functions.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Dealer Configuration
function displays.
5. DEALER CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
STORE NAME: _
VERIFONE

STORE NAME:
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the store name and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
STORE ADDR:
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the store address and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
CITY:
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the city name and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
STATE:
Values:
Steps:

1.
Key the state abbreviation and press [ENTER] to go to the next item.
2.
October 4, 2002
CORR MEMOS: [0, 1, 2]

Description: Determines whether or not credit refunds are allowed.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 2.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
2: Enabled with password protection.
Steps:

1.
2.
MANUAL ENTRY ENABLE: [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashier is able to enter credit card sales manually.
No: The Ruby terminal does not allow manual credit transactions.
Steps:

1.
2.
DISPLAY CLOSE DAY DUE ALARM: [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The close day due alarm displays on the Operator Display and the
terminal beeps if the store has not done a close day within the last 26 hours.
No: The close day due alarm does not sound or display on the Operator
Display.
Steps:

1.
2.
CHECK AUTH: [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: Authorization is requested from the network. Drivers license number
and state code are requested.
No: The store uses local check receipt procedures and the network is not
accessed. If this parameter is set to N the next three parameters described
here do not appear.
Steps:

1.
2.
PRINT CUSTOMER COPY: [Y/N]

Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: When a credit or VeriPASS receipt prints, a second, duplicate copy
prints for the customer to keep. Usually used with single-ply paper.
October 4, 2002
No: Only one copy of a credit receipt prints. Usually uses two-ply paper.
Steps:

1.
2.
MSG DURATION:
Description: Number of seconds a network message displays.
Values:
Numeric, 0 - 5.
Steps:

1.
2.

Network Manager menu.
5. DEALER CONFIGURATION
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the dealer configuration.
List
Press [List] to print a list of dealer parameters.
DEALER FILE
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
Sample Dealer Configuration

Listing
DEALER FILE
Name: VERIFONE
Addr: 1234 Grove Drive
City: Anytown
State: FL
Correction Memo:
Enabled
Manual Entry:
Enabled
Close Day Alarm:
Enabled
Check Authorization: DISABLED
Print Customer Copy
Enabled
Message Duration:
5 seconds
October 4, 2002
Debit Configuration
The Debit Configuration function in the Configuration menu sets parameters for giving
cash back.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Debit Configuration
function appears.
6. DEBIT CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
CASH BACK ENABLED: [Y/N] Y

CASH BACK ENABLED: [Y/N]
Values:
Yes or No.
Note:
To allow a customer to receive cash back without a purchase, set the

Allowed without sale [Y/N] parameter in the MOP File to Y.
Yes: Cash back is allowed.
No: Cash back is not allowed.
Steps:

1.
2.
CASH BACK LIMIT:

Description: This is the maximum dollar amount of cash back allowed.
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 100.00.
Steps:

1.
2.
CASH BACK FEE:

Description: The store fee charged for cash back transactions. Debit cash back fee totals
appear under Memo Items in the Summary Report.
October 4, 2002
Values:
Numeric, 0.00 - 100.00.
Steps:

1.
2.
DEBIT ENCRYPTION METHOD

Description: Determines whether Master Session or DUKPT is used to encrypt debit
PINs.
Values:
Numeric, 0 or 1.
Note:
This parameter must be used with the aid of the VeriFone Ruby Customer
Support Center.
Note:
Both encryption methods appear but DUKPT is the only encryption method
supported.
0: Master Session
1: DUKPT
Steps:

1.
2.

Configuration menu.
6. DEBIT CONFIGURATION
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the debit configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of debit cash back parameters.
CASH BACK CONFIG
****************************************
UNIT#: 00140080294 TID: 02 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
****************************************
Cash Back:
Cash Back Limit:
Cash Back Fee:
Debit Encryption:
Sample Debit Configuration

Listing
Enabled
40.00
100.00
DUKPT
October 4, 2002
Proprietary Card Configuration

The Proprietary Card Configuration function in the Configuration menu sets proprietary
card parameters for up to four cards, each with its own ISO number and name.
Note:
Proprietary card network access is an optional feature which may require a

Ruby Card. This function only appears if proprietary card network access is
installed.
Steps
1. At the Configuration menu, press the arrow keys until the Proprietary Card
7. PROPRIETARY CARD CONFIGURATION
2. Press [Select].
SITE ID: _
3. Key the site identification number assigned to your store by the network and press
[ENTER] and then [-->].
ISO #1: _
CC NAME:
4. Use the arrow key to select the desired ISO range number (1 - 4).
ISO #n:
Description: The beginning digits that identify a specific proprietary card.
Values:
Alphanumeric, up to 6 digits.
Steps:

1.
2.
CC NAME:
Description: The descriptive name of the proprietary card. This name is usually found on
the card.
Values:
October 4, 2002
Alphanumeric, up to 16 characters
Steps:

1.
Key the new name and press [ENTER].
2.
Press [ENTER] to make no changes and return to the previous item.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to configure another ISO range number OR press [EXIT] to
return to the Configuration menu.
7. PROPRIETARY CARD CONFIGURATION
File Maintenance
Use the following procedures to maintain the proprietary card configurations.
List
Press [List] to print a list of proprietary card parameters.
PROPRIETARY CARD PARAMETERS
****************************************
UNIT#: 00014008029 TID: 00 VERS: 4.03.00
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 15:25
****************************************
SITE ID:
4532
ISO #
----9999
CREDIT CARD NAME

---------------MANNATEC
Sample Proprietary Card

October 4, 2002
Configuration Initial Setup

Use this section to set up Configuration on a standalone or controlling terminal for the first
up.
1. Make a copy of the worksheets and use a pencil to complete them.
parameter in the sections.
3. Follow the steps in each section to enter the information into the system.
October 4, 2002
Configuration: Credit Card Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Parameter
Value
Credit Card:
Display code:
Enable exp date:
Abbreviation:
PIN prompt index:
Type:
Max auth limit:
Name:
Term time out:
Enabled:
Dispenser limit:
Floor limit:
Dispenser auth:
Prod restriction:
Enable DCR
V/auth phone#:
Enable hot DCR
ISO part 1:
Hide acct# on DCR receipt
ISO part 2:
Allow DCR fallback
Auth netwk:
Mask acct# on DCR receipt
V/auth netwk:
Expanded auth amount
Acct val index:
Mask acct# on cust receipt
PAN len1:
Hide date on cust receipt
PAN len2:
Mask acct# on store receipt
Track 2 len:
Hide date on store receipt
Enable PIN prompt:
October 4, 2002
Configuration: Modem Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Pulse or Tone
Modem Reset String
Modem Dial String
Configuration: Batch Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Batch size
Display print batch alarm
Batch close period
Configuration: Dealer Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Store name
Store address
City
State
Correction memos
Manual entry enable
Display close day due alarm
Check authorization
Print customer copy
Message duration
Configuration: Debit Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Cash Back Enabled
Cash Back Limit
Cash Back Fee
Debit Encryption Method
October 4, 2002
Value
Store and Forward

6
The Store and Forward function allows you to print a list of stored transactions and delete
them from the store and forward file. Store and forward keeps track of transactions when
the network is not available then forwards them to the host for reconciliation when
communications with the network are restored.
Up to 500 network transactions are stored when communications with the network are
down. When this limit is reached, no more network transactions can be performed.
Store and Forward Steps

Use these steps to reach the Store and Forward function from the Network Manager mode
menu.
1. At the Network Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Store and
Forward function appears.
12. STORE AND FORWARD
2. Press [Select].
1. PRINT OLDEST BATCH
*STORE AND FORWARD MENU*
3. Use the arrow keys to select the desired Store and Forward function.
1. PRINT OLDEST BATCH
Description: Prints the oldest batch which is in storage.
Steps:
Press [ENTER].
2. DELETE OLDEST BATCH

Description: Deletes the oldest batch which is in storage.
Steps:
Do the following.
1.
Press [ENTER].
2.
Press [Yes] or [No].
4. Repeat step 3 to access another batch or press [EXIT] to return to the Network
Manager mode.
12. STORE AND FORWARD
October 4, 2002
Car Wash Manager
Car Wash Manager mode contains functions which interact with a car wash controller:
Department Setup
Car Wash Key Setup
DCR Display Setup
Disable Car Wash
Enable Car Wash
Car Wash Code Days Valid
Set Car Wash Display Order
Outdoor Enable
The last section of this chapter provides information on setting up car wash controllers.
Note:
The car wash function is an option. If this option is not installed in your
system, the Car Wash Manager mode does not appear.
Note:
The Car Wash Manager mode is only available on standalone or controlling

terminals.
October 4, 2002
7-2 Car Wash Manager
Setting Up Car Washes

The following steps apply to setting up car washes. For car wash-related PLUs, such as
coupon books, perform only steps 1 and 2 as you would for any other non-car wash PLU.
1. Use Manager > Dept File to create a car wash department.
2. Use Manager > PLU File to create PLUs for all the car washes. Set the Dept #
parameter to the department number you created in step 1.
3. Use Manager > Menu File to create a menu for the car wash PLUs from step 2.
4. Use Manager > Soft Key File to assign the menu from step 3 to a soft key.
5. Use Car Wash Manager > Department Setup to assign the department number
from step 1 to the car wash department.
6. Use Car Wash Manager > DCR Display Setup to set whether the DCR prompts
the customer to buy a car wash before fueling or after fueling.
7. Use Car Wash Manager > Car Wash Key Setup to assign car wash PLUs to
keys on the car wash controller.
Note: Do not assign car wash-related PLUs to car wash keys.
8. Run Fuel Manager > Initialize Fuel > Full Initialization to send the changes to
the pumps.
9. Use Fuel Manager > Initialize DCRs to send these settings to the DCRs.
Note:
The Ruby terminal talks to the interface device. The device can be
programmed to override the Ruby terminal.
October 4, 2002
Car Wash Manager 7-3
Start Car Wash Manager Mode

Use these steps to enter Car Wash Manager mode from any point in the application. Then
refer to the chapter that describes the car wash function you wish to run.
Steps
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Car Wash Manager mode appears.
[ CAR WASH MGR ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
*CAR WASH MANAGER MENU*
6. Continue with the appropriate Car Wash Manager function.
October 4, 2002
Department Setup
7
The Department Setup function specifies the department number for car wash sales to the
controller. Car wash sales must be assigned to their own department in the Department
File first.
Considerations
Consider these items before creating departments for car wash sales.
Department File
The car wash department must be set up in the Department File before entering
information in Department Setup. The car wash department number and department setup
number should be the same.
PLU File
Car wash and related PLUs must be set up in the PLU File before entering them in Car
Wash Manager mode functions. The Dept# parameter for each car wash and related
PLU must be the car wash department.
October 4, 2002
Department Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Department Setup function from the Car Wash Manager menu
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Department
1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
2. Press [Select].
Car wash department number
3. Key the department number and press [ENTER].

1. DEPARTMENT SETUP
File Maintenance
List
While in the Department Setup function, press [List] to print the current car wash
department.
10/04/02
CAR WASH DISPLAY DEPARTMENT
15:25
--------------------------------------Car wash department

50
October 4, 2002
Sample Car Wash Department Setup

Listing
Car Wash Key Setup

7
The Car Wash Key Setup function assigns car wash PLUs to keys on the car wash
controller. The Car Wash Key Setup assigns car wash items for up to 14 car wash
controller keys.
Note:
Do not assign car wash-related PLUs, such as coupon books, to car wash
keys.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up the Car Wash Key Setup File.
Dispenser Card Readers
If your site sells car wash items with a dispenser card reader (outdoor) fuel sale, up to the
first eight car wash keys you assign (keys 1 through 8) may be available for sale through
the DCR. The number of available keys depends on the features in your specific system.
The number of car washes displayed at the DCR is controlled by the Outdoor Enable
function. The order of the items can be changed using the Set Car Wash Display Order
function.
Display of Car Washes
function.
Key Setup
The keys on the car wash controller must match the description and price set up in this
function. For example, if item 1 in Car Wash Key Setup is defined as Economy Wash at
$1.00, then the controller key 1 must be defined the same way.
PLU File
Car wash items must be set up in the PLU File before they can be assigned to car
wash keys. Assign clear descriptions to each item. For example, use Car Wash
Only and Car Wash + Wax instead of Car Wash 1 and Car Wash 2.
Car Wash PLUs cannot be Open. These PLUs have undefined pricing and would
display incorrect prices at the dispenser.
If a car wash PLU is deleted from the PLU File, then the corresponding car wash
key record is automatically deleted.
October 4, 2002
Car Wash Key Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the Car Wash Key Setup function from the Car Wash Manager
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Car Wash
Key Setup function appears.
2. Press [Select].
>01. PLU 000000000000
02. PLU 000000000000
03. PLU 000000000000
0
0
0
3. Key the car wash key number and press [Select] OR press the arrow keys until
the car wash key you wish to assign is highlighted. The arrow (>) moves to the left
of the chosen key.
4. For each car wash key number, do the following:
a. Key the modifier number (one to three characters) and press [MODIFY].
>01. PLU 123000000000
02. PLU 000000000000
03. PLU 000000000000
0
0
0
b. Key the PLU number (1 to 12 characters) and press [ENTER]. The description
of the item appears at the right. If the modifier/PLU combination does not
exist, INVALID INPUT appears briefly. Enter another PLU.
01. PLU 000000001001 123 CAR WASH ONLY
02. PLU 000000000000
0
03. PLU 000000000000
0
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to enter another car wash item OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Car Wash Manager mode menu.
October 4, 2002
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the Car Wash Key Setup file:
List
While in the Car Wash Key Setup function, press [List] to print the car wash key
assignments.
Sample Car Wash Key Setup Listing
10/04/02
CAR WASH KEYS
15:25
Key# PLU#
PLU Description
--------------------------------------1 000000000012/000 BASIC WASH
2 000000000012/001 BASIC + WAX
3 000000000012/002 WASH + DRY
4 000000000012/003 DELUXE
.
.
.
14 000000000102/001 HAND WASH
Delete a PLU
1. Use the arrow keys to select which key you would like to delete a car wash PLU
from.
2. Key [*][ENTER]. The PLU modifier/number and all information within it is
deleted.
Car Wash Key Setup Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the Car Wash Key Setup function for the first time. Refer to
2. Follow the steps in the Car Wash Key Setup Steps section to enter the
October 4, 2002
Car Wash Key Setup Worksheet

Key
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
October 4, 2002
PLU Number
Modifier
Number
Description
DCR Display Setup

7
The DCR Display Setup function controls the car wash prompt at the dispenser card
reader. This function determines at what point during an outside sale the car wash prompt
appears and the format of the display.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up the DCR Display Setup.
Car Wash Key Setup
Up to the first eight car wash keys (keys 1 through 8) may appear on the DCR display for
the customer to choose. The number of available keys depends on the features in your
specific system. Make sure that the first keys you assign in the Car Wash Key Setup are
the ones you want to be available for outdoor sales.
Display of Car Washes
function.
Initialize DCRs
If you make any changes to the DCR Display Setup, you must download the information
to the DCRs using the Initialize DCRs function in Fuel Manager.
October 4, 2002
DCR Display Setup Steps

Use these steps to reach the DCR Display Setup function from the Car Wash Manager
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the DCR Display
2. Press [Select].
>1. Prompt at beginning of sale
2. Prompt at end of sale
3. Menu presentation
N
N
N

To make a change to a specific item, press the arrow keys to find the desired
parameter and follow the steps for that item.
1. Prompt at beginning of sale
Description: A prompt asking the customer if they wish to purchase a car wash appears
before the customer begins fueling.
Note:
A car wash prompt does not display during a cash acceptor sale.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
Press [Yes] or [No] and then press [ENTER]. Press [-->] to go to

the next item.
2.
2. Prompt at end of sale

Description: A prompt asking the customer if they wish to purchase a car wash appears
when the customer has finished fueling.
October 4, 2002
Note:
A car wash prompt does not display during a cash acceptor sale.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.

the next item.
2.
Car Wash Prompt Variables

Beginning of
Sale
End of Sale
Results
Yes
Yes
Car wash offered before and after

fueling. If the customer makes a car
wash choice before fueling (Yes or
No), then the second option does not
display.
No
Yes
Car wash offered after fueling.
Yes
No
Car wash offered before fueling.
No
No
Car wash not offered outdoors.
3. Menu presentation
Note:
If your system supports debit cards at the DCRs and the pumps are either
Schlumberger or Tokheim, set this parameter to N. Otherwise, the car wash
menu displays, but the customer is not able to select an option.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The car wash prompt displays in menu form. The customer can choose
a car wash item by keying the item number and pressing [ENTER] on the
DCR keypad.
No: The car wash prompt displays in a series of Yes/No questions. As each
item displays, the customer choose either [Yes] or [No] on the DCR
keypad. If the customer presses [No], the next item displays. If the
customer presses [Yes], no more car wash items display.
Steps:

1.

the first item.
2.
4. Repeat step 3 to make additional changes OR press [EXIT] to return to the Car
Wash Manager menu.
October 4, 2002
File Maintenance
The following procedures should be used to maintain the DCR Display Setup file:
List
While in the DCR Display Setup function, press [List] to print the current DCR car
wash display options.
Sample DCR Display Setup Listing
10/04/02
CAR WASH DISPLAY OPTIONS
15:25
Before After Menu

Sale
Sale
Presentation
--------------------------------------N
Y
Y
DCR Display Initial Setup

Use this section to set up the DCR Display Setup function for the first time. Refer to
2. Follow the steps in the Car Wash Key Setup Steps section to enter the
DCR Display Setup Worksheet
Display Option
Prompt at beginning of sale
Prompt at end of sale
Menu presentation
October 4, 2002
Value
Car Wash DCR Displays by Manufacturer

Gilbarco CRIND Display
If your site has Gilbarco Card Reader in Dispenser (CRIND) DCRs, then the menu items
are displayed as follows.
The first three menu items and the option MORE scroll across the first line of the
display.
If the customer chooses MORE, then the next menu items appear.
When all the car wash options have appeared, CANCEL scrolls across the first
line of the display.
If none of the car washes are wanted, the customer can press [CANCEL] at any
time.
Schlumberger CARDSCAN Display

If your site has Schlumberger CARDSCAN DCRs, then the menu items are displayed as
follows.
The first two menu items and the option MORE scroll across the first line of the
display.
If the customer chooses MORE, then the next menu items scroll across the
screen.
When all the car wash options have appeared, CANCEL scrolls across the first
line of the display.
Tokheim DPT Display

If your site has Tokheim Dispenser Payment Terminal (DPT) DCRs, then the menu items
are displayed as follows.
The first screen of choices shows the first three menu items and the option
MORE.
1
2
3
5
=
=
=
=
REGLR
PREM
ULTIM
MORE
Note: The menu items in some applications may be numbered differently.

If the customer chooses MORE, the second screen shows another set of choices.
The last screen includes a CANCEL option.
4 = SUPER
CANCEL
time.
October 4, 2002
Dresser/Wayne DCPT Display

If your site has Dresser/Wayne Dispenser Card Processing Terminal (DCPT) DCRs, then
the menu items are displayed as follows.
The screen has one menu item and the option MORE. When the customer
chooses MORE, the next screen displays. When the customer selects an option,
no more choices are displayed.
1 = REGLR
5 = MORE
The last screen shows the last menu item and the option CANCEL.
4 = SUPER
CANCEL
October 4, 2002
time.
Disable Car Wash

7
The Disable Car Wash function disconnects the Ruby terminal from a car wash controller.
It is most often used when the car wash is down for maintenance. Car washes can still be
sold as rainchecks.
If the car wash controller is disabled at the Ruby terminal, it is automatically disabled at
all workstations.
The controller must be connected to the Ruby terminal.
Disable Car Wash Steps

Use these steps to reach the Disable Car Wash function from the Car Wash Manager.
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Disable Car
Wash function appears.
4. DISABLE CAR WASH
2. Press [Select]. If the car wash is already disabled, Car Wash Already
Disabled... appears briefly.
PLEASE WAIT...
Car Wash Disabled...
4. DISABLE CAR WASH

October 4, 2002
Enable Car Wash

7
The Enable Car Wash function reconnects the Ruby terminal to a car wash controller. It is
most often used after the car wash has been down for maintenance.
The controller must be connected to the Ruby terminal.
Enable Car Wash Steps

Use these steps to reach the Enable Car Wash function from the Car Wash Manager menu.
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Enable Car
Wash function appears.
5. ENABLE CAR WASH
2. Press [Select]. If the car wash is already enabled, Car Wash Already
Enabled... appears briefly.
PLEASE WAIT...
Car Wash Enabled...
5. ENABLE CAR WASH

October 4, 2002
Car Wash Code Days Valid

7
The Car Wash Code Days Valid function sets the number of days a car wash coupon is
valid. This number is added to the current date and the resulting date prints on the coupon.
Note:
This function is only available for the Unitec POS4000 or POS4000/2

(4000/3, etc.) and Ryko Code-A-Wash III car wash controllers.
Car Wash Code Days Valid Steps

Use these steps to reach the Car Wash Code Days Valid function from the Car Wash
Manager menu.
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Car Wash
Code Days Valid function appears.
2. Press [Select].
Nbr days car wash code is valid
14
3. Key the number of days car wash coupons are valid (1 - 99) and press [ENTER].
14
File Maintenance
List
While in the Car Wash Code Days Valid function, press [List] to print the current
number of days valid.
10/04/02
CAR WASH CODE DAYS VALID
15:25
Sample Car Wash Code Days Valid

Listing
--------------------------------------Number of days code valid

14
October 4, 2002
Set Car Wash Display Order

7
The Set Car Wash Display Order function establishes the order in which the various car
washes are displayed on the DCR display. The Outdoor Enable function controls the
number of car washes the DCR displays.
Note:
Support Center.
Set Car Wash Display Steps

Use these steps to reach the Set Car Wash Display Order function from the Car Wash
Manager menu and then make changes to the information.
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Set Car Wash
Display Order function appears.
7. SET CAR WASH DISPLAY ORDER
2. Press [Select].
>_
Unsorted
Least to Most Expensive
Most to Least Expensive
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points to the display order of your choice. Press
[ENTER].
7. SET CAR WASH DISPLAY ORDER
October 4, 2002
File Maintenance
List
While in the Set Car Wash Display Order function, press [List] to print the current
DCR display order.
***************************************
SET CAR WASH DISPLAY ORDER:
Sample Car Wash Display Order

Listings
>01. Unsorted
02. Least to Most Expensive
03. Most to Least Expensive
***************************************
October 4, 2002
Outdoor Enable
7
The Outdoor Enable function allows you to select which car washes are sold at the DCR.
Note:
The first eight car washes assigned (keys 1 through 8) display on the
Outdoor Enable function menu for sale through the DCR.
Outdoor Enable Steps

Use these steps to reach the Outdoor Enable function from the Car Wash Manager menu.
1. At the Car Wash Manager mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Outdoor
Enable function appears.
8. OUTDOOR ENABLE
2. Press [Select].
> 1. WASH
2. WASH+WAX
3. DELUXE WASH+WAX
*CAR
[Y/N]
Y
[Y/N]
N
[Y/N]
Y
WASH MANAGER MENU*
3. Press the arrow keys until the > points to the car wash you want to set up on the
DCR.
4. Press [Yes] to sell the car wash at the DCR or press [No] to not sell the car
wash at the DCR.
> 1. WASH
2. WASH+WAX
3. DELUXE WASH+WAX
*CAR
[Y/N]
N
[Y/N]
N
[Y/N]
Y
WASH MANAGER MENU*
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to configure another car wash OR press [EXIT] to return to
the Outdoor Enable function.
8. OUTDOOR ENABLE
October 4, 2002
Car Wash Controllers

7
The Ruby terminal interacts with the following car wash controllers:
Exacta Controls
Ryko Code-A-Wash (Ryko Manufacturing Company)

III
IV
Unitec (Unitec Electronics)

POS4000
POS4000/2 (4000/3, etc.)
Exacta Controls
This section provides general information for setting up the Exacta controller in a Ruby
terminal.
Hardware
The Exacta Controls should have firmware version 4.05A1. An RS-232 cable is required
to connect to the default COM port 8 of the Ruby terminal.
Programming
The controller should be completely programmed as if the car washes were going to be
sold from the controller and not the Ruby terminal.
Car wash keys should be programmed in numerical order since the Ruby terminal requires
a one-to-one correspondence with the controller. For example, key 1 on the car wash
controller would be set to key 1 with the Ruby terminals Car Wash Key Setup function.
The car wash controller has 12 car wash item keys. Do not use keys 13 and 14 in the Car
Wash Key Setup function.
Set the Host/Remote/Neither parameter to Neither.
Set the POS Alt. Acknowledge parameter to N.
Note:
Refer to the Exacta Controls documentation for more information about

setup.
If the Reset button lights up, key [Reset] [Clear] to abort.
October 4, 2002
Ryko Code-A-Wash III

This section provides general information for setting up the Code-A-Wash III controller in
a Ruby terminal.
Hardware
The Code-A-Wash III should have firmware revision 9D or 9E. It requires a specially
configured RJ-45 to an RS-232 nine-pin male adapter (VeriFone part number 55053-01) to
connect to the auxiliary serial communications port on the back to the car wash controller.
An RS-232 cable is required to connect the nine-pin adapter to the default COM port 8 of
the Ruby terminal.
Programming
The controller should be completely programmed as if the car washes were going to be
sold from the controller and not the Ruby terminal.
The car wash controller has 12 car wash item keys. Do not use keys 13 and 14 in the Car
Wash Key Setup function.
Set the following parameters for the Code-A-Wash IIIs auxiliary serial communications
port 2:
9600 baud rate
8 data bits
1 stop bit
No parity
Set the POS Alt. Acknowledge parameter to No.
Note:
Refer to the Ryko controller documentation for procedures to set up this

information.
October 4, 2002
Ryko Code-A-Wash IV
This section provides information for setting up the Code-A-Wash IV controller in a Ruby
terminal.
The Code-A-Wash IV should have firmware revision L. It requires an RJ-45 to an RS-232
nine-pin female null modem (VeriFone part number 13638-01) to connect to the auxiliary
serial communications port on the back of the car wash controller. An RS-232 cable is
required to connect the nine-pin modem to the default COM port 8 on the Ruby terminal.
Programming
The controller should first be completely programmed as if the car washes were going to
be sold from the controller and not the Ruby terminal.
The controller has 12 car wash item keys. Do not use keys 13 and 14 in the Car Wash Key
Setup function.
Set the following parameters for the Code-A-Wash IVs auxiliary serial communications
port:
9600 baud rate
8 data bits
2 stop bits
No parity
XON/XOFF set to No
Set the POS Alt. Acknowledge parameter to No.
Note:
Refer to the Ryko controller documentation for procedures to set up this

information.
October 4, 2002
Unitec POS4000 and POS4000/2 (4000/3)

This section provides information for setting up the POS4000 and POS4000/2 (4000/3,
etc.) controllers in a Ruby terminal.
POS4000 Hardware
The POS4000 should have firmware revision 6.1. It requires a specially configured RJ-45
to an RS-232 nine-pin female null modem (VeriFone part number 13638-01) to connect to
the auxiliary serial communications port on the back of the car wash controller. An RS232 cable is required to connect the nine-pin adapter to the default COM port 8 on the
Ruby terminal.
POS4000/2 (4000/3, etc.) Hardware
The POS4000/2 (4000/3, etc.) should have firmware revision 6.2. It requires an RJ-45 to
an RS-232 nine-pin female null modem (VeriFone part number 13638-01) to connect to
the auxiliary serial communications port on the back of the car wash controller. An RS232 cable is required to connect the nine-pin modem to the default COM port 8 on the
Ruby terminal.
Programming
This programming applies to both POS4000 and POS4000/x controllers.
The controller should first be completely programmed as if the car washes were going to
be sold from the controller and not the Ruby terminal.
Set the following parameters for the auxiliary serial communications port:
6.51 firmware
POS 2 serial interface
9600 baud rate
code length of 5 (including 0)

The Unitec COM port parameters can be viewed by printing the System Configuration
from the controller.
Note:
October 4, 2002
Refer to the Unitec controller documentation for procedures to set up this

information.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
VeriPASS mode allows you to configure VeriPASS functions for your site. If you assign
VeriPASS FUNCTIONS to a soft key, the first six functions are also available within
Sales mode. All of the following functions are available in VeriPASS mode:
Activate VeriPASS Tag
Print VeriPASS Tag
Change Tag Password
Update VeriPASS Tag
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag
Customer SVC Options
Initialize VeriPASS Feature
VRN Update
VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Configuration
October 4, 2002
8-2 VeriPASS
Setting Up VeriPASS
Note:
When VeriPASS is not installed at the DCRs, outside transactions are not
eligible to earn awards.
Perform the following tasks in this order to set up VeriPASS:
Manager Mode
1. MOP File: Add an MOP and assign the code for VeriPASS.
2. Soft Key File:
Assign the MOP from step 1 to a soft key named [VeriPASS], unless you
want to use the [OTHER MOP] key. The cashier must use this key to update
the customers tag for redeemed and/or earned awards.
Assign a [VeriPASS FUNC] soft key to enable the cashier to enter the first
six functions of VeriPASS mode from within Sales mode.
3. Dept File:
Assign departments against which customers can redeem Loyalty points.
Set the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter to Y to allow items in
a specific department to be redeemed against VeriPASS Loyalty dollars.
To tie loyalty points to one specific dispensed fuel product and not for all
dispensed fuel products, set up that fuel product as its own department. For
example, if you want to award Loyalty points for premium fuel purchases, set
up PREMIUM FUEL as its own department.
4. PLU File:
Create PLUs for each Club to be sold in Sales.
Set the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter to Y to include items
in the VeriPASS awards program.
Set the Dept # parameter to one of the department numbers you created in
step 3.
VeriPASS Mode
5. Initialize VeriPASS Feature: Initialize VeriPASS by placing the Dealer Tag
provided by VeriFone on the Indoor VeriPASS terminal (IVP). The journal records
whether VeriPASS supports inside sales only, inside and outside sales, or neither.
6. Merchant Preferences:
Set up how a VeriPASS tag is activated for payment and determine the
sequence of prompts that the customer sees.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-3
Assign initial club item PLU and quantity that writes to tag during activation.
Set up the initial number of points to load to tag when activated for EPC, and
Department Loyalty programs.
Set up Customer Service Options:
Assign the PLU of the Club Item that can be given away.
Determine the maximum quantity of Club, EPC, and Department Loyalty
points that cashier can give to a customer.
7. VeriPASS Club Configuration: Assign PLU numbers for up to ten Club
programs and the items in them. See step 4.
8. VeriPASS EPC Configuration:
Determine the quantity of punches needed to redeem one free item on the next
transaction.
Assign a PLU number of a qualifying item. See step 4.
9. VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Configuration:
Assign a department number for each participating department (up to ten
departments). See step 3.
Determine the number of points earned for each dollar. You cannot use
fractions. Points are rounded down.
10. VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration: Determine the number of points
required to redeem one dollars worth of merchandise.
Displays
In this chapter, two displays appear to show the contents of both the Ruby Operator
Display and the IVP display.
Ruby Operator Display with IVP Display
ENTER OUTDOOR DISPENSER USAGE ON PINPAD:
PROMPT FOR CAR WASH
NO
CAR WASH MENU?

ASK
The customer presses the buttons under the IVP display to answer prompts.
October 4, 2002
8-4 VeriPASS
Start VeriPASS Mode

Use these steps to enter the VeriPASS mode from any point in the application. Then refer
to the section that describes the VeriPASS function you wish to run.
Steps
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS mode appears.

[ VERIPASS ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

__
*VERIPASS MENU*
6. Continue with the appropriate VeriPASS function.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-5
Activate VeriPASS Tag

8
The Activate VeriPASS Tag function sets up a tag and activates it. The cashier starts the
Activate VeriPASS Tag function on the Ruby terminal. On the Indoor VeriPASS terminal
(IVP), the customer answers the questions that determine how the tag functions during a
transaction. Other prompts display on the Ruby terminal so that the cashier can assist the
customer in answering those on the IVP. The settings in Merchant Preferences determine
the prompts which display. This function is available on standalone, controller, and
workstation Ruby terminals and from within Sales mode.
Considerations
Activation Receipts
If the Print Customer Copy parameter is set to Y in Network Manager >
Configuration > Dealer Configuration, both a merchants and a customers copy of the
activation receipt print. If the parameter is set to N, only a merchants copy prints.
VeriPASS User Passwords
If a customer sets up a password, anytime the customer uses the tag as payment he or she
must enter the password before the transaction can be completed. This includes making
purchases and redeeming awards. However, if a qualifying purchase earns Loyalty points
or the customer purchases a Club item, the user password is not required to add the points
to the tag.
DCR Receipts
Your site may require that DCR transactions always prompt the customer to print a receipt.
Therefore, the customer must still enter YES or NO for each fuel purchase at the DCR,
even though the VeriPASS tag prompts are set as follows:
The Prompt for DCR Receipt? is set to N in Merchant Preferences
The customer responded NO to PROMPT FOR RECEIPT during tag

activation.
October 4, 2002
8-6 VeriPASS
Activate VeriPASS Tag Steps

Use these steps to reach the Activate VeriPASS Tag function from the VeriPASS mode
menu.
Note:
If the customer does not respond within 45 seconds, the Ruby terminal
returns to the VeriPASS mode menu and the IVP returns to the idle prompt.
Also, the cashier may press [EXIT] at any time to cancel the activation
process.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Activate VeriPASS
Tag function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
2. Press [Select].
PRESENT VERIPASS FOR VERIFICATION
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
3. The customer places the tag on the V then removes it when prompted.
4. If your site has DCRs, the car wash option, and the Prompt For Car Wash?
parameter set to Y in Merchant Preferences, the customer must do one of the
following when these displays appear. If the site does not have these features or the
parameter is set to N, go to step 5.
ENTER OUTDOOR DISPENSER USAGE ON PINPAD:
PROMPT FOR CAR WASH
CAR WASH MENU?

NO
ASK
Customer selects NO to keep the car wash menu from appearing on the DCR.
Customer selects ASK to display the prompt for a car wash menu at each sale
on the DCR.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-7
5. If your site has DCRs and the Prompt For DCR Receipt? parameter set to Y in
Merchant Preferences, the customer must do one of the following when these
displays appear. If the site does not have DCRs or the parameter is set to N, go to
step 6.
ENTER OUTDOOR DISPENSER USAGE ON PINPAD
PROMPT FOR RECEIPT
NO
PRINT RECEIPT?
ASK
YES
Customer selects NO to never print a receipt on every DCR transaction.

Customer selects ASK to be given a choice to print a receipt on every DCR
transaction.
Customer selects YES to print a receipt on every DCR transactions.
6. If your site has the Prompt for User Password? parameter set to Y in Merchant
Preferences, the customer must do one of the following when these displays
appear. If the parameter is set to N, go to step 9.
SECURE WITH 4-DIGIT USER PASSWORD
SECURE W/PASSWRD
NO
YES
Customer selects NO to decline password protection. Go to step 9.

Customer selects YES to password protect the tag.
7. When the following displays appear, the customer must key a four-digit password
and press [ENTER].
ENTER 4-DIGIT PASSWORD
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD
8. When the following displays appear, the customer keys the password again and
presses [ENTER].
RE-ENTER 4-DIGIT PASSWORD
Note:
October 4, 2002
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD AGAIN
The passwords must match. If they do not, the customer is given two
more tries to key a password during which the IVP displays
PASSWORDS DO NOT MATCH - RETRY. If the customer
incorrectly keys the second password three times, go to step 9.
8-8 VeriPASS
9. The customer must do one of the following when these displays appear.
ALWAYS USE VERIPASS AS PAYMENT?
ALWAYS AS PYMNT?
NO
YES
Customer selects NO to be always given a choice of a MOP when the cashier

presses [CREDIT] during a sales transaction.
Customer selects YES to use VeriPASS always when the cashier presses
[CREDIT] during a sales transaction.
SLIDE PRIMARY CARD ON PIN PAD
PLEASE SLIDE
PRIMARY CARD
10. The customer swipes a credit card on the IVP.

Note:
If the card is not supported at the site, the Ruby terminal displays
CARD DATA ERROR and the IVP prompts the customer to slide
the card again or to slide another card. The customer has three more
chances to present a valid card or the cashier can press [EXIT]. In
both cases the Ruby terminal returns to the VeriPASS mode menu and
the IVP returns to the idle prompt. The tag is not activated.
11. If the card is accepted at the site and the Prompt For 2nd Payment? parameter set
to Y in Merchant Preferences, the customer must do one of the following when
these displays appear. If the parameter is set to N, go to step 14.
CARD RECEIVED FROM PINPAD
ADD SECOND CARD?

NO
YES
Customer selects NO to load only one card on the tag. Go to step 14.
Customer selects YES to add a second credit card on the tag.
SLIDE SECOND CARD ON PINPAD
PLEASE SLIDE
SECOND CARD
12. The customer swipes the second card.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-9
Note:
If the second card is not supported at the site or the card is not read,
the Ruby terminal displays CARD DATA ERROR and the IVP tells
the customer to slide the card again. The customer has three more
chances to present a valid card or the cashier can press [EXIT]. In
both cases the Ruby terminal returns to the VeriPASS mode menu and
the IVP returns to the idle prompt. The tag is not activated.
13. If the second card is supported and the card is read, the customer does one of the
following.
ENTER CHOICE OF PAYMENT
OR ROLLOVER PAYMENT ON PINPAD
PAYMENT CHOICE
CHOICE
ROLLOVER
Customer selects CHOICE to have the option of choosing either the first card
or the second card each time the customer uses VeriPASS.
Customer selects ROLLOVER to cause the system to automatically try to use
the second card when the first card fails or is not accepted at the site.
14. When the following displays appear, the customer presents the VeriPASS tag to
the IVP and holds it there until prompted to remove it.
PRESENT VERIPASS FOR ACTIVATION
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
15. When the following displays appear, the customer removes the tag.
CUSTOMER SHOULD REMOVE TAG NOW
PLEASE REMOVE
TAG NOW
One of the following occurs:

If the parameters for setting initial values for Club, EPC, and/or Loyalty points
are set up in Merchant Preferences, the points awarded with tag activation
display.
If the initial values for Club, EPC and/or Loyalty points are set to 0, these
displays do not appear and two copies of the activation receipt print.
EARNED POINTS
October 4, 2002
CLUB = 10
EARNED POINTS
CLUB = 10
8-10 VeriPASS
EARNED POINTS
EPC = 08
EARNED POINTS
EPC = 08
EARNED POINTS
LOYALTY = 10
EARNED POINTS
LOYALTY = 10
Note:
If Network Manager > Configuration > Dealer Configuration >

Print Customer Copy is set to N, only the merchants copy of the
activation receipt prints.
VERIPASS ACTIVATED
THANK YOU
ACTIVATION RECEIPT(S)
PRINTED OK?
[Y/N]
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS

To print another copy of the activation receipts, the cashier presses [No] on
the Ruby terminal then [EXIT] to return to the VeriPASS mode menu.
To return to the VeriPASS mode menu, the cashier presses [Yes] on the Ruby
terminal.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-11
File Maintenance
000000000-000
300 PARK BLVD S.
VERIFONE
CLEARWATER FL
Sample Activation Receipt
VeriPASS ACTIVATED
Merchants copy of receipt
<MERCHANT COPY>
VRN
00010
VER 02
TAG STATUS: ACTV
USER TAG OK
Tag information: VeriPASS

Registration Number and tag
status
PRIMARY CARD:
CARD TYPE: MASTERCARD
ACCT NUMBER: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0031
First card selection
SECONDARY CARD:
CARD TYPE: AMEX
ACCT NUMBER: XXXX XXXXXX 12118
Second card selection
PASSWORD PROTECTION NOT ACTIVATED
Password protection status

Customer selected Choice for
payment choice
PROMPT FOR FIRST OR SECOND CARD
DCR Usage
1. Car wash selection is No
2. Receipt selection is No
OUTDOOR DISPENSER USAGE FLAGS:

1. PROMPT FOR CAR WASH
2. PROMPT FOR RECEIPT
TAG IS PAYMENT ON INSIDE SALES = ASK
Customer Programs:
Club: PLU# 000000000131/000
Club: 11
EPC: 10
Loyalty:
4
Payment use
Customer program information
I understand that information is

recorded on this device that permits
transactions to occur against the above
account(s). I understand that existing
cardholder agreements are not changed in
any way by the issue of this device. I
agree to accept transactions using this
device under those same terms and
conditions.
I further understand that the loss of
this device must be treated as a loss of
the original card(s) used to issue this
tag device.
October 4, 2002
X -----------------------------------------------Authorized Cardholder Signature
Signature line
REG# 0001
Trailer
CSH# 001
10/04/02
17:40:47
8-12 VeriPASS
Print VeriPASS Tag

8
The Print VeriPASS Tag function prints the account information for VeriPASS including
the choices selected during the activation process. This function is available on
standalone, controller, and workstation Ruby terminals and from within Sales mode.
Print VeriPASS Tag Steps

Use these steps to reach the Print VeriPASS Tag function from the VeriPASS mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Print VeriPASS Tag
function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
PRESENT VERIPASS ON PINPAD
3. The customer presents the VeriPASS tag to the IVP.

PRINTING VERIPASS DATA
PROCESSING
PLEASE WAIT
Note:
When the VeriPASS tag is presented to the V of the IVP, a light should
come on briefly and then go out. If the light does not come on, ask the
customer to remove the tag and re-present it.
After the receipt prints, give it to the customer.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-13
File Maintenance
000000000-000
300 PARK BLVD S.
VERIFONE
CLEARWATER FL
Sample Print VeriPASS Tag Receipt
PRINT VERIPASS TAG

VRN 00010 VER 02
TAG STATUS: ACTV
USER TAG OK
October 4, 2002
Tag information: VeriPASS

Registration Number (VRN) and tag
status
PRIMARY CARD:
CARD TYPE: MASTERCARD
ACCT NUMBER: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0031
First card information
SECONDARY CARD:
CARD TYPE: AMEX
ACCT NUMBER: XXXX XXXXXX 12118
Second card information
TAG IS PASSWORD PROTECTED: ****
Tag is password protected
PROMPT FOR
Customer selected payment choice
MASTERCARD OR
AMEX CARD

1. NEVER PROMPT FOR CAR WASH
2. NEVER PRINT RECEIPT
DCR Usage
1. Car wash selection is No
2. Receipt selection is No
TAG IS PAYMENT ON INSIDE SALES = ALWAYS
Payment information
CUSTOMER PROGRAMS:
Club: PLU# 000000000131/000
Club: 11
EPC: 10
Loyalty:
4
Customer program information
8-14 VeriPASS
Change Tag Password

8
The Change Tag Password function allows the customer to do the following:
Add a password to a VeriPASS tag
Change a password to a VeriPASS tag
Remove a password from a VeriPASS tag

Change Tag Password is available on standalone, controller, and workstation Ruby
terminals and from within Sales mode. The sales clerk initiates the function and the
customer completes it using the IVP.
If a customer sets up a password on a tag, any time the tag is used as payment the customer
must enter the password before the transaction can be completed. Also, the customer must
enter the password to redeem points. However, if a qualifying purchase earns Loyalty
points or the customer purchases a Club PLU, a user password is not required to add these
points to the tag. Therefore, if someone who does not know the password attempts to use a
tag, he or she cannot use it for payment or to receive discounted products, but any
purchases continue to add value to the tag.
Note:
A customer who has forgotten his or her password may deactivate the tag
and then reactivate it. However, any awards, points, and customer program
settings are lost. Depending on store policies or procedures, before
deactivating a tag the cashier may run a Print VeriPASS Tag function,
deactivate the tag, and then manually input the existing awards and/or points
on the tag using the Customer Service Options function. The settings of the
parameters in Merchant Preferences determine the number of points a
cashier can enter.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-15
Add Tag Password

1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Change Tag Password
function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
2. Press [Select].
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
3. The customer places the tag on the V of the IVP and does one of the following:
If the tag is password protected, go to the Change Tag Password Steps.
If the tag is not password protected, the following displays appear:
4.
The customer keys a four-digit password and presses [ENTER].

5.
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD AGAIN
The customer re-enters the password and presses [ENTER].

Note:
If the passwords do not match the IVP prompts PASSWORDS DO NOT

MATCH - RETRY and the Ruby terminal displays PASSWORDS DO
NOT MATCH. The customer repeats step 4 and step 5.
6. When the password is accepted, the following displays appear and the customer
places the tag on the V of the IVP.
October 4, 2002
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
8-16 VeriPASS
7. The customer removes the tag, the message UPDATING TAG PASSWORD
appears briefly on the Ruby, and the displays return to the idle prompts.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-17
Change or Remove Tag Password Steps

Use these steps to reach the Change Tag Password function from the VeriPASS mode
menu. The customer answers the questions on the IVP. The prompts display on the Ruby
terminal so that the cashier can assist the customer.
Note:
Between prompts, the IVP displays PROCESSING PLEASE WAIT. This is

not included in the steps because no response is required.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Change Tag Password
function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
2. Press [Select].
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
3. The customer presents the tag to the V of the IVP and then does one of the
following:
If the tag is not password protected, go to Add Tag Password Steps.
If the tag is currently password protected, the following displays appear and
the customer keys in the four-digit password.
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD
4. The customer presses [ENTER]. The password is compared to the password on

the tag.
Note:
October 4, 2002
The passwords must match. The customer is given two more tries to
key a password during which the IVP displays INVALID
PASSWORD, TRY AGAIN and the Ruby terminal displays
INVALID PASSWORD. If the customer incorrectly keys the
password three times, the IVP displays CANCELLED - MAX
RETRIES EXCEEDED and the Ruby terminal displays MAX
RETRIES EXCEEDED. The function exits to the idle prompt.
8-18 VeriPASS
5. The customer must do one of the following if the passwords match:

SELECT PASSWORD FUNCTION:
CHANGE OR REMOVE
PASSWORD FUNCTION
CHNG
RMOV
To change an existing password, press the arrow function key on the IVP that
points to CHNG.
To remove a password, press the arrow function key on the IVP that points to
RMOV and skip to step 8.
ENTER NEW 4-DIGIT PASSWORD
ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD
6. The customer keys a new four-digit password and presses [ENTER].

ENTER VERIPASS
PASSWORD AGAIN
7. The customer keys the password again and presses [ENTER].

Note:
If the passwords do not match the IVP displays PASSWORDS DO

NOT MATCH, TRY AGAIN and the Ruby terminal displays
PASSWORDS DO NOT MATCH.
Note:
If the customer presses [CLEAR], or the cashier presses [EXIT],

the IVP displays BYPASS PASSWORD, NO/YES, and the Ruby
terminal displays BYPASS PASSWORD OPTION?. Select Y and
the Ruby terminal displays PASSWORD ACCEPTED - PASSWORD
CHANGED and the IVP displays PASSWORD OK, PWD/CHGD
or RMVD. Skip to step 9.
8. The following displays appear and the customer places the tag on the V of the
IVP.
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
The following occurs:

PASSWORD ACCEPTED - PASSWORD CHANGED
PASSWORD OK
PWD
CHGD
OR
RMVD
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-19

PASSWORD OK
PWD
CHGD
OR
RMVD
*VERIPASS MENU*
9. The customer presses [CLEAR] to return to the idle prompt.

*VERIPASS MENU
October 4, 2002
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
8-20 VeriPASS
Update VeriPASS Tag

8
The Update VeriPASS Tag function copies a customers information from an older tag
version to a newer tag version and rewrites it to the same tag. This is necessary if the
merchants VeriPASS registration number (VRN) has changed for any reason. Also, if a
site formerly had a payment-only version of VeriPASS, the tag must be updated to allow
the customer to participate in the customer-frequency programs. The initial values defined
in Merchant Preferences are added to the tag during the update.
If the customer removes the tag before it has been completely updated, the next time the
tag is used, the IVP prompts the customer to update the tag. Update VeriPASS Tag is
available on standalone, controller, and workstation Ruby terminals and from within Sales
mode.
Update VeriPASS Tag Steps

Use these steps to reach the Update VeriPASS Tag function from the VeriPASS mode
menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Update VeriPASS Tag
function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
PRESENT VERIPASS TAG TO UPDATE
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
3. The customer places the tag on the V on the IVP and holds it there.
READING OLD TAG DATA
READING OLD TAG DATA

PLEASE WAIT...
4. The Ruby terminal displays the following if the tag is up to date and does not
require updating. The customer removes the tag.
TAG IS UP TO DATE
THANK YOU
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-21
The journal records the update activity. The display returns to the VeriPASS
mode menu and the IVP returns to the idle prompt.
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
8-22 VeriPASS
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag

8
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag is available on all Ruby terminals and accessible from within
Sales mode. If a customer decides to cancel the tag, this function removes the stored
information so that the tag can be safely disposed of. If a customer wants to change the
credit cards assigned to the tag, then the cashier can do the following:
1. Perform the Print VeriPASS Tag function to have a list of the current tag
information.
2. Deactivate the tag.
3. Perform the Activate VeriPASS Tag function.
4. Use the Customer Service Options function to add points that were on the previous
tag. However, keep in mind that limits are set in Merchant Preferences for how
many points can be added at any one time.
Note:
This function removes all of the information on the tag, including awards
information. Therefore, it is recommended that you run the Print VeriPASS
function before deactivating a tag.
Note:
This function only deactivates VeriPASS user tags. Dealer tags cannot be
deactivated.
Deactivate VeriPASS Tag Steps

Use these steps to reach the Deactivate VeriPASS Tag function from the VeriPASS mode
menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Deactivate VeriPASS
Tag function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
2. Press [Select].
PRESENT TAG TO BE DEACTIVATED
PRESENT TAG
TO DEACTIVATE
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-23
3. The customer presents the tag to the IVP. UPDATE COMPLETE, WAIT FOR
RECEIPT displays briefly on the IVP. A list prints showing the status of the
tag.The idle displays appear on both the Ruby terminal and the IVP.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
File Maintenance
Sample Deactivation Receipt
VRN 0000 VER 01 TAG STATUS: INACTV
INCOMPATIBLE USER TAG
PRIMARY CARD:
CARD TYPE:
ACCT NUMBER:
SECONDARY CARD:
CARD TYPE:
ACCT NUMBER:
PASSWORD PROTECTION NOT ACTIVATED
ROLLOVER TO SECOND CARD
1. NEVER PROMPT FOR CAR WASH
2. NEVER PRINT RECEIPT
TAG PAYMENT ON INSIDE SALES = ASK
CUSTOMER PROGRAMS:
CLUB: PLU# 000000000000/000
CLUB: 0
EPC: 0
LOYALTY: 0
REG# 0001
October 4, 2002
CSH# 001
10/04/02
17:40:47
8-24 VeriPASS
Customer Service Options

8
Customer Service Options (CSO) allows the cashier to add points to a VeriPASS tag when
the customer has not purchased a qualifying item. For example, the cashier could give
points to compensate a customer who returned after receiving the wrong item on a
previous visit.
A special receipt prints that includes spaces for the cashier to indicate why the award was
given and for the cashier or customer to sign. Site policy determines whether the customer
or the cashier signs the receipt.
The Customer Service Options function is available on all Ruby terminals and accessible
from within Sales mode.
Considerations
Use the following parameters in Merchant Preferences to set the maximum number of
points a cashier can award in each program:
Club: CSO - Club PLU# and CSO Club Maximum Qty
EPC: CSO - EPC Maximum Qty
Loyalty: CSO - Loyalty Maximum Qty
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-25
Customer Service Options Steps

Use these steps to reach the Customer Service Options function from the VeriPASS mode
menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Customer Service
Options function appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
2. Press [Select].
ENTER TYPE (1=CLUB, 2=EPC, 3=LOYALTY)
PLEASE WAIT...
3. Key the option number for the desired customer frequency program.
4. Press [ENTER].
ENTER POINT VALUE
PLEASE WAIT...
5. Key the number of points to award.

6. Press [ENTER]. The following briefly display on the Ruby terminal:
AWARDING POINTS
PRESENT VERIPASS ON PINPAD
PRESENT VERIPASS
TO POST AWARD
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
7. The customer presents the tag to the IVP.

PRESENT TAG TO UPDATE; <EXIT> TO CANCEL
8. The customer again presents the tag to the IVP.
October 4, 2002
PROCESSING
PLEASE WAIT
8-26 VeriPASS
The Ruby terminal updates the tag and the Customer Service Options receipt
prints. The Ruby display returns to the VeriPASS mode menu and the IVP returns
to the idle prompt.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU
9. Write an explanation for the award on the receipt.

10. Follow your sites policy for either signing the receipt yourself or asking the
customer to sign it.
File Maintenance
The Customer Service Options receipt can be signed by the customer or cashier.
Sample Customer Service Options
Receipt
WELCOME TO
OUR STORE
000000000000-000
16001 BAY VISTA
Descr.
------
VERIFONE
CLEARWATER FL
qty
----
amount
------
CUSTOMER SVC AWARDS

CLUB
5 points
Cashiers explanation of award
Signature line (customer/cashier)

REG# 0001
CSH# 001
10/04/02
16:03:13
Trailer
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-27
Initialize VeriPASS Feature

8
Note:
This function is only available on a controller or standalone Ruby terminal.

It is not available in Sales mode.
A Dealer Tag is required to use this function. Perform the Initialize VeriPASS Feature
under the following conditions:
Before any VeriPASS functions are configured
Whenever Ruby application software is upgraded

This function records on the journal whether VeriPASS supports inside sales only, inside
and outside sales, or neither. The VRN also prints on the journal.
Initialize VeriPASS Feature Steps

Use these steps to reach the Initialize VeriPASS Feature from the VeriPASS mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Initialize VeriPASS
Feature appears.
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
PRESENT VERIPASS DEALER TAG TO PINPAD
3.
PLEASE PRESENT
TAG NOW
Present the dealer tag to the IVP.

REMOVE TAG NOW
REMOVE
TAG NOW
The initialization process is complete and the idle prompts display.

*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
SLIDE CARD OR
PRESENT VERIPASS
8-28 VeriPASS
VRN Update
8
Note:
Support Center.
The VRN Update function updates the VeriPASS Registration Number (VRN) for the site.
The VRN is a number VeriFone assigns to a merchant when the VeriPASS equipment is
purchased. It determines whether the site accepts a tag.
VRN Update Steps

Use these steps to reach the VRN Update function from the VeriPASS mode menu.
Note:
These displays are read only. No information can be changed using this
function.
1. At the VeriFone mode menu, press the arrow keys until the VRN Update function
appears.
8. VRN UPDATE
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
PRIMARY MERCHANT VRN 10
3.
Press [ENTER].
PREVIOUS VRN: 0
4. Press [ENTER].
DATE OF DEALER TAG: MM/DD/YY
5. Press [Exit].
8. VRN UPDATE
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS 8-29
File Maintenance
While in the VRN Update function, press [List] to print the current information.
10/04/02
14:27
VRN UPDATE CONFIG
________________________________________
>VRN:
PREV VRN
DATE OF DEALER TAG:
October 4, 2002
10
0
01/01/70
Sample VRN Update Configuration

Listing
8-30 VeriPASS
8
Note:
The function is only available on a controller or standalone Ruby terminal. It

is not available in Sales mode.
Use the Merchant Preferences function to do the following:
Determine the sequence of prompts that the customer sees during tag activation
Set initial awards for Club, EPC, and department Loyalty programs
Place limits on customer service options (CSO) awards.
Merchant Preferences Steps

Use these steps to reach the Merchant Preferences function from the VeriPASS mode
menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the Merchant Preferences
function appears.
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
01 Prompt for Car Wash? Y/N
3. Press the arrow keys until the desired parameter appears.

01 Prompt for Car Wash? Y/N
Note:
This only displays if the car wash feature is installed.
Description: Determines if PROMPT FOR CAR WASH appears during VeriPASS tag
activation.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
Press [Yes] or [No] then press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
02 Prompt for DCR Receipt Y/N

Note:
This parameter only displays if DCRs are installed.
Description: Determines if PROMPT FOR RECEIPT appears during VeriPASS tag

activation.
Values:
Yes or No.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
Steps:
8-31

1.
2.
03 Prompt for User Password? Y/N

Note:
If this parameter is set to N, customers may still have the option of adding
password protection later through the CHANGE TAG PASSWORD
function.
Description: Determines if SECURE WITH 4-DIGIT USER PASSWORD appears

during VeriPASS tag activation.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
04 Prompt for 2nd Payment? Y/N

Description: Determines if ADD SECOND CARD? NO/YES appears during VeriPASS
tag activation.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
05 Print promo if no VP? Y/N

Description: Determines if the promotional message set in 14 Customer Program Promo
Message prints on the receipt. This occurs when a customer does not use a
VeriPASS tag and could have earned awards if they had used one.
Values:
Yes or No.
Steps:

1.
2.
06 Init Club PLU# nnnnnnnnnnnn/nnn

Description: Sets the PLU for the Club item that is credited to a tag when the tag is
activated.
Values:
Modifier: Numeric, 000 - 999.

PLU: Numeric, 000000000000 - 999999999999.
000000000000/000: The customer does not receive a Club credit when
purchasing a tag.
Steps:
October 4, 2002

1.
Key the modifier then press [ENTER]. Key the PLU then press
2.
8-32 VeriPASS
07 Init Club Item Qty

Description: Determines the number of Club points for the PLU in 06 Init Club PLU#
nnnnnnnnnnnn/nnn that are added to the customers VeriPASS tag when it
is activated for payment or updated.
Values:
0 to 99.
Steps:

1.
Key in the value then press [ENTER] to go to the next parameter.
2.
08 Init EPC Qty

Description: Determines the number of electronic punch card points added to the
customers VeriPASS tag when it is activated for payment or updated.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
09 Init Loyalty Qty

Description: Determines the number of Loyalty points added to the customers VeriPASS
tag when it is activated for payment or updated.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
10 CSO - Club PLU#
nnnnnnnnnnnn/nnn
Description: Determines the Club item which the cashier can give using the Customer
Service Options function to make up for an inconvenience to the customer
when no club is present on the tag.
Values:

PLU: Numeric, 000000000000 - 999999999999.
000000000000/000: The customer does not receive a Club credit.
Steps:

1.
Key the modifier then press [ENTER]. Key the PLU then press
2.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-33
11 CSO - Club Maximum Qty

Note:
If the cashier enters more points than the allowable number when using the
Customer Service Options function, the message AMOUNT TOO LARGE
displays.
Description: Determines the maximum number of points that the cashier can give using
the Customer Service Options function to make up for an inconvenience to
the customer.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
12 CSO - EPC Maximum Qty

Note:
displays.
Description: Determines the maximum number of EPC (electronic punch card) points that
the cashier can give using the Customer Service Options function to make up
for an inconvenience to the customer.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
13 CSO - Loyalty Maximum Qty

Note:
displays.
Description: Determines the maximum number of loyalty points that the cashier can give
using the Customer Service Options function to make up for an
inconvenience to the customer.
Values:
0 - 99.
Steps:

1.
2.
14 Customer Program Promo Message

Ask about VeriPASS
Description: Allows the manager to type a promotional message to print on a receipt
when a customer does not present a VeriPASS tag in a transaction that
includes VeriPASS-eligible items. Ask about VeriPASS is the default
message.
Values:
October 4, 2002
Alphanumeric, 39 characters.
8-34 VeriPASS
Steps:

1.
2.
15 Prompt for Tag in Sales? Y/N

Description: If a cashier presses an MOP other than VeriPASS and a transaction includes
VeriPASS-eligible items, this parameter determines whether the Ruby
terminal prompts the cashier to ask a customer for a VeriPASS tag.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: If the VeriPASS MOP is not the first one the cashier presses, the
prompt, Present Tag? Y/N displays.
No: The prompt, Present Tag? Y/N does not display.
Steps:

1.
2.
16 Prompt Customer for Redeem? Y/N

Description: Determines whether the Ruby terminal prompts the cashier to ask customers
if they want to use their earned loyalty points. The Ruby terminal displays,
REDEEM PTS FOR LOYALTY $; EXIT TO CANCEL. The IVP displays
PTS FOR $ dd.
Values:
Yes or No.
Yes: The cashier is prompted to ask the customer whether to use earned
Loyalty dollars if there are qualifying items on the current transaction.
No: No prompt appears, and the total is automatically discounted by the
Loyalty dollars earned through previous purchases.
Steps:

1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to go back to the first
parameter.
2.

VeriPASS mode menu.
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
File Maintenance
Press [List] to print a list of all the merchant preferences and the parameters.
DATE: 10/04/02
MERCHANT PREFERENCES
17:46
---------------------------------------PROMPT FOR CARWASH:

Y
PROMPT FOR DCR RECEIPT:
Y
PROMPT FOR USER PASSWORD:
Y
PROMPT FOR 2ND PAYMENT:
Y
PRINT VERIPASS PROMO MSG:
Y
INITIAL VALUES - ADD AT ACTV FOR PMNT
CLUB ITEM PLU#:
000000000000/000
CLUB ITEM COUNT:
00
EPC (FREQ) VALUE:
00
LOYALTY VALUE:
00
CSO PARAMETERS (DISCRETIONARY POINTS)
CLUB ITEM PLU#:
000000000000/000
CLUB ITEM COUNT:
00
EPC (FREQ) VALUE:
00
LOYALTY VALUE:
00
CUSTOMER PROGRAM PROMO MESSAGE:
Ask About VERIPASS
PROMPT FOR TAG IF PROGRAM IN SALE:
PROMPT CUSTOMER FOR LOYALTY REDEEM:
October 4, 2002
Y
Y
Sample Merchant Preferences

Listing
8-35
8-36 VeriPASS
Merchant Preferences Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
Value
Prompt for Car Wash

Prompt for DCR Receipt
Prompt for User Password
Prompt for 2nd Payment
Print Promo if no VP
Initial Club PLU#
Initial Club Item Quantity
Initial EPC Quantity
Initial Loyalty Quantity
CSO - Club PLU#
CSO - Club Maximum Quantity
CSO - EPC Maximum Quantity
CSO - Loyalty Maximum Quantity
Customer Program Promo Message
Prompt for Tag in Sales
Prompt Customer for Redeem
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-37

8
The VeriPASS Club Configuration function allows a site to set up items referred to as
Clubs. In a Club, a customer prepurchases a set quantity of a specific item, usually at a
reduced price. The VeriPASS tag stores the PLU for the Club group, the PLU for the Club
item, and the quantity of the Club item purchased. Each time the customer buys the Club
item and presents the tag, the count stored on the tag goes down by one and the Ruby
terminal discounts the Club item 100% on the customers receipt. When the item count on
the tag is zero, the customer may purchase the same or a different Club program.
Up to 10 Club programs can be configured at any site, but the tag stores only one Club at a
time. Each Club program requires two PLUs: one to sell the Club group and the second to
identify the individual items in the Club.
Considerations
Although a site may offer up to 10 Clubs, each VeriPASS Tag can participate in
only one Club at a time.
When the number of Club items is reduced to 0, the customer may participate in
another Club.
A customer cannot purchase a Club and redeem a Club item in the same
transaction. The customer must either begin redeeming Club items on the next visit
or the cashier must close out the sale and start a new one to process the Club item
separately.
A car wash may be sold as a Club item, but can only be redeemed as part of an
inside transaction.
PLUs used in Combo or Mix Files cannot be used in a Club.
Example of a Club
A merchant sets up a Coffee Club in which a customer can prepurchase ten cups of 12-oz.
coffee for $5.00. Although a 12-oz. cup of normally coffee sells for $0.79, net cost to the
customer in the Club is $0.50 per cup. The customer sees this as a savings and buys the
Club. The merchant issues a VeriPASS tag to store the Club and now the customer must
return to the store to receive the cups of coffee.
Coffee Club
PLU Item
October 4, 2002
Description
Price
Club Group PLU#
Coffee Club
$5.00
PLU Item #
12-oz. Coffee
$0.79
8-38 VeriPASS
The Coffee Club (group PLU) includes ten 12-oz. cups of coffee. The VeriPASS Tag is
loaded with the PLU item number for the 12-oz. coffee, and the Club count on the tag is
set to 10. Each time the customer uses the tag to purchase a 12-oz. cup of coffee, the tag
is presented. The counter is decreased by one and the ticket amount is reduced by an
amount equal to a 100% discount on the coffee. The following receipts show the initial
Club purchase and redemption of one cup of coffee with VeriPASS.
ID0000000-001
372 CENTRAL AVE
Descr.
----COFFEE CLUB
JOES MART
CLEARWATER FL
qty
--1
amount
-----5.00
-----5.00
.00
Sub Total
Tax
TOTAL
5.00
CASH
Change
$ 10.00
$ -5.00
CUSTOMER PROGRAM TOTAL

PREV
EARN
REDEEM
0
10
0
CLUB
Sample Club Purchase Receipt
TOTAL
10
Quantity of Club Items on the Tag
THANKS, COME AGAIN

REG# 0000
CSH#000
10/04/02 11:13:22
DR# 01
ID0000000-001
372 CENTRAL AVE
Descr.
----COFFEE
DONUT
TRAN# 10019
ST# 0
JOES MART
CLEARWATER FL
qty
--1
6
amount
-----0.50
1.98
-----0.50
-0.50
0.07
Sub Total
CLUB ITEM
Tax
TOTAL
2.05
Change
CLUB
$ -3.00
CUSTOMER PROGRAM TOTAL

PREV
EARN
REDEEM
10
0
1
TOTAL
9
Sample Club Redemption Receipt
100% Discount for Club Item
Note: The customer does not have

to pay with VeriPASS to redeem
Club items.
Quantity of Club Items on the Tag
THANKS, COME AGAIN

REG# 0000
CSH#000
10/04/02 11:13:22
DR# 01
TRAN# 10019
ST# 0
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-39
Awarding Club Points without Purchases

Using the Init - Club PLU# and Init - Club Qty parameters in the Merchant
Preferences function, the site can set up an incentive to buy a VeriPASS tag. Use this
parameter to preset the tag to already have a quantity of Club items when the customer
first activates the tag for payment, or when the tag is updated.
The CSO - Club Maximum Qty parameter sets the maximum number of points which
the cashier can offer the customer as compensation for an inconvenience. The cashier uses
the Customer Service Options function to award the points.
October 4, 2002
8-40 VeriPASS
VeriPASS Club Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the VeriPASS Club Configuration function from the Manager
mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS Club
__
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [ENTER].
CLUB01 GRP PLU 00000000031
3. Key the PLU number and press the arrow keys to reach the next PLU.
CLUBnn GRP PLU nnnnnnnnnnnn
Description: Sets the PLU for the Club group of items, set with the CLUBnn ITEM
PLUs parameter, that the customer purchases at one time.
Values:

PLU: Numeric, 000000000000 - 999999999999.
Steps:

1.
Key the modifier and press [ENTER]. Key the PLU and press
2.
CLUBnn ITEM PLU nnnnnnnnnnnn
Description: Sets the PLU for the individual items in the Club which the customer
purchases at a 100% discount.
Values:

PLU: Numeric, 000000000000 - 999999999999.
Steps:

1.
Key the modifier and press [ENTER]. Key the PLU and press
2.
CLUBnn QTY#
Description: The quantity of the CLUBnn ITEM PLU put on the tag at the time the
customer purchases the Club.
Values:
0 - 99.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
Steps:
8-41
Do the following:
1.
Key the new value and then press [ENTER] to go back to the first
parameter.
2.

VeriPASS Club Configuration function.
*VERIPASS MENU*
File Maintenance
Press [List] to print a listing of the VeriPASS Club Configuration parameters.
DATE: 10/04/02
TIME: 17:46
CLUB CONFIGURATION FILE
Sample VeriPASS Club

ID CLUB PLU#
CLUB DESCR
ITEM PLU#
ITEMS/CLUB
---------------------------------------01 000000001001/000
000000000135/001
MED. COFFEE
6
02 000000001002/000
000000000141/002
LG FOUNT DR
12
03 000000001003/000
000000000145/001
DZN DONUTS
6
04 000000001004/000
000000000151/000
DELUXE WASH
10
VeriPASS Club Configuration Setup

Use this section to set up the VeriPASS Club Configurations.
1. Make a copy of the VeriPASS Club Configuration Worksheet and use a pencil to
complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the VeriPASS Club Configuration Steps section.
October 4, 2002
8-42 VeriPASS
VeriPASS Club Configuration Worksheet

Parameter
PLU/Modifier
Description
Quantity
Club 01
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 02
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 03
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 04
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 05
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 06
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 07
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 08
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 09
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU

Club 10
Club Group PLU
Does not apply
Club Item PLU
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-43

8
The VeriPASS EPC Configuration function allows the site to set up an electronic punch
card (EPC) program. The EPC program substitutes for a local frequency program where a
cashier must physically punch a card each time a customer purchases a particular item.
When the card has enough punches, the customer receives a free item.
Using VeriPASS, the tag tracks the number of qualifying items which the customer
purchases so the cashier does not have to punch a card carried by the customer. At the end
of each transaction which includes the purchase of a qualifying item, the Ruby terminal
prompts the cashier to ask the customer to present the tag to the IVP. If the customer has
earned enough points to qualify for a free item on a previous visit to the store, the Ruby
terminal automatically gives the customer a 100% discount on the item.
For example, if the program requires the customer to purchase six cups of coffee to get a
free cup, the customer receives a 100% discount on a cup on the next visit after the
purchase of the sixth cup. If the customer purchases seven cups of coffee in the first visit,
he or she earns one free cup and has one cup which counts toward the next free one.
However, the customer must wait to receive the free cup until the next visit. When the
customer receives the free cup, the tags counter decreases by the minimum required
number already used up (six cups), which, in this case, leaves five more cups to be
purchased before the next free one is earned.
If the EPC program contains multiple PLUs, then buying any of the items earns a punch.
For example, if the EPC program includes PLUs for a ham sandwich, turkey sandwich,
tossed salad, and chef salad, the customer receives electronic punches when purchasing
any of these items. When the customer earns enough punches to receive a free item, the
Ruby terminal applies a 100% discount to the least expensive qualifying item among the
customers purchases.
October 4, 2002
8-44 VeriPASS
Considerations
Setting Up EPC
When setting up or changing an item in the VeriPASS EPC Configuration function,
consider the following:
A site can set up only one EPC program at a time, although the program can have
up to ten PLUs participating in the program.
Each purchase of a qualifying PLU earns a punch unless the item has already been
counted as an item in a Club program.
The customer cannot receive the last punch and earn the free item in the same
transaction. The customer must redeem the item on the next visit or the cashier
must close out the sale and start a new one to process the EPC item separately.
PLU items (car wash) can earn points at the DCR but the customer must come
inside to redeem awards.
PLUs used in a Combo or Mix File cannot be included in an EPC program.
Awarding EPC Points without Purchases

Using the Init - EPC Qty parameter in the Merchant Preferences function, the site can
set up an incentive to buy a VeriPASS tag. Use this parameter to preset the tag to already
have a quantity of punches when the customer first activates the tag for payment, or
when the tag is updated.
The CSO - EPC Maximum Qty parameter sets the maximum number of points which
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-45
VeriPASS EPC Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the VeriPASS EPC Configuration function from the VeriPASS
mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS EPC
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [ENTER].
QUANTITY (No Fractions)
00
3. Key the quantity (0 - 99) and press [ENTER].

Note: The quantity set here is the same for every PLU entered in this function.
Keep pressing [ENTER] until you reach an empty PLU entry.
Keep pressing [ENTER] until you reach the desired PLU for editing.
5. Key the PLU and press [ENTER].
Repeat steps 4 and 5. You may enter up to ten PLUs.
Press [EXIT] to return to the VeriPASS mode menu.
*VERIPASS MENU*
October 4, 2002
8-46 VeriPASS
File Maintenance
Press [List] to print a list of the EPC preferences.
EPC CONFIGURATION FILE
Sample VeriPASS EPC Configuration

Listing
QTY
ID
PLU#
DESCR
---------------------------------------06
01
000000000145/000 SGL DONUT
02
000000000135/001 MED. COFFEE
VeriPASS EPC Configuration Setup

Use this section to set up the VeriPASS EPC Configurations.
1. Make a copy of the VeriPASS EPC Configuration Worksheet and use a pencil to
complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the VeriPASS EPC Configuration Steps section.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
VeriPASS EPC Configuration Worksheet

PLU
Quantity:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
October 4, 2002
Description
8-47
8-48 VeriPASS
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration

8
Note:
When VeriPASS is not installed at the DCRs, outside transactions are not
eligible to earn awards.
The VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration function allows the site to set up a
program to increase sales for a particular department. For example, if your site wants to
increase sales of sandwiches because they offer a high profit margin, you could set up the
deli department as a Loyalty department. Each time customers purchase sandwiches of
any kind, they earn points which the VeriPASS tag stores.
When the customer accumulates enough Loyalty points (without including the items on
the current transaction) the Ruby terminal prompts to PRESENT TAG Y/N. If a tag is
presented, the customer may be able to choose whether to redeem earned Loyalty points or
the transaction may be automatically discounted by the Loyalty dollars earned through
previous purchases. Whether the discount is at the will of the customer or is automatic
depends on the settings in Merchant Preferences. In either case, the customer also earns
points in any other Club, EPC, or Loyalty programs on the tag.
Note:
Earned points must be equivalent to or exceed the cost of an item rounded up

to the nearest whole dollar.
Considerations
Consider these items before setting up Loyalty departments.
To earn awards on outside transactions, VeriPASS must be installed at the DCRs.
Only items which have the LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter set to
Y in the Department File can be bought using Loyalty dollars.
To be part of a Loyalty program, a specific fuel product must be set up in the

Department File as its own department. For example, to award Loyalty dollars for
the purchase of premium fuel, set up a premium fuel department.
The highest, total, whole-dollar amount in a transaction for a Loyalty department

item earns Loyalty points. For example, one large soda at $1.25 earns the customer
the points for $1.00. Amounts are rounded down to an even dollar amount and no
partial points are earned.
If the redeemed item is not a whole-dollar amount, redemption requires enough

points to equal the next higher whole dollar amount. For example, a large soda
costing $1.25 requires $2.00 in Loyalty dollars.
PLUs used in a Combo can earn both Loyalty points and be redeemed for Loyalty
dollars.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-49
Awarding Loyalty Points without Purchases

Using the Init - Loyalty Qty parameter in the Merchant Preferences function, the site
can set up an incentive to buy a VeriPASS tag. Use this parameter to preset the tag to
already have a quantity of points when the customer first activates the tag for payment, or
when the tag is updated.
The CSO - Loyalty Maximum Qty parameter sets the maximum number of points which
Earning Rate
The VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration function allows you to set up as many
as ten departments in which customers can earn Loyalty dollars, each at its own earn rate
per dollar spent. Each department shares one redeem rate. For more information on the
redemption rate, refer to the next section, VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration.
Overview
To set up a Loyalty program, do the following:
Manager Mode
1. Dept File:
Set up the departments, if you have not already done so. For each department
in which you offer items for redemption, set the LOYALTY REDEEM
ELIGIBLE?? parameter to Y.
To award Loyalty dollars for a fuel product, configure the fuel product as a
department. For example, to allow customers to earn Loyalty dollars for
premium fuel purchases, set up PREMIUM FUEL as a department.
2. PLU File: If you are using PLUs to sell the items, set them up, if you have not
already done so. For each PLU which you offer as a redemption item, set the
LOYALTY REDEEM ELIGIBLE? parameter to Y. Assign a department
number from step 1 to the PLU.
3. MOP File: Set up a VeriPASS MOP using MOP code 18 VERIPASS.
4. Soft Key File: Set up the following:
An MOP key for VeriPASS (or make sure the cashier knows which MOP
number to use when pressing the [OTHER MOP] key).
A soft key to access VeriPASS mode from within Sales mode
VeriPASS Mode
5. VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Config: Enter each department number and the Pts Per
$1.00.
6. VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Config: Enter the number of points that the customer
must have to receive a $1.00 credit in the LOYALTY REDEEM RATE. Only
one LOYALTY REDEEM RATE can be set and it applies to all redeemable
items.
October 4, 2002
8-50 VeriPASS
7. Merchant Preferences:
Set the Init Loyalty Qty parameter if you want to award Loyalty points to
customers getting new VeriPASS tags.
Set the CSO - Loyalty Maximum Qty parameter if you want the cashier to be
able to award points to compensate unhappy customers.
To print a promotional message on customers receipts when they do not use
VeriPASS, set the PRINT PROMO IF NO VP parameter to Y.
Set the Prompt Customer for Redeem parameter to Y to prevent Loyalty
dollars from automatically being deducted when a customer buys a qualifying
item.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-51
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration function from
the VeriPASS mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS Dept
Loyalty Config function appears.
2. Press [ENTER].
LOYALTY DEPT01 Dept #9060
3. Do one of the following to set up or edit a Loyalty department:

Key the department number for the first record (LOYALTY DEPT01) and
press [ENTER].
Key the record number (01 - 10) to reach and edit a Loyalty department which
has already been set up. Press [Select]. Either key a new department
number then press [ENTER] or skip to step 4.
Press [->] to reach the desired record. Either key a new department number
then press [ENTER] or skip to step 4.
LOYALTY DEPT01 Pts per $1.00
4. To set up or edit the LOYALTY DEPT01 Pts per $1.00 spent parameter, key a
number between 0 and 99 then press [ENTER]. For example, if you enter a value
of 5, the customer earns five points for every whole dollar spent in the
department set in step 3.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 until all Loyalty departments have been set up.
6. Press [EXIT] to return to the VeriPASS mode menu.
October 4, 2002
8-52 VeriPASS
File Maintenance
Press [List] to print a list of the VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configurations.
10/04/02
LOYALTY DEPT CONFIGURATION FILE
14:15
Sample Loyalty Department

Configuration File Listing
ID
DEPT#
DESCR
EARN RATE
---------------------------------------01 9001 HBA
05/ $
02 9009 DELI
02/ $
03 9060 FOUNTAIN
10/ $
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Setup

Use this section to set up the VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configurations.
1. Make a copy of the VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Worksheet and
use a pencil to complete it.
2. Follow the steps in the VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Steps
section.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-53
VeriPASS Department Loyalty Configuration Worksheet

Record
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
October 4, 2002
Department #
Description
Pts per Dollar
8-54 VeriPASS

8
The VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration function sets the number of points that
equals a Loyalty dollar.
Considerations
Note:
Refer to the VERIPASS DEPARTMENT LOYALTY CONFIGURATION

section for more information on redeeming Loyalty dollars.
Redeem Loyalty Points

Setting the PROMPT CUSTOMER FOR REDEEM? parameter in Merchant
Preferences to Y or N, the site can determine whether:
Yes: The Ruby terminal prompts the cashier to ask a customer who meets both of
the following conditions whether he or she wishes to redeem Loyalty points:
The customer is purchasing a qualifying item.
The customer has earned enough points to purchase the item with Loyalty
dollars.
No: The Ruby terminal automatically applies earned Loyalty points whenever
enough points have been earned and the customer purchases a qualifying item in
the transaction.
Redemption Details
Note:
For every Loyalty dollar redeemed, the Loyalty points stored on the tag are
decreased by a point value equal to the redeem rate set in the VERIPASS
REDEEM LOYALTY CONFIGURATION.
When a customer purchases an item with its departments LOYALTY REDEEM

ELIGIBLE? parameter set to Y and the tag has accumulated enough Loyalty points to
redeem an item, the Ruby terminal displays PRESENT TAG Y/N.
If the customer presents the tag, the cashier presses the VeriPASS MOP.
Depending on the setting of the PROMPT CUSTOMER FOR REDEEM?
parameter in Merchant Preferences, one of the following occurs. In both cases the
customer also receives points earned in any Club, EPC, or Loyalty programs in
which he or she is participating.
PROMPT CUSTOMER FOR REDEEM? is set to Y: The cashier is
prompted to ask the customer whether to redeem earned Loyalty points. If the
customer answers Y, the total is automatically discounted by the Loyalty
dollars earned through previous purchases. If the customer answers N, no
discount applies.
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS
8-55
PROMPT CUSTOMER FOR REDEEM? is set to N: The total is

automatically discounted by the Loyalty dollars earned through previous
purchases.
If the customer does not present a tag, the customer does not receive the discount
and does not receive points for any other items that may qualify for Club, EPC, or
Loyalty programs. Also, the promotional message Ask about VeriPASS may
print on the receipt, depending on the setting of the Print promo if no VP
parameter in Merchant Preferences.
MOP
A unique MOP must be set up and the VeriPASS MOP code assigned to it in the MOP
File. This MOP can then be assigned to a soft key or the cashier may use the [OTHER
MOP] key. The receipt shows the MOP as a separate line item. The Cashier and Summary
Reports print redeemed Loyalty dollars in the MOP section.
Tax
Items configured as tax included earn points on the total price (tax included).
Loyalty Redeem Rate

The Loyalty Redeem Configuration function allows a site to set up as many as ten
departments in which customers can earn Loyalty dollars, each at its own earn rate per
dollar spent. The value in the Loyalty Redeem Rate parameter in the VeriPASS Redeem
Loyalty Configuration function determines how many points are required to equal one
Loyalty dollar. The table below shows an example of one combination of points and
awards. The formula which follows gives the relationship among the parameters.
Loyalty Redeem Rate Example
VeriPASS Dept Loyalty Config Function
Loyalty Dept
Record
Dept #/Desc
DEPT01
9001/HBA
Loyalty $ Earned
per $ Spent
October 4, 2002
VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty

Config Function
Pts Earned
per Dollar
Spent
Loyalty Redeem
Rate
(Pts/$ Earned)
No. of Points
Accumulated
Loyalty $
Earned
per $
Spent
10
60
$6.00
No. of Points Accumulated

Loyalty Redeem Rate
8-56 VeriPASS
VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration Steps

Use these steps to reach the VeriPASS Redeem Loyalty Configuration function from the
VeriPASS mode menu.
1. At the VeriPASS mode menu, press the arrow keys until the VeriPASS Redeem
Loyalty Configuration function appears.
*VERIPASS MENU*
2. Press [Select].
LOYALTY REDEEM RATE 10
3. Key a number between 1 and 99 for the LOYALTY REDEEM RATE. This is the
number of Loyalty points required to redeem one dollar in merchandise.
4. Press [EXIT] to return to the VeriPASS mode menu.
*VERIPASS MENU*
File Maintenance
Press [List] to the Loyalty redeem rate.
10/04/02
15:25
LOYALTY REDEEM CONFIGURATION FILE
Sample Loyalty Redeem Config

Listing
REDEEM RATE
---------------------------------------10 / $
October 4, 2002
HPV-20 Functions
The HPV-20 is a separate storage device that contains functions which have the capability
of performing the following:
Backup
Restore
Upgrade
Revert
Note:
A Ruby Card is needed to perform any HPV-20 Functions.
Note:
When a controller has HPV-20 with a Ruby Card installed, all workstations
attached to the controller need Ruby Cards installed.
October 4, 2002
9-2 HPV-20 Functions
Initial Start Up
1. The following four displays only appear the first time the Ruby application starts.
Insert HPV-20 Card now and press a key
(PRESS A KEY TO CONTINUE)
2. Insert a blank HPV-20 Ruby Card.

Setting up HPV-20 Card now...
3. Press a key and the Ruby terminal reboots. A display appears that indicates the
HPV-20 functions are loading and that the connections are correct.
HPV-20/UpTime v. 1.0.0 -- Starting...
HPV-20/UpTime is initializing the MSD...

Creating directory...
copying files...
Setting date to idle...
Several displays appear that show the copyright notice, operating system (Gemix)
version number, application name, and software version number plus the question,
Change system configuration? (Y/N).
GEMPAK Release -- Version X.XX.XX
Gemix v2.5.12 NOT REGISTERED!
Change system configuration? (Y/N)
4. Press [No].
The remaining steps are the same as in the Power Up the Ruby Terminal section of
chapter 1 of the Sales Reference.
October 4, 2002
HPV-20 Functions 9-3
Start HPV-20 Functions Mode

Steps
Use these steps to enter HPV-20 Functions mode from any point in the application. Then
select the function you wish to run.
[ SALES ]
2. Press the arrow keys until the Maintenance mode appears.

[ MAINTENANCE ]
3. Press [Select].
Enter I.D. ? _

Enter Password _

*MAINTENANCE MENU*
6. Use the arrow keys to reach the Reboot System function.

29. REBOOT SYSTEM
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
7. Press [Select].
Warning System Will Shutdown.
Are you sure
[Y/N]
*MAINTENANCE MENU*
October 4, 2002
8. Press [Select]. Several displays appear that show a copyright notice, operating
system (Gemix) version number, application name, and version number. The
following displays indicate the HPV-20 functions are loading.
HPV-20/UpTime v. 1.0.0 -- Starting...
9. Press [ENTER] within five seconds after the following display appears to obtain
access to the HPV-20 main menu.
Starting application program...
(Press <ENTER> for UpTime menu)
10. One of the following occurs:

If you did not press [ENTER] within five seconds, the Ruby terminal
completes the boot process and goes into Sales mode.
If you pressed [ENTER] in time, the following displays appear.
HPV-20/UpTime v1.0.0
Ruby HPV-20/UpTime System
Copyright 2001 VeriFone
Press <ENTER>
UpTime Main Menu

1. BACKUP
3. UPGRADE
2. RESTORE
4. REVERT
--> Press number of choice or <EXIT>
Note:
The Ruby terminal checks communication with the e-PC every three
minutes. When it confirms communications, a double-beep sounds. If
communications are broken, HPV-20 UNAVAILABLE displays.
11. Choose one of the HPV-20 functions described on the following pages or press
[EXIT] to return to Sales mode.
Backup
Restore
Upgrade
Revert
October 4, 2002
Backup
9
The Backup function records the Ruby terminals configuration including the following:
Data files
Fuel settings
Configuration files
Security settings
Load modules
The HPV-20 storage device can store up to two backups of each Ruby terminal in the
system. Creating each backup takes approximately 15 minutes. The system is not
available for sales transactions during this time.
Backup Steps
Use these steps to perform the Backup function.
1. Run a Close Daily if transactions have been performed since the last Close Daily
was run.
2. If your system has workstations connected to the controller, make certain they are
not in Sales mode.
3. Reboot the Ruby terminal using the Reboot System option. (See Start HPV-20
Functions Mode on page 3 of this chapter.)
4. Press [ENTER] within five seconds after the following display appears.

If you did not press [ENTER]within five seconds, the Ruby terminal
UpTime v1.0.0
HPV-20/UpTime System
(c)2001 VeriFone, a division of HP
CONNECTED. Press <ENTER>
October 4, 2002
6. Press [ENTER].
HPV-20/UpTime Main Menu
1. BACKUP
3. UPGRADE
2. RESTORE
4. REVERT
==> Press number of choice or <EXIT>
7. Press [1] for BACKUP.

[State 3, Backup Init]
Listing available backups.
Please wait...
A list of available backups displays.

#1 GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-01-22 20:09
#2 <none>
------------------------> OK to create new backup? (Y/N)
Note:
If two backups appear, the Ruby terminal prompts you to erase or keep
the oldest backup.
Press [No] to stop backing up and return to the HPV-20 main menu.
Press [Yes] to erase the oldest backup and continue. The following display
appears briefly.
[State 8, Application shutdown]
Application is not running.
The following display appears continuously until the backup is complete.

[State 9, Perform Backup]
Saving current application...
Saving xxxxxxxx.xxx
Note:
The term xxxxxxxx.xxx represents the name of the file currently being
saved.
When the backup process finishes, the following display appears.
[State 18, End]
Successful completion
Rebooting...
October 4, 2002
GEMPAK Release -- Version x.xx.xx
9. Press [No] to keep the same system configuration.

The remaining steps are the same as in the Powering Up the Ruby Terminal section of
October 4, 2002
Restore
9
The Restore function restores system information which was saved using the Backup
function. Keep in mind that if you do a restore, the system returns to the state it was in at
the time the backup was made. This includes all totals saved at the time of the backup.
The restore is only available for backups made from the same software version as the one
currently running.
Restoring the system backup takes approximately 15 minutes. The system is not available
for sales transactions during this time.
Restore Steps
Use these steps to perform the Restore function.
was run.
not in Sales mode.

UpTime v1.0.0
October 4, 2002
6. Press [ENTER].
1. BACKUP
3. UPGRADE
2. RESTORE
4. REVERT
7. Press [2] for RESTORE.

[State 4, Restore Init]
Listing available backups,
Please wait...
#1 GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-02-21 20:09
#2 <none>
------------------------> Select backup to restore:
Note:
If no backups are stored on the HPV-20, No backup available.

==>
Press (EXIT). displays.
8. Press the number of the backup, [1] or [2], to be restored on the Ruby terminal.
GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-02-21 20:09
Restore confirmation number is nnn-nnn
Call Help Desk, Enter password:
Note:
Call the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center for help in obtaining a
password for the restore function. The nnn-nnn is a confirmation
number that changes each time the restore process is begun. This number
must be given to the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center to obtain a
password for the restore function to operate correctly.
9. Key the password and press [ENTER].
Then the following display appears continuously until the restore is complete.
[State 16, Begin restore system]
Clearing memory...
Wiping RAM...
October 4, 2002
The Ruby terminal reboots. Several displays appear that show you a copyright
notice, operating system (Gemix) version number, and application name and
version number.
UpTime v. 1.0.0 -- Starting...
[State 17, Restore system]
Copying xxxxxxxx.xxx
to/ram
Note:
restored.
10. When the restore process is complete, the following display appears:
[State 18, End]
Rebooting...
GEMPAK Release -- Version X.XX.XX

October 4, 2002
Upgrade
9
The Upgrade function allows the user to upgrade the Ruby terminal from new software
automatically sent by the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center and stored on the
HPV-20. When the Ruby terminal receives an upgrade, a message appears on the alarm
line and prints on the journal. This message signals that an upgrade is available on the
HPV-20. When the upgrade begins, a backup of the current configuration is automatically
performed if the upgrade package requires it.
If you need assistance with this function, call the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support
Center.The system is not available for sales transactions during the Upgrade process.
Upgrade Steps
Use these steps to perform the Upgrade function.
was run.
not in Sales mode.

UpTime v1.0.0
6. Press [ENTER].
1. BACKUP
3. UPGRADE
2. RESTORE
4. REVERT
October 4, 2002
7. Press [3] for UPGRADE.

[State 5, Upgrade Init]
Listing available upgrades.
Please wait...
#1 GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-02-21 20:09
#2 <none>
------------------------> Select upgrade package to apply:
Note:
If no upgrades are stored on the HPV-20, No upgrade available.

==>Press (EXIT). displays.
8. Press the number of the upgrade, [1] or [2], to be installed.
GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-01-22 20:09
Restore confirmation number is nnn-nnn
Note:
If the upgrade requires a password, the above prompt displays. Call the
VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center for help in obtaining a
password for the Upgrade function. The nnn-nnn is a confirmation
number that changes each time the upgrade process begins. This number
must be given to the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center to obtain a
password for the upgrade function to operate correctly.
A backup starts automatically.
The following display appears continuously until the backup is complete.

[State 9, Perform Backup]
Saving current application...
Saving xxxxxxxx.xxx
When the backup finishes, the upgrade process begins automatically. Several
displays appear that show the application status. When the upgrade process
finishes, the following display appears.
[State 18, End]
(PRESS A KEY TO CONTINUE)
October 4, 2002
9. Press any key and the Ruby terminal reboots. Several displays appear that show
the copyright notice, operating system (Gemix) version number, application name,
and software version number plus the question, Change system configuration?
(Y/N).

October 4, 2002
Revert
99
The Revert function allows the user to revert back to an earlier version of the software and
system configuration which were present at the time the last upgrade was performed.
The site configuration settings and totals also revert to those that were current at the time
of the last upgrade. If no version appears on the display then Gemstall must be used to
revert to a previous version.
The system is not available for sales transactions during the Revert process.
Revert Steps
Use these steps to perform the Revert function.
was run.
not in Sales mode.

UpTime v1.0.0
6. Press [ENTER].
1. BACKUP
3. UPGRADE
2. RESTORE
4. REVERT
October 4, 2002
7. Press [4] for REVERT.

[State 6, Revert Init]
Listing available revert info.
Please wait...
#1 GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-01-22 20:09
#2 <none>
------------------------> OK to revert (Y/N).
Note:
If no older versions of software are stored on the HPV-20, No revert

available. Press (EXIT). displays.
8. Press the number next to the software version, [1] or [2], to select the one to
which you want to revert.
GEMPAK
vx.xx.xx
2001-01-22 20:09
Revert confirmation number is nnn-nnn
Note:
Call the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center for help in obtaining a
password for the revert function. The nnn-nnn is a confirmation number
that changes each time the revert process is begun. This number must be
given to the VeriFone Ruby Customer Support Center to obtain a
password for the revert function to operate correctly.
9. Key the password number and press [ENTER].
Then the following display appears continuously until the revert is complete.
[State 16, Begin restore system]
Clearing memory...
Wiping RAM...
The Ruby terminal reboots. Several displays appear that show a copyright notice,
operating system (Gemix) version number, and application name and version
number.
UpTime v1.0.0 -- Starting...
October 4, 2002
[State 17, Restore system]
Copying xxxxxxxx.xxx
to/ram
Note:
restored.
10. When the revert process is complete, the following display appears:
[State 18, End]
Rebooting...
The Ruby terminal reboots. Several displays appear that show a copyright notice,
operating system (Gemix) version number, application name, version number, and
offer a chance to Change system configuration? (Y/N).
11. Press any key and the Ruby terminal reboots. Several displays appear that show
the copyright notice, operating system (Gemix) version number, application name,
and software version number plus the question, Change system configuration?
(Y/N).

October 4, 2002
10
Index
A
account number on DCR receipt
6-39
print partial 6-40
activate, VeriPASS tag 8-5
attributes, pump 4-35
authorization
limit, edit 6-38
authorization, check 6-49
autocollect inside 4-57
overview 4-75
parameter setting 4-80
autocollect, set type of 4-37
B
backup, HPV-20 functions 9-5
backup, print log 5-42
banner
edit 3-212
multiterminal setup 3-213
print text 3-213
batch
configuration 6-46 to 6-47
details 6-6
beginning date, POP discounts
3-264
beginning time, POP discounts
3-264
blend fuel 4-10
Dresser/Wayne 4-11
set type 4-39
blue law setup 3-215
PLU parameter 3-165
set combo parameter 3-231
set department parameter
3-148
bottle deposit 3-125
break point tax 3-117
defined 3-95
October 4, 2002
set up 3-110
buzzer
nozzle off pump 4-39
volume 5-37
C
Canadian GST 3-53, 3-97, 3-101
car wash
DCR display menus 7-14
DCR display order 7-19
department setup 3-138
discount setup 3-171
manager functions 7-1
outdoor enable 7-21
print display order 7-20
print key setup 7-8
print valid days for code 7-18
car wash manager mode
car wash code days valid 7-18
car wash controllers 7-22
car wash key setup 7-6
DCR display setup 7-10
disable car wash 7-16
enable car wash 7-17
initial setup, controller 2-4
set car wash display order 7-19
cash acceptor
configuration 4-71
edit site parameters 4-89
print configuration 4-74
print site parameters 4-95
site parameters worksheet
4-96
cash back
configuration 6-51
set MOP for no sale required
3-83
cash drawers connected 3-49
cashier # required 3-49
category 3-134
department file 3-146
change allowed 3-84
change tag password 8-14
charge type
PLU 3-165
set 3-145
check
authorization required 6-49
edit franking text 3-69
multiterminal setup for
validation 3-71
set MOP for no sale required
3-83
clear pumps on hold 4-103
club
configuration 8-37
customer service options 8-24
merchant preferences 8-31 to
8-32
code days valid 7-18
combo file 3-224
club 8-37
customer ID 3-230
EPC 8-44
food stamps 3-230
loyalty 8-48
print list 3-233
returnable item 3-225, 3-230
soft keys 3-188
special discount 3-231
worksheet 3-236
communication statistics 6-14
sample 6-15
configuration 3-40
batch 6-46
cash acceptor 4-71
credit card 6-33
DCR 4-52
dealer 6-48
I/O 5-7
modem 6-44
10-2 Index
parameter download 6-32

product 4-10
proprietary card 6-53
sales 3-45
security control 3-12
set up 6-55
system 3-42
controller
car wash 7-22
set up Ruby 2-2
Tokheim pump 4-104
CPU exception information 5-32
create
banner 3-64, 3-211
files 5-19
credit
authorization limit 6-38
card configuration 6-33
enable card 6-34
enable DCR 6-39
limit DCR 6-38
restrict products 6-34
credit card
configuration 6-43
configuration, proprietary cards
6-53
POP discount set up 3-268
pre-authorization 6-3
print card parameters 8-41
currency 3-89
edit configuration 3-89
print exchange rates 3-93
customer ID info 3-205
combo requirement 3-230
PLU requirement 3-164
D
data files version 5-9
date, set 5-5
days valid, car wash code 7-18
DCR
attributes 4-54
car wash display order 7-19
car wash menu 7-14
configuration 4-52
configuration worksheet 4-68
credit limit 6-38
disable/enable 4-55, 4-65
edit site parameters 4-83
for nozzle off pump 4-39
fueling/promo message 4-64

Gilbarco graphics 4-52
graphics parameter 4-58
network authorization
requirement 6-40
print configuration 4-67
receipt header 4-60
receipt trailer 4-62
receipt, account number on
6-39
4-96
deactivate VeriPASS tag 8-22
dealer configuration 6-48
print list 6-50
debit configuration
cash back 6-51
print list 6-52
debugger 5-33
Default POP level 4-81
delete
mix record 3-241
PLU from mix record 3-242
POP discount 3-271
department 3-138, 3-185
car wash setup 7-4
category file 3-146
customer ID 3-147, 3-205
fee/charge file 3-125
food stamps 3-146
ID checking 3-139
money order 3-140, 3-144
negative 3-144
print list 3-150 to 3-151
soft keys 3-188
tax assignment 3-145
taxes 3-94
tracking 3-183, 3-185
deposit, bottle 3-125
dial-in 5-21
disable
car wash 7-16
credit card 6-34
credit card at DCR 6-39
DCR 4-55, 4-65
expiration date 6-37
PIN prompt 6-37
printer 5-12
discount 3-171
car wash 3-171
fuel per gallon 3-46
limits 3-46
see also POP discounts
special 3-80, 3-147, 3-165,
3-231
type 3-175
discount ID for free code 3-55
discount type, setting up for POP
3-266
display car wash
menus 7-14
order 7-19
prompt 7-10
display IP stats, maintenance mode
5-47
download parameters 6-32
drawer
open during sale 3-52
open on sale 3-82
drawer, open during sale 3-52
Dresser/Wayne
blended or pure products 4-11
blending fuel 4-39
car wash on DCR display 7-15
E
edit
banner 3-212
cash acceptor configuration
4-71
check franking text 3-69
credit authorization limit 6-38
credit card floor limit 6-34
currency configurations 3-89
DCR attributes 4-54
DCR configuration 4-52
menus 3-202
POP coupon text 3-275
pump configuration 4-32
tank names 4-5 to 4-6
telephone number 5-30
voice authorization phone
number 6-35
EJournal, log RTDS 3-54
electrical blender 4-39
electronic punch card
combo 8-44
October 4, 2002
Index 10-3
merchant preferences 8-32

mix 8-44
employee file 3-32
security control 3-6, 3-33 to
3-34
enable
car wash 7-17
credit card 6-34
DCR 4-55, 4-65, 6-39
expiration date 6-37
hot DCR 6-39
PIN prompt 6-37
printer 5-11
enable POP levels 4-81
end date, POP discounts 3-265
end time, POP discounts 3-265
e-pc status report, maintenance
mode 5-49
Exacta car wash contoller 7-22
exception information, CPU 5-32
execute load module 5-35
expiration date, enable/disable
6-37
F
fallback, allow 6-40
fast credit, enable 3-54
features in Ruby 5-26
fee/charge
money order 3-140
PLU file 3-165
type set 3-145
file
create 5-19
maintenance, defined 3-3
system information 5-24
fixed blender 4-39
flash reports, security control 3-15
flat rate tax
defined 3-95
set up 3-105
floor limit, edit credit card 6-34
flush printer queue 5-13
food stamps
combo assignment 3-230
department acceptance 3-146
PLU assignment 3-164
fractional quantity
department sale 3-139, 3-148
PLU assignment 3-158
PLU sale 3-166
October 4, 2002
free POP award

soft key 3-192
fuel
edit site parameters 4-77, 4-93
4-96
fuel functions
free POP award 3-55
soft keys 3-188
fuel manager mode
clear pumps on hold 4-103
fuel product prices 4-46
functions 4-1
initialize DCRs 4-101
initialize fuel 4-100
POP discount 4-107
product code setup 4-19
product configuration 4-10
product department setup 4-23
product ID setup 4-27
pump configuration 4-32
reset controller 4-104
RFID configuration 4-106
site parameters 4-75
starting 4-2
tank names 4-3
training mode 3-209
fuel parameters
blending 4-39
credit pre-authorization limit
6-38
default POP level 4-81
department defined 3-144
discount per gallon 3-46
discount type 3-175
fuel running totals 5-17
manual approval 4-79
POP discounts 4-107
postpay hours 4-78
slow flow point 4-38
fueling/promo DCR message 4-64
full-service
preset at pump 4-57
set pump as 4-38
G
Gemcom configuration 3-58
general services tax 3-97, 3-101
get latest data 5-14
troubleshooting 5-14
Gilbarco
blending fuel 4-39
graphics 4-58
primary graphic side 4-52
graphics
Gilbarco 4-52
Tokheim 4-58
GST 3-53, 3-97, 3-101, 3-107,
3-113
set up 3-94
H
hard halt mode 4-78
hose assignments 4-10, 4-41
tank names 4-3
worksheet 4-43
hot DCR, enable 6-39
HPV-20 functions 9-1
backup 9-5
reboot 9-3
restore 9-8
revert 9-14
start up 9-2
upgrade 9-11
I
I/O configuration 5-7
ID checking 3-139, 3-158
in-house, MOP file 3-80
initialize
DCRs 4-101
fuel 4-100
VeriPASS feature 8-27
installation, print listing 5-43
K
keyboard layout 3-197 to 3-200
keys
assignment 3-190
car wash setup 7-6
10-4 Index
print car wash display order

7-20
reset 5-36
L
log in/out prompt 3-220
logo/slogan file 3-73
set up for each workstation
3-65
lotto, set MOP for no sale required
3-83
loyalty
combo 8-48
overview 8-49
VeriPASS department config
8-48
VeriPASS redeem config 8-54
M
mail 6-5
sample 6-5
maintenance mode
adjust buzzer volume 5-37
backup print log 5-42
CPU exception information
5-32
create files 5-19
data files version 5-9
disable printer 5-12
display I/O configuration 5-7
display IP stats 5-47
enable printer 5-11, 5-33, 5-35
e-pc status report 5-49
feature information 5-26
file information 5-24
flush printer queue 5-13
functions 5-1
initial setup, workstation 2-7
monitor tank communication
5-41
print installation information
5-43
printer error log 5-39
reboot system 5-46
registration information 5-28
reset modem 5-38
reset soft key file 5-36

reset tank delivery 5-40
set date and time 5-5
set store postal code 5-31
set store telephone number
5-30
set totals 5-15
start debugger 5-33
start remote dial-in 5-21
starting 5-3, 6-2
version information 5-4
manager mode
blue law setup 3-215
category 3-134
check franking 3-69
combo file 3-224
configuration 3-40
create banner 3-211
currency file 3-89
customer ID info 3-205
department tracking file 3-183
employee file 3-32
functions 3-1
initial setup, workstation 2-7
log in/out prompt 3-220
match file 3-244
menu file 3-201
mix file 3-238
MOP file 3-77
PLU file 3-153
PLU promotion file 3-171
PLU tracking file 3-179
POP discount coupon 3-274
POP discount file 3-259
register configuration 3-64
security control 3-5, 3-7
soft key file 3-187
starting 3-4
tax rate file 3-94
training mode 3-209
manifolded tanks 4-3
manual approval of fueling 4-79
match file 3-244
delete match 3-255
delete mix 3-256
examples 3-246
mix file setup 3-238
refund 3-244
setup 3-245
mechanical blending 4-39

menu file 3-201
edit 3-202
modify 3-187
multiterminal setup 3-203
print list 3-203
soft keys 3-187, 3-201
worksheet 3-203
merchant preferences, VeriPASS
8-30
mix n match, PLU promotion
3-171
mix file 3-238
assigning PLUs 3-238, 3-244
club 8-37
delete PLU from record 3-242
delete record 3-241
electronic punch card 8-44
print list 3-241
modem
reset 5-38
money order 3-140
allow money order purchase
3-85
department parameters 3-144
fee/charge 3-140
low check limit 3-54
multiple fees 3-126
monitor tank communication 5-41
MOP 3-77, 3-140
allow money order purchase
3-85
in-house 3-80
print list 3-86
soft keys 3-77, 3-188
VeriPASS 3-80
multiple fees 3-126
multiterminal system
banner setup 3-213
check validation setup 3-71
menu file setup 3-203
soft key file 3-195
soft key setup in 3-188
N
name, tanks 4-3
negative department 3-144
October 4, 2002
Index 10-5
network
configuration 6-20
DCR authorization 6-40
network manager mode
communication statistics 6-14
configuration 6-30
functions 6-1
mail 6-5
network configuration 6-20
prepaid functions 6-9
print network log 6-16
print parameters 6-19
print product codes 6-28
quick credit 6-11
store and forward 6-58
network manager mode, batch
details 6-6
number of days valid, POP code
3-56
number on DCR receipt 6-39
O
open
drawer on sale 3-82
PLU 3-159, 3-162
open drawer on sale 3-52
open PLU 3-162
options installed in Ruby 5-26
outdoor enable, car wash 7-21
P
parameter download 6-32
password
employee 3-35
Gemcom 3-58
setup steps 8-17
PIN prompt, enable 6-37
PLU
price 3-162
tracking 3-179, 3-181
PLU file 3-153
car wash department 7-4
customer ID 3-164, 3-205
departments 3-141
fee/charge 3-125, 3-165
food stamps 3-164
October 4, 2002
ID checking 3-158
maximum number 3-42
maximum promotions 3-43
open PLU 3-162
PLU not found 3-141
print list 3-168
promotions 3-171
returnable item 3-165
soft keys 3-188
sold, item may be 3-165
storage media 3-43
worksheet 3-169
PLU promotion 3-171
mix n match 3-171
PLUs 3-159, 3-164
print list 3-176
POP award type 3-265
POP definition table
considerations for set up 4-108
sample listing 4-112
set up 4-110
POP discount code
days valid 3-56
enabling 3-55
description 3-274
print list 3-276
sample 3-276
setting security 3-8
setting up 3-275
worksheet 3-276
POP discount file
description 3-259
print list 4-112
setting security 3-8
setting up 3-264
soft key 3-263
transaction requirements
3-259
worksheet 3-272
POP discount table
considerations 4-108
set up 4-109
POP discounts
award type 3-265
beginning date 3-264
beginning time 3-264
default POP level 4-81
definition ID 3-266
deleting 3-271
discount type 3-266
enable 3-55
enabling 3-55
end date 3-265
end time 3-265
for car wash 3-260
free award key 3-192
fuel manager 4-107, 4-109
ID for free code 3-55
limits 3-261
recalculating total 3-56
refunds 3-263
security for free award 3-55
updating DCRs 4-108
POP preset timer, parameter setting
4-81
postal code, set 5-31
postpay hours 4-78
pre-authorization
credit card 6-3
prepaid card 6-4
pre-authorization of fuel sale, set
limit 6-38
prepaid functions 6-9
fuel sale 3-139
preset/postpay fuel sale, definition
4-36
preset/prepay fuel sale, definition
4-35
price
includes tax 3-95 to 3-96
open PLU 3-159, 3-162
set 3-162
primary graphic side parameter
4-52
print
account number, partial 6-40
activate VeriPASS tag 8-11
backup log 5-42
banner text 3-213
batch configurations 6-47
car wash display order 7-20
cash acceptor configurations
4-74
combo file 3-233
credit card configurations 6-43
credit card parameters 8-41
currency exchange rates 3-93
DCR configurations 4-67
dealer configurations 6-50
10-6 Index
debit configurations 6-52

department loyalty parameters
8-52
department tracking file 3-185
departments 3-150
fuel product configurations
4-16
installation information 5-43
logo/slogan text 3-75
menu list 3-203
mix file 3-241
modem configurations 6-45
MOPs 3-86
network configurations 6-26
network log 6-16
network log, sample 6-17
parameters 6-19
parameters, sample 6-19
POP discount file 3-270, 4-112
prepaid card activation receipt
6-10
product codes 6-28
product codes, sample 6-29
product departments 4-25
product IDs 4-30
proprietary card configurations
6-54
pump configurations 4-42
redeem configuration file 8-56
register parameters 3-67
set size of receipt total 3-50
soft key list 3-194
store number 3-53
tank names 4-7
VeriPASS tag 8-12
printer
disable 5-12
enable 5-11
error log 5-39
flush queue 5-13
stop printing 5-13
product
configuration 4-10
ID setup 4-27
ID worksheet 4-30
print fuel configurations 4-16
print IDs 4-30
worksheet 4-17
product codes
dept assigned to 3-143
PLU assigned to 3-162

print list 4-21
setup 4-19
promotion, car wash 3-171
prompt for POP recalc 3-56
prompt, log in/out 3-220
proprietary card configuration 6-53
print list 6-54
pumps
attributes 4-35
clear on hold 4-103
configuration worksheets 4-43
edit configuration 4-32
full- or self-service 4-38
hose assignments 4-3, 4-10,
4-41, 4-46
print configurations 4-42

training mode 3-209
reset
controller 4-104
display 3-52
modem 5-38
soft keys 5-36
tank delivery 5-40
restore, HPV-20 functions 9-8
restriction, credit card 6-34
returnable item 3-165, 3-225,
3-230
revert, HPV-20 functions 9-14
RFID configuration 4-106
Ryko car wash controller 7-22
quick credit 6-11
safe drop, force 3-82

sales configuration 3-45
sales management functions,
soft keys 3-189
sales, VeriPASS item 3-148, 3-166
sales, weighed items 3-148, 3-166
scanner 3-160, 3-172
Schlumberger
blending fuel 4-39
security control
car wash functions 3-20
configuration 3-12
employee security level 3-34
flash reports 3-15
free POP award 3-55
fuel manager 3-9
Gemcom configuration 3-58
list parameters 3-25
maintenance 3-17
manager mode 3-7
network manager functions
3-23
no sale 3-48
POP discount file 3-8
refund 3-47
reports 3-13
security functions 3-19
starting 3-6
vendor payment 3-49
VeriPASS 3-21
R
reboot system, maintenance mode
5-46
receipts
account number on DCR 6-39
DCR header 4-60
DCR trailer 4-62
print partial number on DCR
6-40
set size of print 3-50
record number 1-2
redeem loyalty points 8-54
refund
allowed 3-83, 3-165, 3-230
combo file 3-225, 3-230
fee/charge 3-125
match file 3-244
PLU file 3-165
POP discounts 3-263
security control for 3-47
registration
information 5-24, 5-28
status of Ruby 5-26
remote dial-in 5-21
set up 5-22
reports
flash reports 3-15
October 4, 2002
Index 10-7
voids 3-48
worksheets 3-26
self-service level 4-38
senior citizen discount 3-147
service level, set 4-48
set
autocollect type 4-37
buzzer on Ruby for nozzle off
4-39
buzzer volume 5-37
date and time 5-5
postal code 5-31
prepay fuel sale limit 6-38
pumps as full- or self-service
4-38
receipt print size 3-50
service level 4-48
store telephone number 5-30
totalizers 5-16
totals 5-15
totals, fuel running 5-17
zip code 5-31
set up
blue laws 3-215
car wash department 7-4
DCR display for car wash 7-10
GST 3-94
product codes 4-19
product department 4-23
product ID 4-27
system 2-1
taxes 3-94
set up Ruby
controller 2-2
workstation 2-7
cash acceptor 4-89
DCRs 4-83
fuel 4-77, 4-93
print list 4-95
worksheet 4-96
slogan, edit 3-73
soft halt mode 4-78
soft key 3-187, 3-201
free POP award 3-192
MOP assignment 3-77
PLUs 3-159
print list 3-194
reset 5-36
set up 3-195
October 4, 2002
software upgrade, set totals for

5-15
special discount
combo file 3-231
MOP file 3-80
PLU file 3-165
see also POP discounts
start
debugger 5-33
remote dial-in 5-21
storage media, PLU totals 3-43
store and forward 6-58
store number, edit 3-53
student discount 3-147
subtotal required 3-50
subtract amount 3-144
suppress account number 6-39
system configuration 3-42
T
tank
manifolded 4-3
monitor communication 5-41
names 4-3
reset delivery 5-40
taxes
break point 3-103, 3-113,
3-117
break point, defined 3-95
break point, set up 3-110
department 3-94
department assignment 3-145
fee/charge 3-126
flat rate 3-103, 3-107
flat rate, defined 3-95
flat rate, set up 3-105
general services 3-53
GST 3-94, 3-97, 3-101, 3-107,
3-113
PLU, assigned to 3-163, 3-229
price includes 3-95 to 3-96
rate file 3-94
set up 3-94
VAT 3-53, 3-95
telephone number, edit 5-30
time, set 5-5
Tokheim
blending fuel 4-39
halt mode 4-78
reset controller 4-104
totalizers 5-16
training mode 3-209
transactions, maximum number
3-44
troubleshooting
file download 5-14
start debugger 5-33
U
Unitec car wash controller 7-22
update VeriPASS tag 8-20
upgrade, HPV-20 functions 9-11
V
variable blender 4-39
VAT 3-53, 3-95
VeriPASS 8-1
activation receipt sample 6-13,
8-11
CSO receipt 8-26
deactivation receipt 8-23
department sale 3-148, 3-166
loyalty points 8-54
loyalty redeem rate 8-55
MOP file 3-80
print tag receipt sample 8-13
troubleshooting 8-27
VeriPASS mode
activate VeriPASS tag 8-5
deactivate VeriPASS tag 8-22
initialize VeriPASS tag 8-27
merchant preferences 8-30
print VeriPASS tag 8-12
update VeriPASS tag 8-20
VeriPASS club configuration
8-37
VeriPASS department loyalty
configuration 8-48
VeriPASS EPC configuration
8-43
VeriPASS redeem loyalty
configuration 8-54
VRN update 8-28
version number 5-4, 5-24
Ruby software 5-26
10-8 Index
voice authorization phone number,

edit 6-35
voids, security level 3-48
volume, set buzzer 5-37
VRN update 8-28
workstation
logo/slogan file setup 3-65
set up Ruby 2-7
soft key setup 3-188
zero MOP allowed 3-84

zip code, set 5-31
October 4, 2002

Verifone Ruby

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Verifone Ruby

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CITGO

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference Revision History

March 15, 1996

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

February 10, 1997

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

Reflects updates to the previous revision

July 28, 1997

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

January 12, 1998

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

Reflects updates to the previous revision.

July 29, 1998

Production release of software and documentation.

Reflects updates to the previous revision including

June 16, 1999

Reflects change in the Armed Forces Restriction

December 23, 1999

Production release of software and documentation.

October 18, 1999

Reflects addition of VeriPASS to software and

January 31, 2000

Reflects updates to software and documentation

February 22, 2000

Corrected the description and value definitions of

Production release of software and documentation.

Reflects significant software updates.

CITGO Manager Reference Revision History (Continued)

October 20, 2000

Implemented support for 60 cashiers; Added

September 21, 2001

January 25, 2002

Reflects updates that include alternate POP

Production release of software and documentation.

Reflects addition of POP Discount functionality.

Setting Up Your System

CITGO Manager Reference

System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

DCR Receipt Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-62

CITGO Manager Reference

Data Files Version Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

CITGO Manager Reference

Reset Tank Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CITGO Manager Reference

Car Wash Manager

CITGO Manager Reference

Unitec POS4000 and POS4000/2 (4000/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

How to Use this Manual

CITGO Manager Reference

CITGO Manager Reference

To choose a mode or menu item. This works two ways:

Setting Up Your System

2-2 Setting Up Your System

CITGO Manager Reference

Set Date and Time: Refer to Set Date and Time.

SECURITY CONTROL MENU

SECURITY CONTROL MENU